You are on page 1of 598

e-terragridcomT390

Technical Guide

Version 6.1

T390/EN TG/B23

GRID
Technical Guide T390/EN TG/B23
Contents
e-terragridcomT390 Page 1/2

T390

CONTENTS

Safety Section

General Presentation T390/EN GP/B23

Overall System Description T390/EN OS/B23

Amplifier Description and Configuration T390/EN AM/B23

Extended Amplifier Description and Configuration T390/EN AX/B23

Processing Unit Description and Configuration T390/EN PU/B23

Application Notes T390/EN AP/B23

TPI Description and Configuration T390/EN TP/B23


T390/EN TG/B23 Technical Guide
Contents
Page 2/2 e-terragridcomT390

BLANK PAGE
Safety Section

SAFETY SECTION
Safety Section

(SS) - 1/6

STANDARD SAFETY STATEMENTS FOR ALSTOM


TELEPROTECTION EQUIPMENT

1. INTRODUCTION 2

2. HEALTH AND SAFETY 2

3. SYMBOLS AND LABELS ON THE EQUIPMENT 3


3.1 Symbols 3
3.2 Labels 3

4. INSTALLING, COMMISSIONING AND SERVICING 3

5. DE-COMMISSIONING AND DISPOSAL 5

6. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR SAFETY 6


6.1 Protective fuse rating 6
6.2 Protective class 6
6.3 Installation category 6
6.4 Environment 6
Safety Section

(SS) - 2/6

1. INTRODUCTION
This Safety Section and the relevant equipment documentation provide full information on
safe handling, commissioning and testing of this equipment. This Safety Section also
includes reference to typical equipment label markings.
The technical data in this Safety Section is typical only, see the technical data section of the
relevant equipment documentation for data specific to a particular equipment.

Before carrying out any work on the equipment the user should be familiar with
the contents of this Safety Section and the ratings on the equipment’s rating
label.

Reference should be made to the external connection diagram before the equipment is
installed, commissioned or serviced.
Language specific, self-adhesive User Interface labels are provided in a bag for some
equipment.

2. HEALTH AND SAFETY


The information in the Safety Section of the equipment documentation is intended to ensure
that equipment is properly installed and handled in order to maintain it in a safe condition.
When electrical equipment is in operation, dangerous voltages will be present in certain parts
of the equipment. Failure to observe warning notices, incorrect use, or improper use may
endanger personnel and equipment and also cause personal injury or physical damage.
Before working in the terminal strip area, the equipment must be isolated.
Proper and safe operation of the equipment depends on appropriate shipping and handling,
proper storage, installation and commissioning, and on careful operation, maintenance and
servicing. For this reason only qualified personnel may work on or operate the equipment.
Qualified personnel are individuals who:

• Are familiar with the installation, commissioning, and operation of the equipment and
of the system to which it is being connected;

• Are able to safely perform switching operations in accordance with accepted safety
engineering practices and are authorized to energize and de-energize equipment and
to isolate, ground, and label it;

• Are trained in the care and use of safety apparatus in accordance with safety
engineering practices;

• Are trained in emergency procedures (first aid).


The equipment documentation gives instructions for its installation, commissioning, and
operation. However, the manuals cannot cover all conceivable circumstances or include
detailed information on all topics. In the event of questions or specific problems, do not take
any action without proper authorization. Contact the appropriate ALSTOM technical sales
office and request the necessary information.
Safety Section

(SS) - 3/6

3. SYMBOLS AND LABELS ON THE EQUIPMENT


For safety reasons the following symbols which may be used on the equipment or referred to
in the equipment documentation, should be understood before it is installed or
commissioned.
3.1 Symbols

Caution: refer to equipment documentation Caution: risk of electric shock

Protective Conductor (*Earth) terminal Functional/Protective Conductor


(*Earth) terminal

Note: This symbol may also be used for a Protective Conductor (Earth) terminal if that
terminal is part of a terminal block or sub-assembly e.g. power supply.

*NOTE: THE TERM EARTH USED THROUGHOUT THIS TECHNICAL


MANUAL IS THE DIRECT EQUIVALENT OF THE NORTH
AMERICAN TERM GROUND.
3.2 Labels
See Safety Guide (SFTY/4L M) for typical equipment labeling information.

4. INSTALLING, COMMISSIONING AND SERVICING


Equipment connections
Personnel undertaking installation, commissioning or servicing work for this
equipment should be aware of the correct working procedures to ensure safety.
The equipment documentation should be consulted before installing,
commissioning, or servicing the equipment.
The equipment and cabinet must be earthed as specified in IEC 60950-1.
The equipment must be supplied over circuit breaker for the power supply. Circuit
breaker must be switched off.
Terminals exposed during installation, commissioning and maintenance may
present a hazardous voltage unless the equipment is electrically isolated.
Do not work on the equipment or connecting cables during lightning storm.
Any disassembly of the equipment may expose parts at hazardous voltage, also
electronic parts may be damaged if suitable electrostatic voltage discharge (ESD)
precautions are not taken.
If there is unlocked access to the rear of the equipment, care should be taken by
all personnel to avoid electric shock or energy hazards.
To ensure that wires are correctly terminated the correct crimp terminal and tool
for the wire size should be used.
The equipment must be connected in accordance with the appropriate connection
diagram.
Do not touch the high frequency 3 pin terminations or the inner core of the BNC
cable, when the T390 is energized.
Before removing top cover, the isolating terminals of external cables must be
opened or disconnected.
Safety Section

(SS) - 4/6

Protection Class I Equipment:


- Before energizing the equipment it must be earthed using the protective
conductor terminal, if provided, or the appropriate termination of the
supply plug in the case of plug connected equipment.
- The protective conductor (earth) connection must not be removed since
the protection against electric shock provided by the equipment would be
lost.
- When the protective (earth) conductor terminal (PCT) is also used to
terminate cable screens, etc., it is essential that the integrity of the
protective (earth) conductor is checked after the addition or removal of
such functional earth connections. For M4 stud PCTs the integrity of the
protective (earth) connections should be ensured by use of a locknut or
similar.
The recommended minimum protective conductor (earth) wire size is 2.5 mm²
(3.3 mm² for North America) unless otherwise stated in the technical data section
of the equipment documentation, or otherwise required by local or country wiring
regulations.
The protective conductor (earth) connection must be low-inductance and as short
as possible.
All connections to the equipment must have a defined potential. Connections that
are pre-wired, but not used, should preferably be grounded when binary inputs
and output relays are isolated. When binary inputs and output relays are
connected to common potential, the pre-wired but unused connections should be
connected to the common potential of the grouped connections.
Before energizing the equipment, the following should be checked:
- Voltage rating/polarity (rating label/equipment documentation);
- Protective fuse rating;
- Integrity of the protective conductor (earth) connection (where
applicable);
- Voltage and current rating of external wiring, applicable to the application.
It is important that this instruction manual is read and fully understood by all
people involved including personnel that has already undergone training and is
otherwise qualified before changing configuration or carrying out maintenance.
Otherwise no warranty will be applied.
Accidental touching of exposed terminals
If working in an area of restricted space, such as a cubicle, where there is a risk of
electric shock due to accidental touching of terminals which do not comply with
IP20 rating, then a suitable protective barrier should be provided.
Unused connectors in the equipment sub-racks should be terminated with blank
plugs.
Equipment use
If the equipment is used in a manner not specified by the manufacturer, the
protection provided by the equipment may be impaired.
Removal of the equipment front panel/cover
Removal of the equipment front panel/cover may expose hazardous live parts,
which must not be touched until the electrical power is removed.
Safety Section

(SS) - 5/6

Equipment operating conditions


The equipment should be operated within the specified electrical and
environmental limits.
If the link gets disturbed while using tuning, testing, simulating alarms,
measurement and loading new configurations, appropriate measures must be
taken to prevent the protection signal transmission being used.
Before switching on the circuit breaker check that the equipment/cabinet is
securely connected to the protective earth/ground and check the polarity and
value of the power supply.
Insulation and dielectric strength testing
Insulation testing may leave capacitors charged up to a hazardous voltage. At the
end of each part of the test, the voltage should be gradually reduced to zero, to
discharge capacitors, before the test leads are disconnected.
Insertion of modules and pcb cards
Modules and PCB cards must not be inserted into or withdrawn from the
equipment whilst it is energized, since this may result in damage.
Fiber optic communication
Where fiber optic communication devices are fitted, these should not be viewed
directly. Optical power meters should be used to determine the operation or
signal level of the device.
Cleaning
The equipment may be cleaned using a lint free cloth dampened with clean water,
when no connections are energized. Contact fingers of test plugs are normally
protected by petroleum jelly, which should not be removed.

5. DE-COMMISSIONING AND DISPOSAL


De-commissioning
The supply input (auxiliary) for the equipment may include capacitors across the
supply or to earth. To avoid electric shock or energy hazards, after completely
isolating the supplies to the equipment (both poles of any dc supply), the
capacitors should be safely discharged via the external terminals prior to
de-commissioning.

Disposal
It is recommended that incineration and disposal to water courses is avoided.
The equipment should be disposed of in a safe manner. Any equipment
containing batteries should have them removed before disposal, taking
precautions to avoid short circuits. Particular regulations within the country of
operation, may apply to the disposal of the equipment.
Safety Section

(SS) - 6/6

6. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR SAFETY


Unless otherwise stated in the equipment technical manual, the following data is applicable.
6.1 Protective fuse rating
The recommended maximum rating of the external protective fuse for equipments is 16A,
high rupture capacity (HRC) Red Spot type NIT, or TIA, or equivalent. The protective fuse
should be located as close to the unit as possible.

6.2 Protective class


IEC 60255-27: 2005 Class I (unless otherwise specified in the
EN 60255-27: 2005 equipment documentation). This equipment
requires a protective conductor (earth) connection
to ensure user safety.

6.3 Installation category


IEC 60255-27: 2005 Installation category III (Overvoltage Category III):
EN 60255-27: 2005 Distribution level, fixed installation.
Equipment in this category is qualification tested at
5 kV peak, 1.2/50 µs, 500 Ω, 0.5 J, between all
supply circuits and earth and also between
independent circuits.

6.4 Environment
The equipment is intended for indoor installation and use only. If it is required for use in an
outdoor environment then it must be mounted in a specific cabinet of housing which will
enable it to meet the requirements of IEC 60529 with the classification of degree of
protection IP54 (dust and splashing water protected).
Pollution Degree - Pollution Degree 2 Compliance is demonstrated by reference to safety
Altitude - Operation up to 2000m standards.
IEC 60255-27:2005
EN 60255-27: 2005
e-terragridcomT390

General Presentation

Version 6.1

T390/EN GP/B23

GRID
General Presentation T390/EN GP/B23

e-terragridcomT390 Page 1/64

CONTENTS

1. FOREWORD 9
1.1 Overview 9
1.2 Modularity 10
1.3 Standards – References 10
1.4 Precaution 11
1.5 Technical document list 11

2. SYSTEM INFORMATION 12
2.1 Hardware description 12
2.2 Units Combination Sets 13
2.3 Config table: Functions description 13
2.4 Firmware description 14
2.4.1 Main Features list 14
2.4.2 Digital or Mixed mode feature list 15
2.4.3 Analogue mode feature list 15
2.4.4 Feature licence key list 16
2.5 Remote and Local Configuration 17
2.6 Management (using SNMP protocol (optional) 17
2.7 LAN to LAN function (optional) 17
2.8 Fallback Mode (digital mode only) 18
2.9 AES password Encryption (Optional ) 18
2.10 Rates (digital mode only) 19
2.11 HMI 19

3. HARDWARE DESCRIPTION 20
3.1 Mechanical - Design 20
3.1.1 Mechanical constraints: 20
3.1.2 Mechanical Size 20
3.2 Power supply 21
3.3 Available units 21
3.3.1 Amplifier units 21
3.3.2 Processing Units 22
3.3.3 Teleprotection Units 22

4. TRANSMISSION MEDIUM 23
4.1 R.F Bandwidth 23
4.1.1 Overview 23
4.1.2 Bandwitdh allocation 24
4.1.3 Interband overview 25
4.1.4 Hardware filters 25
T390/EN GP/B23 General Presentation

Page 2/64 e-terragridcomT390

4.2 R.F amplifier and Output power 26


4.3 Line coupling mode 26
4.3.1 Connecting mode 26
4.3.2 RF impedance options 26
4.4 Correction of transmission medium 27
4.4.1 R.F load. 27
4.4.2 Power distribution 27
4.4.3 AGC 27
4.4.4 Equalization 27
4.5 Digital transmission 28
4.5.1 Recovering time 28
4.5.2 Performance according Bandwidth 28
4.5.3 Multiplexer 29

5. DIGITAL SERVICES 30
5.1 Data service specifications 30
5.1.1 Overview 30
5.1.2 V11 service description 30
5.1.3 V24/V28 service description 32
5.1.4 RS232 data service (processing local service) 35
5.2 Speech & Signaling service specifications 35
5.2.1 Speech 35
5.2.2 Signaling service 36
5.2.3 Universal telephone Unit feature 37
5.2.4 Maintenance phone handset feature 37

6. ANALOGUE SERVICES 38
6.1 DATA service (Built-in modem or MTU) 38
6.1.1 Description 38
6.1.2 Transmission delays 38
6.2 Speech interface (Telephony T0) 39
6.2.1 Description 39
6.2.2 Transmission delays 40
6.3 Telegraph interfaces (TG) 40
6.3.1 Description 40
6.3.2 Transmission delays 41

7. EXTERNAL TELEPROTECTION SERVICE / MULTI PURPOSE INPUT 42


7.1.1 Interfacing 42
7.1.2 Latency 42
7.1.3 Power distribution 42
7.1.4 Safety aspects 43
7.1.5 Working modes 43
General Presentation T390/EN GP/B23

e-terragridcomT390 Page 3/64

8. INTEGRATED TELEPROTECTION 44
8.1.1 Inputs 44
8.1.2 Outputs 45
8.2 System 46
8.3 Analog modes 46
8.3.1 Command Number 46
8.3.2 Coding mode 46
8.3.3 Command combination (dual tone mode only) 46
8.3.4 Set/Reset (dual tone mode only) 46
8.3.5 Working modes 46
8.3.6 Power repartition 47
8.3.7 Tone levels 47
8.3.8 Band used 47
8.3.9 Performance 47
8.3.10 Extra functions and Alarms 47
8.4 Digital modes 49
8.4.1 General characteristics 49
8.4.2 Electric path 49
8.4.3 Optical path 49
8.5 Alarms 50
8.5.1 Communication Alarm 50
8.5.2 Minor and Major alarms 50
8.5.3 User Alarms 50
8.6 Maintenance and monitoring 51
8.6.1 Monitoring functions 51
8.6.2 Maintenance functions 51

9. CHARACTERISTICS 52
9.1 T390-AMP/AMPX 52
9.2 Processing units 54
9.3 Teleprotection Unit 57
9.4 Other General Information 63
T390/EN GP/B23 General Presentation

Page 4/64 e-terragridcomT390

LIST OF FIGURES

FIGURE 1: MODULARITY CONCEPT 10


FIGURE 2: REMOTE CONFIGURATION 17
FIGURE 3: AMP-AMPLIFIER FRONTVIEW 21
FIGURE 4: AMPX-AMPLIFIER EXTENSION FRONTVIEW 21
FIGURE 5: PRCS-PROCESSING FRONT VIEW 22
FIGURE6: TPI-TELEPROTECTION UNIT FRONT VIEW 22
FIGURE 7: QAM VS SNR CURVES 28
FIGURE 8: TELEPHONY BAND ALLOCATION 39
FIGURE 9: TELEGRAPH STANDARD BAND ALLOCATION 40
FIGURE 10: BREAKING CAPACITY OF OUTPUT ON RESISTIVE LOAD 59
General Presentation T390/EN GP/B23

e-terragridcomT390 Page 5/64

LIST OF TABLES

TABLE 1: APPLICABLE STANDARDS 10


TABLE 2: AVAILABLE DOCUMENTS 11
TABLE 3: AVAILABLE UNIT LIST 12
TABLE 4: PARAMETRIC FUNCTIONS 13
TABLE 5: MAIN FEATURE LIST 14
TABLE 6: DIGITAL OR MIXED FEATURE LIST 15
TABLE 7: ANALOG FEATURE LIST 15
TABLE 8: OPTIONAL FEATURE LIST 16
TABLE 9: USER RATES 19
TABLE 10: SEPARATED BANDWIDTH ALLOCATION 24
TABLE 11: SUPERIMPOSED BANDWIDTH ALLOCATION 24
TABLE 12: ADJACENT BANDWIDTH ALLOCATION 24
TABLE 13: V11 PROPAGATION DELAYS 31
TABLE 14: RS232 PROPAGATION DELAYS (ASYNC MODE) 34
TABLE 15: RS232 PROPAGATION DELAYS (SYNC MODE) 34
TABLE 16: RS232 PROPAGATION DELAYS (ASYNC MODE) 35
TABLE 17: VOICE PROPAGATION DELAYS 36
TABLE 18: RS232 PROPAGATION DELAYS (ASYNC MTU MODE) 38
TABLE 19: RS232 PROPAGATION DELAYS (ASYNC MTU MODE) 39
TABLE 20: TELEGRAPH PROPAGATION DELAYS (ANALOG MODE) 41
T390/EN GP/B23 General Presentation

Page 6/64 e-terragridcomT390

BLANK PAGE
General Presentation T390/EN GP/B23

e-terragridcomT390 Page 7/64

MODIFICATIONS PAGE

VERSION DATE COMMENTS


A22 25/02/2011 Product release 5
A23 30/03/2011 Product release 6
B23 10/07/2012 Product release 6.1
T390/EN GP/B23 General Presentation

Page 8/64 e-terragridcomT390

BLANK PAGE
General Presentation T390/EN GP/B23

e-terragridcomT390 Page 9/64

1. FOREWORD
1.1 Overview
The T390 is a Power Line Carrier (PLC) designed to cover the power utilities utility’s needs.
The equipment is suitable for conventional analogue transmission & services as well as new
digital services as noted in the Cigré PLC report:
“Digital Power Line Carrier/WG 35.09/ August 2000”.
It operates in the frequency range 20 to 700 kHz.
The system can operate different transmission:

• Digital transmission up to 128kbit/s

• Analogue transmission (mono or bi-channel)

• Mixed transmission (1 digital channel + 1 analogue channel)


The available services are:

• Digital Data transmission across standard interfaces such as V11, V24, etc

• Lan to Lan communication using built in Ethernet interfaces

• Full featured Digital Speech services with signalling

• Full featured analogue telegraph and speech services with signalling

• External Teleprotection support


The T390 is based on the concept of “same hardware/various firmware” to offer a wide range
of features, transmission mode, and services.
This document aims at describing first the hardware of the system, each item and possible
combinations. Then, the common features of firmware are described. Finally, each
transmission mode is detailed separately.

PRODUCT RELEASE 6.1


T390/EN GP/B23 General Presentation

Page 10/64 e-terragridcomT390

1.2 Modularity
The number of services and the distribution between speech and data is flexible.

To Power Line Medium

Power Amplifier

Teleprotection

Processing
OPTIONAL

Higway Bus
TelephoneTelephone Telephone
Data

User Services
Telephone

User Services
Telephone Telephone

Telephone Telephone
User Services
Telephone

Data 1
User Services
Data n
Data n D0398ENa

FIGURE 1: MODULARITY CONCEPT


1.3 Standards – References

Name Comments
IEC 60495 1993 edition
IEC 60834-1 Edition 2.0 (1999-10)
Cigré report Digital Power Line Carrier/WG 35.09/ August 2000
IEC 60663 Manual for planning of (SSB) PLC systems: Part 1 PLC systems
(1980)
IEC TS 61000-6-5 Generic standards – immunity for power station and substation
environments
EN60950 Low voltage directive
IEC or EN 61000-6-4 Generic standards – Emission standard for industrial environments
EN 55011 limits of conducted radio disturbance
EN 55022 limits of radiated radio disturbance
UIT-T (V,X)

TABLE 1: APPLICABLE STANDARDS


General Presentation T390/EN GP/B23

e-terragridcomT390 Page 11/64

1.4 Precaution
The T390 equipment should be properly installed and configured to make all described
features working, and to reach expected performance.
Installation procedure and rules are given in the manual T390/EN AP Chapter Installation
user guide.
General configuration of T390 equipment through the related IHM is given in the user
manuals T390/EN AM Amplifier Description, T390/EN PU Processing Unit, T390/EN OS
Overall System, T390/EN SU Service Unit (SRV unit is not yet available in version 6.1).
Several application notes and technical information are available to help you installing,
configuring and using properly the T390 equipment in order to reach optimal performance
(see technical documents within the application notes subfolder on last CDROM distribution
or contact your representative).
1.5 Technical document list
For more information, see related documents:

Document name Description


T390/EN OS/ T390 Technical manual – Overall System Description
T390/EN AM T390 Technical manual – Amplifier Description and Configuration
T390/EN AX T390 Technical manual – Extended Amplifier Description and
Configuration
T390/EN PU T390 Technical manual – Processing Unit Description and
Configuration
T390/EN AP T390 Technical manual – Application Note
T390/EN TP T390 Technical manual – Integrated Teleprotection
TABLE 2: AVAILABLE DOCUMENTS
T390/EN GP/B23 General Presentation

Page 12/64 e-terragridcomT390

2. SYSTEM INFORMATION
2.1 Hardware description
The T390 hardware is split into 3 units groups:

• The medium access (amplifier units)

• The processing units

• The services units

• The internal teleprotection units


A basic system should be built with one medium access & one processing unit. Then the
system could be extended with teleprotection. In version 6.1, services units are not yet
available. It is possible to set one TP (internal or external) in the system.
All units are interoperable and compatible. They are automatically recognized by the HMI
upon connection and configured accordingly.

Group Code Included


AMP 40 Watts amplifier, 20~700kHz
AMPX Auxiliary amplifier unit to double the output power.
PRCS QAM modulation & TDM 64 channels multiplexer.
Quad RS232, V11 interfaces
IRIG-B for time synchronization
3 full featured speech channels including a maintenance
handset input
External Teleprotection and/or analogue 4W service
Dual dry-contact relay for user programmable alarms
TPI Internal teleprotection

TABLE 3: AVAILABLE UNIT LIST


General Presentation T390/EN GP/B23

e-terragridcomT390 Page 13/64

2.2 Units Combination Sets


Each Units combination contains one Amplifiers and one Processing Unit. Optionally, it can
also contain one or several service units.
For the sake of simplicity, not all of the combinations are available in the portfolio: a
simplified set has been defined that should cover most of electrical operator needs.
The pre-defined combinations are defined hereafter, from the simplest to the most complete
(in terms of performances, covered density and available services). All combinations can be
managed via SNMP locally or remotely through the LAN2LAN feature.

Software Digital Analogue Telepotection


System
configuration mode Channels module
1 Digital Only X - Up to 1
S20x 2 Analogue Only - X Up to 1
(AMP+ PRCS+xTPI) 3 Mixed X X Up to 1

2.3 Config table: Functions description


The following table give the maximum number of services, taking into account the hardware
limitation.
(FXO/FXS/Transit)
TDM 64channels

signaling (E&M)
TΦ telephony +
Digital channel
Digital Speech

TG telegraphy
Teleprotection
QAM & trellis

MTU (FSK
SYSTEM

modem)
Up to 1
RS232

V11

S200 Digital Yes Yes 3 4 Up to 1 (including TPX) 1 0 0 0

S200 Analogue No No 0 0 Up to 1 (including TPX) 0 3 2 4

S200 Mixed Yes Yes 0 4 Up to 1 (including TPX) 1 3 2 0

TABLE 4: PARAMETRIC FUNCTIONS


T390/EN GP/B23 General Presentation

Page 14/64 e-terragridcomT390

2.4 Firmware description


Each unit is delivered by the manufacturer with the latest kernel (operating system), and
could be upgraded on-site thanks to HMI.
Each unit should be loaded with a dedicated firmware set, and properly configured in order
to make the system running. The FW set is composed of an applicative main program and
specific add-ons according to the required feature (see the table below to know the various
add-ons available for each unit).
A coherency check is done by each unit (hardware and firmware) at the boot time. A second
check is made by the connected HMI during the configuration process.
2.4.1 Main Features list

Features Notes
HF Line amplifier: Output Power according to Tx filter insertion
loss and RF Bandwidth limitation, see the
• 1W up to 40W curves
• 2W up to 80W with AMP/AMPX
• Bal or unbalanced 50, 75, 125, 150 Ohms
• 20 to 700kHz, 0.12Hz steps
Teleprotection support (2.5k or 4kHz) The Teleprotection uses an analogue
channel distinct from digital channel.
However, the channel could be shared with
analogue services
Default history queue (non- volatile events) +
special recorder module
Data recorder with advanced triggering modes Up to 10 scopes with 3 tracks of 5000
points each
On-line & Off-line maintenance module For hardware & line verifications
or commissioning purpose
Dual Full programmable alarm module with Thresholds and delays are programmable
Leds and dry contact relays for AGC, SNR, TXPEP, BER).
Logical matrix table for local and/or remote
alarms conditions
Safety presence check and lock condition
Advanced real time measures (AGC, SNR,
BER)
Advanced System diagnostics module &
training progress status
Full featured spectrum analyzer on RX
bandwidth (25.6kHz)

TABLE 5: MAIN FEATURE LIST


General Presentation T390/EN GP/B23

e-terragridcomT390 Page 15/64

2.4.2 Digital or Mixed mode feature list

Features Notes
Digital QAM transmission on 1, 2, 4, 8 or Separated requires at least an interband of the
16kHz bandwidth. Separated, adjacent or width of the bandwidth. For example, 16 kHz of
superimposed bands interband is required for a total bandwidth of
16kHz.
Some configuration are in option (see keys
below)
Both Digital QAM transmission and Separated requires at least an interband of the
Analogue with TPX on 8 or 16kHz width of the bandwidth. For example, 16 kHz of
bandwidth. Separated, adjacent or interband is required for a total bandwidth of
superimposed bands 16kHz.
Some configuration are in option (see keys
below)
QAM differential encoding maps available: The QAM differential encoding map matches in
• QAM4 any situation
• QAM16
• QAM64
• QAM256
• QAM1024
Trellis encoding maps available: The Trellis encoding map may be chosen to
• TCM32 increase BER performances under some line
conditions, with propagation time degradations.
• TCM128
QAM/Trellis map display module Up to 100ms constellation refreshing
Special pre-settings for synchronization AGC init, FSE pre-equalization
time improvement
TABLE 6: DIGITAL OR MIXED FEATURE LIST

2.4.3 Analogue mode feature list

Features Notes
Analogue or TPX transmission on 4kHz Some configuration are in option (see keys
separated bands below)
Analogue or TPX transmission on 2.5kHz Some configuration are in option (see keys
separated bands (adjacent mode only) below)
MTU channel through RS232
asynchronous interfaces
50bps Signaling channel for telephony E&M signaling
1 speech band per each channel 300-2000, 300-2200, 300-2400 (2.5 & 4kHz)
300-3400 (4khz only)
Compressor expander /limiter Enable/disable for each access (T0 or TG)
3 Telegraphs for each channel Programmable within 300-3720 bandwidth (see
complete table for details)
Cable equalizer for each access Up to 8 pre-programmed curves
Line equalizer for speech and telegraph Programmable on-site by HMI (automatic or
channel manual mode)
Built-in FSK modem for MTU
300/600/1200bps
One External Teleprotection interface Dedicated access on PRCS
TABLE 7: ANALOG FEATURE LIST
T390/EN GP/B23 General Presentation

Page 16/64 e-terragridcomT390

2.4.4 Feature licence key list

Base Keys Features


installed
ANA-4KHZ KEY-ANALOG- 2 or 4kHz Analogue mode Bandwidth Analogue
4KHZ
IRIG-B KEY-IRIGB IRIG-B synchronization ALL

Optional Keys Features Mode


ANA-2.5KHZ KEY-ANALOG- 2.5kHz Analogue mode bandwidth Analogue
2.5KHZ
ANA-5KHZ KEY-ANALOG- 5kHz Analogue mode bandwidth Analogue
5KHZ
ANA-8KHZ KEY-ANALOG- 8kHz Analogue mode bandwidth Analogue
8KHZ
SNMP KEY-SNMP SNMP supervision module ALL
SECURITY KEY- Security pack module (AES encryption, ALL
SecurityPack Authentication, Authorization)
TPI KEY- SET/RESET command Type ALL
SET/RESET
DIGITAL KEY-16KHZ- QAM/TCM on 16 kHz of bandwidth Digital
mode QAM
includes the
following
keys
KEY-8KHZ- QAM/TCM on 8 kHz of bandwidth Digital
QAM
KEY-4KHZ- QAM/TCM on 4 kHz of bandwidth Digital
QAM
KEY-2KHZ- QAM/TCM on 2 kHz of bandwidth Digital
QAM
KEY-1KHZ- QAM/TCM 1 kHz of bandwidth Digital
QAM
KEY-FAX FAX G3 relay for compressed speech channel Digital
KEY-ADPCM ADPCM 16/24/32/40 Digital
KEY-IMPOSED Superimposed mode Digital
HSM High speed Mode Digital
PTM Point to Multipoint function All
KEY-Fallback Enable the Fallback mode Digital
KEY-L2L Allow LAN to LAN communication on a PLC link Digital

TABLE 8: OPTIONAL FEATURE LIST


General Presentation T390/EN GP/B23

e-terragridcomT390 Page 17/64

2.5 Remote and Local Configuration


The settings mechanism of the T390 uses the TC/IP protocol. Each PLC of a network is
identified thanks an alone IP address. The Man Machine Interface is identifying automatically
a set of PLC connected to the network by scanning a pool of address or by a host file.
Thanks to the T390 HMI, it’s possible to address each of those PLC. Each PLC of a link is
seen through its own address and the HV link is considered as a part of the LAN network.
See the figure bellow:

Computer

NETWORK

PLC1 PLC2 router PLC3 PLC4


IP1 IP2 IP3 IP4
Config PLC1

Config PLC3

D0111ENb

FIGURE 2: REMOTE CONFIGURATION


This feature uses the LAN-to-LAN mechanism (see feature description hereafter) and uses
the digital transmission. So, this mode requires the digital or mixed mode feature of the
system to work.
The LAN-to-LAN feature offers the following possibilities:

− Remote alarms and events retrieving

− Services remote configuration

− Remote measures (BER, spectrum analyzer, …)


This feature requires configuring a special LAN2LAN channel into the digital multiplexer, in
order to be able to use it in normal running mode.
It is also possible to use the full transmission bandwidth by using the LAN2LAN maintenance
mode.
2.6 Management (using SNMP protocol (optional)
A SNMP (SNMP V2) agent is implemented within the T390, which allows a full monitoring of
alarms, real-time measures (SNR, AGC, etc) and complete configuration reading
(frequencies, tx power, services, etc). Moreover, each alarm could generate a Trap sent to
the network manager (up to 10 IP addresses are programmable). The management system
could be any of the existing products available on the market like HP Openview, TIVOLI,
ALSTOM NMS 5000, etc. We provide a MIB to interface the T390 with the management
system (ASN.1 format).
2.7 LAN to LAN function (optional)
The T390 is equipped with an Ethernet interface able to transmit LAN, WAN information from
one side to the other.
This feature implements a L2 bridge at network level (full transparent bridging) with
advanced capabilities:

− Compliant with 802.1q for VLAN transport (without QoS)


T390/EN GP/B23 General Presentation

Page 18/64 e-terragridcomT390

A router needs to be installed on the front of the T390 to limit the quantity of
information going through the PLC link.
During the commissioning and the maintenance phase, a special feature switches the full
bandwidth of the TDM to the LAN service, giving up to gross bit rate to the LAN service (i.e.
76.8kbit/s in QAM64/16kHz).
If the LAN service is stopped it’s no more possible to configure or to do the commissioning of
the remote PLCs.
For digital system, we recommend allocating at least 10kbits/s to the LAN Service: means
(i.e. 14% of the bandwidth in QAM64/16khz), in order to support the SNMP & HMI remote
configuration routing.
2.8 Fallback Mode (digital mode only)
The Fallback mode is an optional T390 feature, which allows switching to another encoder
when line conditions are degraded.
The quality of service (maximum guaranteed BER) and delay to return to normal mode are
programmable by HMI.
The rate linked to the Fallback mode is fully programmable thanks the HMI, gicing all
possible combinations.
The Fallback mode could be engaged if all units grant it (well suited firmware package and
software key).
All services should be flagged in order to run or not in Fallback condition.
A special feature is provided for the V11 & LAN2LAN interface, where it is possible to make
it run at different speed instead of enabling/disabling the services like other ones.
2.9 AES password Encryption (Optional )
Since password has to be exchanged between the Computer HMI and the T390 through a
LAN or Wan, there is a risk that this password can be read by unauthorized person on the
network.
General Presentation T390/EN GP/B23

e-terragridcomT390 Page 19/64

2.10 Rates (digital mode only)

1kHz 2 kHz 4kHz 8kHz 16kHz


Bandwidth bandwidth Bandwidth Bandwidth Bandwidth
Gross bit 1.6kbits/s 3.2kbits/s 6.4kbits/s 12.8kbits/s 25.6kbits/s
rate
QAM4
User rate 1.24kbits/s 2.49kbits/s 3.7kbits/s 10.1kbits/s 22.9kbits/s

Gross bit 3.2kbits/s 6.4kbits/s 12.8kbits/s 25.6kbits/s 51.2kbits/s


QAM16 rate
TCM32 User rate 2.49kbits/s 4.88kbits/s 10.1kbits/s 22.9kbits/s 48.5kbits/s

Gross bit 4.8kbits/s 9.6kbits/s 19.2kbits/s 38.4kbits/s 76.8kbits/s


QAM64 rate
TCM128 User rate 3.3kbits/s 8kbits/s 16.5kbits/s 35.7kbits/s 74.1kbits/s

Gross bit 6.4kbits/s 12.8kbits/s 25.6kbits/s 51.2kbits/s 102.4kbits/s


rate
QAM256
User rate 4.88kbits/s 9.43kbits/s 22.9kbits/s 48.5kbits/s 99.7kbits/s

Gross bit 8kbits/s 16kbits/s 32.0kbits/s 64.0kbits/s 128.0kbits/s


rate
QAM1024
User rate 6.44kbits/s 12.76kbits/s 29.3kbit/s 61,3kbit/s 125.3kbit/s

TABLE 9: USER RATES

QAM256 and QAM1024 both require good line condition (see SNR vs BER figure) and
proper configuration and settings (Cross talk between TX/RX filter and hybrid balancing.)
2.11 HMI
The firmware upgrade and the configuration of the T390 system are made through a
dedicated HMI software.
In addition this HMI offers several facilities, such as:

• Measures retrieval

• Maintenance mode

• Unconnected mode configuration and/or measures analysis

• Advanced logging features


The HMI is available for Microsoft Windows 2000 & Windows XP operating system only.
T390/EN GP/B23 General Presentation

Page 20/64 e-terragridcomT390

3. HARDWARE DESCRIPTION
3.1 Mechanical - Design
3.1.1 Mechanical constraints:

− Installation in cabinet or standard 19” rack

− Maximal deep < 300 mm (connectors et wire plugs included)

− IP 30
3.1.2 Mechanical Size
3.1.2.1 Amplifier module

480 mm
480 mm

134mm

3U
260 mm

435 mm

3.1.2.2 Processing and service module

480 mm
480 mm
89mm

2U
260 mm

435 mm

3.1.2.3 TPI module

480 mm
480 mm
45m

1U
m
260 mm

435 mm
General Presentation T390/EN GP/B23

e-terragridcomT390 Page 21/64

3.2 Power supply


Standard voltage

• Max consumption (at 48 VDC)< 102W for 4 Modules:

− Amplifier: 72W (for 40W output power)

− Processing: 15W

− Service unit: 15W

− TELEPROTECTION Unit/ 19W Max


Ground Reference
The input voltage is grounding referenced with the 3 following possibilities:

− Floating mode (no grounding)

− + Battery to Ground

− Battery to Ground
ON/OFF supply
On the PLC units no switch are provided in standard. A Circuit breaker should be installed to
supply the whole equipment and to offer the ON/OFF operation.

For maintenance operation, simply unplug the power supply connector.


3.3 Available units
3.3.1 Amplifier units

FIGURE 3: AMP-AMPLIFIER FRONTVIEW

FIGURE 4: AMPX-AMPLIFIER EXTENSION FRONTVIEW


T390/EN GP/B23 General Presentation

Page 22/64 e-terragridcomT390

3.3.2 Processing Units

FIGURE 5: PRCS-PROCESSING FRONT VIEW


3.3.3 Teleprotection Units

FIGURE6: TPI-TELEPROTECTION UNIT FRONT VIEW

The Teleprotection units are optional and are used to offer integrated teleprotection services.
General Presentation T390/EN GP/B23

e-terragridcomT390 Page 23/64

4. TRANSMISSION MEDIUM
4.1 R.F Bandwidth
4.1.1 Overview
The PLC bandwidth is in relation with the number and the type of user services.
In order to satisfy the various situations and to increase our ability for adapting to various line
properties the product will provide adaptation with respect to the HV lines, by offering several
optimized pairing.
The bandwidth for a pair of Tx/Rx channel can be selected.(see Allowed combinations table
below).
The system could also operate in:

• Superimposed mode (with installed key): In this mode the RX & TX channels share
the same bandwidth (Digital mode only).

• Separated band mode: In this mode, RX and TX channels are separated by at least
an empty channel of the same bandwidth with a minimum of 8 kHz (e.g. for 16kHz
channels, a 16kHz interband is required between RX&TX)

• Adjacent mode: in this mode, TX&TX should be put side by side without any
interband, and the TX filter of each transmitter should be programmed to cover the
complete RX+TX channels (refer to related application note for details)
The RX/TX complete channel is then used in various combination:

• Whole bandwidth is assigned to full digital transmission (QAM modulation)

• Whole bandwidth is assigned to analogue transmission (mono or dual channel)

• Whole bandwidth is assigned to mixed digital and analogue (1 slot for QAM, 1 or 2
slots for analogue)
From the user side, a choice is made during the configuration (commissioning) by the use of
pre-selected configurations.
T390/EN GP/B23 General Presentation

Page 24/64 e-terragridcomT390

4.1.2 Bandwitdh allocation


This chapter describes the possible layout of the Analog / Digital , TX and RX band-sharing.
It is not directly correlated to the HF filter bandwidth required to perform PLC systems
paralleling. This HF bandwidth increases with the center frequency in order to maintain a
reasonable over-voltage in the Transmission filter cells.
Allowed combinations are:

Separated Mode
Bandwidth Analogue mode Digital mode Mixed mode
2k + 2k Ch1/TP2 N/A N/A
2.5k + 2.5k Ch1/TP2.5 QAM2k N/A
4k + 4k Ch1/TP4 QAM4k QAM1k + Ch1/TP2 .5
5k + 5k Ch1/TP5 N/A N/A
8k + 8k Ch1/TP8 QAM8k QAM4k + Ch1/TP4
QAM2k + Ch1/TP5
12k+12k N/A N/A QAM8k+ Ch1/TP4
16k + 16k N/A QAM16k QAM8k+ Ch1/TP8
QAM8k+ Ch1/TP4 + Ch2/TP4
Ch1/TP8 + Ch2/TP8

TABLE 10: SEPARATED BANDWIDTH ALLOCATION

Superimposed Mode
Bandwidth Analogue mode Digital mode Mixed mode
4k N/A QAM4k N/A
8k N/A QAM8k N/A
16k N/A QAM16k N/A

TABLE 11: SUPERIMPOSED BANDWIDTH ALLOCATION

Adjacent Mode
Bandwidth Tx +Rx Analogue mode Digital mode Mixed mode
4k Ch1/TP2 N/A N/A
5k Ch1/TP2.5 QAM2k N/A
8k Ch1/TP4 QAM4k QAM1k + Ch1/TP2 .5
10k Ch1/TP5 N/A N/A
16k Ch1/TP8 QAM8k QAM4k + Ch1/TP4
QAM2k + Ch1/TP5
24k N/A N/A QAM8k + Ch1/TP4
32k N/A QAM16k QAM8k+ Ch1/TP8
QAM8k+ Ch1/TP4 + Ch2/TP4
Ch1/TP8 + Ch2/TP8

TABLE 12: ADJACENT BANDWIDTH ALLOCATION


General Presentation T390/EN GP/B23

e-terragridcomT390 Page 25/64

Legend:

• TP2: Internal Teleprotection – 2k

• Ch1/TP2 .5: Channel 1 + internal or external teleprotection - 2.5k

• Ch22 .5: Channel 2 - 2.5k

• N/A: Non Applicable configuration

• 4k + 4k: 2 separated bands of 4kHz each

• 4k: single band of 4kHz

NOTE: All bandwidth are not available for all frequency allocation, see §8
“Characteristics” for possible bandwidth respect to frequency
allocation.
All combination are given if only part of them may fit into existing
frequency plan. Usually, Frequency plans are divided into 2.5kHz or
4kHz slots.
NOTE: Ch2 is not available in version 6.1

4.1.3 Interband overview


4.1.3.1 Between two PLC system in parallel (using the same couplig box)
The PLC was design in order to fit with IEC60495 requirements. Nevertheless, for narrow
bandwidth when central frequency is above 400 kHz, there can be some restrictions:
limitation on output power or bandwidth increasing.
4.1.3.2 Between TX and RX transmission
When inter-band is greater than the bandwidth, we are in separated mode, when the
interband is null, we are in adjacent mode. Other combinations are forbidden.
As a minimum when used in separated mode we recommend to use a minimum
spacing of 8 Khz and above 8 Khz of at least 1 band.
For adjacent mode, refer to commissioning recommendation in order to obtain the best
performances.
4.1.4 Hardware filters
Refer to T390/EN AP, chapter “Filters Settings” for jumper configuration.
The TX hardware filters aims at inserting the PLC in an assigned frequency slot without
disturbing the others equipment on the line. Its function is more the line matching than
filtering the TX signal that is already properly shaped by the digital processing. For adjacent
modes, we recommend to use configure the TX filter bandwidth to cover both TX&RX
bandwidth (see app notes).
The RX filter aims at filtering the suited bandwidth in order not to saturate the receiver.

Filters 4 kHz 5kHz 8 kHz 16 kHz 32 kHz


TX Side X X X X X
RX Side X X X X X

Others bandwidths or applicable range are available on special request.


T390/EN GP/B23 General Presentation

Page 26/64 e-terragridcomT390

4.2 R.F amplifier and Output power


The system is able to provide user RF power from 1 W to 40 W. on the entire frequency
band.
In fact the amplifier module itself is able to deliver more power at the input of the TX filter to
compensate the loss of the TX filter, hybrid transformer and impedance matching
transformer.
The RF output power can easily be changed on site, through the HMI.
By adding an AMPX amplifier, it is possible to double the output power (resulting
power depends on TX filter insertion loss, frequency and RF Bandwidth).
4.3 Line coupling mode
The PLC uses the coupling system defined in IEC 60481 and IEC 60663 standards.
When a digital modulation is to be be used with T390, we strongly recommend the use of
ALSTOM LMU Line Matching unit in balanced mode
The system is able of supporting several equipments connected in parallel without any
deterioration.
For bandwidth less or equal to 4 kHz, some precaution should be taken in case of parallel
equipments.

4.3.1 Connecting mode


4.3.1.1 T390-AMP amplifier
Balanced or unbalanced connection through a shielded heavy duty sub-D connector
(Phoenix contact model)

4.3.2 RF impedance options


• 150 ohms, balanced or unbalanced

• 125 ohms, balanced or unbalanced

• 50 ohms, balanced or unbalanced

• 75 ohms, unbalanced
General Presentation T390/EN GP/B23

e-terragridcomT390 Page 27/64

4.4 Correction of transmission medium


4.4.1 R.F load.
The PLC is able to withstand wide R.F impedance variation and is protected against extreme
R.F line conditions: R.F output “Open” and “Short-circuit”.
4.4.2 Power distribution
The PLC is able to share the Output R.F. power flexibly over the signals for the QAM,
analogue & TPI/TPX services and then provide the optimized SNR
The power distribution is adjusted through:

• FSK level

• Manual channel allocation

• TPI/TPX guard signal or average analogue power

• Each analogue service T0, TG, MTU


4.4.3 AGC
This function, as specified in IEC standard 495, regulates the level of effective signals
recovered within a dynamic range of:

• 72 dB for T390-AMP
A turbo mode is automatically enabled when no Teleprotection is configured, allowing to
speed up the AGC conversion algorithm.
When external Teleprotection is enabled in the system, the AGC slew rate is limited to
0.5dB/s to not conflict with external Teleprotection internal algorithms
The initialization value of the AGC could be overridden by the user through the HMI.
4.4.4 Equalization
The imperfections in the transmission channel response (amplitude distortion and group
delay distortion) are corrected by mean of an “Equalizer” system. Two kind of equalizer exist
in the system depending on the transmission mode used.
Digital mode equalizer
The digital mode equalizer is an auto-adapted filter, also called FSE (fractional space
equalizer) that works continuously in order to compensate automatically the phase rotation,
small line attenuation changes and distortions.
The equalizer starts automatically, without user intervention. However “pre-equalization” is
MANDATORY, in order to force the start conditions of the algorithm.

Analogue mode equalizer


The analogue mode equalizer is able to compensate the line attenuation within the speech
and telegraph band. Each analogue channel has it own line equalizer (available only for
speech and telegraph as said before). The equalizer is programmable through the HMI, with
2 methods: automatic adjustment or manual setting.
The external teleprotection is not affected by this equalization. The equalized signals are
speeches and telegraphs.
T390/EN GP/B23 General Presentation

Page 28/64 e-terragridcomT390

4.5 Digital transmission


4.5.1 Recovering time
The system is particularly strengthened to reduce recovery time in case of High noise levels
on the transmission medium.
For instance, a line drop of few seconds (line breaks or large attenuation change) is
recovered in less than 200 ms in separated mode. This feature is deeply used with external
teleprotection in order to transmit the commands without QAM loss of synchronization.
4.5.2 Performance according Bandwidth
Measurement Method

Programmable Hybrid PLC B


PLC A
line attenuator transformer

Noise
Generator
+
Ampli
RMS Multimeter
D0113ENa

The SNR is measured by external means, that is to say calibrated instruments connected
directly to the line. The SNR measured within the PLC uses a different approach and is
intended to be used only for information purpose and fallback condition switching.
The SNR is computed as follow: the signal is assumed to be the QAM within the band
measured, the noise is assumed to be the same band when QAM is switched off. In this
figure, no band translation is required and the SNR is the simple ratio of Psignal / Pnoise,
whatever the bandwidth chosen for the measure (we used the bandwidth offered by the
instrument, i.e. 3.74kHz)
The BER is measured by a data tester (PFA30) connected to the V11 interface of U05 unit.
Time for measurement of BER is taken in order to have a number of received bits 10 times
the inverse of BER (e.g: a BER of 1E-8 is measured with more than 1E9 bits)
Results (16 KHz / Separated mode)

14.00 19.00 24.00 29.00 34.00


1.00E+00
BER-QAM4
1.00E-01 BER-QAM16
BER-QAM64
1.00E-02
BER-QAM256
1.00E-03 BER-TCM32
BER-TCM128
1.00E-04

1.00E-05

1.00E-06

1.00E-07

1.00E-08

1.00E-09

1.00E-10
D0114ENa

FIGURE 7: QAM VS SNR CURVES


General Presentation T390/EN GP/B23

e-terragridcomT390 Page 29/64

SNR measurement method within HMI


The signal is assumed to be the RX FSK signal (70Hz band), means that for all
configurations (2k, 4k, 8k, 16k), the measure is always the same. The Noise is assumed to
be the mirrored 70Hz besides the QAM channel. For superimposed band mode, the noise is
measured outside the band, assuming that an interband of 8 kHz is left besides the channel.
4.5.3 Multiplexer
The processing firmware has in standard a built-in 64 channels, fully programmable
multiplexer, called TDM.
The multiplexer offers following features:

• Minimal slot width: 300 bits/s

• Maximal slot width: max digital bandwidth (e.g 74100 bits/s for QAM64 on 16kHz
band)

• Up to 64 channels with automatic stuffing for rate regulation

• Automatic or manual channel assignment


T390/EN GP/B23 General Presentation

Page 30/64 e-terragridcomT390

5. DIGITAL SERVICES
5.1 Data service specifications
5.1.1 Overview
3 types of data services are available on plc systems, according to the unit installed.

• V11 interface up to max user rate (e.g. 73.5kbit/s for QAM64)

• V24/V28 Sub-D25 interface (limited by max user rate) for Synchronous and
asynchronous modes

− Synchronous rate: from 300 bps to 38400 bps

− Asynchronous rate: from 200 bps to 38400 bps (1 start /1 or 2 stop / 1 to 9 data
bits; parity included)
NOTE: 200Bps is only available on T390 PRCS unit
NOTE: 9 data bits without parity and 8 data bits with parity

− DTE, DCE or back to back

• RS232 Sub-D9 interface (limited by max user rate) for asynchronous mode only

− Rate: from 300 bps to 38400 bps (1 start /1 or 2 stop / 1 to 9 data bits; parity
included)
NOTE: 9 data bits without parity and 8 data bits with parity

− DTE or DCE

− Point to multipoint function (double interface on one channel) suits for RTU
application (polling)
5.1.2 V11 service description
5.1.2.1 V11 internal clock mode scheme (synchronous mode)

Substation A Substation B

Tx Data Tx Data
DATA SERVICE DATA SERVICE
Tx Clock PLC PLC Link
PLC Tx Clock
CLK CLK
Rx Clock GEN Rx Clock
RECOVER
DCE DCE
Rx Data Rx Data

MASTER SLAVE

DTE A DTE B

D0118ENa
General Presentation T390/EN GP/B23

e-terragridcomT390 Page 31/64

5.1.2.2 V11 from device clock ‘on master’ mode (synchronous mode)

Substation A Substation B

Tx Data Tx Data
DATA SERVICE DATA SERVICE
Tx Clock PLC PLC Link
PLC Tx Clock
CLK CLK
Rx Clock GEN Rx Clock
RECOVER
DTE DCE
Rx Data Rx Data

MASTER SLAVE

DCE A DTE B

D0119ENa

5.1.2.3 V11 from device clock ‘on slave’ mode (synchronous mode)

Substation A Substation B

Tx Data Tx Data
DATA SERVICE DATA SERVICE
Tx Clock PLC PLC Link
PLC Tx Clock
CLK CLK
Rx Clock GEN Rx Clock
RECOVER
DTE DCE
Rx Data Rx Data

SLAVE MASTER

DCE A DTE B

D0120ENa

5.1.2.4 V11 propagation delay


From V11 interface to V11 interface including transmission delay (100 m line) and measure
equipment internal delays

76,8 Kb/s 6.4 Kb/s Maw


Rate 16K/QAM64 4K/QAM4
(Typical) (Typical)

72 Kbit/s ~30 ms N/A 35 ms

64 Kbit/s ~32 ms N/A 35 ms

48 Kbit/s ~36 ms N/A 40 ms

32 Kbit/s ~33 ms N/A 40 ms

16 Kbit/s ~34 ms N/A 40 ms

8 Kbit/s ~35 ms N/A 40 ms

(3Kb/s) 50 ms
4 Kbit/s ~43 ms
~44 ms

2 Kbit/s ~55 ms 45 ms 60 ms

TABLE 13: V11 PROPAGATION DELAYS


T390/EN GP/B23 General Presentation

Page 32/64 e-terragridcomT390

5.1.3 V24/V28 service description


5.1.3.1 Data Frame clock
The data frame clock is driven in order to take into account of the two cases below.
5.1.3.1.1 DCE-1 Mode
This is the most popular mode for the PLC equipment. The 2 PLC equipments act as
Modems and realize a point-to-point connection between 2 data terminal equipments.
This mode can be used in synchronous or asynchronous communication mode.
One PLC is considered as Master, the other one as Slave.

− The PLC Master provides the Serial Clock if needed (synchronous)

− The PLC Slave recovers the Serial Clock from the incoming Data flow (Data
coming from the PLC link).
In this case, we have the following schemes:

Substation A Substation B

Tx Data Tx Data
DATA SERVICE DATA SERVICE
Tx Clock PLC PLC Link
PLC Tx Clock
CLK CLK
Rx Clock GEN Rx Clock
RECOVER
DCE DCE
Rx Data Rx Data

MASTER SLAVE

DTE A DTE B

D0118ENa

5.1.3.1.2 DCE-2 Mode (Back to Back Mode)


This mode can be used in asynchronous or synchronous communication mode.
In this mode, there is no PLC Master or Slave. Both DATA Service block generate and
recover the serial clock. Transmit and receive section are fully independent.

Substation A
Substation B

DATA SERVICE
CLK TX
DATA TX CLK
RECOVER PLC Link
PLC To DTE B
DATA RX
PLC in
DCE Mode
CLK RX CLK GEN

Substation C
DATA SERVICE
CLK TX
CLK
DATA TX
RECOVER PLC PLC Link
PLC To DTE C
in
DATA RX DCE Mode
CLK GEN
CLK RX

DCE-2 Data Service transit Mode


D0121ENa
General Presentation T390/EN GP/B23

e-terragridcomT390 Page 33/64

In synchronous communication mode, this mode is also known as Service Transit Mode. It
allows the transit of one data service from one PLC link to another. The scheme is the
following:
In asynchronous communication mode, the scheme is the following:

Substation A Substation B

DATA SERVICE DATA SERVICE


Tx Data Tx Data

Rx Data CLK Rx Data


CLK GEN PLC Link RECOVER
PLC PLC
DTR DTR
DSR CLK DSR
CLK GEN
RECOVER

Optional Flow
CTS Optional Flow CTS
control Signals
control Signals
DTE A RTS RTS DTE B
DCD DCD

D0122ENa

5.1.3.2 DTE Mode


This mode allows the T390 to be integrated in a higher hierarchy network. The PLC Link is
only used to attach a remote DTE to the network. The scheme is the following:

Substation A Substation B

Tx Data Tx Data
DATA SERVICE

Tx Clock
PLC Link Tx Clock
Rx Clock PLC PLC DATA SERVICE

Rx Data Rx Data

DTE MODE
DCE MODE
DTE A DCE

NETWORK

D0123ENa

SYNCHRONOUS COMMUNICATION MODE

Substation A Substation B

Tx Data Tx Data
DATA SERVICE

DATA SERVICE
Rx Data Rx Data
PLC Link CLK
PLC PLC RECOVE
DTR DSR
R
DSR DTR

Optional Flow
Optional Flow control Signals
CTS RTS
control Signals
DTE A RTS CTS DCE
DCD

DCE MODE DTE MODE

NETWORK

D0124ENa

ASYNCHRONOUS COMMUNICATION MODE

A PLC in DTE mode is always connected by the PLC link to a PLC in DCE mode.
T390/EN GP/B23 General Presentation

Page 34/64 e-terragridcomT390

5.1.3.3 Propagation delays


5.1.3.3.1 Asynchronous mode
From RS232 interface to RS232 interface including transmission delay (100 m line) and
measure equipment internal delays

76,8 Kb/s 6.4 Kb/s MAX


Rate 16K/QAM64 4K/QAM4
(typical) (typical)

19.2Kbit/s 25 ms N/A 30 ms

14.4Kbit/s 25 ms N/A 30 ms

9.6Kbit/s 26 ms N/A 30 ms

4.8Kbit/s 27 ms 27 ms 32 ms

2.4Kbit/s 27 ms 30 ms 35 ms

1.2Kbit/s 40 ms 40 ms 45 ms

600bit/s 49 ms 50 ms 60 ms

300bit/s 70 ms 75 ms 80 ms

TABLE 14: RS232 PROPAGATION DELAYS (ASYNC MODE)


5.1.3.3.2 Synchronous mode
From RS232 interface to RS232 interface including transmission delay (100 m line) and
measure equipment internal delays

76,8 Kb/s 6.4 Kb/s


Rate 16K/QAM64 4K/QAM4 MAX
(Typical (Typical)
19.2Kbit/s 25 ms N/A 30 ms

14.4Kbit/s 25 ms N/A 30 ms

9.6Kbit/s 25 ms N/A 30 ms

4.8Kbit/s 26 ms 27 ms 32 ms

2.4Kbit/s 26 ms 28 ms 35 ms

1.2Kbit/s 30 ms 32 ms 40 ms

600bit/s 41 ms 41 ms 50 ms

300bit/s 54 ms 60 ms 70 ms

TABLE 15: RS232 PROPAGATION DELAYS (SYNC MODE)


General Presentation T390/EN GP/B23

e-terragridcomT390 Page 35/64

5.1.3.3.3 Asynchronous mode (Point to Multipoint)


From RS232 interface to RS232 interface including transmission delay (100 m line) and
measure equipment internal delays

76,8 Kb/s
Rate 16K/QAM64 MAX
(Typical
19.2Kbit/s 17 ms 20 ms

14.4Kbit/s 19 ms 21 ms

9.6Kbit/s 19 ms 21 ms

4.8Kbit/s 19 ms 21 ms

2.4Kbit/s 24 ms 26 ms

1.2Kbit/s 28 ms 30 ms

600bit/s 28 ms 30 ms

300bit/s 30 ms 35 ms

TABLE 16: RS232 PROPAGATION DELAYS (ASYNC MODE)

5.1.4 RS232 data service (processing local service)


5.1.4.1 Characteristics
Same characteristics as V24/28 interface except the following features:

• Only asynchronous mode supported


• DCE-2 (back to back) mode not supported
5.1.4.2 Propagation delays (Asynchronous mode only)
Same values as for the service unit data channels.
See chapter 8.3.3.1.
5.2 Speech & Signaling service specifications
5.2.1 Speech
The Speech interface, and the speech capability of the system are able to interface and
transport a G3 FAX.
5.2.1.1 Level adjustment
The speech level setting (Tx & Rx) is made by the use of H.M.I
5.2.1.2 Echo canceller
A voice echo canceller could be enabled by HMI to recover the echo generated by digital
transmission of compressed channels.
T390/EN GP/B23 General Presentation

Page 36/64 e-terragridcomT390

5.2.1.3 Voice coding


Two Vocoders are provided to compress the speech channels:
• Vocoder (TDM used bandwidth 4.15 kbps max)
• ADPCM encoder decoder with the following rates:
− 16 kbps (TDM used bandwidth 17.41 kbps max)
− 24 kbps (TDM used bandwidth 25.6 kbps max)
− 32 kbps (TDM used bandwidth 33.45 kbps max)
− 40 kbps (TDM used bandwidth 41.64 kbps max)
The given used TDM bandwidth is the max-occupied bandwidth for the worst case. These
values are slightly lower for high gross bit rate configurations (i.e. 16khz/QAM64)
5.2.1.4 Call Progress
Call progress available:
− Q35 compliant
− Several national standards (France, Italy, etc)
− Full Custom (user programmable call progress parameters)
5.2.1.5 Interfacing
The interface is a Basic 4W with the possibility to switch in a 2W mode by two different
actions:
• By a fixed setting by H.M.I during commissioning
• By an automatic changeover given by an external ground command.
− Command ON = 4 W mode
− Command OFF = 2 W mode
5.2.1.6 Propagation delays on service unit
From SPEECH interface to SPEECH interface including transmission delay (100 m line) and
measure equipment internal delays
76,8 Kb/s 6.4 Kb/s
Rate 16K/QAM64 4K/QAM4 MAX
(typical) (typical)
Vocoder 130 ms 130 ms 160 ms

ADPCM16 95 ms N/A 120 ms

ADPCM24 95 ms N/A 120 ms

ADPCM32 95 ms N/A 120 ms

ADPCM40 95 ms N/A 120 ms

TABLE 17: VOICE PROPAGATION DELAYS

5.2.2 Signaling service


This service is directly associated with the speech service. It provides transmission and
reception of the busy state of the speech channel (hence the term signaling) and if
necessary transmission of dial pulses.
5.2.2.1 Type of signaling

• Pulse signalling on E&M interface

• DTMF signalling
General Presentation T390/EN GP/B23

e-terragridcomT390 Page 37/64

5.2.2.2 Interfacing
The command interfaces usually called E & M (M wire for input, E wire for output), is
referenced to voltages that are taken from the "ref" connector of the service unit
• Input closed to REFIN voltage

• Output open in idle state, closed to REFOUT when active

• Current flows from REFOUT to REFIN (usually, REFIN is -48V, REFOUT is Ground)
5.2.3 Universal telephone Unit feature
This device acts as a direct call telephone-terminating unit. It is only available on the Speech
channel 2 and 3 of each service unit.
It carries out the call criteria conversion (off-hook/on-hook, dialling, current generation,
ringing generator) through the signalling circuit.
The unit is programmed to operate as follows:

• Direct Phone to Phone Mode (with Central Battery (CB) or Local Battery (LB) supply).

• Line Extension FXS mode (Connection to a telephone set (CB or LB) or a fax...)

• Line extension FXO mode (Connection to a PABX)


5.2.4 Maintenance phone handset feature
The first speech channel on each unit can act as a maintenance phone if enabled by HMI.
The maintenance handset is automatically detected by the hardware, and in this case the
speech main connector (and related channel) is disabled.
Use only the delivered handset for maintenance purpose (DTMF dialing only).
The DTMF dialing is used to make the other side ringing when a call is required by user.
As the handset is automatically detected, it is mandatory that handsets are powered on both
side of PLC in order to switch the speech channel to maintenance mode.
T390/EN GP/B23 General Presentation

Page 38/64 e-terragridcomT390

6. ANALOGUE SERVICES

6.1 DATA service (Built-in modem or MTU)


6.1.1 Description
Up to 3 built-in modems by channel provides the user with the following services:

• Asynchronous mode from 300 bps to 1200 bps

• 1 start /1 or 2 stop / 5 to 9 data bits (inc parity)


The interface is Data I/O type – V24/V28 sub-D 25 points connector
The modulation is FSK (frequency shift key modulation)
This is the solution for low rate (300 bps to 1200 bps). It offers the simple solution for polling
modem network.
The number of MTU by channel should be only limited by the available bandwidth.
6.1.2 Transmission delays
6.1.2.1 Asynchronous (normal mode)
The following measures were made in Asynchronous mode on a 4hz analogue band.

Latency Latency
Rate
(typical) (Max)

1.2Kbit/s 30 ms 35 ms

600bit/s 45 ms 50 ms

300bit/s 70 ms 80 ms

TABLE 18: RS232 PROPAGATION DELAYS (ASYNC MTU MODE)


General Presentation T390/EN GP/B23

e-terragridcomT390 Page 39/64

6.1.2.2 Asynchronous (Point to mulitpoint)


The following measures were made in Asynchronous mode on a 4hz analogue band.

Latency Latency
Rate
(typical) (Max)

1.2Kbit/s 23 ms 25 ms

600bit/s 24 ms 26 ms

300bit/s 37 ms 40 ms

200bit/s 53 ms 55 ms

TABLE 19: RS232 PROPAGATION DELAYS (ASYNC MTU MODE)

6.2 Speech interface (Telephony T0)


6.2.1 Description
The telephony use a 600 2W/4W interface with automatic changeover, BF analogue
bandwidth with programmable standard filters as depicted below:

Frequency (Hz) 30 20 22 24 34 36 37
Low limit = 300 Hz 0 00 00 00 00 00 20

Full Band

Band 1

Band 2

Band 3

D0401ENa

FIGURE 8: TELEPHONY BAND ALLOCATION


The 300-3400 is available for 4kHz bandwidth only. The signaling is not included in this
picture and uses an additional 120Hz bandwidth.
Levels adjustments are the same as for the digital speech channel (-30dBm to +7dBm).
The telephony supports the following features: Compressor-expander (IUT-T G162), limiter,
cable equalizer, power distribution, signalling

This signalling uses an IUT-T R35 50 baud channel (F0 ± 30 Hz) placed immediately after
the upper telephone channel band edge.
Its position in the spectrum is linked both to the selected telephone band and the
requirement to optimize the remaining spectrum.
The E&M distortion is less than 3ms, the E&M latency is less than 20 ms.
The maintenance handset is shared with this service with an automatic detection.
T390/EN GP/B23 General Presentation

Page 40/64 e-terragridcomT390

6.2.2 Transmission delays


The latency is computed with a frequency of 1 KHz and is equal to 13 ms +/- 3 ms for the full
band, the band 1, the band 2, the band 3 mode.

6.3 Telegraph interfaces (TG)


6.3.1 Description

The telegraph uses a 600Ω 4W interface, BF analogue bandwidth with programmable filters.
As for the Telephony, the TG supports also the following features: Compander, limiter, cable
equalizer, power distribution.
The available filters are divided in two categories.
Standard filters:

Frequency (Hz) 36 48 60 72 84 96 10 12 13 14 15 16 18 19 20 21 22 24 25 26 27 28 30 31 32 33 34 36 37
0 0 0 0 0 0 80 00 20 40 60 80 00 20 40 60 80 00 20 40 60 80 00 20 40 60 80 00 20

Low limit = 300


Full Band

Band 1
partage avec

téléphonique
Utilisation en

service

Band 2

Band 3

1200 BDS
Utilisation
en transit

600 BDS 601 602 603

ITU-T R38 401 402 403 404 405 406


A
ITU-T R38 301 302 303 304 305 306 307 308
B

D0402ENa

FIGURE 9: TELEGRAPH STANDARD BAND ALLOCATION


Custom filters:
In order to cover multiple situations, it is possible to use custom filters with the followings
specifications:

• Starting point 360 Hz

• End 3800 Hz

• 60 Hz steps
In this mode, the configurations allow to choose the input and output centre frequencies of
the telegraph, as well as the in band transmission one.
General Presentation T390/EN GP/B23

e-terragridcomT390 Page 41/64

6.3.2 Transmission delays

Latency Latency
Mode
(Typical) (Max)

Full Band 8.7 ms 15 ms

Bandwidth 1500Hz 10.5 ms 15 ms

TABLE 20: TELEGRAPH PROPAGATION DELAYS (ANALOG MODE)

NOTE: With signaling or a modem, the transmission time increase is about


1.5ms (Note that Full band mode come always with nothing else in the
band)
T390/EN GP/B23 General Presentation

Page 42/64 e-terragridcomT390

7. EXTERNAL TELEPROTECTION SERVICE / MULTI PURPOSE INPUT


This service allows the use of an external (stand alone) Teleprotection equipment. ALSTOM
DIP for example
(for re-using existing Teleprotection , or the customer’s choice of device).
This input could also be used for multi-purpose full BF analogue channel (300-2400Hz or
300-3800Hz), for example to connect a terminal signaller type ALSTOM TS313
7.1.1 Interfacing

• 4W, 600Ω standard BF analogue bandwidth


• A Blocking control circuit (On/Off command) with 2 commands inputs.
In accordance with IEC 60495, the blocking command given by the Teleprotection system is
a loop.
The blocking control circuit enables, when activated by the Teleprotection equipment:

• Interruption (transmission and reception) of all user services signals. The external
Teleprotection service is considered with no extra bandwidth in idle state
• Boosting of the R.F. transmission signals (from the external Teleprotection
equipment). This boost is programmable (0, +6dB, or +12dB).
• A safety presence input (Alive): If enabled by HMI, could generate an alarm when
connector is unplugged
7.1.2 Latency
Latency from TP interface to TP equipment includes transmission delays (100m line) and
algorithm internal delays.
The given latency are measured on the entire channel (i.e. 300-3800Hz for the 4 kHz
bandwidth), but keep in mind that the latency is not flat due to the filter response. For
instance, we have a typical 2.5ms latency within 500-3500Hz versus 4ms/8ms on the entire
channel.
7.1.3 Power distribution
This input may be used for external Teleprotection connection or multi-purpose analog
channel (e.g. telegraph).
In both case, we distinguish 3 operating modes:

• Complete silent mode


• Guard only
• Normal channel
In complete silent mode, no power are assigned to the channel, this mode is used for
external Teleprotection sharing the telephone signalling FSK for the guard detection.
In guard only mode, only the power of the guard tone provided by the external Teleprotection
is considered by the PLC and assigned to this channel.
For complete silent mode and Guard only, we assume that all PLC power will be assigned to
this channel on BLE assertion (QAM will be cut off).
In normal channel mode (multi purpose analog input), the BLE signal is not more considered,
and requested power (st by HMI) is continuously assigned to this channel.
The power allocated for the guard signal of external Teleprotection & the power for the
analog channel are programmable through HMI.
See the service manuals or dedicated application note for details.
General Presentation T390/EN GP/B23

e-terragridcomT390 Page 43/64

7.1.4 Safety aspects


For safety reasons, it is recommended to connect the user programmable Alarm1 to the
external safety input of the Teleprotection and program the PLC alarm1 as ‘TPX error’. In
this figure, the Teleprotection will be locked when PLC is out of service, for instance during
booting process or abnormal cases. See application noteT390-EN-AP DIP connection to
PLC for more details.
Moreover, the T390 offers a safety presence input to monitor the state of Teleprotection
equipment. This alarm is visible remotely, and can be supervised by the SNMP agent.
The T390 firmware offers also 2 additional programmable alarms:

• Active flag: ON when Teleprotection is sending a command

• TP command too long: ON when duration of TP activation is more than 2s


7.1.5 Working modes
Two working modes are available for the Teleprotection:

− Internal guard: in this mode, the Teleprotection provides its own guard signal.

− External guard: in this mode, the Teleprotection uses the preconfigured signalling
signal as guard.
T390/EN GP/B23 General Presentation

Page 44/64 e-terragridcomT390

8. INTEGRATED TELEPROTECTION
The integrated Teleprotection rack T390-TPi offers Teleprotection features following 60834-1
standard.
The communication through LVDS channel with the other racks allows taking advantage of
the PLC signal in order to get the best performances.
Four protection schemes are available for the best transfer time/dependability/security
compromise

• Type 1 (Blocking Mode)

• Type 2 (Permissive mode)

• Type 3 (Fast Direct Tripping Mode)

• Type 4 (Slow Direct Tripping mode)


8.1.1 Inputs
8 opto-insulated inputs are available (4 for Light version).
4 input ranges are selectable by jumpers:

• 24V

• 48/60V

• 110/130V

• 220V
These inputs can be freely allocated by HMI to

• Command 1 to 8

• ”Start” input (dual tone mode only)


8.1.1.1 Operator
An operator between inputs is available to drive the commands
Available operators are OR, AND and XOR
The input can be active if ON (normal mode) or OFF (inverted mode)
8.1.1.2 Start (dual tone mode only)
It is possible to lock the command reception if a particular input is active.
This function must be combined to the “AND” operator of the Output combination
8.1.1.3 Filtering
A filter can be set to avoid bad operation on glitches on input (like capacitive coupling)
The recommended value is minimum 1ms.
8.1.1.4 Holding Delay
The holding delay is a function on command transmission to extend the command duration
in order to be sure it will be received correctly on the receiver side.
8.1.1.5 Validation delay (dual tone mode only)
A delay is configurable by HMI to trig the holding delay. This can be used as soft filtering for
analog mode only.
General Presentation T390/EN GP/B23

e-terragridcomT390 Page 45/64

8.1.2 Outputs
14 heavy duty outputs are available
They can combine Solid State Relay and electromechanical relays in order to increase the
making and breaking capacity while keeping an high capacity permanent current.
The Solid State Relay can be bypassed but the global transmission time will be increased by
7ms.
The output relays can be used to drive the position of

• Output commands

• Input commands

• Unblocking

• User Alarm 1 and 2

• Minor alarm/Major Alarm


8.1.2.1 State on alarm
The state of the relay on alarm can be

• Idle : the relay is released when the alarm triggers

• Set: the relay is set when the alarm triggers

• Transparent: alarm does not affect the output relay

• Memory: keep the last state without alarm


In the case mixed tone mode, only the MAJOR alarms can trig the relays.
In the case dual tone mode, both MAJOR alarms and UNBLOCKING can trig the relays.
8.1.2.2 Operator
An operator between outputs is available to drive the relays.
Available operators are OR and AND.
8.1.2.3 Holding Delay
It is the minimum duration of relay closing in case of command reception.
Holding delay is configurable by HMI.
8.1.2.4 Validation delay (dual tone mode only)
It is defined as an optional delay for command detection.
This function is used to reinforce security on command reception.
Validation delay is configurable by HMI.
T390/EN GP/B23 General Presentation

Page 46/64 e-terragridcomT390

8.2 System
The TPI offers the possibility to use dual path (digital and analog) in order to increase the
transmission dependability.
In that case, the commands are always transmitted on the both path. The device takes
decision for output commands on reception.
The number of commands must match on both paths.
8.3 Analog modes
8.3.1 Command Number
The nominal command number is independent 4 commands per TPI and per band.
8.3.2 Coding mode
Three modes are available:

• A “dual tone mode”, which means that for each command combination two tones are
sent on line

• A “2+2” mixed tone mode, which means that 2 commands correspond to permissive
tripping command and are sent on single tone, with possibility to set full power on this
tone and 2 commands correspond to direct tripping command and are sent on two
tones on line

• A “3+1” mixed tone mode, which means that 3 commands correspond to permissive
tripping commands and are sent on single tone, with possibility to set full power on this
tone and 1 command corresponds to a direct tripping command and is sent on two
tones on line
8.3.3 Command combination (dual tone mode only)
A special mode is available to increase the command number up to 6 by rack.
In this case the commands are not independent: priorities of some commands on the others
(see table in manual T390-EN-TP).
8.3.4 Set/Reset (dual tone mode only)
Set/reset is a special mode useful to transmit permanent commands.
In this case, a pulse (whose duration is configurable by HMI) is transmitted to mean the
command start and another pulse to mean the command end.
In case of default, an acknowledge between systems ensures the command integrity
Available modes are

• 1 set/reset Command + 2 normal commands

• 2 set/reset Commands + 1 normal command

• 3 set/reset commands
8.3.5 Working modes
Three working modes are available for the Teleprotection:

• Internal guard: in this mode, the Teleprotection provides its own guard signal
(application are TP over full band and TP over QAM when QAM is superimposed)

• External guard: in this mode, the Teleprotection uses the preconfigured signalling
signal as guard (application TP over Speech)

• TP on QAM separate mode (dual tone mode only): in case of digital services
configured, the Digital modulation can be used as guard for the integrated
teleprotection
General Presentation T390/EN GP/B23

e-terragridcomT390 Page 47/64

8.3.6 Power repartition


In Idle mode (guard mode), the power necessary for the Teleprotection is

• Either low

• Or null (the teleprotection does not need any extra guard signal in case of TP over
speech or TP over QAM)
The operator can choose by HMI which analog or/and digital channels are cut to free power
for the best compromise between service integrity and power for commands.

• Cut all the services for maximum power dedicated to commands (up to PEP minusthe
level reserved for system pilot).

• Share the power between the services and the Teleprotection commands
The band used by the TP is always cut.
8.3.7 Tone levels
The tone levels in Transmission are configurable up to the maximum power available.
The tone levels in Reception are configurable from -30dB to + 30dB respect to the expected
value.
8.3.8 Band used
The bandwidth use for command transmission is the speech bandwidth in the case of TP
over speech and 1800Hz otherwise.
The band frequency can be configured by HMI within the used band (dual tone mode full
band only)
8.3.9 Performance
See performance table for details.
8.3.10 Extra functions and Alarms
8.3.10.1 Maximun transmission time
Useful only with normal commands: it shall not be set with SET/RESET.
This function by cutting too long duration commands:

• Protects the amplifier from too long duration commands (High power duration
commands)

• Ensures a service availability rate, by reactivating the service


8.3.10.2 Unblocking
Unblocking follows the Cigre Joint Working Group 34/35.11.
Furthermore:

• A relay can be freely allocated to this function.

• It is possible to allocate both commands and unblocking on the same relay (dual tone
mode only). In this case, the relay state on alarm is trigged either by major alarm or by
unblocking.
8.3.10.3 SNR
In case of burst of noise, an alarm appears to inform the operator that the link is not
operating correctly.
Delays and levels are configurable by HMI for user alarm.
This alarm is minor and can trigger the communication alarm.
T390/EN GP/B23 General Presentation

Page 48/64 e-terragridcomT390

8.3.10.4 Signal Loss


In case of attenuation drop, an alarm appears to inform the operator that the link is not
operating correctly.
Delays and levels are configurable by HMI for user alarm.
This alarm is minor and can trigger the communication alarm.
8.3.10.5 Guard loss
In case where guard is not detected anymore and no command is seen an alarm appears to
inform the operator that the link is not operating correctly.
8.3.10.6 Forbidden combination (mixed tone mode only)
In case of reception of a not existing combination of frequencies, as both guard and
command tone, an alarm appears to inform the operator the link is not operating correctly.
8.3.10.7 Loop test (mixed tone mode only)
A loop test is available to check to ability of the system to send and receive commands. This
test can be ordered manually or can be scheduled daily or hourly.
General Presentation T390/EN GP/B23

e-terragridcomT390 Page 49/64

8.4 Digital modes


8.4.1 General characteristics

• Command number are 2, 4 or 8 commands

• A logical address is embedded to the communication message in order to avoid any


unwanted command in case of communication path wrong switching.

• Available alarms are:


ƒ Minor BER on path
ƒ Major BER on Path
ƒ Alarm on propagation Time
ƒ Synchronization Loss
These alarms are minor but can trigger the communication alarm
8.4.2 Electric path
The use of daughter boards is necessary to communicate through electrical channel

• IR179 for V11 communication (clock on receive or internal clock)

• IR180 for G703-1 communication (clock on receive or internal clock)

• IR173 for G703-6 communication (clock on receive or internal clock)


The interfaces used are those of the DIP with similar performances (see digital
characteristics).
8.4.3 Optical path
The optical path is made through the use of SFP module, with LC connector
The internal communication algorithm used is C3794 with selectable number of slots (1/4/8)
The optical characteristics such as optical budget are guaranteed by the SFP manufacturer.
For this version, validated optical modes are:

• Dual fiber Single mode 1310 nm

• Dual fiber Single mode 1550 nm

• Dual fiber Single mode 1310nm


T390/EN GP/B23 General Presentation

Page 50/64 e-terragridcomT390

8.5 Alarms
8.5.1 Communication Alarm
The communication alarm monitors the communication path. In case of impossibility to
transmit commands, the LED switches ON.

• For Analog path, triggers are Signal Loss or SNR or Blocking Alarm or LVDS link
broken

• For digital path, triggers are Synchronization fails or BER Major

• In case of dual path, the communication alarm triggers only if both path are broken
The major alarm is triggered and the output commands are released according to the output
configuration.
8.5.2 Minor and Major alarms
Two kinds of alarms are available:

• Major alarm: alarm that does not lock the system and prevent any command
transmission

• Minor alarm: Minor default of the system that does not prevent the command
transmission (e.g. loss of one path in dual path mode)
These alarms can be freely allocated to the outputs. Relays from 9 to 13 are recommended
(Normally closed contact available).
Led indication in front panel is present for minor and major alarm.
Type of blinking indicates the alarm Status:

Local Alarm Remote Alarm LED Status


Off Off Off
Off On Slow blinking
On Off Fixed
On On Fast blinking

8.5.3 User Alarms


User alarm 1 and 2 are available for relay output and LED.

• User alarm1 copies the Major alarm with configurable delay in HMI

• User alarm2 copies the Minor alarm with configurable delay in HMI
Led indication in front panel is present for User Alarm 1 and 2.
These alarms can be freely allocated to the outputs. Relays from 9 to 13 are recommended
(Normally closed contact available).
General Presentation T390/EN GP/B23

e-terragridcomT390 Page 51/64

8.6 Maintenance and monitoring


8.6.1 Monitoring functions

• Double set of counters

• Status of input optocouplers

• Status of outputs relays

• Analog mode: Tone levels measures

• Digital mode: BER measures and propagation time

• Alarm table

• Events are recorded in a flash memory (inputs switching, outputs and commands)

• Result of loop test (mixed mode)


8.6.2 Maintenance functions

• Forcing of input commands for commissioning

• Forcing of output relays for commissioning

• Release of output commands in case of SET/RESET (dual tone mode)

• Reset of command counters

• Loop test (mixed mode)


T390/EN GP/B23 General Presentation

Page 52/64 e-terragridcomT390

9. CHARACTERISTICS
9.1 T390-AMP/AMPX

Part Number Internal code Notes


T390-AMP MOD9002101 AMP
T390-AMPX MOD9002201 AMPX

General features Digital Mode Analogue Mode Mixed Mode


Operational characteristics
Frequency range 20 to 700 kHz
Separated, Separated,
TX and RX band Separated
superimposed superimposed
Choice of channel In 1 kHz steps
Choice of carrier
In 0.12 Hz steps
frequency
Transmitter power
1W to 40 W PEP 1W to 40 W PEP 1
T390-AMP
Transmitter power
2W to 80 W PEP 1W to 40 W PEP1
AMP + AMPX
Line output Balanced or unbalanced, 50, 75, 125, 150 Ω
Analog 4Khz + Digital
4,8 kHz

4 kHz, 8 kHz or 16 kHz 4 kHz or 2.5 kHz 2 per Analog 2.5Khz +


R.F Bandwidth Digital 4,8 kHz
QAM or TCM channel
Analogue 4kHz * 2
Analogue 2.5kHz * 2
(3)
4kHz (from 20 to 500 kHz)
5kHz (from 20 to 500 kHz) (3)
TX/RX filter
8kHz (from 24 to 500 kHz) (3)
programmability
16kHz (from 48 to 700 kHz)(4)
32kHz (from 96 to 700 kHz)(4)

1
With limitations on the output power for narrow filters in the upper part for the PLC band
2
2.5 kHz single channel available only in low part of PLC band (under 150 kHz). The normal operation
is adjacent Rx and Tx channel on 5kHz filters.
3
In the upper part of band, the real HF bandwidth of the narrow filters (4,5 and 8 kHz nominal
bandwidth) must be extended to avoid losses. Therefore, some restriction should be made
regarding the paralleling of PLC equipments (extension of IEC495 tapping loss requirements).
4
Lower frequency could not be lower than 5/2xBW (e.g. for 32kHz, lowfreq>80kHz)
General Presentation T390/EN GP/B23

e-terragridcomT390 Page 53/64

General features Digital Mode Analogue Mode Mixed Mode


Sensitivity
Absolute sensitivity
-56dBm (typical) -50dBm (min)
of receiver(5)
Sensitivity of FSK
channel for complete
-30dBm (typical) - 38dBm (min)
synchronization with
default parameters(3)
Analogue AGC
Dynamic range/set
72dB (range –21 to +60)
reference
Time constant 2 dB/sec rise or drop within out zone, 0.5dB/s within the capture zone
LF response < ± 0.5 dB
Power Supply
Input type DC voltage
Voltage 48V= typical (38 to 72V wide range)
Power 72W typical
9A (50μs<t<1.5ms )
Inrush current
About 1.2 A after operating system boot
Environmental (in operation)
Normal operational -5 °C / +50°C according to 721-3-3 class 3K5
temperature range
Max temperature -30°C / + 55 °C according to IEC 495 clause 3.1
range
Max relative 95 % at 23 °C non condensing
humidity
Environmental (Storage)
Temperature -40 °C < T < +70°C
Relative humidity 100 %
Insulation & EMC
Insulation IEC 60495 / IEC 60950
EMC (emissions) Radiated and conducted IEC 61000-6-4 (CISPR11)
EMC (immunity) IEC61000-6-2 / IEC61000-6-5
Mechanical
AMP: 8800 g:
Weight
AMPX: 7650 g
Dimensions 480x260x134mm
MTBF
AMP 66 years @ 30°C 54 years @ 45°C
AMPX 149 years @ 30°C 120 years @ 45°C

5
Default settings for AGC init, jumper RXF -12dB not enabled, separated mode.
T390/EN GP/B23 General Presentation

Page 54/64 e-terragridcomT390

9.2 Processing units

Part Number Internal code Notes


T390-PRCS PRCS-e

General features Digital Mode Analogue Mode Mixed Mode


Operational characteristics
Max Digital bit rate 128kbit/s N/A 128kbits/s
Digital User rate Up to 125.3 kb/s N/A Up to 125.3 kb/s
Minimum SNR for Synchronization
QAM4 16dB N/A 16dB
QAM16/TCM32 20dB N/A 20dB
QAM64/TCM128 24dB N/A 24dB
QAM256 32dB N/A 32dB
QAM1024 43dB N/A 43dB
For PLC sync 6dB
Digital AGC
Dynamic range/set
+24dB N/A +24dB
reference
Time constant 20 dB/sec rise or drop N/A 20 dB/sec rise or drop
RF Equalizer
Amplitude distortion N/A ± 6 dB ± 6 dB
External Teleprotection
Interface N/A 4W
Impedance N/A 600 Ω
Mode N/A Balanced/Isolated
Return loss N/A > 14 dB
Input max level N/A +14dBm for T390-PRCS
adjustment
Input min level N/A -18 dBm
adjustment
Input step level N/A 3 dB
Output max level N/A +14dBm for T390-PRCS
adjustment
Output min level N/A -18 dBm
adjustment
Output step level N/A 3 dB
Internal Guard N/A YES
External Guard N/A YES
General Presentation T390/EN GP/B23

e-terragridcomT390 Page 55/64

General features Digital Mode Analogue Mode Mixed Mode


External Teleprotection Channel Blocking control (BLE/BLR) & safety presence
Command method 2 user points access, DC level, External free
loop
Level range 17 VDC to 160 VDC
Insulation value IEC 60495
Particularity 0dB or +6 dB or +12 dB programmable Boost
on command
Bouncing Protection
External Teleprotection Alarm output – PRCS only
Function method Free potential Static relay Contact
Continuous max 160 VDC
voltage
250 VAC
Continuous max 190 mA
current
Peak current 300 mA during 30 ms
Insulation value IEC 60495
Particularity Normally open
Data & voice services
V11
RS232
Speech See chapters 5 and 6
Telegraphy
Signaling
Power Supply
Input type DC voltage
Voltage 48V= typical (38 to 72V wide range)
Power 15W typical
3.76A (50 μs < t < 1,5 ms)
Inrush current
1.9A (1,5 ms < t < 500 ms)
UO5 @ 52V
0.08A (t > 500 ms)
Alarm output
Function method Free potential, Pure relay Contact
Continuous max 160 VDC
voltage
250 VAC
Continuous max 2A
current
Peak current 100 A during 30 ms
Max Power 100 W
Insulation value IEC 60495
Particularity Dual insulated contact
Normally closed
T390/EN GP/B23 General Presentation

Page 56/64 e-terragridcomT390

General features Digital Mode Analogue Mode Mixed Mode


Environmental (in operation)
Normal operational -5 °C / +50°C according to 721-3-3 class 3K5
temperature
Max temperature -30°C / + 55 °C according to IEC 495 clause 3.1
Max relative 95 % at 23 °C
humidity
Environmental (Storage)
Temperature -40 °C < T < +70°C
Relative humidity 100 %
Insulation & EMC
Insulation IEC 60495 / IEC 60950
EMC (emissions) Radiated and conducted IEC 61000-6-4 (CISPR11)
EMC (immunity) IEC61000-6-2 / IEC61000-6-5
Mechanical
PRCS: 4300g
Weight

Dimensions 480x260x89mm
MTBF
PRCS 22 years @ 30°C 20 years @ 45°C
General Presentation T390/EN GP/B23

e-terragridcomT390 Page 57/64

9.3 Teleprotection Unit

Part Number Internal code Notes


T390-TPI MOD9005001 TPI

General features
Power Supply
Input type DC voltage
Voltage 48V= typical (38 to 72V wide range)
Power 19W typical/30W max
Permanent current without commands 19W
Permanent current with all relays only 28W
Permanent current with all relays & commands 30W
Inrush current 12A <1.5ms , 9A for 1.5<t<500ms
Environmental (in operation)
Normal -5 °C / +50°C according to 721-3-3 class 3K5
operational
temperature
Max temperature -30°C
+ 55 °C according to IEC 495 clause 3.1
Max relative 95 % at 23 °C
humidity
Environmental (Storage)
Temperature -40 °C < T < +70°C
Relative humidity 100%
Insulation & EMC
Insulation IEC 60495 / IEC 60950
EMC (emissions) Radiated and conducted IEC 61000-6-4 (CISPR11)
EMC (immunity) IEC61000-6-2 / IEC61000-6-5
C3790.1/C3790.3/C3790.3
Mechanical
Weight TPI: 3600 g
operation 3M1 according to IEC 60721-3-3
storage 2M1 according to IEC 60721-3-2
Dimensions 480x260x44,5mm
IEC 255-21-1 vibration response Class 2
IEC 255-21-1 vibration endurance Class 1
IEC 255-21-2 Shock response Class 2
IEC 255-21-2 Shock withstand Class 1
IEC 255-21-2 Bump Class 1
T390/EN GP/B23 General Presentation

Page 58/64 e-terragridcomT390

General features
MTBF

TPI 29 years @ 30°C 25 years @ 45°C


Outputs
contacts 8 NO contacts
available 6 NO/NC contacts
Mode Single Electromechanical relays (EMR)
or combined with solid state relays and (mode selectable by jumper)
Working the contacts are allocated freely to commands a/o alarms
Contacts
Max permanent 8A
Current
Max Voltage 300Vdc
Making EMR COMBINED
capacity(200ms)
15A 30A
Breaking see Figure 10 see Figure 10
capacity
Resistive Load
Inductive load
L/R= 40ms at 5A on combined output
127V

short-circuit max 100A during 30ms


current
Combination AND/OR
State on Alarm Transparent/Idle/Set/Memory
Holding Delay 0-500ms, by step of 1ms
Alarms
Delay for alarm 0-30s by step of 1s
relays
General Presentation T390/EN GP/B23

e-terragridcomT390 Page 59/64

General features
Inputs
input available 8
Mode decoupling opto couplers
working inputs the input allocation is freely configurable by HMI
Max Input
voltage 290VDC
Input Range selectable
by
jumpers 24V 48-60V 110-129V 220-250V
Max trigger
threshold 18V 36V 80V 170V
Minimum switch
off voltage
Impedance At
(tolerance of nominal
10%) voltage 6000 10000 18000 39000
Logical AND/OR/XOR
Combination
Input filters 0-100ms by steps of 0,1 ms
Max input
frequency 50 Hz in permanent
Holding Delay 0-500ms by steps of 1ms
Input validation 0-25ms by steps of 1ms
Delay

1000

100
Max DC Voltage(A)

EMR
Combined

10

1
0,1 1 10
DC current(A)

FIGURE 10: BREAKING CAPACITY OF OUTPUT ON RESISTIVE LOAD


T390/EN GP/B23 General Presentation

Page 60/64 e-terragridcomT390

Digital
General features
number of 2/4/8
commands
Application 3 different types selectable by group of 2 commands
Types
Alarm on Ber Two thresholds available for Minor and Major BER alarm
Alarm on 10-30ms by step of 1ms
propagation
Time
Measure of performed in link loop, accuracy of 1ms
transfer time
Interfaces V11 G703-1 G703-6 Optical
available daughter daughter board daughter board link
board
Protection Protection against path switching and loop back
Electrical
connector Sub-D 15
V11
Clock source internal or external
Clock speed Range 32-256 kbps
Communication
Mode Data received on internal clock/external clock
G703-6
Clock source internal or external
Type E1 2Mbps
G703-1
Clock source internal or external
Clock speed 64 kbps
Optical
connector Type LC-LC
Communication Monomode 1550nm long haul
Type
1310nm short haul
1550nm simplex bidirectional interface
Multimode 850 nm for C3794 compatible application
Tx failure
LOS on Rx
Slots of 64kbps 1/2/4
on 2Mbps frame
interface type
and
characteristics by SFP modules
C3794 function compatibility with C3794 system with 850nm SFP
General Presentation T390/EN GP/B23

e-terragridcomT390 Page 61/64

Digital
Performance according to 60834-1
Protection mode Blocking Permissive Direct
Tripping
N Cycles required 1 2 3
D Hamming distance 3 2 2
Transfer Time 64 kbps 4 CMDS 6 ms 7 ms 8 ms
Transfer Time 2Mbps 4 CMDS <1ms <1 ms <1ms
Dependability Pmc = Probability of a <1E-35 <1E-20 <1E-15
Missing Command
(Pmc) for
BER = 1E-3 (10ms)

Security (Puc) (Worst case) 1E-05 1E-13 1E-20


Recovery Time <8ms at 64kBps

Analog
General features
Number of 4 independent commands
commands
6 commands with priorities
Case dual tone
2 commands + 1 SET/RESET
1 command + 2 SET/RESET
3 SET/RESET
Number of 2+2 : 2 permissives and 2 direct trippings
commands
3+1 : 3 permissives and 1 direct tripping
Case Mixed mode
SET RESET Type of application designed for continuous commands such as
switchgear position copy
The Transmission duration is configurable in the 10-200ms range
Frequency And power Allocation
Type According to services configured, the TP band allocated
TP over speech TP over empty TP over QAM
Power allocation operator can configure the channel to cut
during command transmission
Bandwidth TP over speech TP over empty TP over QAM
1800Hz 1800Hz same as QAM bandwidth
Alarm and special features
SNR alarm Low/High Limits and trigger delays configurable by HMI
Signal Loss Low/High Limits and trigger delays configurable by HMI
Unblocking
function 1 output contact can be allocated
unblocking following Cigre Joint Working Group 34/35.11
Alarm on
Command too
Long configurable by HMI from 0 to 2,5s by step of 0,1s
T390/EN GP/B23 General Presentation

Page 62/64 e-terragridcomT390

Analog
Performance according to 60834-1 dual tone mode
T0 (ms) Puc Pmc
Type 1 / Blocking 12 3E-05 7E-04
Type 2 /
12 7E-07 <7E-05
Permissive
TP over QAM Type 3 /Direct
14 1E-09 <1,3E-06
tripping fast
Type 4 / Direct
40 1E-09 <1E-6
tripping slow
Type 1 / Blocking 9 4E-05 9E-04
Type 2 /
9 <1E-6 8E-05
Permissive
Type 3 / Direct
TP full band 10 1E-09 <1E-6
tripping fast
Type 4 / Direct
40 1E-09 <1E-6
tripping slow
Type 1 / Blocking 12 <4E-05 1,8E-03
Type 2 /
12 <1E-06 2,6E-04
Permissive
Type 3 Direct
TP over speech 12 1E-09 <1E-6
tripping fast
Type 4 / Direct
40 1E-09 <1E-6
tripping slow
Recovery Time <45ms for SNR= 0dB
(Tac after noise <65ms for SNR = -5dB
burst)
Performance according to 60834-1 mixed tone mode

Dependability
Tac (ms) at Security(Puc)
T0 (ms) (Pmc) at
SNR=6dB at worst case
SNR=6dB
Permissive
12 15 <10-3 <10-4
commands
Direct tripping
15 30 <10-4 <10-6
commands
General Presentation T390/EN GP/B23

e-terragridcomT390 Page 63/64

9.4 Other General Information

General features
Number of 4 independent commands
commands
Frequency +/- 1Hz
Accuracy HF
Cross Talk < -65 dBmp
Selectivity < 55 dBm0 as per IEC 60495 § 5.3.1.5
MTBF
MTBF (years)
Systems @30°C @45°C
S200-40 17 15
S200-80 15 13
S201-40 11 9
S201-80 10 9
Minimum bandwidth spacing for paralleling equipment
Digital mode Min 8 kHz or equal to a bandwidth
Analogue mode Transmitter to adjacent transmitter 8 kHz
Transmitter to adjacent receiver 8 kHz
Receiver to adjacent receiver 8 kHz
T390/EN GP/B23 General Presentation

Page 64/64 e-terragridcomT390

BLANK PAGE
Alstom Grid

T390/EN GP/B23 © - ALSTOM 2012.


ALSTOM, the ALSTOM logo and any
alternative version thereof are trademarks and
service marks of ALSTOM. The other names
mentioned, registered or not, are the property
of their respective companies. The technical
and other data contained in this document is
provided for information only. Neither
ALSTOM, its officers and employees accept
responsibility for or should be taken as
making any representation or warranty
(whether express or implied) as to the
accuracy or completeness of such data or the
achievement of any projected performance
criteria where these are indicated. ALSTOM
reserves the right to revise or change this
data at any time without further notice.

Alstom Grid Worldwide Contact Centre


www.grid.alstom.com/contactcentre/
Tel: +44 (0) 1785 250 070

www.alstom.com
e-terragridcomT390

Overall System Description

Version 6.1

T390/EN OS/B23

GRID
Overall System Description T390/EN OS/B23

e-terragridcomT390 Page 1/64

CONTENTS

1. INTRODUCTION 9
1.1 Definitions 9
1.2 List of acronyms and abbreviations 9

2. OVERVIEW 11
2.1 Hardware & Firmware description 11
2.2 Firmware Packages 11
2.3 Human-Machine-Interface (HMI) 11

3. OPTIONAL FEATURES 12
3.1 Superimposed mode 13
3.2 Fallback mode 13
3.3 ADPCM 13
3.4 High Speed Modem 13
3.5 LAN to LAN 14
3.6 IRIG-B/SNTP 15
3.7 Point to Multipoint 15
3.8 SNMP 15
3.9 Security pack 15
3.10 Set Reset 16

4. PROVISIONING AND COMMISSIONING PROCEDURE 17


4.1 System assembly 18
4.2 Frequency bandwidth setting 18
4.3 Administrative settings 18
4.4 Verification 18
4.5 Inter-unit connection 18
4.6 Mains supply plug-in 18
4.7 Connection to electrical transmission line 18
4.8 Power line characteristics measurement 18
4.9 Transmission and reception filter tuning 18
4.10 Data and speech channels connection 18
4.11 Software setup (units and channels configuration) 18
4.12 Tests 18

5. CONFIGURATION AND SETTINGS 19


5.1 Unit-specific physical settings 19
5.1.1 Amplifier Bandwidth 19
5.2 Physical fittings 19
5.2.1 Unit assembly 19
T390/EN OS/B23 Overall System Description

Page 2/64 e-terragridcomT390

5.2.2 Inter-unit connection 21


5.2.3 Power Supply Connection 21
5.2.4 Connection to High Voltage Electrical Line through Line Matching Unit 22
5.3 HMI Introduction 22
5.3.1 Main window description 22
5.3.2 Toolbar 23
5.3.3 Menus 23
5.3.4 Status Bar 23
5.3.5 Login 24
5.3.6 Local connection 25
5.3.7 Date Manager 27
5.3.8 PLC Information 27
5.3.9 Access Manager 28
5.4 Administrative settings 28
5.4.1 System configuration setup 29
5.5 Transmission settings 31
5.6 Connection to external communication devices 31
5.6.1 Speech channels modes 31
5.6.2 Data Channel Modes 33

6. OPERATIONS 35
6.1 Information upload (from PLC to PC) 35
6.2 Firmware package update 35
6.3 Event logging 37
6.4 History logging 38
6.5 Recorder 39
6.6 Maintenance 41
6.6.2 TPI tab 47
6.7 Tests and measurements 47
6.7.1 The Line tab 48
6.7.2 The BER tab 49
6.7.3 The Constellation tab (QAM) 50
6.7.4 The Data Recorder tab 51
6.7.5 Alarm Status 53
6.7.6 System Diagnosis Status 53
6.7.7 Spectrum Analyser 54
6.7.8 TPI 54

7. PREFERRED CONFIGURATIONS 56
7.1 3 speeches + 3 signalings in 8kHz Analog band 56
7.2 3 speeches over 4kHz, 8kHz, or 16kHz Digital with separate Tx and Rx bands 56
7.3 3 speeches over 16kHz Digital with superimposed Tx and Rx bands 56
7.4 1 speech and 1 signaling in 4kHz Analog + 1kHz Digital (Mixte mode 4kHz) 56
Overall System Description T390/EN OS/B23

e-terragridcomT390 Page 3/64

7.5 2 speeches + 2 signalings in 5 kHz Analog + 2 kHz Digital (Mixte mode 8kHz) 56
7.6 3 speeches + 3 signalings in 8 kHz Analog + 8 kHz Digital (Mixte mode 16kHz) 57
7.7 2 speeches + 2 signalings + 2 MTU in 8kHzAnalog 57
7.8 4 MTU in 8kHz Analog 57
7.9 4 MTU in 4kHz Analog 57
7.10 1 speech + 1 signaling +1 TG in 4kHz Analog 57
7.11 1 speech + 1 signaling + 2 TG in 4 kHz Analog 58
7.12 1 speech + 1 signaling + 1 TG + 1 MTU in 8kHz Analog 58
7.13 1 speech + 1 signaling in 8 kHz Analog + 8 Khz Digital (mode Mixte 16kHz) 58
7.14 1 speech + 1 signaling in 8 kHz Analog + 8 Khz Digital (mode Mixte 16kHz) 58

8. FIRMWARE CONFIGURATION 59
8.1 Offline: Full 59
8.2 Online: Services (Maint.) 59
8.3 Online: Patches 59

9. SHIPMENT AND STORAGE 60


9.1 Unpacking 60
9.2 Storage conditions 60
9.3 Accessories provided 62
9.3.1 Kit basic standard 62
9.3.2 Kit basic special 63
9.3.3 Kit AMPX 63
9.3.4 Kit TPI 64
9.3.5 Kit Commissionning 64
T390/EN OS/B23 Overall System Description

Page 4/64 e-terragridcomT390

LIST OF FIGURES

FIGURE 1: LAN TO LAN 14


FIGURE 2 POINT TO MULTIPOINT 15
FIGURE 3: AES 16
FIGURE 4: PLC NETWORKING 16
FIGURE 5: PROVISIONING AND COMMISSIONING PROCEDURE 17
FIGURE 6: AMP MODULE FOR 40W AMPLIFICATION 20
FIGURE 7: AMPX MODULE FOR 80W EXTENSION AMPLIFICATION 20
FIGURE 8: PRCS MODULE FOR DATA/SPEECH/TPX/IRIG-B/ALARMS 20
FIGURE 9: TPI MODULE 20
FIGURE 10: POWER SUPPLY CONNECTION 21
FIGURE 11: POWER SUPPLY CONNECTOR 22
FIGURE 12: HMI MAIN WINDOW 22
FIGURE 13: MAIN WINDOW TOOLBAR 23
FIGURE 14: MAIN WINDOW MENUS 23
FIGURE 15 MAIN WINDOW STATUS BAR 23
FIGURE 16: LOGIN WINDOW 24
FIGURE 17: UNIT SELECTION WINDOW 25
FIGURE 18: ADD A NEW IP ADDRESS 25
FIGURE 19: CONNECT TO NEW IP ADDRESS 25
FIGURE 20: SYSTEM RECOGNITION 26
FIGURE 21: CHANGE UNIT IP ADDRESS 26
FIGURE 22: DATE MANAGER WINDOW 27
FIGURE 23: PLC INFORMATION WINDOW 27
FIGURE 24: AUTHENTICATION 28
FIGURE 25: ACCESS MANAGER USER CONFIGURATION 28
FIGURE 26: T390 HARDWARE CONFIGURATION WINDOW IN CONNECTED MODE 29
FIGURE 27: HARDWARE CONFIGURATION WINDOW IN DISCONNECTED MODE 30
FIGURE 28: SYSTEM CONFIGURATION WINDOW 30
FIGURE 29: SPEECH ACCESS 32
FIGURE 30: SOFTWARE MODIFICATION WINDOW 35
FIGURE 31: OPEN SCRIPT DIALOG BOX 36
FIGURE 32: EVENTS WINDOW 37
FIGURE 33: HISTORY LOGGING WINDOW 38
FIGURE 34: RECORDER CONFIGURATION WINDOW 39
Overall System Description T390/EN OS/B23

e-terragridcomT390 Page 5/64

FIGURE 35: RECORDER PAGE VIEWER 40


FIGURE 36: DIGITAL EQUALIZATION 41
FIGURE 37: AUTO GAIN CONTROL 42
FIGURE 38: MAINTENANCE: ANALOG EQUALIZATION 42
FIGURE 39: MAINTENANCE: ENABLE ANALOG CHANNEL EQUALIZER 43
FIGURE 40: MAINTENANCE: ANALOG CHANNEL EQUALIZER - MANUAL 43
FIGURE 41: MAINTENANCE: ANALOG CHANNEL EQUALIZER – MEASUREMENT IN
PROGRESS 43
FIGURE 42: MAINTENANCE: ANALOG CHANNEL EQUALIZER – EQUALIZATION OK 43
FIGURE 43: MAINTENANCE: MULTITONES 44
FIGURE 44: MAINTENANCE: PROCESSING 45
FIGURE 45: MAINTENANCE: LOOPBACK 45
FIGURE 46: MAINTENANCE: LOOPBACK SELECTION 46
FIGURE 47: SYSTEM MAINTENANCE TAB 46
FIGURE 48 TPI TAB 47
FIGURE 49: MAIN SYSTEM LINE MEASUREMENTS 48
FIGURE 50: MAIN SYSTEM BER MEASUREMENTS 49
FIGURE 51: QAM 16 CONSTELLATION DIAGRAM 50
FIGURE 52: MAIN SYSTEM DATA RECORDER 51
FIGURE 53: SIGNAL TO NOISE MEASUREMENTS 51
FIGURE 54: AGC MEASUREMENTS 52
FIGURE 55: TEMPERATURE MEASUREMENTS 52
FIGURE 56: DAGC MEASUREMENTS 52
FIGURE 57: BER MEASUREMENTS 52
FIGURE 58: MAIN SYSTEM ALARM STATUS 53
FIGURE 59: MAIN SYSTEM DIAGNOSIS STATUS 53
FIGURE 60: SPECTRUM ANALYZER 54
FIGURE 61: MEASURE/TPI TAB 55
FIGURE 62: CONFIGURATION MODE 59
T390/EN OS/B23 Overall System Description

Page 6/64 e-terragridcomT390


Overall System Description T390/EN OS/B23

e-terragridcomT390 Page 7/64

DOCUMENT CONTEXT AND VERSION HISTORY


This document is part of the T390 user manuals document set.
Document Context

Document name Description


T390/EN OS T390 Technical manual – Overall System Description (this document)
T390/EN AM T390 Technical manual – AMP Description and Configuration
T390/EN AX T390 Technical manual – AMPX Description and Configuration
T390/EN PU T390 Technical manual – PRCS Description and Configuration
T390/EN AP T390 Technical Schedule – Application Note
T390/EN TP T390 Technical Manual – TPI Description and Configuration

Version History

VERSION DATE COMMENTS


A22 25/02/2011 Product Release 5
A23 03/03/2011 Product Release 6
B23 10/07/2012 Product Release 6.1
T390/EN OS/B23 Overall System Description

Page 8/64 e-terragridcomT390

BLANK PAGE
Overall System Description T390/EN OS/B23

e-terragridcomT390 Page 9/64

1. INTRODUCTION
This document describes the modular PLC T390 system and outlines its commissioning. It
provides a broad conceptual and technical overview of the system and the available features
and facilities, and points the user towards more detailed descriptions within the T390
documentation set.
1.1 Definitions
The following list identifies some commonly used terms and defines their specific meaning in
the context of this manual:
Board: A board is an electronic card (PCB) and all its components and connectors. A board
is always assembled and tested.
Unit: A unit is a physical 19-inch rack containing boards and connectors offering distinct
functionality such as amplification, signal processing, services, and teleprotection. A unit
includes the rack unit casing, boards, internal cables, and modules.
System: A system is a rack assembly of units and must include at least one Amplifier (AMP)
and one Processing Unit (PRCS). For increased power up to 80W, an additional amplifier
(AMPX) can be added. The PRCS unit offers a basic set of service functions but this can be
greatly extended by adding one or more Service Units (SRV), up to a maximum of nine.
Link: A link, sometimes “PLC system” or even just “PLC” refers to a complete configuration
of equipment at both ends of the physical link (the High Voltage Line), including the line
itself. Provided there is little risk of ambiguity, “System” can also be used loosely to cover
this wider definition.
Interface: An interface is a connector that is accessible on the exterior of a unit. This
connector can be used for internal needs of the product such as LVDS connectivity or the
power supply chain. It can also be used for customer access, such as for speech or data.
1.2 List of acronyms and abbreviations

ACRONYMS MEANING
ADPCM Adaptation Digital Pulse Code Modulation
AES Advanced Encryption Standard
APP Application message
AREC Adaptive Reference Echo Cancellation
DAGC Digital Automatic Gain Control
BITST Bit stream
DTE/DCE Data Terminal/Communication Equipment
CR Carrier Recovery
CRC Cyclic Redundancy Check
EC Echo Canceller
FPGA Field Programmable Gate Array
FSE Fractional Space Equalizer
FSM Finite State Machine
FXO Foreign Exchange Office
FXS Foreign Exchange Subscriber
HF High frequency
HMI Human Machine Interface
ID or IDP Identification Protocol
IDMP Identification protocol Master Protocol
T390/EN OS/B23 Overall System Description

Page 10/64 e-terragridcomT390

ACRONYMS MEANING
IRIG-B Inter-Range Instrumentation Group B
ITU-T International Telecommunication Union - Telephony
LAN Local Area Network
LAN to LAN IP-based system of connecting devices on separate LANs within
a network
LVDS Low Voltage Differential Signalling
MOS Mean Opinion Score
MTU Multipurpose Telegraph Unit (Built-in modem)
PEP Peak Envelope Power
PLC Power Line Carrier
PTM Point to Multipoint
PTP Point to Point
QAM Quadrature Amplitude Modulation
QOS Quality Of Service
SCADA Supervisory Control And Data Acquisition
SESR Severely Error Seconds Ratio
TCP/IP Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol
TDM Time Division Multiplexing
SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol
SNTP Simple Network Time Protocol
SR Symbol Recovery
XPRG FPGA Xilinx program

TABLE 1: ACRONYMS AND ABBREVIATIONS


Overall System Description T390/EN OS/B23

e-terragridcomT390 Page 11/64

2. OVERVIEW
This section introduces the main components of the Power Line Carrier T390 System.
A T390 system offers comprehensive transmission capabilities over power lines using Power
Line Carrier (PLC) technologies. It allows for voice and data transmission and can integrate
a teleprotection system in order to react to problems in the electrical network.
A T390 PLC Link employs two T390 systems, communicating along the power line, with
each system located on a distribution or transmission substation. The two sites may well be
several hundred kilometres apart.
The two T390 systems are arranged in a master/slave configuration. The combination of
equipment making up each of the two systems must be identical.
T390 units are modular and can be adapted to the customer’s needs in terms of services
(such as a mix of speech and data channels, or data rates). The minimum configuration for a
T390 system is one AMP Unit and one PRCS Unit, but this can be expanded by the addition
of a second amplifier (AMPX) and one TPI unit
Additionally, a global software package is installed on the system: this software package is
available in various levels to allow for differing ranges and performance.
2.1 Hardware & Firmware description
Hardware and firmware for each type of unit is fully described in the relevant documents
(identified above in the section “Document context and version history”).
2.2 Firmware Packages
All units are delivered with the latest kernel (T390 operating system), and can be upgraded
on-site using the Human Machine Interface (HMI).
Each unit must be loaded with a dedicated firmware set, properly configured for correct
system operation. Firmware sets consist of the main software for the particular unit, plus
specific add-ons according to the required feature (see the table below for the available add-
ons for each unit).
Coherency checks are made by the hardware and firmware at boot time. A second check is
made by the connected HMI during configuration.
Contact your representative for availability and price.
2.3 Human-Machine-Interface (HMI)
The Human Machine Interface (HMI) program runs on a PC and is used for all access,
configuration, measurement, and maintenance on a PLC system.
Firmware means all programs or FPGA bit streams that are downloaded onto the PLC
system.
A Software bundle is always delivered with each system, on a CD-ROM.
Use the version of HMI delivered with your firmware package to avoid compatibility issues.
The use of HMI software, for maintenance and measurement, is described in this document.
Use of the HMI with specific units (AMP, AMPX, PRCS and TPI) is described in their
respective user manuals.
T390/EN OS/B23 Overall System Description

Page 12/64 e-terragridcomT390

3. OPTIONAL FEATURES
The T390 architecture is flexible and modular: starting from the minimum requirement of one
Processing Unit (PRCS) and one Amplifier (AMP), the customer can assemble the required
configuration by adding an additional Amplifier Unit (AMPX, for up to 80W) and one TPI. The
same flexibility applies to the firmware: the features and facilities in the baseline
configuration can be extended by the purchase of option keys, giving access to a wide range
of enhancements. A list of available keys is given in the following table:

KEYS FEATURES MODE


KEY-IMPOSED Superimposed mode Digital
KEY-FALLBACK Fallback Digital
QAM/Trellis encoding map on 16 kHz of
KEY-16KHZ-QAM Digital
bandwidth
KEY-8KHZ-QAM QAM/Trellis encoding map on 8 kHz of bandwidth Digital
KEY-4KHZ-QAM QAM/Trellis encoding map on 4 kHz of bandwidth Digital
KEY-2KHZ-QAM QAM/Trellis encoding map on 2 kHz of bandwidth Digital
KEY-1KHZ-QAM QAM/Trellis encoding map on 1 kHz of bandwidth Digital
KEY-FAX FAX G3 relay for compressed speech channel Digital
KEY-ADPCM ADPCM 16/32/40 Digital
KEY-ANALOG-8KHZ 8kHz Analogue mode bandwidth Analog
KEY-ANALOG-5KHZ 5kHz Analogue mode bandwidth Analog
KEY-ANALOG-4KHZ 4kHz Analogue mode bandwidth Analog
KEY-ANALOG-2.5KHZ 2.5kHz Analogue mode bandwidth Analog
Key-HSM High Speed Modem Digital
Key-PTM Point to Multipoint All
KEY-IRIGB/SNTP IRIG-B synchronization All
KEY-L2L LAN to LAN Digital
KEY-Security Pack AES, encrypted password All
KEY-Set Reset Special command function for TPI All
KEY-SNMP SNMP supervision module All

TABLE 2: OPTION KEY LIST


NOTES:
1) The standard firmware is supplied with KEY-ANALOG-4KHZ installed,
which enables 4kHz bandwidth analog communication. This can be extended
in three ways:

• KEY-Analog-2.5KHZ, KEY-Analog-5KHZ, KEY-Analog-8KHZ enable


support for 2.5kHz, 5kHz and 8kHz respectively analogue bandwidth
communication

• The functionality of all analogue systems can be extended by the


purchase of option keys IRIGB/SNTP, SNMP, Set Reset and Security
Pack

• Option KEY-DIGITAL adds a range of keys for support of digital


functionality
Overall System Description T390/EN OS/B23

e-terragridcomT390 Page 13/64

2) Purchase of option key Digital includes all of the following keys:


KEY-IMPOSED, KEY-16KHZ-QAM, KEY-8KHZ-QAM, KEY-4KHZ-QAM, KEY-
2KHZ-QAM, KEY-1KHZ-QAM, KEY-ADPCM, KEY-FALLBACK, KEY-FAX
3. With KEY-DIGITAL installed, KEY-L2L and KEY-PTM are available to
purchase.
3.1 Superimposed mode
The option to use superimposed mode for digital transmissions is enabled by the purchase
and installation of KEY-IMPOSED. Superimposing Tx and Rx channels gives an economy in
required bandwidth, but at the cost of potential impact on SNR. This mode activates an echo
canceller, and therefore works only with Digital mode.
3.2 Fallback mode
Purchase and installation of KEY-FALLBACK provides the option of a failsafe fallback in the
event of degraded line characteristics. When transmission conditions do become degraded,
and threaten the immediate loss of all running PLC services, Fallback mode enables the
option of deliberately restricting throughput to selected facilities.
On entry to Fallback mode, the overall throughput of the system is reduced to a user-defined
level, and the available bandwidth is then occupied by all the services that have Fallback
enabled. In the case of V11 and LAN to LAN, a reduced speed (i.e. lower than in Normal
mode) can be specified.
If Fallback is not enabled for a particular service then, on entry to Fallback mode, this service
is cut.
Switching between Normal and Fallback encoders is automatic according to a Quality of
Service chosen by user.
The current mode is monitored and recorded, in order to restart in the same mode when
recovering from degraded line conditions or a loss of synchronization.
Encoder settings for normal mode must always be configured with higher values than those
for fallback. The rate for the fallback mode is fully programmable through the HMI.
Fallback mode can be activated only if KEY-FALLBACK is installed and the appropriate
configuration is made in the HMI (coherency check). Fallback must be enabled individually
for each service that supports it.
3.3 ADPCM
Adaptive Differential Pulse Code Modulation (ADPCM) becomes available on the purchase
and installation of KEY-ADPCM. ADPCM codecs quantize the difference between the actual
speech signal and a prediction of it, instead of quantizing the speech signal directly (like
PCM codecs). At the decoder, the quantized difference signal is added to the predicted
signal to reconstruct the speech signal. The performance of the codec is aided by using
adaptive prediction and quantization, so that the predictor and difference quantize adapt to
the changing characteristics of the speech being coded. Supported bandwidths for ADPCM
are 16, 24, 32, or 48 kbits/s.
3.4 High Speed Modem
If KEY-HSM is purchased and installed, then only the Data channels can be transmitted,
using a 4 kHz band, and the encoding is limited to QAM4, QAM16, or TCM32.
T390/EN OS/B23 Overall System Description

Page 14/64 e-terragridcomT390

3.5 LAN to LAN


Purchase and installation of KEY-L2L provides the option of LAN to LAN communication.
The T390 settings mechanism uses the TC/IP protocol: the HMI identifies PLCs connected
to the network by scanning a pool of addresses or by using a host file. It addresses each of
the units in a link individually by its unique IP address.
The HV link is considered as a part of the LAN network, as illustrated in Figure 1:

Computer

NETWORK

PLC1 PLC2 PLC3 PLC4


router
IP1 IP2 IP3 IP4
Config PLC1

Config PLC3

D0571ENa

FIGURE 1: LAN TO LAN


Since the LAN to LAN option is implemented using digital transmission, it is only available in
digital and mixed modes. The LAN to LAN option offers the following features:

• Remote alarm and event retrieval

• Remote service configuration

• Remote measurements (BER, spectrum analyzer, …)


A special LAN to LAN channel must be configured in the digital multiplexer, TDM, in order to
use it in normal running mode. It is also possible to employ full transmission bandwidth using
the LAN to LAN maintenance mode.
The T390 is equipped with an Ethernet interface to facilitate the exchange of LAN and WAN
information.
This feature implements an L2 bridge at network level (fully transparent bridging) with
advanced capabilities:

• Compliant with standard 802.1q for VLAN transport (Virtual LAN is a local network of
equipment grouped logically, but not necessarily physically).

• Neighbour analysis to remove unnecessary traffic on the PLC line by appropriate


network routing for each system.
During commissioning and maintenance, a special feature switches the full bandwidth of the
TDM to the LAN service, giving it the maximum bit rate (i.e. 76.8kbit/s in QAM64/16 kHz).
If the LAN service is stopped, the remote system is inaccessible.
For a digital system, we recommend allocating at least 10 kbits/s to the LAN service (that is
14% of the bandwidth in QAM64/16 kHz) in order to support SNMP and HMI remote
configuration routing.
More information on the LAN to LAN feature, can be found in Application Note T390/EN AP.
Overall System Description T390/EN OS/B23

e-terragridcomT390 Page 15/64

3.6 IRIG-B/SNTP
Purchase and installation of KEY-IRIGB enables options for time synchronization of the PLC.
Enabling the IRIG-B input interface allows synchronization of the PRCS unit real time clock
with an external time generator device, such as a GPS clock device.
If LAN to LAN is activated, then the IRIG B function can activate time synchronization from
an SNTP (Simple Network Time Protocol) server, accessed through the Ethernet interface.
3.7 Point to Multipoint
Point to Multipoint (PTM) is used when access is required to remote and/or local RTU
devices, as illustrated below in Figure 2. PTM analogue services are included in the standard
system. Digital PTM services become available on a digital-enabled system (KEY-DIGITAL)
following the purchase and installation of KEY-PTM.

FIGURE 2 POINT TO MULTIPOINT


3.8 SNMP
Purchase and installation of KEY-SNMP alows the implementation of an SNMP (V2) agent,
allowing full monitoring of alarms, real-time measurements (SNR, AGC, etc), and complete
configuration reading (frequencies, TX power, services, etc). In addition, each alarm can
generate an SNMP Trap which is sent to the network manager (up to 10 IP Trap addresses
are programmable). The management system can be any of the existing products available
on the market such as HP Open view ®, TIVOLI, and Castlerock. An MIB is supplied with the
T390 system to interface to the management system (ASN.1 format).
For SNMP configuration under the HMI, refer to the document Processing Unit Description
and Configuration, T390/EN PU.
3.9 Security pack
The security pack feature, made available by purchase and installation of KEY-SECURITY
PACK, is based on the Advanced Encryption Standard (AES), and prevents anyone but a
valid user (i.e. a user with a valid login/password) from gaining access to a protected T390
system. AES is widely used in symmetric key cryptography worldwide.
For the first PC user to PLC connection, there is a standard “once-only” login/password
combination admin/admin. This is only used for creating the initial customer password
connection, and then ceases to be valid.
T390/EN OS/B23 Overall System Description

Page 16/64 e-terragridcomT390

To create, enter, and activate a permanent customer login and password, you must set it in
the Maintenance|System Security Management. As shown in Figure 3:

FIGURE 3: AES
Three user levels are available:

• Anonymous, meaning anyone can log in

• Login and password stored in PLC, meaning authentication on the PLC, without AES

• As anonymous, with encrypted communication between PC and PLC


To apply this feature, select level 2 and enter a login and password associated for level 3.
The login name must be no more than 16 characters, the password no more than 8. Up to
sixteen login/password combinations can be defined.
In the network shown in Figure 4, all computers have access to the digital PLCs. If the
security pack feature is installed, only users with a valid login/password will have access.

Telephone Telephone
Fax

Computer

Digital PBX
Printer

Computer
Printer ETHERNET LAN

Computer
ETHERNET LAN

Internet

Router Digital PLC


Digital PLC
Firewall D0572ENa

FIGURE 4: PLC NETWORKING


3.10 Set Reset
Refer to T390/EN TP for explanation.
Overall System Description T390/EN OS/B23

e-terragridcomT390 Page 17/64

4. PROVISIONING AND COMMISSIONING PROCEDURE


NOTE: Refer to section 9, Shipment and storage, before starting any
commissioning work.
This section describes the procedure for setting up a T390 system. This is only a
summarized description, outlining the main steps to follow and giving links to fuller details.

LMU
settings

Power line
characteristics
measurements

• PLC units comply as required


System • All necessary cables &
assembly connectors provided (power
supply, coaxial, LVDS, ground)

Inter Units
connection

Main supply • HF Tx & Rx filters


plug in after checking and/or setting
checking • Ip addresses of each units
• Firmware version updated
• Data & speech soft set up
Local settings

Connection to Electrical Transmission Line

• QAM synchro
PLC link tests • SNR,BER,AGC
• Maintenance
speech test…
Data and Speech users Connection

End to end customer final tests, SAT


D0065ENa

FIGURE 5: PROVISIONING AND COMMISSIONING PROCEDURE


T390/EN OS/B23 Overall System Description

Page 18/64 e-terragridcomT390

4.1 System assembly


This is detailed in a specific note in the document Application Note, T390/EN AP.
4.2 Frequency bandwidth setting
This is detailed in a specific note in the document Application Note, T390/EN AP.
4.3 Administrative settings
This is detailed in section 5.4, Administrative settings, in this document.
4.4 Verification
Confirm that all delivered units are compatible with the main power voltage of the installation
(48V DC) and that they are correctly configured (frequencies, unit combination sets,…).
4.5 Inter-unit connection
This is detailed insection 5.2.2, Inter-unit connection, in this document.

4.6 Mains supply plug-in


This is detailed in section 5.2.3, Power Supply Connection, in this document.
4.7 Connection to electrical transmission line
Connection to High Voltage Electrical Line is covered in the AMP documentation.
4.8 Power line characteristics measurement
This is detailed in section 6.7, Tests and Measurements, in this document.
4.9 Transmission and reception filter tuning
This is detailed in the Filter Tuning section of the Application Note, T390/EN AP.
4.10 Data and speech channels connection
Information about connection modes and connectors can be found in the documentation for
the PRCS units (SRV unit is not yet available in Rel 6.0 and 6.1). Please refer to the
following documents:

• Processing Unit Description and Configuration, T390/EN PU


4.11 Software setup (units and channels configuration)
Information on units and channels configuration is in the relevant unit-specific documents.
4.12 Tests
Refer to the procedure and site commissioning reports.
Overall System Description T390/EN OS/B23

e-terragridcomT390 Page 19/64

5. CONFIGURATION AND SETTINGS


BEFORE CARRYING OUT ANY WORK ON THE EQUIPMENT, THE USER
SHOULD BE FAMILIAR WITH THE CONTENTS OF THE SAFETY
SECTION, THE TECHNICAL DATA SECTION, AND THE RATINGS ON
THE EQUIPMENT RATING LABEL
The PLC system supports the setting of several parameters to handle various site-related
parameters and customer-driven configurations. Some of the parameters are set at
manufacturing time, some at integration time, and some have to be set at installation and
service start-up time.
Some parameters relate to a specific unit, while others apply to the whole system.
This section describes parameter setup, specifies the operating mode, and identifies the
recommended or mandatory steps with which the configuration should be carried out. When
necessary, for unit-specific parameters, reference is made to unit-specific technical manuals.
5.1 Unit-specific physical settings
5.1.1 Amplifier Bandwidth
The frequency range used for transmission by the amplifier can be configured by modifying
jumpers. This is described in the Filter Tuning section of the Application Note, T390/EN AP.
Take care during this procedure to avoid damaging the amplifier.
5.2 Physical fittings
5.2.1 Unit assembly
A T390 Link is a combination of two T390 systems, each located on distribution or
transmission substations, and each consisting of at least two units (a minimum system is one
Amplifier, AMP, and one Processing unit, PRCS).
It is important to note that the T390 systems at either end of a link must be an identical
combination of units, and the installed software on each system must also be identical.
5.2.1.1 General
Before the agreed delivery date, the infrastructure where the equipment will be installed
should be ready. It is also important that the AC mains power supply, as well as the PLC
power supply, be guaranteed continuous.
5.2.1.2 Site Selection
The following parameters should be taken into account during selection of the site:

• rack dimensions

• number of racks

• ceiling height, no lower than 2.5 m. from floor

• Battery Charger dimension

• environmental conditions

• main earth network


T390/EN OS/B23 Overall System Description

Page 20/64 e-terragridcomT390

5.2.1.3 Mechanical installation


Once all requirements related to the installation site have been verified it is possible to
proceed with installation.
The following rules should be observed when mounting T390 units in their rack:

• Choose an open space far from other equipment, if possible, and with good
ventilation, to reduce climatic stress.

• Leave at least 1U (44mm) between each unit. This space can be used for cable
holdings or fan units.

• Put the units on the rear of the rack: no cabling is required on the back except the
grounding braid refer to in the Application Note: Installation check. This layout will give
more space on the front for cabling and user accessibility.

• Fix the units firmly on the rack with the supplied bolts and screws or equivalents.

• Connect each unit to earth/ground using a large tinned copper braid to provide low
impedance between the cases and earth/ground.
5.2.1.4 Modules presentation

FIGURE 6: AMP MODULE FOR 40W AMPLIFICATION

FIGURE 7: AMPX MODULE FOR 80W EXTENSION AMPLIFICATION

FIGURE 8: PRCS MODULE FOR DATA/SPEECH/TPX/IRIG-B/ALARMS

FIGURE 9: TPI MODULE


Overall System Description T390/EN OS/B23

e-terragridcomT390 Page 21/64

5.2.2 Inter-unit connection

All modules are interconnected through a high speed link, also called the LVDS link.
Use the supplied T390-Harting manufacturer cables to connect the units.
The connection scheme must conform to the following:

• Both connectors of each unit should be connected in such a way that the connector
could be left connected when the system is on-line.

• The chain-in of each unit must be connected to the chain-out of one of the other units,
although no particular order is required.

• Use the appropriate cable length to connect the units. Supplied cables within the kit
allow a standard layout configuration, but other cable lengths can be ordered to suit
different configurations.

• Never connect or disconnect LVDS cables under PLC power on.


5.2.3 Power Supply Connection
Only star connection can be used to connect the various units to the power supply.
5.2.3.1 Star connection
THE GROUND CONNECTION MUST BE MADE WITH THE MAIN CIRCUIT
BREAKER OFF.

FIGURE 10: POWER SUPPLY CONNECTION


Once the connections have been made, switch the main circuit breaker ON. Check on every
unit of the local system that the Main and Power LEDs indicate a correct connection: if the
polarity has been respected, the Main, Power and Logic LEDs will be lit (green). Only under
these circumstances may configuration continue.
T390/EN OS/B23 Overall System Description

Page 22/64 e-terragridcomT390

5.2.3.2 Power supply connector


The power supply connector is not unit-specific: it is identical on every unit in a T390 system.

Pin out Description


+ BAT 48 VDC positive
- BAT 48 VDC negative
NC Not Connected

FIGURE 11: POWER SUPPLY TABLE 3: POWER SUPPLY


CONNECTOR CONNECTOR PIN-OUT

5.2.4 Connection to High Voltage Electrical Line through Line Matching Unit
This is detailed in the AMP document, Amplifier Description and Configuration, T390/EN AM.
5.3 HMI Introduction

This section introduces the Human Machine Interface (HMI), illustrates the user interface,
and describes the basics of operation and access.
5.3.1 Main window description
On launching the HMI, the main window is displayed, as shown in Figure 12:

FIGURE 12: HMI MAIN WINDOW


All options display a window or pane inside the main window.
Overall System Description T390/EN OS/B23

e-terragridcomT390 Page 23/64

5.3.2 Toolbar
The toolbar is located below the menu bar, and is illustrated in Figure 13:

Connection

Bitstream
Events listing Measurements
Configurations
Maintenance
D0574ENa

FIGURE 13: MAIN WINDOW TOOLBAR


References to the relevant explanations of facilities available from the menu are given in the
sections that follow.
5.3.3 Menus
All functions available from the main window are listed in its menus, as shown in Figure 14:

FIGURE 14: MAIN WINDOW MENUS


The functionality within these menus is described later in the document.
5.3.4 Status Bar
The status bar, shown in Figure 15, is located below the HMI main window. It provides
general and real time information about the HMI.

FIGURE 15 MAIN WINDOW STATUS BAR


T390/EN OS/B23 Overall System Description

Page 24/64 e-terragridcomT390

The following table describes the various messages displayed in the status bar:

Status bar
Description Values
info position
- Disconnected
TCP/IP or remote Connection
1 - Connected
status
- Connecting

2 HMI user identification level Level 1 to 3

- Running (GREEN) (Training, Service,


ANALOG ONLY …)
- FAILED (RED)
3 PLC running mode
- Entering conf (RED)
- Maintenance mode (Orange)
- etc
- OK
4 PLC general Status - Warning
- Failed
- Used when launching any menu to
5 Progress bar
report progress progress
- No new events available
6 Events availability
- New events available

TABLE 4: STATUS BAR MESSAGES


5.3.5 Login
Before being able to use any functions, the user must log in.The login window is accessible
from the LOGIN icon. This window prompts for a username and password. The
username/password pair must have been registered previously with the T390 Access
Manager software, a process described in section 5.3.9, Access Manager.
The login window is shown below in Figure 16:

FIGURE 16: LOGIN WINDOW


The user is logged in with access rights to a specific set of functions, depending on what has
been set up in Access Manager. The default set of username/password pairs is usernames
1, 2, and 3 associated with, respectively, access levels 1, 2, and 3.
Overall System Description T390/EN OS/B23

e-terragridcomT390 Page 25/64

5.3.6 Local connection


To access Local Connection, select PLC|Connect Local. During the connection, the HMI
identifies the system configuration, and the following selection window is displayed:

FIGURE 17: UNIT SELECTION WINDOW


Initially, the display reflects the current system setup. To add a new unit IP, right-click in the
display and select Add Unit, as in Figure 18. The new IP details can now be added.

FIGURE 18: ADD A NEW IP ADDRESS


To connect to an IP which is not in the list, right-click in the display and select Connect to,
as in Figure 19:

FIGURE 19: CONNECT TO NEW IP ADDRESS


T390/EN OS/B23 Overall System Description

Page 26/64 e-terragridcomT390

Select the unit with which to connect and then click Connect, in order to enter connected
mode with the selected unit. This starts with a recognition process:

FIGURE 20: SYSTEM RECOGNITION


When the recognition is complete, the HMI is in connected mode.
To change a unit IP, click Change IP. The window shown in Figure 21 is displayed:

FIGURE 21: CHANGE UNIT IP ADDRESS


Overall System Description T390/EN OS/B23

e-terragridcomT390 Page 27/64

5.3.7 Date Manager


To access the Date Manager select Tools|Date Setup.
The window shown in Figure 22 is displayed:

FIGURE 22: DATE MANAGER WINDOW


To match the PLC system date and time to the PC, click the >> button. To match the PC
date and time to the PLC, click the << button.
SNTP (Simple Network Time Protocol) is used to synchronize PLC clock in the Internet. To
set local Time Server IP address, click SNTP Enable, enter the IP address, and click Apply.
Note that SNTP requires the purchase and installation of options KEY-IRIGB and KEY-L2L.
5.3.8 PLC Information
To view PLC information, select File|PLC Info. The pane shown in Figure 23 is displayed:

FIGURE 23: PLC INFORMATION WINDOW


To exit, click OK.
T390/EN OS/B23 Overall System Description

Page 28/64 e-terragridcomT390

5.3.9 Access Manager


This is an independent application launched to configure access rights for users depending
on their login identity. This application generates password files that control user login.
Double-click the icon marked AccessManager.exe to display the authentication dialog, as in
Figure 24:

FIGURE 24: AUTHENTICATION


Enter the standard password mdp to display the main window, as shown in Figure 25:

FIGURE 25: ACCESS MANAGER USER CONFIGURATION


Users are created with the Apply Changes button or deleted with the Delete User button.
The configuration is saved by clicking Apply.
When selecting a user from the list on the left hand panel of the window pane, the properties
for that user are displayed on the right hand panel: name, password, a textual description,
and a user level. The user level defines access to the various levels of functionality.
5.4 Administrative settings
Each unit in a T390 system is individually identified (name) and may have a defined role
relative other units in the system (master/slave).
Setup of these parameters is generally done at manufacturing and integration time, but
further modifications might occasionally be needed at installation and operation time.
These parameter settings are implemented by the HMI from a PC connected to the PLC.
Overall System Description T390/EN OS/B23

e-terragridcomT390 Page 29/64

5.4.1 System configuration setup


A system can include a range of the various units. This combination is identified in the HMI
by a configuration file.

Setup of the parameters is normally done at integration time, but further modifications may
occasionally be needed at installation and operation time. The settings are applied through
the HMI from a PC.
Connect the administration PC to the T390 unit through the Ethernet connector of any unit in
the system and then launch the HMI. Select Tools|Configuration from the main menu bar
of the HMI. If the HMI has been launched in connected mode, the Hardware Configuration
window shown in Figure 26 is displayed:

FIGURE 26: T390 HARDWARE CONFIGURATION WINDOW IN CONNECTED MODE


The hardware configuration is displayed for information.The various panels show the name
and a textual description for each configured unit.
It is possible to insert a free text in the text field “Substation name”. This text is stored on the
PLC after applying and is reminded in the main window (Figure 12).
No other changes can be made directly on the configuration stored in the T390 system: the
text fields are non-editable and the Add and Remove buttons are inactive. In order to modify
the configuration for an existing T390 Unit, the configuration must first be loaded in
connected mode, saved to file by clicking Save and then re-loaded from the file in
disconnected mode, as detailed below.
Then, choose the bandwidth distribution you want:

− First the total bandwidth : 2, 2.5, 4, 5, 8, 12 or 16 are all the possibilities.

− Secondly, choose the PRCS mode: analog, digital or mixed for both cases

− Thirdly, click on TPx to add a TPx


Click Next to continue to the Configuration Window as shown in Figure 28.
T390/EN OS/B23 Overall System Description

Page 30/64 e-terragridcomT390

If the HMI has been launched in disconnected mode, the following window is displayed:

FIGURE 27: HARDWARE CONFIGURATION WINDOW IN DISCONNECTED MODE


This window is similar to that displayed for connected mode, but now the Load button is
available, the text fields are editable, and the Add and Remove buttons are also active.
The window is used for hardware configuration of the units in the system.
Teleprotection Units are added to the upper list by entering a name for the unit and clicking
Add. In version 6.1, only one TP (TPI or TPx) is supported.
NOTE: The name chosen for each unit must be unique within the system: it is
the reference identification for configuration. The name must not
contain any Space characters.
Once the hardware configuration is completed, click Next to display the System
Configuration Window, as shown in Figure 28:

FIGURE 28: SYSTEM CONFIGURATION WINDOW


Click Save to save the configuration to a file.
Click Apply to load this configuration into the system.
Overall System Description T390/EN OS/B23

e-terragridcomT390 Page 31/64

5.5 Transmission settings


This section describes how to set the various transmission settings (frequency, analog/digital
mode, modulation).
Setup and modification of these parameters is generally done at manufacturing, integration,
and installation time. However, further modifications may be needed at operation time.
Connect the administration PC to the T390 system through the Ethernet connector of any
unit and launch the HMI in connected mode.
Select File|Configuration, enter identification information for the amplifier, and click NEXT.
The configuration downloaded from the PLC system cannot be directly modified, it must first
be copied to a file. Click SAVE and select a file name in which to save the configuration.
Exit the HMI and launch it again in disconnected mode. From the configuration main window
click LOAD, select the configuration file, then click NEXT.
From the top left panel “Units from PLC”, select the unit to configure. The right hand panels
display unit-specific tabs.
The bottom right panel shows a graphical representation of the selected unit rack front panel.
Unit-specific configuration is not detailed here but can be found in the T390 technical
manuals related to specific units.
5.6 Connection to external communication devices
T390 systems support varied mixes of data and speech channels in both digital and analog
operating modes.
These mixes of channels are supported either by the Processing Unit or the Service Unit(s).
The associated connectors allow the connection of a range of telecommunication equipment.
Specific rules must be followed for the end-to-end connection of these devices. The various
available modes are summarised below. More details on the configuration can be found in
the manuals related to the PRCS and SRV Units.
5.6.1 Speech channels modes
Speech channels are supplied as a module with three speech channels (implemented as
three RJ45 connectors), together with one reference voltage connector for E & M wires, and
one maintenance handset (service phone) channel (implemented as one RJ11 connector).
The available modes for speech channels connection are detailed below:
5.6.1.1 Phone / Phone Connection (Hot Line)

Phone or fax Phone or fax


2 wires 2 wires
fax
PLC P PLC
L
D0068ENa

A 2-wire phone is connected to each side of the T390 speech channel. When the phone is
taken off-hook on one side of the line, the phone at the other end rings (see note below on
call alerts). If the other end is already off-hook, a busy tone is sent back.
T390/EN OS/B23 Overall System Description

Page 32/64 e-terragridcomT390

ONLY CHANNELS B AND C SUPPORT THIS CONFIGURATION.


PHONES ARE EITHER ACTUAL PHONES OR FAX. NO OTHER DEVICE
(E.G. MODEM) CAN BE CONNECTED.

Channel A Channel B Channel C

D0575ENa

FIGURE 29: SPEECH ACCESS


5.6.1.2 Incoming call alerts
For analog speech channels, the phone rings to indicate an incoming call. For digital speech
channels, the phone does not ring, but the PLC system buzzes.
5.6.1.3 PABX / Phone Connection

From the PABX's


point of view, this is
seen as a phone

Phone or fax
2 wires
2 wires
PABX PLC PLC

FXO FXS

D0069ENa

In this mode:

• The T390 channels on both sides must be set in 2-wire mode.

• The T390 channel connected to the PABX must be set as FXO (Foreign Exchange
Office).

• The T390 channel connected to the phone must be set as FXS (Foreign Exchange
Subscriber).

• Number dialling is done in DTMF mode


ONLY CHANNELS B AND C SUPPORT THIS CONFIGURATION.
PHONES ARE EITHER ACTUAL PHONES OR FAX. NO OTHER DEVICE
(E.G. MODEM) CAN BE CONNECTED.
Overall System Description T390/EN OS/B23

e-terragridcomT390 Page 33/64

5.6.1.4 Transit Connection

2 wires 2 wires
4 wires 4 wires

Auto Auto

PABX PABX
PLC PLC

Line per channel D0070ENa

In this mode, the PLC channels can act towards the PABX either as 2-wire or 4-wire (or
automatic mode). This allows support for several handsets at each end of a PLC system,
and thus allows several concurrent communications (with a maximum of one line per speech
channel).
All speech channels (A, B, and C) support this configuration.
WHEN ON THE SAME UNIT, THE MAINTENANCE HANDSET AND
CHANNEL A ARE LINKED. THIS MEANS THAT IT IS NOT POSSIBLE TO
USE THE MAINTENANCE HANDSET AND CHANNEL A AT THE SAME
TIME. TO KEEP THE EMERGENCY FUNCTIONALITY OF THE
MAINTENANCE HANDSET, IF THE MAINTENANCE HANDSET IS TAKEN
OFF HOOK WHILE CHANNEL A IS ACTIVE, THE CHANNEL A
COMMUNICATION IS IMMEDIATELY CUT.
5.6.2 Data Channel Modes
Data channels are supplied as a module with three data channels (implemented as three
V11 connectors). In contrast with the speech channels, there is no functional differentiation
between the three data channels.
Details of the available modes for data channels connection are given below.
ANY DCE/DTE COMBINATION OTHER THAN THOSE DESCRIBED
BELOW IS UNSUPPORTED.

5.6.2.1 T390 Data Channel as DCE

DTE PLC PLC DTE

(DCE) (DCE) D0071XXa

In this case, the PLC data end acts as master towards the DTE, i.e. the clock signal is
provided by the PLC data end.
T390/EN OS/B23 Overall System Description

Page 34/64 e-terragridcomT390

5.6.2.2 T390 Data Channel as DTE/DCE

DTE PLC PLC DTE

(DTE) (DCE) D0072XXa

In this case:

• One of the PLC data ends acts as master towards the DTE, i.e. the clock signal is
provided by the PLC data end.

• The external device provides the clock signal, the external DCE acts as master
towards the other PLC data end.
5.6.2.3 DCE2 (Back to Back) Mode

On same site -
Direct Connection

DTE PLC PLC PLC PLC DTE

DCE DTE DTE DCE


DCE 2 DCE 2

Clock Master
Only on TX D0073ENa

In this case, the two DCE2 PLC systems must be located on the same site and directly
connected to each other. For usage efficiency, it is recommended that all data channels use
this mode on such a configuration. The PLC data end provides the DCE PLCs act as
masters towards the related DTEs, i.e. the clock signal.
Regarding the two PLC Units connected as DCE2, they act as a master towards each other
on their transmission link.
Overall System Description T390/EN OS/B23

e-terragridcomT390 Page 35/64

6. OPERATIONS
6.1 Information upload (from PLC to PC)
Operational information, such as events, records, and memory dumps are stored for system
debugging and tracing.
This information is stored on flash memories and can be downloaded to a PC running the
HMI for later analysis.
Additionally, software packages are stored in upgradeable FPGA. The contents of these
FPGA can be uploaded to a PC for backup purposes.
The related operations are generally performed during maintenance or normal operation.
There are two operating modes for events and history logs retrieval. These are detailed in
section 6.3 Event logging and section 6.4 History logging.
6.2 Firmware package update
Firmware contains the Operating System as well as specific applications that depend on:

• the combination of units defining the system

• the software package chosen by the customer.


Nevertheless, for a specific combination of units, the firmware is the same in each unit of a
system. It can be uploaded on any of the system’s units, which will distribute it to the other
units through the LVDS chain.
Firmware upload takes place at integration time, but it can also be done at maintenance time
if the customer decides to upgrade the software package or if a corrective version of the
firmware is distributed.
A firmware upload is initiated through the main menu bar by selecting Tools|Bitstream,
which displays the following window:

FIGURE 30: SOFTWARE MODIFICATION WINDOW


A unit must be selected in the top right panel. Software modifications are done using scripts
that must be retrieved for each update. Click Open Script to select which script should be
used (this script must be stored somewhere on the PC running the HMI).
T390/EN OS/B23 Overall System Description

Page 36/64 e-terragridcomT390

An Open dialog is displayed for the user to select the script, as shown below:

FIGURE 31: OPEN SCRIPT DIALOG BOX


Choose a script and click Start to begin the transfer. The progress of the transfer can be
followed on the progress bar at the foot of the pane.
Following the identification given in the top right panel (Address field corresponding to
Name), it is possible to identify the image installed on each upgradeable part of the system,
i.e. “Xilinx area”, “Program Area”, “User Parameter’s Area”. These are identifiers used for
convenience, details about their meaning are unnecessary to install or use a T390 system.
Script descriptions are outside the scope of this document.
Upgrade application sequence:

• Backup the configuration of your system on both sides (master and slave)

• If the package includes a new kernel release, install that first and then reboot the
system, before installing anything else

• If your upgrade package contains a new unit-specific release, install that next

• Finally, install any remaining feature additions or upgrades

• Reboot the system

• Apply a system configuration, click Confirm in the dialog box, and wait until all units
have their LEDs flashing

• Reboot the system


For more information on upgrading the system, please refer to the Firmware and Key
Upgrades chapter of the Application Note, T390/EN AP.
Overall System Description T390/EN OS/B23

e-terragridcomT390 Page 37/64

6.3 Event logging


The PLC supports event recording. It can store in flash a series of event records that
describe system activity.
This list of events can be retrieved on the PC by the HMI and stored in a file.
The related operations are performed during normal operation phase.
Event logging is accessed through the main menu bar by selecting PLC|Show Events,
which leads to the following window:

FIGURE 32: EVENTS WINDOW


Events are listed in the following format:

• Chrono: event incremental counter – the icon indicates the gravity of the event

• Gravity: event gravity (only for Warning/Error events)

• Date: event date and time

• ID: an internal identifier

• Comment: additional information about the event

• Description: describes the event


The events are stored on a per-unit basis: the unit is selected from the top left panel and the
uploaded events are displayed in the lower pane.
Events are uploaded in either of two ways:

• Directly from T390 Unit, by clicking Retrieve from PLC or by double clicking on a unit
in the list. This can be done only in connected mode. The Retrieve from PLC button
is inactive in disconnected mode.

• From a file stored on the PC, by clicking Load. This can be done in both connected
and disconnected mode.
In order to load events from a file, they must first have been saved. This is achieved by
clicking Save, once some events have been uploaded and displayed in the event window.
Progress of all of the above operations can be monitored with the progress bar at the foot of
the window.
T390/EN OS/B23 Overall System Description

Page 38/64 e-terragridcomT390

An additional filtering functionality is also available: it allows the user to filter events on the
basis of their ID and a date panel.
6.4 History logging
History information can be logged in RAM (instead of FLASH memory).
This history can be retrieved from the HMI using roughly the same method as for events.
This logging is provided for debugging purpose only. No detailed documentation is available
describing the logs or their content. They are intended only to guide the hotline or support
staff when solving a problem or failure in the PLC system.
The related operations are performed during normal operation phase.
History logging is accessed through the main menu bar by selecting PLC|History Logging,
which displays the following window:

FIGURE 33: HISTORY LOGGING WINDOW


History logs are similar to event logs and are displayed in the following format:

• Date: event date and time

• Level: a hierarchy of events is defined, which implies sub-events. Level 0 identifies the
top level of the hierarchy.

• Gravity: identifies potential for damage to the system. In decreasing order of gravity,
the possible values are:
Fatal Error: Halts the system
Error: Requires the system to be restarted, generally generates automatic
reset or automatic boot sequence
Warning: Information message; suspect a problem that may lead to an error
Reporting: Change of status, without operational impact

• Date: the log date and time

• Comment: additional information about the log


The events are stored on a per-unit basis: the unit is selected from the top left panel and the
uploaded events are displayed in the lower pane.
Overall System Description T390/EN OS/B23

e-terragridcomT390 Page 39/64

Events are uploaded in either of two ways:

• Directly from the T390 unit, by selecting Retrieve from PLC, or by double-clicking on
a unit in the list. This can be done only in connected mode (the button is inactive in
disconnected mode).

• From a file stored on the PC, by clicking Load from File. This can be done whether in
connected or disconnected mode.
In order to load events from a file, they must first have been saved from a T390 unit. To save
uploaded events that are currently on display, click Save to File.
Progress of the operations can be monitored from the progress bar at the foot of the window.
An additional filtering functionality is also available: it allows the user to filter events on the
basis of its characteristics (level, gravity…).
6.5 Recorder
The HMI provides a facility for recording actions on the HMI, for later analysis. These records
depend on configurable events: when a specific trigger is encountered, the HMI records HMI
activity before and after this trigger.
The related operations are performed during the normal operation phase.
Recording facilities are accessed through the main menu bar by selecting PLC|Recorder,
which displays the window shown in Figure 34:

FIGURE 34: RECORDER CONFIGURATION WINDOW


T390/EN OS/B23 Overall System Description

Page 40/64 e-terragridcomT390

Up to ten triggers can be used (numbered from 0 to 9): they are chosen from event
identifiers in a pull-down list.
Click Enable to activate the recorder.
HMI events are recorded from a start point before the trigger, up to a set number of events:

• The Allow a new trigger after text box identifies the minimum time in ms between
two recorded events

• The Event slots text box sets the minimum number of events between two triggers
Events stored around a trigger constitute a page.
Click Apply to store the recorder configuration.
The lower part of this pane relates to actions and information on the recorder base itself.
The recorder status indicates whether it is full, empty, or if some records are available (Page
available) through non-editable check boxes.
Click Refresh to load the records from the PLC, click Erase All to clear the recorder, or click
Close to exit the recorder display.
Click View to display the following pane:

FIGURE 35: RECORDER PAGE VIEWER


This is a viewer for records pages: the user can choose the page to view by selecting the
page number from the pull-down list.
To save the set of records to a file click Save.
Previously stored records can be loaded from a file by clicking Load.
Click Close to close this pane.
Overall System Description T390/EN OS/B23

e-terragridcomT390 Page 41/64

6.6 Maintenance
The HMI can drive the PLC in order to make some tests on the line, such as line response to
tone signals, signal generation test, system reboot, or shutdown.These tests can only be
performed if the T390 system is in maintenance (TEST) mode. Driving the PLC through the
HMI ensures this condition.
Note that the PC running the HMI must be connected directly to the system under test; the
operations involved cannot be performed remotely through the Power Line link.
This functionality is accessed through the main menu by selecting PLC|Maintenance, which
displays a pane with seven available tabs:

• System Security Management

• System equalization

• Multitones

• Processing

• Loopback

• Misc

• TPI (if a TPI is present in the system)


6.6.1.1 Digital Equalization tab

FIGURE 36: DIGITAL EQUALIZATION


The PLC system has a line equalizer able to make a continuous line adaptation in terms of
attenuation and phase, on the entire programmed band (ie 4, 8, or 16kHz).
The equalizer starts automatically, without user intervention. However, “pre-equalization” is
MANDATORY, in order to force the start conditions of the algorithm.
This pre-equalization is set in the maintenance module equalizer. This module notes the line
condition when launched and stops when good equalization is reached. Those values are
stored in flash for the next run.
Up to six slots are available to store different line conditions. Easy switching between them is
achieved by defining the start up index.
T390/EN OS/B23 Overall System Description

Page 42/64 e-terragridcomT390

6.6.1.2 Auto Gain Control tab

FIGURE 37: AUTO GAIN CONTROL


The AGC optimization is used to store the initial Gain for AGC algorithm allowing a faster
restart. Click Refresh value to retrieve current values, then check the Enabled box, and
click Apply and Save to save the parameters. In case of signal loss, the AGC will start with
this value.
NOTE: Wait for complete synchronization of the link to get true values for
AGC.
6.6.1.3 Analog equalization tab

FIGURE 38: MAINTENANCE: ANALOG EQUALIZATION


Overall System Description T390/EN OS/B23

e-terragridcomT390 Page 43/64

This functionality is used to equalize speech or telegraph analog channel, only, configured in
the T390 system.
It can be enabled by selecting Analog Channel 1 in the following radio button:

FIGURE 39: MAINTENANCE: ENABLE ANALOG CHANNEL EQUALIZER


Then click Apply on PLC to apply the changes on PLC.
Click Save in flash to permanently save the equalization parameters in flash so that they will
be automatically applied on the next reboot.
Channel equalization procedure:
1. Manual equalization
If the line de-equalization is known (by using an external spectrum analyzer or the one
provided in the measures pane), it is possible manually to apply a gain correction per
frequency using the manual equalization panel:

FIGURE 40: MAINTENANCE: ANALOG CHANNEL EQUALIZER - MANUAL


Once the equalization values have been selected, click Apply to send them to the PLC.
2. Automatic equalization
Click Start to initiate the automatic equalization process.
The equalization steps are displayed in the panel on the right until the end of the
process:

FIGURE 41: MAINTENANCE: ANALOG CHANNEL EQUALIZER – MEASUREMENT IN PROGRESS

FIGURE 42: MAINTENANCE: ANALOG CHANNEL EQUALIZER – EQUALIZATION OK


T390/EN OS/B23 Overall System Description

Page 44/64 e-terragridcomT390

Remember to apply changes by clicking Apply on PLC. Clicking Save in flash writes the
equalization parameters permanently in flash so that they will be automatically applied on
next reboot.
6.6.1.4 Multitones tab

FIGURE 43: MAINTENANCE: MULTITONES


Two modes are available:

• Single Tone: the user can select in the table on the right of the pane up to four tones
to be sent.

• Multi Tones: the tone characteristics are pre-defined and not editable by the user. The
number of tones and the associated frequencies depend on the RF bandwidth in use
(this bandwidth is set on the amplifier unit, on which more information can be found in
Amplifier Description and Configuration, T390/EN AM):

− Four tones for a 4kHz bandwidth

− 15 tones for an 8kHz bandwidth

− 30 tones for a 16kHz bandwidth


A chart displays the line’s response to the various tones with regards to the signal level.
This maintenance mode can be applied either on the Local or Remote side, by selecting the
appropriate option.
IN SINGLE TONE MODE, THE FULL POWER OF THE AMPLIFIER IS
AVAILABLE (NO LIMITATION IS PROVIDED). SO BE VERY CAREFUL
WHEN USING THIS MODULE AND START WITH LOW LEVELS SUCH
AS –20DB.
Overall System Description T390/EN OS/B23

e-terragridcomT390 Page 45/64

6.6.1.5 Processing tab

FIGURE 44: MAINTENANCE: PROCESSING


This is used to send digital signals for line testing purposes.
Depending on the selected check box in the Selection panel, the signals are generated
either locally or remotely, or else the feature is disabled.
Two types of signal can be generated:

• Pseudo Noise: PNG 511 bits are sent to the line

• Fixed Symbol : the symbol consists of one 8-bit character and is indicated in
hexadecimal notation in the corresponding text box

• LAN to LAN: full gross bit rate is assigned to the LAN to LAN feature
The choice of maintenance mode is made by clicking the relevant Switch button.
6.6.1.6 Loopback tab

FIGURE 45: MAINTENANCE: LOOPBACK


T390/EN OS/B23 Overall System Description

Page 46/64 e-terragridcomT390

It is possible to apply a loopback on all digital and analog channels using this tab.
The loopback mode must be selected by right clicking on a channel and selecting the
required option:

FIGURE 46: MAINTENANCE: LOOPBACK SELECTION


6.6.1.7 Misc tab

FIGURE 47: SYSTEM MAINTENANCE TAB


This tab offers two basic functions: Reboot System and Shutdown System. Both options
allow a controlled shutdown of the PLC system, saving all parameters or pending events.
Always use one of these options rather than the hardware power switch.
Overall System Description T390/EN OS/B23

e-terragridcomT390 Page 47/64

6.6.2 TPI tab


The TPI tab gives the possibility to force input commands and output commands and to
reinitialize the TPI command counters.
A more complete description of each subtab is given in T390/EN TP.

FIGURE 48 TPI TAB


6.7 Tests and measurements
It is possible to make various tests and measurements on the PLC system. These tests and
measurements can only be performed if the T390 system is in maintenance (TEST) mode.
Driving the PLC through the HMI ensures this condition.
Note that the PC running the HMI must be connected directly to the system under test; the
operations involved cannot be performed remotely through the Power Line link.
This functionality is accessed through the main menu bar by selecting PLC|Measures. The
window shown in Figure 49 is displayed.
Various tests and measurements are available, as follows:

• Line measurements: SNR, AGC, TX PEP

• Digital measurements: BER, QAM (Constellation)

• Data recorder

• System diagnostics

• Alarms

• Spectrum analyzer

• TPI (if a TPI is present in the system)


T390/EN OS/B23 Overall System Description

Page 48/64 e-terragridcomT390

6.7.1 The Line tab

FIGURE 49: MAIN SYSTEM LINE MEASUREMENTS


Click Refresh to redraw the display. If Auto-Refresh is checked, the display is automatically
redrawn at regular intervals.
TX Power (analog)
The PEP value in dBm is displayed on a graphical bar and in a text box.
SNR Panel
The SNR value in dB is displayed on a graphical bar and in a text box.
The signal is assumed to be the Rx FSK signal (70Hz band), meaning that for all
configurations (4k, 8k, 16k), the measurement is always the same. The noise is assumed to
be the mirrored 70Hz beside the QAM channel. For superimposed band mode, the noise is
measured outside the band, assuming that an interband of 8kHz is left beside the channel.
The SNR measured within the PLC HMI is intended to be used only for information purpose
and fallback condition switching.
Noise and Rx Signal
This is an estimation of the noise and the Rx signal measured on the incoming signal, in dB.
AGC Operation
The AGC value in dB is displayed on a graphical bar and in a text box. The vertical bars
identify the thresholds (AGC high-level threshold and AGC low-level threshold) that have
been defined for the Amplifier Unit.
There are two AGCs: one digital, one anologue.
Temperature (Additional Panel)
The temperature of the system in degrees Celsius.
Overall System Description T390/EN OS/B23

e-terragridcomT390 Page 49/64

6.7.2 The BER tab

FIGURE 50: MAIN SYSTEM BER MEASUREMENTS


Windowed BER
The Windowed BER measurement is controlled from this panel: editing the value in the
corresponding text box configures the measurement duration (in seconds). Click Go to send
signals for the configured duration and calculate the Windowed BER.
The Windowed BER value is displayed on a graphical bar and in a text box.
BER G821
The G821 Status window shows the global status of G821:
OK: no errors/slippages/skipped bits or sync loss have occurred.
WARNING: No error has occurred, but there are slippages and/or skipped bits and/or sync
loss.
Otherwise, the current BER is displayed in this panel.
The right hand side of the tab contains all G821 compliant statistics.
Click Refresh to resend a signal with the configured settings and refresh the results.
If Auto-Refresh is checked, the display is refreshed at regular intervals.
T390/EN OS/B23 Overall System Description

Page 50/64 e-terragridcomT390

6.7.3 The Constellation tab (QAM)

FIGURE 51: QAM 16 CONSTELLATION DIAGRAM


The maximum number of printed points is chosen in the corresponding editable text box.
Click Clear to clear the display.
Click Refresh to start a set of measurements.
Click Save to save results.
Click Close to close the pane display.
Overall System Description T390/EN OS/B23

e-terragridcomT390 Page 51/64

6.7.4 The Data Recorder tab

FIGURE 52: MAIN SYSTEM DATA RECORDER


Up to three traces can be displayed on each graph. To hide a trace, deselect the
corresponding color on the left panel.
The trace width is 5000 points, with a maximum resolution of 1pt/s, giving a display limit of
83 minutes recording.
The trigger option can be used to schedule recording by event (see User Alarm configuration
tab), Date, or Normal. In normal mode, the trigger option is not used.
Unchecking Continuous causes the measurement to stop after filling the point buffer.
To save measurements click Save to file. To read them offline click Load from file.
Amplifier graphs
Signal to Noise graphs, showing the signal measurement (red) and the in-band (green) and
out-band (blue) noise measurement.

FIGURE 53: SIGNAL TO NOISE MEASUREMENTS


Analog AGC (red) measurement, when A/D converter saturated digital AGC (green) is
operated, and Rx power measurement (blue).
T390/EN OS/B23 Overall System Description

Page 52/64 e-terragridcomT390

FIGURE 54: AGC MEASUREMENTS


Temperature (red) measured on B01 amplifier card, Tx power (green) measured after Tx HF
filter on line, and analog Tx power (blue) measurement concerning analog services and/or
teleprotection signal.

FIGURE 55: TEMPERATURE MEASUREMENTS


PRC graphs
DAGC measurement error variation (red) and DAGC gain.

FIGURE 56: DAGC MEASUREMENTS


BER error curve (red), BER skip curve (green) and BER synchro curve (blue).

FIGURE 57: BER MEASUREMENTS


Overall System Description T390/EN OS/B23

e-terragridcomT390 Page 53/64

6.7.5 Alarm Status


An alarm status list is displayed. These alarms corespond with the status of the LEDs
present on each unit, as described in the relevant unit description document.

FIGURE 58: MAIN SYSTEM ALARM STATUS


6.7.6 System Diagnosis Status

FIGURE 59: MAIN SYSTEM DIAGNOSIS STATUS


The system diagnosis status pane displays status information for the selected unit.
T390/EN OS/B23 Overall System Description

Page 54/64 e-terragridcomT390

6.7.7 Spectrum Analyser


The HMI provides a spectrum analyser that can display a bandwidth of 25.6 kHz inside the
T390 Rx band.

FIGURE 60: SPECTRUM ANALYZER

The following options are available from the spectrum analyzer:


ON/OFF: Enable or disable the spectrum analyser.
Sweep Time: Window sweep time duration in seconds.
Measure Duration: Duration of a single point measure in seconds.
Center Frequency: Measurement window center frequency in kHz.
Frequency Span: Window width in kHz.
Auto: Automatically adapts the window to fit the measured signal.
6.7.8 TPI
The TPI tab () allows checking the state of following parameters:
Input commands
This subtab gives the current status of inputs.
Output commands
This subtab gives the current status of output relays.
Counters
This subtab gives the number of Tx and Rx commands since the last reinitialization
Analog
This subtab gives the current measured level of each tone of the teleprotection (including the
guard)
Overall System Description T390/EN OS/B23

e-terragridcomT390 Page 55/64

Digital
This subtab gives the the instantaneous BER, measured on 1E6 bits and the propagation
delay in ms
Alarms
This subtab gives the current status of all TPi alarms.
A more complte description of all subtabs is given in T390/EN TP.

FIGURE 61: MEASURE/TPI TAB


T390/EN OS/B23 Overall System Description

Page 56/64 e-terragridcomT390

7. PREFERRED CONFIGURATIONS
The following configurations are preferred and have been more accurately tested during the
test campaign.
7.1 3 speeches + 3 signalings in 8kHz Analog band

7.2 3 speeches over 4kHz, 8kHz, or 16kHz Digital with separate Tx and Rx bands

7.3 3 speeches over 16kHz Digital with superimposed Tx and Rx bands

7.4 1 speech and 1 signaling in 4kHz Analog + 1kHz Digital (Mixte mode 4kHz)

QAM
signaling Separate
Speech

1 kHz
1700
300 2500 4000

7.5 2 speeches + 2 signalings in 5 kHz Analog + 2 kHz Digital (Mixte mode 8kHz)
Overall System Description T390/EN OS/B23

e-terragridcomT390 Page 57/64

7.6 3 speeches + 3 signalings in 8 kHz Analog + 8 kHz Digital (Mixte mode 16kHz)

7.7 2 speeches + 2 signalings + 2 MTU in 8kHzAnalog

7.8 4 MTU in 8kHz Analog

7.9 4 MTU in 4kHz Analog

7.10 1 speech + 1 signaling +1 TG in 4kHz Analog

signaling
Speech TG

2400
0 300 4000
3720
T390/EN OS/B23 Overall System Description

Page 58/64 e-terragridcomT390

7.11 1 speech + 1 signaling + 2 TG in 4 kHz Analog

7.12 1 speech + 1 signaling + 1 TG + 1 MTU in 8kHz Analog

7.13 1 speech + 1 signaling in 8 kHz Analog + 8 Khz Digital (mode Mixte 16kHz)

7.14 1 speech + 1 signaling in 8 kHz Analog + 8 Khz Digital (mode Mixte 16kHz)
Overall System Description T390/EN OS/B23

e-terragridcomT390 Page 59/64

8. FIRMWARE CONFIGURATION
All parameters must be set correctly and must be consistent with the remote PLC.
Please refer to the relevant manuals for a description of the various parameters.
There are three options available for firmware configuration, as follows:

• Offline configuration
• Online services configuration
• Online patches
The preferred option is selected from the panel at the lower left of the configuration window.

FIGURE 62: CONFIGURATION MODE


8.1 Offline: Full
In this mode, the whole PLC configuration is accessible.
A PLC manual restart will be necessary after applying the new configuration.
This mode is useful at commissioning time or when the system requires major changes such
as frequency allocation and output power.
8.2 Online: Services (Maint.)
In this mode only the services can be configured, but there is no need to reboot the system.
Also, this mode allows the service configuration changes while the system is still
synchronized. The mode can be used off-line, but is especially suited to on-line
configuration, and is carried out using the following steps:
1. Switch the PLC to maintenance mode processing (either PNG , Fixed, or LAN to LAN
mode)
2. Apply the services configuration on both sides
3. Exit maintenance mode (on the same side that entered it)
4. The service configuration is immediately operational
8.3 Online: Patches
This mode allows only alarm configuration.
It can be applied at any time without rebooting the system.
T390/EN OS/B23 Overall System Description

Page 60/64 e-terragridcomT390

9. SHIPMENT AND STORAGE


This section describes the procedures for unpacking the containers used to transport T390
terminals. Repacking is largely a reversal of these steps.
When repacking is required, the re-use of original packing materials is recommended.
In order to protect the equipment from mechanical and environmental damage, the following
containers should be used:

• Wooden boxes for ship, aircraft and truck transportation which is likely take longer
than 60 days.

• Cardboard boxes for aircraft or truck transportation likely to take less than 30 days

9.1 Unpacking

9.1.1.1 Preliminary verification


The following information is printed on container sides:

• production mark

• destination

• net weight

• dimensions

• ↑↑ symbol identifying container proper position during transportation


A packing sheet, inserted in a plastic bag, lists the materials inside the container.
When receiving the containers, verify that no damage has occurred during transportation.
Should any damage be discovered, unpack the containers and contact the company or the
carrier representative.
Check that the container final destination matches that shown on the box.

9.1.1.2 Equipment unpacking


Follow these steps for unpacking containers and boxes:

• Confirm that container is facing the right way up (indicated by “↑↑ “)

• Cut the nylon laces

• Extract any nails if the container is a wooden box, or the metal staples if container is a
compensated wood or carton box

• Take out the carton pre-packing wound on the polyethylene tube


9.2 Storage conditions
If the equipment is not to be installed immediately, the packing should be stored as follows:

• Carton boxes must be placed in an environment with good air circulation.

• Wood or plywood boxes can be kept outdoors provided they are protected against rain
and sunlight.

• Long term storage temperature must be between -40 °C and +70 °C.

• The outdoor storage period must not exceed 12 months.

• Take out the carton pre-packing from the polyethylene tube by cutting one end. Do not
throw away the tube as it may later be needed for repacking.

• Cut the adhesive tape wound around the carton box.


Overall System Description T390/EN OS/B23

e-terragridcomT390 Page 61/64

• Remove the polyurethane foam bed from the box.

• Take out wound on the tube cutting an end.

• Do not throw away the tube as it may later be needed for re-packing.

• Check that the equipment was not damaged in transport, but if it was then contact the
company representative.
9.2.1.1 Equipment repacking
To repack equipment, proceed as follows:

• Insert the unit in its polyethylene tube and seal with adhesive tape

• Set the unit on the bed and insert the bed in the box

• Seal the box with adhesive tape

• Whenever it is necessary, see paragraph "General", put the pre-packing in wood or in


plywood crate

• Close the wood crate with the nails and the cardboard box with the metal staples

• Wind round the crate the nylon laces

• Take care with the front panel switcher: there is a specific cutout on the bed to protect
it during shipment
T390/EN OS/B23 Overall System Description

Page 62/64 e-terragridcomT390

9.3 Accessories provided


9.3.1 Kit basic standard
This is the content of the KIT-BASIC Standard. This kit is always delivered with a system (in
the PRCS package). It is wrapped up in a plastic bag, and has a label indicating its reference
stuck on it. It contains the basic elements needed to start a basic system of 2 units (Amplifier
+ processing).

KIT BASIC STANDARD


Code Qty Item
BAG 1 Polythene bag with zip seal
23mm x 32mm x 100μm
LAB 1 Sticker with "KIT 9000102" and Revision
V1 3 MOV 250Vrms / 6500A / 130J (HF Line common mode and differential
mode)
V2 1 MOV 75Vrms / 6500A / 33J (Power Supply)
TB1 2 Female Plug for Power Supply connection
(screw connection)
TB2 1 Female Plug for Alarms connection
(screw connection)
TB3 1 Female Plug for VSU board references connections.
PL1 1 Power Subconnect Plug for HF Line
CH1 1 Cable Housing for PL1
LEV1 1 Levers for WAGO Connectors
CAB1 1 Cable for LVDS 0,4m
CAB2 1 Cable for LVDS 1m
JMP1 15 Set of jumpers for RXF and Hybrid adjust (black or others color)
JMP2 10 Set of jumpers for TXF (Red)
JMP3 1 Jumper for TXF JP49 (unbalanced mode)
Overall System Description T390/EN OS/B23

e-terragridcomT390 Page 63/64

9.3.2 Kit basic special


This is the content of the KIT-BASIC Special. Special due to the LVDS cables that are with a
right angle on the connectors. This is in order to facilitate the integration within a cubicle with
door.
This kit is an option that will be delivered with a system (in the PRCS package) instead of the
standard kit.
It is wrapped up in a plastic bag, and has a label indicating its reference stuck on it. It
contains the basic elements needed to start a basic system of 2 units (Amplifier +
processing).

KIT BASIC SPECIAL


Code Qty Item
BAG 1 Polythene bag with zip seal
23mm x 32mm x 100μm
LAB 1 Sticker with "KIT 9000103" and Revision
V1 3 MOV 250Vrms / 6500A / 130J (HF Line common mode and differential
mode)
V2 1 MOV 75Vrms / 6500A / 33J (Power Supply)
TB1 2 Female Plug for Power Supply connection
(screw connection)
TB2 1 Female Plug for Alarms connection
(screw connection)
TB3 1 Female Plug for VSU board references connections.
PL1 1 Power Subconnect Plug for HF Line
CH1 1 Cable Housing for PL1
LEV1 1 Levers for WAGO Connectors
CAB1 1 Cable for LVDS 0,4m
CAB2 1 Cable for LVDS 1m
JMP1 15 Set of jumpers for RXF and Hybrid adjust (black or others color)
JMP2 10 Set of jumpers for TXF (Red)
JMP3 1 Jumper for TXF JP49 (unbalanced mode)

9.3.3 Kit AMPX


This is the content of the Kit AMPX provided for equipment equipped with 80W.

KIT AMPX
Code Qty Item
BAG 1 Flat mini grip transparent bag
TB1 1 Power supply connector female plug
JMP1 20 Jumper red insulated-PCC 6.33mm for TXF board
CAB1 1 Cable SUB-D 9 points (for Low Power signals 0.4m)
CAB2 1 Cable BNC-BNC (for High Power signals 0.5m)
LEV1 2 Operating Lever for female and male con
T390/EN OS/B23 Overall System Description

Page 64/64 e-terragridcomT390

9.3.4 Kit TPI


This is the content of the KIT-TPI. This kit is delivered with a TPI module. It is wrapped up in
a plastic bag, and has a label indicating its reference stuck on it. It contains the elements
needed to connect a TPI module on a system (the system must include at least an AMP
module and a processing module).

KIT TPI
Code Qty Item
BAG 1 Polythene bag with zip seal
23mm x 32mm x 100μm
LAB 1 Sticker with "KIT 9000501"
TB1 1 Female Plug for P7 connection
(screw connection)
TB2 4 Female Plug for P1 to P4 connection (screw connection)
TB3 2 Female Plug for P5 to P6 connection (screw connection)
LEV1 2 Levers for WAGO Connectors
CAB1 1 Cable for LVDS 0,4m

9.3.5 Kit Commissionning


This kit is delivered with a system or a link on demand in a dedicated box.
It is wrapped up in a plastic bag, and has a label indicating its reference stuck on it. It
contains the elements needed to perform the commissioning of the system.

KIT COMMISSIONNING
Code Qty Item
BAG 1 Polythene bag with zip seal
23mm x 32mm x 100μm
LAB 1 Sticker with "KIT 9000202"and Revision
CAB1 2 SMB plug to SMB plug coaxial cable
CAB2 1 CAT5e Crossover Patch Cable, 3 ft.
CD R6.x 1 CDROM (Customer release 6.x) with case and cover, including the HMI,
firmware and Documentation
Alstom Grid

T390/EN OS/B23 © - ALSTOM 2012.


ALSTOM, the ALSTOM logo and any
alternative version thereof are trademarks and
service marks of ALSTOM. The other names
mentioned, registered or not, are the property
of their respective companies. The technical
and other data contained in this document is
provided for information only. Neither
ALSTOM, its officers and employees accept
responsibility for or should be taken as
making any representation or warranty
(whether express or implied) as to the
accuracy or completeness of such data or the
achievement of any projected performance
criteria where these are indicated. ALSTOM
reserves the right to revise or change this
data at any time without further notice.

Alstom Grid Worldwide Contact Centre


www.grid.alstom.com/contactcentre/
Tel: +44 (0) 1785 250 070

www.alstom.com
e-terragridcomT390

Amplifier Description
and Configuration

Version 6.1

T390/EN AM/B23

GRID
Amplifier Description and Configuration T390/EN AM/B23

e-terragridcomT390 Page 1/46

CONTENTS

1. INTRODUCTION 7

2. SUMMARY DESCRIPTION 8

3. PHYSICAL DESCRIPTION 9
3.1 Amplifier power supply indicators and connectors 9
3.2 AMP Extension Unit (AMPX) indicators and connectors 10
3.3 Application and system LED indicators 11
3.3.1 Ethernet activity (orange) 11
3.3.2 Ethernet link (green) 11
3.3.3 System indicators 11
3.3.4 Line fault 12
3.3.5 User SNR alarm 12
3.3.6 Remote maintenance 12
3.3.7 Local maintenance 12
3.3.8 TX power alarm 12
3.3.9 1/4 12
3.3.10 1/2 13
3.3.11 Full 13
3.4 Internal boards of the amplifier unit 13
3.5 Board physical layout 14
3.6 Internal interconnections 14
3.7 Functional interconnections 16

4. CONFIGURATION AND SETTINGS 17


4.1 Configuration procedure 17
4.2 Hardware settings 18
4.2.1 HF access impedance settings 21
4.2.2 Settings for bandwidth allocation 22
4.2.3 Settings for AMP – AMPX connection 23
4.2.4 Settings for AMP JP50 hybrid adjust help 23
4.2.5 Filter settings 24
4.3 Software parameter settings 27
4.3.1 R.F. Stage configuration 27
4.3.2 Bandwidth Allocation 29
4.3.3 Misc and Alarm configuration 33
4.3.4 Advanced configuration 35
4.4 Hybrid Settings 39
T390/EN AM/B23 Amplifier Description and Configuration

Page 2/46 e-terragridcomT390

5. CONNECTORS DESCRIPTION 43
5.1 AMP connectors 43
5.2 Power supply P6 connector 43
5.3 Unit chain P2/P3 connectors 44
5.4 HF access P4 connector 44
5.4.1 HF line output 44
5.4.2 HF output P7 80W 44
5.4.3 HF input P5 80W 45
Amplifier Description and Configuration T390/EN AM/B23

e-terragridcomT390 Page 3/46

LIST OF FIGURES

FIGURE 1: AMP 40W FRONT VIEW 8


FIGURE 2: AMPX AMPLIFIER FRONT VIEW 8
FIGURE 3: THE T390 AMPLIFIER UNIT (AMP) 9
FIGURE 4: POWER SUPPLY INDICATORS AND CONNECTOR 9
FIGURE 5: AMP EXTENSION TO AMPX CONNECTIONS 10
FIGURE 6: AMPLIFIER FUNCTIONAL LED INDICATOR PANEL SCHEMATIC VIEW 11
FIGURE 7: AMPLIFIER UNIT BOARD PHYSICAL LAYOUT (TOP VIEW) 14
FIGURE 8: AMPLIFIER UNIT INTERNAL CONNECTIONS (TOP VIEW) 14
FIGURE 9: HF POWER 40W 16
FIGURE 10: RXF FILTER BOARD JUMPER POSITIONS 18
FIGURE 11: RXF FILTER BOARD DIAGRAM 19
FIGURE 12: TXF FILTER BOARD JUMPER POSITIONS 19
FIGURE 13: TXF FILTER BOARD DIAGRAM 20
FIGURE 14: IMPEDANCE SETTING JUMPERS 21
FIGURE 15: BAND ALLOCATION JUMPERS 22
FIGURE 16: AMP-AMPX CONNECTION JUMPERS 23
FIGURE 17: AMP-JP50 JUMPER 23
FIGURE 18: TEST BENCH 24
FIGURE 19: SHOW/HIDE HF BAND 27
FIGURE 20: AMPLIFIER R.F. STAGE CONFIGURATION 27
FIGURE 21: TP IN 2KHZ ANALOG ADJACENT 29
FIGURE 22: 2 KHZ DIGITAL ADJACENT OR SEPARATED 30
FIGURE 23: 4 KHZ ANALOG ADJACENT OR SEPARATED 30
FIGURE 24: 4 KHZ MIXED, MODE DIGITAL 1KHZ + ANALOG 2.5 KHZ SEPARATED 30
FIGURE 25: 5 KHZ ANALOG ADJACENT OR SEPARATED 30
FIGURE 26: 8 KHZ ANALOG OR SEPARATED 30
FIGURE 27: 8 KHZ DIGITAL SEPARATED OR ADJACENT 31
FIGURE 28: 8 KHZ MIXED, 4 KHZ DIGITAL + 4 KHZ ANALOG SEPARATED OR ADJACENT 31
FIGURE 29: 8 KHZ MIXED, 2 KHZ DIGITAL + 5 KHZ ANALOG SEPARATED OR ADJACENT 31
FIGURE 30: 12 KHZ MIXED, 8 KHZ DIGITAL+ 4 KHZ ANALOG SEPARATED OR ADJACENT 31
FIGURE 31: 16 KHZ DIGITAL SEPARATED 31
FIGURE 32: 16 KHZ ANALOG 8 KHZ + SRV 8 KHZ 32
FIGURE 33: 16 KHZ MIXED DIGITAL 4 KHZ, ANALOG 8 KHZ + SRV 4 KHZ 32
FIGURE 34: 4 KHZ DIGITAL SUPERIMPOSED 32
T390/EN AM/B23 Amplifier Description and Configuration

Page 4/46 e-terragridcomT390

FIGURE 35: 8 KHZ DIGITAL SUPERIMPOSED 32


FIGURE 36: 16 KHZ DIGITAL SUPERIMPOSED 32
FIGURE 37: OVERLAP WARNING 33
FIGURE 38: AMPLIFIER MISC AND ALARM CONFIGURATION 33
FIGURE 39: AMPLIFIER ADVANCED 35
FIGURE 40: INBAND SNR COMPUTATION 36
FIGURE 41: SIGNAL SPECTRA AND NOISE MEASUREMENT 37
FIGURE 42: LOCATION OF HYBRID BOARD 39
FIGURE 43: HYBRID BOARD 39
FIGURE 44: HYBRID BOARD FRONT END 40
FIGURE 45: POWER SUPPLY P6 PLUG 43
FIGURE 46: HF LINE ACCESS P4 PLUG 44
FIGURE 47: HF OUTPUT 80W ACCESS P7 PLUG 44
FIGURE 48: HF INPUT 80W ACCESS P5 PLUG 45
Amplifier Description and Configuration T390/EN AM/B23

e-terragridcomT390 Page 5/46

DOCUMENT CONTEXT AND VERSION HISTORY


This document is part of the T390 user manuals document set.
Document Context

Document name Description


T390/EN OS T390 Technical manual – Overall System Description
T390/EN AM T390 Technical manual – AMP Description and Configuration
T390/EN AX T390 Technical manual – AMPX Description and Configuration
T390/EN PU T390 Technical manual – PRCS Description and Configuration
T390/EN AP T390 Technical Schedule – Application Note
T390/EN TP T390 Technical manual – TPI Description and Configuration

Version History

VERSION DATE COMMENTS


A22 25/02/2011 Product release 5

A23 04/03/2011 Product release 6

B23 10/07/2012 Product release 6.1


T390/EN AM/B23 Amplifier Description and Configuration

Page 6/46 e-terragridcomT390

BLANK PAGE
Amplifier Description and Configuration T390/EN AM/B23

e-terragridcomT390 Page 7/46

1. INTRODUCTION
This document describes the amplifier parts of the modular PLC T390 system.
A PLC T390 link consists of two T390 systems (at least one processing unit and one
amplifier in each) configured in a Master/Slave relationship, with each system located on a
distribution or transmission substation, and they may be several hundred kilometres apart.
The T390 system offers comprehensive transmission capabilities over power lines using
Power Line Carrier (PLC) technologies. It supports voice and data transmission, and can
integrate a teleprotection system to react to problems in the electrical network.
The whole system is modular and is readily adaptable to customers’ needs in terms of
services (a mix of speech and data channels, data rate, etc.).
Additionally, a global software package is installed on each system. The package is available
in various levels, taking into account range and performance.
For further information on the T390 system as a whole, and on the units that comprise it,
please refer to the relevant user manuals:

• Overall System Description T390/EN OS

• Amplifier Description and Configuration T390/EN AM (this manual)

• 80W Extension Amplifier Description and Configuration T390/EN AX

• Processing Unit Description and Configuration T390/EN PU

• Global Specification T390/EN GP

• TPI Description and Configuration T390/EN TP


T390/EN AM/B23 Amplifier Description and Configuration

Page 8/46 e-terragridcomT390

2. SUMMARY DESCRIPTION
Every PLC T390 link must have at least a T390 Amplifier (AMP) Unit and a T390 Processing
(PRCS) Unit. The amplifier offers a choice of different transmitting powers up to 40W,
configured by the HMI (Human-Machine Interface, described in the Overall System
Description, T390/EN OS).
Note that the maximum output power can be increased to 80W with the addition of an AMPX
80W Extension Amplifier Unit.
Note that Service units are not available in versions 6.0 and 6.1.
Each unit of a T390 system is enclosed in a stackable rack unit, as shown below.
The signals to be sent are prepared (modulation, error detection and correction scheme,
etc.) by the PRCS processing unit, which commands the amplifier to amplify and send them
over the line.
The system does not produce perturbations or spurious noise out of its own allocated band.
Bandwidth allocation: The system can transmit frequencies in bands that are from 2; 2.5;
4 kHz up to 16kHz wide, and within the range 20-700 kHz. The allowed bandwidth
allocations are shown graphically in section 4.3.2.

FIGURE 1: AMP 40W FRONT VIEW


The output power can be increased to 80W with the addition of an AMPX 80W Extension
Amplifier Unit, as shown in Figure 2. For in-depth coverage of this unit, please refer to the
80W Extension Amplifier Description and Configuration, T390/EN AX.

FIGURE 2: AMPX AMPLIFIER FRONT VIEW


BEFORE CARRYING OUT ANY WORK ON THE EQUIPMENT, THE USER
SHOULD BE FAMILIAR WITH THE CONTENTS OF THE SAFETY
SECTION, THE TECHNICAL DATA SECTION AND THE RATINGS ON
THE EQUIPMENT RATING LABEL.
Amplifier Description and Configuration T390/EN AM/B23

e-terragridcomT390 Page 9/46

3. PHYSICAL DESCRIPTION

DO NOT TOUCH THE HIGH FREQUENCY 3 PIN TERMINATIONS OR


THE INNER CORE OF THE BNC CABLE, WHEN THE T390 IS
ENERGIZED.
This section identifies the indicators and connectors on the front panel of the amplifier unit.
The layout of the front panel is illustrated in Figure 3:

FIGURE 3: THE T390 AMPLIFIER UNIT (AMP)


3.1 Amplifier power supply indicators and connectors
Figure 4 shows the LED indicators and the connectors on the power supply panel:

Logic LED
Power LED

Power
supply
connector

D0577ENa

FIGURE 4: POWER SUPPLY INDICATORS AND CONNECTOR


T390/EN AM/B23 Amplifier Description and Configuration

Page 10/46 e-terragridcomT390

The LEDs above the power supply connector indicate the status of power supply connection
and detection. They function as follows:

LED Status Description


Power ON 40VDC Power Supply OK after Logic ON
Logic + 5 VDC OK

The power supply connector is described in section 5.2, Power supply P6 connector.
3.2 AMP Extension Unit (AMPX) indicators and connectors
Figure 5 shows the AMPX amplifier connections (for supporting 80W power output).

FIGURE 5: AMP EXTENSION TO AMPX CONNECTIONS


The LED indicators on the AMP extension unit panel function as follows:

LED Status Description


System OK Acknowledgement of AMPX
Enabled In service

The input and output connectors, P5 and P7, are described in section 5.4.3, HF input P5
80W and section 5.4.2, HF output P7 80W.
Amplifier Description and Configuration T390/EN AM/B23

e-terragridcomT390 Page 11/46

3.3 Application and system LED indicators

FIGURE 6: AMPLIFIER FUNCTIONAL LED INDICATOR PANEL SCHEMATIC VIEW


The following sections describe the functions of the LED indicators (for more information,
refer to T390/AP Data retrieving for assistance):
3.3.1 Ethernet activity (orange)
Indicates activity on the receive side of the Ethernet link (RJ45 plug).

LED Status Description


ON blinking Rx activity
OFF No Rx Activity (no connection)

3.3.2 Ethernet link (green)


The LED indicates whether an Ethernet device (typically a maintenance PC) is connected
through the Ethernet link (RJ45 plug).

LED Status Description


ON Connected to a device
OFF No carrier

3.3.3 System indicators


These LEDs display as follows to indicate the system status:

System OK (green) Internal Error (red) Description


OFF ON Internal unit error
ON FAST BLINKING Internal configuration error
OFF SLOW BLINKING Waiting for configuration
FAST BLINKING N/A Bit stream transfer with HMI in progress
(Events, QAM diagram, Recorder ...)

ON OFF System is running and waiting for line


synchronization
T390/EN AM/B23 Amplifier Description and Configuration

Page 12/46 e-terragridcomT390

3.3.4 Line fault


The LED is ON (steady) or flashing to indicate line faults.

Status Description
ON Line Fault (not connected to HV line, or signal out of range)
Flash Bad line (not enough to assure data transmission)
OFF Line OK

3.3.5 User SNR alarm


LED is ON (steady) or flashing to indicate SNR status.

Status Description
ON Alarm threshold reached
Flash Warning
OFF Within the user-defined limits

3.3.6 Remote maintenance


LED shows status of maintenance mode (remote connection).

Status Description
ON Maintenance in progress (connected with the remote PLC)
Flash Maintenance error
OFF Maintenance off

3.3.7 Local maintenance


LED shows status of maintenance mode (local connection).

Status Description
ON Local Maintenance in progress (the amplifier should be connected to a
dummy load, NOT the HF Line)
Flash Maintenance error
OFF Maintenance off

3.3.8 TX power alarm


Indicates that Tx power is beyond/within user-defined limits.

Status Description
ON Outside the user-defined limits
OFF Within the user-defined limits

3.3.9 1/4
Works with the other LEDs in this group to indicate Tx power status

Status Description
ON Power is a quarter of full power
Slow blinking Power is less than 1/4 of full power
OFF Power is more than 1/4 of full power
Amplifier Description and Configuration T390/EN AM/B23

e-terragridcomT390 Page 13/46

3.3.10 1/2
Works with the other LEDs in this group to indicate Tx power status

Status Description
ON Power is half full power
Flash Power is between 1/4 and 1/2 of full power
OFF Power is less than or equal to 1/4 or more than 1/2 of available power

3.3.11 Full
Works with the other LEDs in this group to indicate Tx power status

Status Description
ON Power is at maximum
Flash Power is between half and full power
OFF Power is less than or equal to half full power

3.4 Internal boards of the amplifier unit


This section lists the boards that are present in the amplifier unit following configuration.
It also describes the main functionality of the boards and their interconnections.
NOTE: The description that follows is provided for information only; internal
boards cannot be sold separately. They are an integral part of the
T390 system and must not be reworked or repaired by customers. In
the event of damage, the complete unit should be returned to the
manufacturer in its original packaging, or something equivalent.

Board Name Functions Comment


PPC Main processor board Always present
AFE Analog Front End, A/D and D/A Always present
conversion Daughter board on PPC
AMP 40W AB class Amplifier Board Always present. Mounted on the left side
heat sink of the unit
TXF Programmable 40W Transmit Always present. Filter setting is achieved
Filter, Impedance matching, with jumpers. Fine tuning is obtained by
Summing stage for 80W version adjusting the inductance value of the 2
coils (screw adjusting)
RXF Programmable Receive Filter Filter setting is achieved with jumpers.
Fine-tuning is obtained by adjusting the
In the 80W/Separated band
inductance value of the three coils
version, it is only present on
(screw adjusting).
AMP module
PSL Power supply unit – Low levels Always present
PSH Main power supply input board Always present
(protection and filtering)
I80W Interface 80W Part of the TXF board

Jumpers on the transmission filter board (TXF) and on the reception filter board (RXF) allow
frequency settings: the pass-band can be 2.5 kHz , 4 kHz, 8 kHz , or 16 kHz wide, and is in
the range 20kHz to 700kHz.
T390/EN AM/B23 Amplifier Description and Configuration

Page 14/46 e-terragridcomT390

3.5 Board physical layout


Figure 7 shows the basic physical layout. It identifies the position of the physical elements
used during configuration, i.e. the jumpers and connectors.

165mm

PPC

AFE

Alim
PSL TXF
PSH AMP

RXF

436mm
D0578XXa

FIGURE 7: AMPLIFIER UNIT BOARD PHYSICAL LAYOUT (TOP VIEW)


3.6 Internal interconnections
Figure 8 shows the internal interconnections:

REAR

FRONT

FIGURE 8: AMPLIFIER UNIT INTERNAL CONNECTIONS (TOP VIEW)


Amplifier Description and Configuration T390/EN AM/B23

e-terragridcomT390 Page 15/46

3.6.1.1 Cable list

Left side Cable mark Right side


PSH-J3 C1 PPC-J7 (power)
PSH-J2 C2 AMP-J3
TXF-J1 C3 AMP-J2
TXF-J6 C4 RXF-J1
RXF-J2 C5 AFE-J6
AMP-J1 C6 AFE-J1
AFE-J2 C7 I80W-J2
AFE-J4 C8 TXF-J8 (first connection)
RXF-J3 (second connection)
Top rear screw insert C9 RXF rear left M4 screw

Mark Qty Manufacturer name & reference


C1 1 CAB9000101-750
C2 1 CAB9000601-400
C3 3 CAB9003001-200
C4
C5
C6 2 CAB9003101-240
C7
C8 1 CAB9003201-340
C9 1 CAB9003301-120
T390/EN AM/B23 Amplifier Description and Configuration

Page 16/46 e-terragridcomT390

3.7 Functional interconnections


The internal and external functional interconnections depend on the configuration of the
equipment.

PPC

connexion to

connexion to
Digital Logic

Digital Logic
Interface

RXF

AFE
AFE
RXF

connexion to

connexion to

PSL
Analog

Analog
RXF

AFE
Mixed Analog Digital Logic Analog
connexion to connexion to connexion to connexion to
80W interf AMP AMP AMP

Digital Flags
Analog Input
& PSH cmd
AMP
Power On PSH
PSH

AMP

PSL

TX signal Out
To To To
RXOUT
PSH PPC RXF
Mixed
connexion to
AFE
TXIN

TXF
I80W PSL
80W Interface

48V Power
To 80W From 80W HF LINE
Supply
Aux AMP Aux AMP Connector
Connector

D0580ENa

FIGURE 9: HF POWER 40W


Amplifier Description and Configuration T390/EN AM/B23

e-terragridcomT390 Page 17/46

4. CONFIGURATION AND SETTINGS


The amplifier unit accepts a range of settings for handling various site-related parameters or
customer-driven configurations. Some of these parameters are set during the manufacturing
stage, some at integration time (for example, if they depend on other units in the target T390
system), and some are set during installation and service start-up time.
This section describes the setup of amplifier parameters, along with the operating mode, and
lists the mandatory or recommended steps with which configuration should be performed. It
also includes instructions for setting the various transmission parameters (frequency, power,
modulation).
DO NOT TOUCH THE HIGH FREQUENCY 3 PIN TERMINATIONS OR
THE INNER CORE OF THE BNC CABLE, WHEN THE T390 IS
ENERGIZED.
4.1 Configuration procedure
As the change of frequency must be performed by changing jumpers on the hardware AND
by firmware configuration, it is mandatory to follow the procedure described below to avoid
damaging the amplifier:
1. Clear Enable Amplifier in the Misc and Alarm configuration tab
2. Apply changes
3. Shut down the system and wait for all LEDs to stop flashing
4. Power off the unit and configure the hardware filters
5. Check the cables, close the unit
6. Restart the system and go back to the configuration tab
7. Set up the new filter frequencies in the RF Stage tab
8. Click Enable Amplifier
9. Apply changes, after which the system will shut down
10. Wait for all LEDs to stop flashing and then switch off the unit

TAKE CARE DURING THIS PROCEDURE TO AVOID DAMAGING THE


AMPLIFIER.
T390/EN AM/B23 Amplifier Description and Configuration

Page 18/46 e-terragridcomT390

4.2 Hardware settings


The frequency bands, as well as the output impedance of the amplifier can be modified by
setting the jumper positions; for in-depth information, please refer to the Application Note,
T390/EN AP. Modifications of these settings is normally performed at manufacturing time,
but they may need to be modified later.
Figure 10 shows the Rx filter board jumper positions:

FIGURE 10: RXF FILTER BOARD JUMPER POSITIONS


Amplifier Description and Configuration T390/EN AM/B23

e-terragridcomT390 Page 19/46

Figure 11 shows the Rx filter board layout:

FIGURE 11: RXF FILTER BOARD DIAGRAM


The three relays (RL1, RL2 & RL3) are activated automatically by the AFE board to adjust
the AGC level, when JP2 is closed.
For a short line, implying low attenuation, an additional attenuator of 12 dB can be included
by opening JP2 and closing JP6. The total attenuation can be up to 33 dB.
Figure 12 shows the Tx filter board jumper positions:

FIGURE 12: TXF FILTER BOARD JUMPER POSITIONS


SMC Connector
for adjustment
Page 20/46

Front Side access


Superimposed
SMC Connector to
Rx Filter Board Separated

RX1
T390/EN AM/B23

Superimposed
or adjacent modes
Asymmetrical Hybrid
AGND transformer with
impedance adjusting
(front side access)

Za

Tx Filter input Tx Filter Output


Impedance Matching Impedance Matching

From AMP Board HFGND

Line Impedance
40W Superimposed Matching :
Tx Programmable Filtering
Separated
Figure 13 shows the Tx filter board layout:

I/O =75 Ohms 80W


AGND 50 / 75 / 125 / 150 Ohm
Line Connector

Protections

Balanced
Force capacitive
impedance Unbalanced
Tx / Rx Coupling for
separated mode
HFGND
Divider/

RX2

FIGURE 13: TXF FILTER BOARD DIAGRAM


SMC Connector on front HFGND
current limiter

panel for 80 W connection. Main


40W Input when Main AMP Symmetrical Connection to
HFGND
40W Output when Aux AMP Hybrid transformer Mechanical Ground
Aux with balancing resistor

SMC Connector
To Front side
(Test point)

HFGND
HFGND

D0584ENa
e-terragridcomT390
Amplifier Description and Configuration
Amplifier Description and Configuration T390/EN AM/B23

e-terragridcomT390 Page 21/46

4.2.1 HF access impedance settings


The impedance on the HF output can be modified as follows using JP43, JP44, JP45, JP46,
JP47, JP48, and JP49 on the TXF board:

FIGURE 14: IMPEDANCE SETTING JUMPERS

Mode Impedance
Unbalanced 50 Ohms JP43:2-3, JP44:1-2, JP48:2-3, JP49:1-2
Unbalanced 75 Ohms JP43:2-3, JP45:1-2, JP48:2-3, JP49:1-2
Unbalanced 125 Ohms JP43:2-3, JP46:1-2, JP48:2-3, JP49:1-2
Unbalanced 150 Ohms JP43:2-3, JP47:1-2, JP48:2-3, JP49:1-2
Balanced 50 Ohms JP43:2-3, JP44:1-2, JP48:2-3
Balanced 75 Ohms JP43:2-3, JP45:1-2, JP48:2-3
Balanced 125 Ohms JP43:2-3, JP46:1-2, JP48:2-3
Balanced 150 Ohms JP43:2-3, JP47:1-2, JP48:2-3

NOTE: The unbalanced mode is characterized by a measure on the HF signal


A with the HF signal B at the ground. The balanced mode is
characterized by signals between HF signal A and HF signal B in the
same time. The ground reference is the body of the connector.
T390/EN AM/B23 Amplifier Description and Configuration

Page 22/46 e-terragridcomT390

4.2.2 Settings for bandwidth allocation


The distribution for Tx and Rx bands, superimposed or separated, is set using jumpers JP39,
JP40, JP41, and JP42 on the TXF filter board (these jumpers haven’t any effect and no
change on excel configuration sheet).

FIGURE 15: BAND ALLOCATION JUMPERS

Separated MODE Superimposed/adjacent MODE


JP39: 2-3 closed JP39: 1-2 closed
JP40: 2-3 closed JP40: 1-2 closed
JP41: open JP41: closed
JP42: closed JP42: open
Amplifier Description and Configuration T390/EN AM/B23

e-terragridcomT390 Page 23/46

4.2.3 Settings for AMP – AMPX connection


To include an AMPX amplifier unit (“double power” mode) Jumpers 38 and 51 (see) must be
set according to the table below.

AMP stand alone AMP - AMPX


JP38: 2-3 closed 1-2, 3-4 open JP38: 2-3 open 1-2, 3-4 closed
JP51: 1-2 closed 2-3 open JP51: 1-2 closed 2-3 open

The jumper positions for the AMP-AMPX connection are shown in Figure 16.

FIGURE 16: AMP-AMPX CONNECTION JUMPERS


4.2.4 Settings for AMP JP50 hybrid adjust help

FIGURE 17: AMP-JP50 JUMPER

Put ON jumper JP50 on TX board in case of OHL under inductance-coil influence or


superimposed configuration (it’s not a very easy jumper to settle cause need to remove plate
and Rx filter to access it).
T390/EN AM/B23 Amplifier Description and Configuration

Page 24/46 e-terragridcomT390

4.2.5 Filter settings


This part describes a method to tune the filters on the boards TXF and RXF.
The jumper configurations for the filters are described in the documents included in the CD
rom delivered with your T390 link

• PTC-Tx9x-E-DEV-TXF-001.xls

• PTC-Tx9x-E-DEV-RXF-001.xls
4.2.5.1 Tuning TX filters
4.2.5.1.1 Test bench
The test bench uses a selective voltmeter and a generator, the SMP31 / PSE31 from W&G
(ACTERNA) is a good example, but any Generator / Level Meter couple would be Ok if it
provides the following settings:

• Input impedance of the level meter: 75Ω

• Selectivity of the level meter: 24 Hz

• Output Impedance of the generator: 75 Ω


(A sweeping spectrum analyzer combined with a tracking generator can also be used)
Make the following test bench:

Generator Selective
Level Meter
75 Ohm 75 Ohm
Output Intput

When point A not connected: send 0 dBm with the


generator to read 0 dBm on the level meter

D0621ENa

FIGURE 18: TEST BENCH


Amplifier Description and Configuration T390/EN AM/B23

e-terragridcomT390 Page 25/46

4.2.5.1.2 Tuning the filter


On the test bench:

• Set the level meter to selective and tune the frequency to the central frequency of the
filter

• Set the level filter to the 24 Hz position


On the Filter:

• Set the jumpers following the Spreadsheet PTC-Tx9x-E-DEV-TXF-001.xls

• Free the L1 and L2 nuts and screw the black button of L1 and L2 at the maximum
First step:

• Connect the A point of the test bench to the input of the filter (connector J1 "From
AMP")

• Leave the output of the filter unconnected

• Unscrew the black button of inductance L1 to find a minimum on the level meter
NOTE: Don't care about the level of the minimum, just find it.
Second step:

• Connect the A point of the test bench to the output of the filter (HF Line)

• Leave the input of the filter unconnected

• Unscrew the black button of inductance L2 to find a minimum on the level meter
NOTE: Don't care about the level of the minimum, just find it.
Third step:
Come back to the usual measurement of the filter response. You should be very close to the
right tuning.
4.2.5.2 Tuning RX filters
4.2.5.2.1 Test bench
The test bench is the same than for TXF.
4.2.5.2.2 Tuning the filter
On the test bench:

• Set the level meter to selective and tune the frequency to the central frequency of the
filter

• Set the level filter to the 24 Hz position


On the Filter:

• Set the jumpers following the Spreadsheet PTC-Tx9x-E-DEV-RXF-001.xls

• Screw the tuning of L1, L2 and L3 at the maximum


First step:

• Connect the A point of the test bench to the input of the filter (connector J1 "From
Hybrid TXF")

• Leave the output of the filter unconnected

• Unscrew the tuning screw of inductance L1 to find a minimum on the level meter
NOTE: Don't care about the level of the minimum, just find it.
T390/EN AM/B23 Amplifier Description and Configuration

Page 26/46 e-terragridcomT390

Second step:

• Connect the A point of the test bench to the output of the filter (connector J2
"OUTPUT")

• Leave the input of the filter unconnected

• Unscrew the tuning screw of inductance L2 to find a minimum on the level meter
NOTE: Don't care about the level of the minimum, just find it.
Third Step:

• Leave the connections as they are

• Unscrew the tuning screw of inductance L3 to find a maximum on the level meter
NOTE: Don't care about the level of the maximum, just find it.
Fourth step:
Come back to the usual measurement of the filter response. You should be very close to the
right tuning.
Amplifier Description and Configuration T390/EN AM/B23

e-terragridcomT390 Page 27/46

4.3 Software parameter settings


Select File|Configuration to make any required adjustments to the hardware configuration,
and then click Next to display the Configuration Window.
Select the amplifier from the Units from PLC pane to display the screen shown in Figure 20.
The following tabs are now available:

• R.F. Stage

• Miscellaneous and Alarm

• Advanced
The panel at the foot of the screen displays either a graphical representation of the amplifier
rack front panel or the HF distribution bandwidths (controlled by Show HF/Hide HF).

FIGURE 19: SHOW/HIDE HF BAND


4.3.1 R.F. Stage configuration
Select the R.F. Stage tab to display the following pane:

FIGURE 20: AMPLIFIER R.F. STAGE CONFIGURATION


For successful signal transmission, the values set in this screen must be the same for both
sides of the T390 system (except Tx/Rx frequencies and the Master/Slave dialog).
T390/EN AM/B23 Amplifier Description and Configuration

Page 28/46 e-terragridcomT390

4.3.1.1 Output Power Panel


AMPX Available: Use the additional External Amplifier Unit (AMPX) to increase maximum
power to 80W.
PEP Range: This range must be set to one of the three following values:

− Pmax (default)

− Pmax/2

− Pmax/4
PEP Limiter: The signal power setting for the limiter can be expressed in two ways:

− As a percentage of maximum power (using the Power % text box).


This parameter can take any value between 10 and 100%, the
default value being 100%.

− As an attenuation in dB (using the RF adjust text box). This


parameter can take any value between –3dB and 0dB, the default
value being 0dB.
Estimated Output Power: This field is not editable. It displays the result of applying the
limitation factor to the PEP Range value.
4.3.1.2 R.F. Bandwidth
The T390 system can operate with bands of 2kHz, 2,5kHz, 4kHz, 5kHz, 8kHz, or 16kHz.
Note that the value selected here is applied as:

• the transmission bandwidth in separated mode

• the whole bandwidth in superimposed mode


4.3.1.3 QAM Bandwidth
The QAM bandwidth is chosen from one of the following values:

• 1Khz

• 2Khz

• 4Khz

• 8Khz

• 16Khz

• No QAM (disables digital transmission; system operates with analogue functions only)
4.3.1.4 Transmission Center Frequency
This value sets the transmission centre frequency, using two slide bars:

• The top slide bar adjusts the centre frequency in 1kHz steps, the default value being
184kHz. The actual value is displayed in the text box above the slide bar. The actual
frequency range depends on the effective signal transmission power and can be
derived as follows:
⇒ Minimum frequency (in kHz): 20 + 0.5*RF Bandwidth (in kHz)

⇒ Maximum frequency (in kHz): 700 – 0.5*RF Bandwidth (in kHz)


• The bottom slide bar provides finer adjustment of the frequency by up to 500Hz on
either side of the currently set centre frequency. The adjustment is in steps of about
0.39Hz (exactly 25600/65536 Hz). The actual adjustment value is displayed in the text
box above the slide bar.
Amplifier Description and Configuration T390/EN AM/B23

e-terragridcomT390 Page 29/46

4.3.1.5 Reception Center Frequency


This setting is only available when R.F. mode is set to “separate band”. It is used to set the
reception centre frequency and uses two slide bars:

• The top slide bar allows for setting of the centre frequency in 1kHz steps, the default
value being 184kHz. The actual value is displayed in the text box above the slide bar.
The actual frequency range depends on the effective signal transmission power and
can be derived as follows: …same q, different calculation here, though…
− Minimum frequency (in kHz): 20 + 0.5*Effective power (in W)

− Maximum frequency (in kHz): 700 – 0.5*Effective power (in W)

• The bottom slide bar provides finer adjustment of the frequency by up to 500Hz on
either side of the currently set centre frequency. The adjustment is in steps of about
0.39Hz (exactly 25600/65536 Hz). The actual adjustment value is displayed in the text
box above the slide bar.
THESE SETTINGS MUST BE CONSISTENT ACROSS THE SYSTEM.
THE RX FREQUENCY AT EITHER END MUST MATCH THE TX
FREQUENCY AT THE OTHER.
4.3.1.6 PLC Mode panel
The signal is transmitted using QAM modulation. The transmission and reception bands can
be either separated or superimposed. The settings under PLC mode are as follows:

• R.F. Mode: The operator selects a QAM modulation scheme with transmission and
reception bands either separated or superimposed. If “superimposed” is selected, the
Rx (reception) centre frequency settings are grayed out and are no longer editable
(since the Rx and Tx centre frequencies are the same in this mode).
• PLC dialog: For internal synchronization, a PLC link needs one system to be defined
as MASTER, the other as the SLAVE. The selection of MASTER and SLAVE is an
arbitrary choice; technically, the only difference is in the placement of the FSK
maintenance channel. The Tx maintenance channel is on the right side (upper
frequencies) of the Tx transmit channel for the system master.
4.3.2 Bandwidth Allocation
The system can transmit frequencies in bands that are from 2 kHz up to 16 kHz wide and
within the range of 20-700 kHz.
The available configurations in the release 6.x for bandwidth allocation are shown in the
following figures:
4.3.2.1 Separated or adjacent band mode 1

FIGURE 21: TP IN 2KHZ ANALOG ADJACENT

1
In digital modulation adjacent mode (no interband) is allowed with reduced performance due to
noise reinjection within the QAM band relative to the RX filter shape.
T390/EN AM/B23 Amplifier Description and Configuration

Page 30/46 e-terragridcomT390

FIGURE 22: 2 KHZ DIGITAL ADJACENT OR SEPARATED

FIGURE 24: 2.5 KHZ ANALOG

FIGURE 25: 4 KHZ DIGITAL ADJACENT OR SEPARATED

FIGURE 23: 4 KHZ ANALOG ADJACENT OR SEPARATED

FIGURE 24: 4 KHZ MIXED, MODE DIGITAL 1KHZ + ANALOG 2.5 KHZ SEPARATED

FIGURE 25: 5 KHZ ANALOG ADJACENT OR SEPARATED

FIGURE 26: 8 KHZ ANALOG OR SEPARATED


Amplifier Description and Configuration T390/EN AM/B23

e-terragridcomT390 Page 31/46

FIGURE 27: 8 KHZ DIGITAL SEPARATED OR ADJACENT

FIGURE 28: 8 KHZ MIXED, 4 KHZ DIGITAL + 4 KHZ ANALOG SEPARATED OR ADJACENT

FIGURE 29: 8 KHZ MIXED, 2 KHZ DIGITAL + 5 KHZ ANALOG SEPARATED OR ADJACENT

FIGURE 30: 12 KHZ MIXED, 8 KHZ DIGITAL+ 4 KHZ ANALOG SEPARATED OR ADJACENT

FIGURE 34: 16 KHZ MIXED, ANALOG 8 KHZ + DIGITAL 8 KHZ

FIGURE 31: 16 KHZ DIGITAL SEPARATED


The only way to add a Channel 2 is to add a SRV (not available in versions 6.0 and 6.1) :
T390/EN AM/B23 Amplifier Description and Configuration

Page 32/46 e-terragridcomT390

FIGURE 32: 16 KHZ ANALOG 8 KHZ + SRV 8 KHZ

FIGURE 33: 16 KHZ MIXED DIGITAL 4 KHZ, ANALOG 8 KHZ + SRV 4 KHZ

NOTE: On the master PLC, the FSK maintenance channel on the transmit
side is always placed to the right of the allocated band, on the slave
PLC it is placed on the left hand side.
4.3.2.2 Superimposed band mode

FIGURE 34: 4 KHZ DIGITAL SUPERIMPOSED

In superimposed mode, the Tx/Rx channels are between two FSK maintenance channels.

FIGURE 35: 8 KHZ DIGITAL SUPERIMPOSED

FIGURE 36: 16 KHZ DIGITAL SUPERIMPOSED


Amplifier Description and Configuration T390/EN AM/B23

e-terragridcomT390 Page 33/46

4.3.2.3 Show HF
In the Configuration Window, click SHOW HF to display a graphical view of the currently
allocated HF bandwidth. The display updates immediately for changes in the layout.
Additionally, any unintentional overlaps (i.e. for allocations other than in superimposed
mode) are highlighted in red as shown in Figure 37:

FIGURE 37: OVERLAP WARNING


4.3.3 Misc and Alarm configuration
Select the Misc and Alarm tab to display the following pane:

FIGURE 38: AMPLIFIER MISC AND ALARM CONFIGURATION


The system monitors several parameters and raises an alarm to alert the operator if they
move out of bounds.
Depending on the Processing Unit configuration, some of these alarms are mapped to three
types of alarm:
Alarm1 and Alarm2: These correspond to two relays on an external connection, allowing
the command of external devices such as sound alarms.
Lock condition: If an alarm is mapped to this condition, raising that alarm
automatically halts the system.
All alarms raised are stored for later analysis.
T390/EN AM/B23 Amplifier Description and Configuration

Page 34/46 e-terragridcomT390

4.3.3.1 AGC (Automatic Gain Control) Alarm panel


Certain parameters relating to Automated Gain Control are monitored by the system. Their
limits can be configured by the operator:

• AGC level: this level should stay within two limits (low and high). A high-level
threshold is set so that an alarm is raised if the AGC level rises above it. Similarly, a
low-level threshold is set so that an alarm is raised if the AGC level falls below it. The
high and low thresholds are adjustable by the operator, with the following constraints:

− AGC high-level threshold is set between -20dB and 48dB in 1dB steps, the
default value being 32dB.

− AGC low-level threshold is set between -21dB and 47dB in 1dB steps, the
default value being -16dB.
These two values must be consistent, i.e. the high-level threshold must be greater than the
low-level threshold.

• Mask Delay is used to mask the alarm for a given time. The alarms on high-level and
low-level threshold are not issued until after the delay expires. The Mask Delay is set
between 1s and 10s in 1s steps, the default value being 5s.
Adjustment of these parameters is performed using the corresponding slide bars, the actual
value being displayed in the adjacent text boxes.
4.3.3.2 Signal to Noise Ratio (SNR) Alarm panel
A minimum SNR is necessary to maintain proper operation of the system. An SNR level
threshold is defined and an alarm is raised if the SNR falls below this level.
The SNR level threshold can be defined in this panel using the relevant slide bar. Its value
must be between 6dB and 90dB and can be adjusted in 1dB steps, the default value being
6dB. The actual value is displayed in the adjacent text box.
4.3.3.3 Gain Alarm panel
The gain alarm enable is ticked on automatically when “AMPX available”, under “RF stage”
configuration, is on.
It’s a limitation of TX power to avoid transmission saturation for 80w configuration.
4.3.3.4 Enable Amplifier panel
The Enable Amplifier checkbox is used for Amplifier commissioning.
The procedure is as follows:
1. Uncheck Enable Amplifier and apply changes
2. Shut down the system and configure the hardware filters
3. Restart the system and go back to the configuration tab
4. Set up filter frequencies in the RF Stage tab
5. Click Enable Amplifier
6. Apply changes
Amplifier Description and Configuration T390/EN AM/B23

e-terragridcomT390 Page 35/46

4.3.4 Advanced configuration

FIGURE 39: AMPLIFIER ADVANCED


4.3.4.1 FSK level
This parameter is the level of the FSK supervision channel (120 Hz width) relative to the
PEP output level of the amplifier. It is fixed (for release 5.x).
For example, if the output power selected is 40W with an 80% limitation, this produces 32W,
which is +45 dBm. An FSK level of -22dB means the FSK signal will be at a level of 45-22 =
+23 dBm.
The default for this parameter is -22 dB (i.e. 22 dB below the PEP output power), which is
suitable for almost every application.
Click Restore Default to restore default values on the screen, but note that these values
must still be applied. To apply the configuration click Apply.
4.3.4.2 Ratios
This panel displays the power sharing setted for the digital band and analogue 1 & 2 bands.
This analog is equivalent to a single tone sent at a level of PEP-x, where x is the level
displayed in this configuration window.
4.3.4.3 QAM power
The QAM power display shows the effective mean power used by the QAM on line.
An extra decrease factor is included to calculate the mean power with respect to the PEP
power defined for the PLC link.
4.3.4.4 SNR computation for digital and analogue band
The SNR is computed as the ratio between power measured in the FSK band in reception
and the power measured in an unoccupied band.
The SNR is computed by default by a narrow filtering at the edges of the QAM band (70Hz):
This is the Inband SNR.
T390/EN AM/B23 Amplifier Description and Configuration

Page 36/46 e-terragridcomT390

FSK
Noise
Measurement

QAM BW
TPx BAND

Fc

USER BAND
D0404ENa

FIGURE 40: INBAND SNR COMPUTATION


Note that there are three major limitations with this measurement:
1. In the case of a narrow QAM band (4 or 8kHz), the narrow filtering is computed in a
band too close to the QAM. The noise offset is quite high and the SNR measurement is
not sufficiently sensitive.
2. Measurement in a 70 kHz band is not as representative as a wide band of 1740 Hz for a
reliable noise measurement. An impulsive noise peak at this frequency could disturb the
measurement of the 70Hz filter.
3. In the case of superimposed mode, the local FSK is set on the noise measurement
band. An alternative band must be allocated.
This measurement is recommended for:

• Separated Mode (8kHz,16khz)

• Adjacent Mode with TPx


This measurement is not recommended for:

• Separated mode (4kHz)

• Superimposed Mode

• Adjacent Mode without TPX


Amplifier Description and Configuration T390/EN AM/B23

e-terragridcomT390 Page 37/46

Lower band Edge Upper band Edge

narrow band filter


Wide band
Filter

TPx BAND
QAM BW
Fc

USER BAND
D0323ENa

FIGURE 41: SIGNAL SPECTRA AND NOISE MEASUREMENT


In order to deal with the limitations stated above, the operator is given the following options
for specifying the noise measurement band:

• Inband (by default)

• Outband
In the second case, the noise will be measured in a band allocated to the equipment (the
interband, for example).
The second option is:

• A narrow band filter of 70Hz, easy to allocate but not so representative of the real
noise level

• A wide band filter of 1740Hz, not so easy to allocate but more representative of the
real noise in the user band
The operator must also choose whether to allocate the band on the same side as the FSK or
on the opposite side.
NOTE THAT A WRONG CHOICE COULD JEOPARDISE THE START OF
THE SYSTEM. NOISE MEASUREMENT IS CRITICAL FOR CORRECT
EQUIPMENT OPERATION.

In summary,

• For a Master system, in reception, the FSK is on lower side of the QAM by default:

− Choosing the opposite side from the FSK selects the upper frequencies.

− Choosing the same side as the FSK selects the lower frequencies

• For a Slave system, in reception, FSK is on the upper side of the QAM by default:

− Choosing the opposite side from the FSK selects the lower frequencies.

− Choosing the same side as the FSK selects the upper frequencies
The last option is the band allocation, for which two criteria apply:

• The maximum distance from the QAM centre is 12.8 kHz to measure the noise

• The allocation frequency is the distance from the band edge to the noise band centre
frequency
T390/EN AM/B23 Amplifier Description and Configuration

Page 38/46 e-terragridcomT390

The options are:

• Near: The noise is measured in the band closer to the user band (e.g. 850Hz for a
wide noise band)

• Middle: The noise is measured in the middle of the band available between the edge
and the maximum of 12.8khz

• Far: The band is measured at the maximum distance of the QAM centre, 12.8 kHz

• Custom: The user can choose the centre frequency of the noise band as the distance
from the band edge.

− For 1740Hz the distance cannot be less than 850Hz

− For 70Hz the distance cannot be less than 35Hz in order not to filter into the QAM
band
For example, for a band of 4 kHz centred on 200kHz:
The wide filter centre frequency can be between 850Hz and 9.5kHz, corresponding to
197.150kHz and 188.5kHz, respectively.
For superimposed configuration the option is only “Opposite side of RX FSK”.
Amplifier Description and Configuration T390/EN AM/B23

e-terragridcomT390 Page 39/46

4.4 Hybrid Settings


Hybrid tuning is performed after the software configuration because of the need to generate
an internal signal. This section describes the location of jumpers, the jumper configuration,
and specifies the steps for carrying out hybrid tuning.
Step 1: Open the front cover on the AMP unit, as in Figure 42, to reveal the hybrid board:

FIGURE 42: LOCATION OF HYBRID BOARD


Figure 43 identifies the connectors and jumper locations on the hybrid board:

FIGURE 43: HYBRID BOARD


Step 2: From the Multitones menu of the Maintenance window, activate the Single Tone
Generator. The internal Tone generator minimizes the transmission signal in the
reception stream.
Step 3: Activate a Tone:

− at frequency 0 (band centre)

− at amplitude -10
Step 4: Plug the selective voltmeter into the J4 connector (test point).
T390/EN AM/B23 Amplifier Description and Configuration

Page 40/46 e-terragridcomT390

Step 5: Carry out the adjustment. The scope is to minimize the level in reception by
selecting the capacitors/resistors J7 and the Potentiometer P1.
a) First, try to minimize the level by selecting the capacitors/resistors J7.
b) Once the minimum is reached, tune the Potentiometer P1 to seek a new
minimum.
c) Repeat a
d) And b until the absolute minimum is achieved on the selective voltmeter.

FIGURE 44: HYBRID BOARD FRONT END


Amplifier Description and Configuration T390/EN AM/B23

e-terragridcomT390 Page 41/46

Capacitor tuning on hybrid board


Table 1 gives the J7 position depending on the capacitor value.

J7 Position Position Capacitor value (pF)


1 50

2 100

3 150

4 220

5 270

6 320

7 370

8 440

9 490

10 540

11 590

12 660

13 710

14 760

15 810

TABLE 1: CAPACITOR ADJUSTMENT


Resistor tuning
The resistor tuning depends on the hardware version of TXF card given on the back side of
the amplifier unit.
Table 2 gives the J7 position for T390-MOD9002101 – hardware version G (available with
version 6.1) depending on the impedance range.
Table 3 gives the J7 position for T390-MOD9002101 – hardware version H (not yet available
with version 6.1) depending on the impedance range.
T390/EN AM/B23 Amplifier Description and Configuration

Page 42/46 e-terragridcomT390

J7 Position Position Impedance range


1 33Ω - 46Ω

2 43Ω - 56Ω

3 48Ω - 61Ω

4 58Ω - 71Ω

5 64Ω - 78Ω

6 74Ω - 88Ω

7 79Ω - 92Ω

8 89Ω - 102Ω

TABLE 2: RESISTOR ADJUSTEMENT FOR HARDWARE VERSION G

J7 Position Position Impedance range


1 22Ω - 88Ω

2 53Ω - 120Ω

3 89Ω - 155Ω

4 120Ω - 186Ω

5 155Ω - 222Ω

6 186Ω - 253Ω

7 222Ω - 288Ω

8 253Ω - 320Ω

TABLE 3: RESISTOR ADJUSTMENT FOR HARDWARE VERSION H

NOTE: With these resistor values, expect an additional variation scale to 0 at


200 ohms with the potentiometer P1 connected in series.
Amplifier Description and Configuration T390/EN AM/B23

e-terragridcomT390 Page 43/46

5. CONNECTORS DESCRIPTION
DO NOT TOUCH THE HIGH FREQUENCY 3-PIN TERMINATIONS OR
THE INNER CORE OF THE BNC CABLE WHEN THE T390 IS
ENERGIZED.

5.1 AMP connectors

P1 Ethernet access
P2 Unit chain out
P3 Unit chain in
P4 HF line output
P5 Input AMPX
P6 Power supply
P7 Output AMPX

5.2 Power supply P6 connector


The power supply connector is not specific to the amplifier. An identical connector is used on
every unit in a T390 system.

Logic LED
Power LED

Power
supply
connector

D0577ENa

FIGURE 45: POWER SUPPLY P6 PLUG

Pin out Description


+ BAT 48 VDC positive
- BAT 48 VDC negative
NC Not Connected
T390/EN AM/B23 Amplifier Description and Configuration

Page 44/46 e-terragridcomT390

5.3 Unit chain P2/P3 connectors


Unit Chain Connectors are not specific to the amplifier; they are identical for every unit in a
T390 system. They are described in the Overall System Description, T390/EN OS.
5.4 HF access P4 connector
5.4.1 HF line output

HF access uses a single connector, the same for the 75Ω unbalanced access and all the
other types of connections (balanced for all impedance values and unbalanced for 50Ω,
125Ω, and 150Ω).
The connector type is "Power Sub-connect" with three poles, from PHOENIX CONTACT.
The allocation of poles, front view, is:

3 2 1

Note that pin 2 is left unconnected and provides isolation.

Pin Signal Pin Signal


1 HF signal (A) 2 Not connected
3 HF signal (B) Body Mechanical Ground
This point is connected to
Mechanical ground when in
unbalanced mode

FIGURE 46: HF LINE ACCESS P4 PLUG

5.4.2 HF output P7 80W


The socket connector is a WAGO connector, female, three poles, 12A, 7.5mm pitch. It must
be connected using the corresponding male WAGO plug supplied with the equipment:

FRONT VIEW

D0588ENa

FIGURE 47: HF OUTPUT 80W ACCESS P7 PLUG


Amplifier Description and Configuration T390/EN AM/B23

e-terragridcomT390 Page 45/46

Pin Signal Type SUB-D9 to solder


1 TXa (AUX AMP input signal) Number of points 9 (5 and 4)
2 AUX Amplifier DS2431 R/W Gender Male
3 PSH ENA GND Maximum current 5A
4 FLAG TEMP_OK Maximum voltage 300 Vrms
5 FLAG ALIM_OK Dielectric strength 1000 Vrms
6 TXb (AUX AMP input signal) Material of contact Gold on Nickel
7 PSH ENA Inflammability standard UL94V0
8 +15 V from AMP Temperature range -55°C to +125°C
9 FLAG POWER_OK Case Metallic
Body GND MECHANIC FCI’s reference DE09P064TX

5.4.3 HF input P5 80W

HF signal

Body

D0589ENa

FIGURE 48: HF INPUT 80W ACCESS P5 PLUG

Location Signal Type RADIALL142085161


1 HF signal Designation BNC
Impedance 75 Ω
Voltage 200 Veff max
Frequency of use 0 to 1,5 GHz
Dielectric strength 1500 Veff mini.
Insulation resistance 5000 MΩ mini.
Gender Male
Temperature range -35°C to +70°C
Material of conductor Brass
Body GND MECHANIC Material of insulator Polypropylene
T390/EN AM/B23 Amplifier Description and Configuration

Page 46/46 e-terragridcomT390

BLANK PAGE
Alstom Grid

T390/EN AM/B23 © - ALSTOM 2012.


ALSTOM, the ALSTOM logo and any
alternative version thereof are trademarks and
service marks of ALSTOM. The other names
mentioned, registered or not, are the property
of their respective companies. The technical
and other data contained in this document is
provided for information only. Neither
ALSTOM, its officers and employees accept
responsibility for or should be taken as
making any representation or warranty
(whether express or implied) as to the
accuracy or completeness of such data or the
achievement of any projected performance
criteria where these are indicated. ALSTOM
reserves the right to revise or change this
data at any time without further notice.

Alstom Grid Worldwide Contact Centre


www.grid.alstom.com/contactcentre/
Tel: +44 (0) 1785 250 070

www.alstom.com
e-terragridcomT390

Extended Amplifier Description


and Configuration

Version 6.1

T390/EN AX/B23

GRID
80W Amplifier Description and Configuration T390/EN AX/B23

e-terragridcomT390 Page 1/18

CONTENTS

1. INTRODUCTION 5

2. SUMMARY DESCRIPTION 6

3. PHYSICAL DESCRIPTION 7
3.1 Power supply indicators 8
3.2 System Led Indicators 8

4. INTERNAL BOARDS DESCRIPTION 9


4.1 Board physical layout 9
4.2 Internal interconnections 10
4.3 Functional interconnections 11

5. CONFIGURATION AND SETTINGS 12


5.1 Configuration procedure 12
5.2 Hardware Settings 12
5.2.1 Jumper configuration for TX boards for AMP and AMPX units 13
5.2.2 HF access impedance settings 13
5.2.3 Settings for bandwidth allocation 13
5.2.4 Filters settings 13
5.2.5 R.F. stage configuration with the HMI 14

6. CONNECTORS DESCRIPTION 15
6.1 AMPX Connectors 15
6.2 HF input P1 Connector 15
6.3 Power supply P3 connector 16
6.4 HF output P2 connector 16

7. AMPX ACCESSORIES 17
7.1 Kit description 17
7.2 CAB9001201-400 description 17
7.3 CAB9001301-500 description 18
T390/EN AX/B23 80W Amplifier Description and Configuration

Page 2/18 e-terragridcomT390

LIST OF FIGURES

FIGURE 1: AMP 40W UNIT 6


FIGURE 2: AMPX 80W EXTENSION AMPLIFIER UNIT 6
FIGURE 3: THE AMPX UNIT 7
FIGURE 4: AMP-AMPX INTERCONNECTION 7
FIGURE 5: POWER SUPPLY 8
FIGURE 6: AMPX SYSTEM LEDS 8
FIGURE 7: 80W AMPX - BOARD PHYSICAL LAYOUT 9
FIGURE 8: AMPX UNIT – INTERNAL CONNECTIONS (TOP VIEW) 10
FIGURE 9: AMPX INTERCONNECTIONS 11
FIGURE 10: AMPX CARD 12
FIGURE 11: AMP-AMPX CONNECTION JUMPERS 13
FIGURE 12: AMP R.F. STAGE CONFIGURATION 14
FIGURE 13: AMPX OUTPUT POWER 14
FIGURE 14: HF INPUT 80W P1 PLUG 15
FIGURE 15: POWER SUPPLY CONNECTOR 16
FIGURE 16: HF OUTPUT 80W P2 PLUG 16
FIGURE 17: CAB9001201-400 17
FIGURE 18: CAB9001301-500 18
80W Amplifier Description and Configuration T390/EN AX/B23

e-terragridcomT390 Page 3/18

DOCUMENT CONTEXT AND VERSION HISTORY


This document is part of the T390 user manuals document set.
Document Context

Document name Description


T390/EN OS T390 Technical manual – Overall system Description
T390/EN AM T390 Technical manual – AMP Description and Configuration
T390/EN AX T390 Technical manual – AMPX Description and Configuration
T390/EN PU T390 Technical manual – PRCS Description and Configuration
T390/EN AP T390 Technical Schedule
T390/EN TP T390 Technical manual – TPI Description and Configuration

Version history

Version Date Comment


A22 25/02/2011 Product release 5
A23 21/03/2011 Product release 6
B23 10/07/2012 Product release 6.1
T390/EN AX/B23 80W Amplifier Description and Configuration

Page 4/18 e-terragridcomT390

BLANK PAGE
80W Amplifier Description and Configuration T390/EN AX/B23

e-terragridcomT390 Page 5/18

1. INTRODUCTION
This document describes the AMPX amplifier unit of the modular PLC T390 system.
A PLC T390 link consists of two T390 systems (at least one processing unit and one
amplifier in each) configured in a Master/Slave relationship, with each system located on a
distribution or transmission substation, and they may be several hundred kilometres apart.
The T390 system offers comprehensive transmission capabilities over power lines using
Power Line Carrier (PLC) technologies. It supports voice and data transmission, and can
integrate a teleprotection system to react to problems in the electrical network.
The whole system is modular and is readily adaptable to customers’ needs in terms of
services (a mix of speech and data channels, data rate, etc.). The maximum power output of
a T390 system using only the standard AMP unit is 40W. This can be increased to 80W with
the addition to the system of an AMPX unit.
Additionally, a global software package is installed on each system. The package is available
in various levels, taking into account range and performance.
For further information on the T390 system as a whole, and on the units that comprise it,
please refer to the relevant user manuals:

• Overall System Description T390/EN OS

• Amplifier Description and Configuration T390/EN AM

• AMPX 80W Amplifier Description and Configuration T390/EN AX (this manual)

• Processing Unit Description and Configuration T390/EN PU

• Global Specification T390/EN GP

• TPI Description and Configuration T390/EN TP


T390/EN AX/B23 80W Amplifier Description and Configuration

Page 6/18 e-terragridcomT390

2. SUMMARY DESCRIPTION
Every T390 installation must have at least a T390 Amplifier Unit (AMP) and a T390
Processing Unit (PRCS). The amplifier offers a choice of different transmitting powers up to
40W, configured by the HMI (Human-Machine Interface, described in the Overall System
Description). The output power can be increased to 80W with the addition of a T390 AMPX
80W Extension Amplifier Unit.
Each component of a T390 system is enclosed in a stackable rack unit, as shown in the
figures below.
The signals to be sent are prepared (modulation, error detection and correction scheme,
etc.) by the PRCS processing unit, which commands the amplifier to amplify and send them
over the line.
The system does not produce perturbations or spurious noise out of its own allocated band.
Bandwidth allocation: The system can transmit frequencies in bands that are from 4 kHz
up to 16kHz wide, and within the range 20-700 kHz. The allowed bandwidth allocations are
detailed in the AMP documentation, T390/EN AM.

FIGURE 1: AMP 40W UNIT


The output power can be increased to 80W with the addition of a T390 AMPX 80W Amplifier
Unit, as shown in Figure 2.

FIGURE 2: AMPX 80W EXTENSION AMPLIFIER UNIT

BEFORE CARRYING OUT ANY WORK ON THE EQUIPMENT, THE USER


SHOULD BE FAMILIAR WITH THE CONTENTS OF THE SAFETY
SECTION, THE TECHNICAL DATA SECTION AND THE RATINGS ON
THE EQUIPMENT RATING LABEL.
80W Amplifier Description and Configuration T390/EN AX/B23

e-terragridcomT390 Page 7/18

3. PHYSICAL DESCRIPTION
BEFORE CARRYING OUT ANY WORK ON THE EQUIPMENT, THE USER
SHOULD BE FAMILIAR WITH THE CONTENTS OF THE SAFETY
SECTION, THE TECHNICAL DATA SECTION AND THE RATINGS ON
THE EQUIPMENT RATING LABEL.
DO NOT TOUCH THE HIGH FREQUENCY 3 PIN TERMINATIONS OR
THE INNER CORE OF THE BNC CABLE, WHEN THE T390 IS
ENERGIZED.

FIGURE 3: THE AMPX UNIT

AMP-AMPX connection:

FIGURE 4: AMP-AMPX INTERCONNECTION


T390/EN AX/B23 80W Amplifier Description and Configuration

Page 8/18 e-terragridcomT390

3.1 Power supply indicators

Logic LED
Power LED

Power
supply
connector

D0577ENa

FIGURE 5: POWER SUPPLY


These LEDs indicate the status of the power supply connection and detection.

LED Status Description


Power ON 40 VDC power Supply OK after “Logic” ON
Logic + 5 VDC OK

3.2 System Led Indicators

FIGURE 6: AMPX SYSTEM LEDS


These LEDs indicate the system status.

LED Status Description


System Ok AMP acknowledgement
Enabled In service
80W Amplifier Description and Configuration T390/EN AX/B23

e-terragridcomT390 Page 9/18

4. INTERNAL BOARDS DESCRIPTION


This section lists the boards that are present in the AMPX unit, following configuration.
The main functionality of the board and its interconnections are also provided.
NOTE: This description is for information purpose only. Internal boards
cannot be sold separately, they are an integral part of a T390 system
and must not be reworked or repaired by customers. In case of
damage, the complete unit should be returned to the manufacturer in
the original packaging or equivalent.

Board Name Functions Comment


AMP 40W AB class Amplifier Board Always present. Mounted on the left
side heat sink of the unit
TXF B Programmable 40W Transmit Always present. The filter setting is
Filter, Impedance matching, realized with jumpers. Fine tuning is
Summing stage for 80W version obtained by adjusting the inductance
value of the 2 coils (screw adjusting)
PSL Power supply unit – Low levels Always present
PSH Main power supply input board Always present
(protection and filtering)
I80W Interface 80W It’s a part of TXF board

Jumpers located on the transmission filter board (TXF) allow for frequency settings: the
pass-band can be 4kHz, 8kHz or 16kHz wide, and is in the range from 20kHz to 700kHz.
4.1 Board physical layout
Figure 7 shows the basic board physical layout. The main purpose of this diagram is to
identify the position of the physical elements used for configuration, i.e. jumpers and
connectors.

165mm

PPC

AFE

Alim
PSL TXF
PSH AMP

436mm

D0591xxa

FIGURE 7: 80W AMPX - BOARD PHYSICAL LAYOUT


T390/EN AX/B23 80W Amplifier Description and Configuration

Page 10/18 e-terragridcomT390

4.2 Internal interconnections


The following drawing shows the internal interconnections:

REAR

IOX11
IOX11 C2 (J2)
IOX18
(J3)

IO16
Lower C3
J1
horizontal
board
IO16
AMP

Vertical board

Power cable

PSH/A
Data cable
IOX15

C6

TXF
IOX15

I80W

Power Plug (P3)


FRONT
D0592ENa

FIGURE 8: AMPX UNIT – INTERNAL CONNECTIONS (TOP VIEW)

Cable list:

Left side Cable mark Right side


PSH-J5 C2 AMP-J3
TXF-J1 C3 AMP-J2
AMP-J1 C6 I80W-J2
80W Amplifier Description and Configuration T390/EN AX/B23

e-terragridcomT390 Page 11/18

4.3 Functional interconnections


The internal and external functional interconnections depend on the configuration of the
equipment. The four possible configurations are described later in this document.

Digital Flags
Analog Input
& PSH cmd
AMP
Power On PSH

PSH
AMP

PSL

TX signal Out
To
RXOUT
PSH
Mixed
connexion
AMP

TXIN PSL
TXF B (Under equipped)
I80W
80W Interface

48V Power
From 80W To 80W
Supply
Main AMP Main AMP
Connector

D0593ENa

FIGURE 9: AMPX INTERCONNECTIONS


T390/EN AX/B23 80W Amplifier Description and Configuration

Page 12/18 e-terragridcomT390

5. CONFIGURATION AND SETTINGS


The AMPX amplifier unit accepts a range of settings for handling various site-related
parameters or customer-driven configurations. Some of these parameters are set during the
manufacturing stage, some at integration time (for example, if they depend on other units in
the target T390 system), and some are set during installation and service start-up time.
This section describes the setup of AMPX parameters, identifies the operating mode, and
lists mandatory or recommended steps with which configuration should be performed. It also
includes instructions for setting transmission parameters (frequency, power, modulation).
DO NOT TOUCH THE HIGH FREQUENCY 3 PIN TERMINATIONS OR
THE INNER CORE OF THE BNC CABLE, WHEN THE T390 IS
ENERGIZED.
5.1 Configuration procedure

TAKE CARE DURING THIS PROCEDURE TO AVOID DAMAGING THE


AMPLIFIER.
As the change of frequency should be performed by jumpers on the hardware, it is
mandatory to follow the described 3-steps procedure to avoid damaging the amplifier
mentioned under AMP documentation.

5.2 Hardware Settings


Frequency bands, as well as output impedance used by the amplifier can be modified by
changing jumper positions. This is detailed in the AMP documentation, T390/EN AM.
Modifications of these settings are generally performed at manufacturing time, but they may
need to be modified later.

FIGURE 10: AMPX CARD


80W Amplifier Description and Configuration T390/EN AX/B23

e-terragridcomT390 Page 13/18

5.2.1 Jumper configuration for TX boards for AMP and AMPX units

FIGURE 11: AMP-AMPX CONNECTION JUMPERS

AMP – AMPX
JP38: 1-2, 2-3 open 3-4 closed
JP51: 1-2 open 2-3 closed

The two jumpers JP38 and JP51 on the TXFA and TXFB boards from the AMP and AMPX
units, respectively, need to be modified to activate the power summation. Refer to the Excel
file for filter configuration to set the jumper positioning.
5.2.2 HF access impedance settings
The impedance on the HF output can be modified using JP43, JP44, JP45, JP46, JP47,
JP48 and JP49 on the TXF board.
Refer to the AMP documentation.

5.2.3 Settings for bandwidth allocation


The distribution for Tx band, superimposed or separated, is set using jumpers JP39, JP40,
JP41 & JP42 on the TXF filter board.
Refer to the AMP documentation.
5.2.4 Filters settings
See HMI PR4 release and the specific application note for a description and adjustment of
HF filters.
T390/EN AX/B23 80W Amplifier Description and Configuration

Page 14/18 e-terragridcomT390

5.2.5 R.F. stage configuration with the HMI


Open the Software Configuration Window, select the AMP unit from the Units from PLC
panel, and then click R.F. Stage.
The screen shown in Figure 12 is displayed:

FIGURE 12: AMP R.F. STAGE CONFIGURATION


For successful signal transmissions, the settings performed in this window have to be the
same on each side of the T390 system (except for the Tx and Rx frequencies and the
Master/Slave settings).

5.2.5.1 Output Power


Click AMPX Available, as shown in Figure 13 to make the additional power of the AMPX
unit available to the T390 system. With the PEP set to Pmax, note that the estimated output
power is now 80W, as in Figure 13:

FIGURE 13: AMPX OUTPUT POWER


For all other settings, please refer to the AMP documentation, T390/EN AM.
80W Amplifier Description and Configuration T390/EN AX/B23

e-terragridcomT390 Page 15/18

6. CONNECTORS DESCRIPTION
DO NOT TOUCH THE HIGH FREQUENCY 3 PIN TERMINATIONS OR
THE INNER CORE OF THE BNC CABLE, WHEN THE T390 IS
ENERGIZED.

6.1 AMPX Connectors

P1 Input AMP
P2 Output AMP
P3 Power supply

6.2 HF input P1 Connector

FRONT VIEW

D0588ENa

FIGURE 14: HF INPUT 80W P1 PLUG

Location Signal Type SUB-D9 to solder


1 Txa (AUX AMP input Number of points 9 (5 and 4)
signal)
2 AUX Amplifier DS2431 Gender Male
R/W
3 PSH ENA GND Maximum current 5A
4 FLAG TEMP_OK Maximum voltage 300 Vrms
5 FLAG ALIM_OK Dielectric strength 1000 Vrms
6 TXb (AUX AMP input Material of contact Gold on Nickel
signal)
7 PSH ENA Inflammability standard UL94V0
8 +15 V from AMP Temperature range -55°C to +125°C
9 FLAG POWER_OK Case Metallic
Body GND MECHANIC FCI’s reference DE09P064TX
T390/EN AX/B23 80W Amplifier Description and Configuration

Page 16/18 e-terragridcomT390

6.3 Power supply P3 connector


Power Supply Connector is not specific to the amplifier: they are identical for every unit in a
T390 system.

Pin out Description


+ BAT 48 VDC positive
- BAT 48 VDC negative
NC Not Connected

FIGURE 15: POWER SUPPLY CONNECTOR


6.4 HF output P2 connector

HF signal

Body
D0595ENa

FIGURE 16: HF OUTPUT 80W P2 PLUG

Location Signal Type RADIALL142085161


1 HF signal Designation BNC
Impedance 75 Ω
Voltage 200 Veff max
Frequency of use 0 to 1,5 GHz
Dielectric strength 1500 Veff mini.
Insulation resistance 5000 MΩ mini.
Gender Male
Temperature range -35°C to +70°C
Material of conductor Brass
Body GND MECHANIC Material of insulator Polypropylene

This output must be connected to the AMP input connector using cable CAB9001301-500.
80W Amplifier Description and Configuration T390/EN AX/B23

e-terragridcomT390 Page 17/18

7. AMPX ACCESSORIES
7.1 Kit description

FRANCE (MASSY) REFERENCE COMPONENT DESCRIPTION


1 Polythene bag 230mm x 320mm
1 Label
1 Connector female plug
40 red jumpers for TXF
CAB9001201-400 1 cable assembly for low power signal (0,4m)
CAB9001301-500 1 cable assembly for high power signals (0,5m)

7.2 CAB9001201-400 description


This cable is used to make the connection between the AMP and AMPX units.
It connects to the boards by IOM2 plug (SUB-D 9-pin connector).
This cable allows the exchange of low level signals (AMP input and flag).

400 mm

SUB-D SUB-D
9 points 9 points
Male Male

5 twisted pairs - Shielded

Metalic shell connected to cable shield


D0596ENa

FIGURE 17: CAB9001201-400

Location Wire Signal


1 red Txa (AUX AMP input signal)
2 brown AUX Amplifier DS2431 R/W
3 white PSH ENA GND
4 green Flag TEMP_OK
5 blue Flag ALIM_OK
6 black Txb (AUX AMP input signal)
7 black PSH ENA
8 black + 15 V from AMP
9 black Flag POWER OK
Body GND mechanic
T390/EN AX/B23 80W Amplifier Description and Configuration

Page 18/18 e-terragridcomT390

7.3 CAB9001301-500 description


This cable is used to connect the AMPX amplifier output to the AMP amplifier unit when in
80W mode.
It is connected to the IOA8 plug on the TXF board.

FIGURE 18: CAB9001301-500

Type KX6A Impedance 75 Ω


Center Stranded copper Frequency range DC to 1 GHz
conductor
Internal shield Yes Voltage withstanding 7000 Vrms
External shield Yes Capacitance 63 pF/m
Jacket PVC Propagation delay 5 ns/m
Colour Green Temperature range - 40°C to + 85°C
Alstom Grid

T390/EN AX/B23 © - ALSTOM 2012.


ALSTOM, the ALSTOM logo and any
alternative version thereof are trademarks and
service marks of ALSTOM. The other names
mentioned, registered or not, are the property
of their respective companies. The technical
and other data contained in this document is
provided for information only. Neither
ALSTOM, its officers and employees accept
responsibility for or should be taken as
making any representation or warranty
(whether express or implied) as to the
accuracy or completeness of such data or the
achievement of any projected performance
criteria where these are indicated. ALSTOM
reserves the right to revise or change this
data at any time without further notice.

Alstom Grid Worldwide Contact Centre


www.grid.alstom.com/contactcentre/
Tel: +44 (0) 1785 250 070

www.alstom.com
e-terragridcomT390

Processing Unit Description


and Configuration

Version 6.1

T390/EN PU/B23

GRID
Processing Unit Description and Configuration T390/EN PU/B23

e-terragridcomT390 Page 1/48

CONTENTS

1. INTRODUCTION 7

2. SUMMARY DESCRIPTION 8

3. PHYSICAL DESCRIPTION 9
3.1 Power Supply LEDs 9
3.1.1 Main LED 9
3.1.2 Aux LED 9
3.2 Functional LED details 10
3.2.1 Ethernet 10/100 MB: Activity 10
3.2.2 Ethernet 10/100 MB: Link 10
3.2.3 Internal Error and System OK 10
3.2.4 User Alarm: AL1& AL2 11
3.2.5 FallBack Mode 11
3.2.6 Normal Mode 11
3.2.7 IRIG B Synchro 11
3.2.8 Serv local (analog mode only) 11
3.2.9 TP – Error 11
3.2.10 TP – online 12
3.2.11 TP – active 12

4. CONFIGURATION AND SETTINGS 13


4.1 Hardware configuration 13
4.2 Operating mode 14
4.3 Software configuration – digital mode 15
4.3.1 Basic Access 16
4.3.2 Encoder 17
4.3.3 Misc 18
4.3.4 Data 19
4.3.5 User Alarm 21
4.3.6 TP ( Setttings for external analogue teleprotection ) 23
4.3.7 Ringing Generator 27
4.3.8 Speech Configuration in digital mode 27
4.4 Analog configuration: Speech and MTU 31
4.4.1 Speech/Telegraph configuration in analog mode 31
4.4.2 Configure Speech channel 34
4.4.3 Configure Telegraph channel 37
4.4.4 MTU configuration (analog mode) 38
T390/EN PU/B23 Processing Unit Description and Configuration

Page 2/48 e-terragridcomT390

5. CONNECTORS DESCRIPTION 40
5.1 Power Supply P12 connector 40
5.2 Unit Chain P2 & P3 connectors 40
5.3 Alarms P11 connector 41
5.4 External Teleprotection P4 connector 41
5.5 IRIG B P10 connector 42
5.6 V11/X24 P5 connector 43
5.7 RS 232 P6 to P9 connectors 45
5.8 Service Phone P13 connector (RJ11) 46
5.9 Speech Channels P14 to P16 connectors 46
5.10 Reference Voltage P17 connector 48
5.10.1 Reference input access for telephone circuits 48
Processing Unit Description and Configuration T390/EN PU/B23

e-terragridcomT390 Page 3/48

LIST OF FIGURES

FIGURE 1: FRONT PANEL OF THE T390 PROCESSING UNIT (PRCS) 8


FIGURE 2: INDICATOR AND CONNECTOR LAYOUT ON THE T390 PROCESSING UNIT
(PRCS) 9
FIGURE 3: POWER SUPPLY CONNECTOR AND INDICATORS 9
FIGURE 4: UNIT CHAIN CONNECTORS AND THE LED PANELS 10
FIGURE 5: OPEN THE HARDWARE CONFIGURATION WINDOW 13
FIGURE 6: THE HARDWARE CONFIGURATION WINDOW 13
FIGURE 7: ADD AMPX AMPLIFIER TO THE CONFIGURATION 14
FIGURE 8: OPTIONS FOR OPERATING MODE 14
FIGURE 9: PRCS CONFIGURATION WINDOW 15
FIGURE 10: HIGHLIGHTED INTERFACE 15
FIGURE 11: CONFIGURATION WINDOW: BASIC ACCESS 16
FIGURE 12: CONFIGURATION WINDOW: ENCODER PANE 17
FIGURE 13: ENCODER CONFIGURATION 17
FIGURE 14: CONFIGURATION WINDOW: MISC PANE 18
FIGURE 15: CONFIGURATION WINDOW: DATA1 PANE 19
FIGURE 16: SPLITTING MODE SELECTION 20
FIGURE 17: CONFIGURATION WINDOW: USER ALARM 21
FIGURE 18: CONFIGURATION WINDOW: TP 23
FIGURE 19: INPUT LEVEL CONFIGURATION RELEASE 6 24
FIGURE 20: SELECTIVE CUTTING WINDOW 26
FIGURE 21: CONFIGURATION WINDOW: RING GENERATOR 27
FIGURE 22: CONFIGURATION WINDOW, SPEECH 28
FIGURE 23: CALL PROGRESS STANDARD 29
FIGURE 24: CALL PROGRESS CONFIGURATION 30
FIGURE 25: CALL PROGRESS ADVANDED 30
FIGURE 26: SPEECH/TELEGRAPH CONFIGURATION IN ANALOG MODE 31
FIGURE 27: SHOW ANALOG BAND BUTTON 33
FIGURE 28: SPEECH CHANNEL: TYPE 33
FIGURE 29: SPEECH CHANNEL LEVELS 33
FIGURE 30: CONFIGURATION WINDOW: SPEECH 34
FIGURE 31: SPEECH CONFIGURATION: BASIC PANEL 34
FIGURE 32: SPEECH CONFIGURATION: ADVANCED 35
FIGURE 33: TELEGRAPH CONFIGURATION 37
T390/EN PU/B23 Processing Unit Description and Configuration

Page 4/48 e-terragridcomT390

FIGURE 34: TELEGRAPH PRE-DEFINED BANDS 37


FIGURE 35: TELEGRAPH CUSTOM BANDS 38
FIGURE 36: CONFIGURATION WINDOW: MTU CHANNELS 38
FIGURE 37: SPLITTING MODE SELECTION 39
FIGURE 38: POWER SUPPLY P12 CONNECTOR 40
FIGURE 39: ALARMS P11 CONNECTOR 41
FIGURE 40: TPX P4 CONNECTOR 41
FIGURE 41: DIP-T390 CONNECTION 42
FIGURE 42: IRIG B P10 CONNECTOR 43
FIGURE 43: V11 CONNECTOR 44
FIGURE 44: V11 CONNECTOR PIN-OUT 45
FIGURE 45: RS232 CONNECTORS 45
FIGURE 46: RS232 PIN-OUT 45
FIGURE 47: MAINTENANCE HANDSET CONNECTOR AND PIN-OUT 46
FIGURE 48: SPEECH CONNECTOR PIN-OUT 46
FIGURE 49: SPEECH CONNECTORS 47
FIGURE 50: REFERENCE VOLTAGE CONNECTOR 48
Processing Unit Description and Configuration T390/EN PU/B23

e-terragridcomT390 Page 5/48

DOCUMENT CONTEXT AND VERSION HISTORY


This document is part of the T390 user manuals document set.
Document Context

Document name Description


T390/EN OS T390 Technical manual – Overall system Description
T390/EN AM T390 Technical manual – AMP Description and Configuration
T390/EN AX T390 Technical manual – AMPX Description and Configuration
T390/EN PU T390 Technical manual – PRCS Description and Configuration
T390/EN AP T390 Technical Schedule
T390/EN TP T390 Technical manual – TPI Description and Configuration

Version History

VERSION DATE COMMENTS


A22 25/02/2011 Product release 5
A23 09/03/2011 Product release 6
B23 10/07/2012 Product release 6.1
T390/EN PU/B23 Processing Unit Description and Configuration

Page 6/48 e-terragridcomT390

BLANK PAGE
Processing Unit Description and Configuration T390/EN PU/B23

e-terragridcomT390 Page 7/48

1. INTRODUCTION
This document describes the Processing Unit (PRCSe) of the PLC T390 system.
A PLC T390 link consists of two T390 systems (at least one processing unit and one
amplifier in each) configured in a Master/Slave relationship, with each system located on a
distribution or transmission substation, and they may be several hundred kilometres apart.
The T390 system offers comprehensive transmission capabilities over power lines using
Power Line Carrier (PLC) technologies. It supports voice and data transmission, and can
integrate a teleprotection system to react to problems in the electrical network.
The whole system is modular and is readily adaptable to customers’ needs in terms of
services (a mix of speech and data channels, data rate, etc.).
Additionally, a global software package is installed on each system. The package is available
in various levels, taking into account range and performance.
For further information on the T390 system as a whole, and on the units that comprise it,
please refer to the relevant user manuals:

• Overall System Description T390/EN OS

• Amplifier Description and Configuration T390/EN AM

• 80W Extension Amplifier Description and Configuration T390/EN AX

• Processing Unit Description and Configuration T390/EN PU (this manual)

• General Presentation T390/EN GP

• TPI Description and Configuration T390/EN TP


T390/EN PU/B23 Processing Unit Description and Configuration

Page 8/48 e-terragridcomT390

2. SUMMARY DESCRIPTION
Every T390 installation must have at least a T390 Amplifier Unit and a T390 Processing Unit.
The signals to be sent are prepared (modulation, error detection and correction scheme,
etc.) by the Processing Unit (PRCS), which then commands the amplifier to amplify and
send them over the line. The PRCS samples (in digital mode only) and modulates the signal
using either QAM for normal data or FSK for out-of-band data (e.g. for alarms and external
teleprotection). For simpler configurations, the PRCS can also provide service capabilities.
Note that Service units are not available in release 6.1.
The amplifier offers a choice of different transmitting powers up to 40W, configured by the
HMI (Human-Machine Interface, described in the Overall System Description). Note that the
output power can be increased to 80W by adding a T390 80W Extension Amplifier Unit.
Each component of a T390 system is enclosed in a stackable rack unit, as in Figure 1 below.
The system does not produce perturbations or spurious noise out of its own allocated band.
Bandwidth allocation: The system can transmit frequencies in bands that are from 4 kHz
up to 16kHz wide, and within the range 20-700 kHz. The allowed bandwidth allocations are
shown graphically in the T390 Amplifier Description and Configuration, T390/EN AM.

FIGURE 1: FRONT PANEL OF THE T390 PROCESSING UNIT (PRCS)

BEFORE CARRYING OUT ANY WORK ON THE EQUIPMENT, THE USER


SHOULD BE FAMILIAR WITH THE CONTENTS OF THE SAFETY
SECTION, THE TECHNICAL DATA SECTION AND THE RATINGS ON
THE EQUIPMENT RATING LABEL.
Processing Unit Description and Configuration T390/EN PU/B23

e-terragridcomT390 Page 9/48

3. PHYSICAL DESCRIPTION
This section describes the physical appearance of the PRCS, with its various interfaces,
connectors, and LED indicators. The individual functions of the LED indicators are set out in
the tables following. These indicators, along with the interfaces and other connectors, are
highlighted in Figure 2:

FIGURE 2: INDICATOR AND CONNECTOR LAYOUT ON THE T390 PROCESSING UNIT (PRCS)
The interfaces and other connectors on the PRCS front panel are described in detail in
section 5: Connectors Description.
3.1 Power Supply LEDs

FIGURE 3: POWER SUPPLY CONNECTOR AND INDICATORS


3.1.1 Main LED
Indicates the status of power supply connection and detection

LED Status Meaning


ON Power supply OK
OFF Power supply not OK or no Power Supply

3.1.2 Aux LED

LED Status Description


OFF Reserved for future application
T390/EN PU/B23 Processing Unit Description and Configuration

Page 10/48 e-terragridcomT390

3.2 Functional LED details

FIGURE 4: UNIT CHAIN CONNECTORS AND THE LED PANELS


The following tables describe the function of each of the LEDs (for more information, refer to
T390/AP Data retrieving for assistance).

3.2.1 Ethernet 10/100 MB: Activity


The LED indicates activity (or the lack of it) on the Ethernet.

LED Status Description


ON Rx activity
OFF No Rx activity

3.2.2 Ethernet 10/100 MB: Link


Indicates whether an Ethernet device (e.g. maintenance PC) is connected (at RJ45 plug).

LED Status Description


ON Device connected
OFF No carrier

3.2.3 Internal Error and System OK


The status of these two LEDs in combination indicates the overall system status.

System OK Internal Error Description (see HMI section for more details)
OFF ON Internal Unit error
ON FAST BLINKING Internal configuration error
OFF SLOW BLINKING Waiting for configuration
FAST N/A Bit stream transfer with HMI in progress (events, QAM
BLINKING diagram, recorder, etc.)
ON OFF System is running and waiting for line synchronization
Processing Unit Description and Configuration T390/EN PU/B23

e-terragridcomT390 Page 11/48

3.2.4 User Alarm: AL1& AL2


Indicates the status of user-defined alarms.

Status Description
ON Relay 1, 1 of both contacts closed
OFF Relay 2 , 1 of both contacts open

3.2.5 FallBack Mode


This LED indicates when fallback is active (only if KEY-FALLBACK is installed).

Status Description
ON Fall Back mode activated
OFF Normal mode or TDM is off

3.2.6 Normal Mode


Indicates the operational status of digital transmissions.

Status Description
ON Normal mode activated / Services are running
Flash (slow) Waiting for QAM signal
Flash (Fast) Waiting for TDM synchronization (searching for marker)
OFF TDM OFF

3.2.7 IRIG B Synchro


Indicates the operational status of the IRIG-B interface (KEY-IRIGB must be installed)

Status Description
ON Full synchronization with PLC
OFF No IRIG B Signal

3.2.8 Serv local (analog mode only)


Indicates the status of local services (analog only)

Status Description
ON All local services are activated
Flash (slow) At least one channel has failed
Flash (Fast) At least one channel is locked
OFF All services are off

3.2.9 TP – Error
Indicates the operational status of external teleprotection.

Status Description
ON Error on TPX
Flash (Fast) Safety presence
OFF No error
T390/EN PU/B23 Processing Unit Description and Configuration

Page 12/48 e-terragridcomT390

3.2.10 TP – online
Indicates the availability of the external teleprotection.

Status Description
ON TPX enabled and running
Flash (slow) TPX enabled but not running
OFF TPX not activated

3.2.11 TP – active
Indicates whether external teleprotection is active.

Status Description
ON TPX BLE active
OFF BLE off
Processing Unit Description and Configuration T390/EN PU/B23

e-terragridcomT390 Page 13/48

4. CONFIGURATION AND SETTINGS


The Processing Unit Standard (PRCS) supports a range of adjustable settings for handling
various site-related parameters or other customer-driven configurations. Some of the
parameters are set during the manufacturing stage, some at integration time (for example, if
they depend on other units in the target T390 system), while some have to be set at
installation and service start-up time.
This chapter describes the process of setting parameters, in the relevant operating mode,
and identifies the recommended or mandatory steps for performing the configuration.
4.1 Hardware configuration
To begin, select File|Configuraton or click the configuration icon, as illustrated in Figure 5:

FIGURE 5: OPEN THE HARDWARE CONFIGURATION WINDOW


From the individual panes of the Hardware Configuration Window, select the combination of
units that makes up the target system, supplying an identifying name for each unit.

FIGURE 6: THE HARDWARE CONFIGURATION WINDOW


To save this configuration, click Save. To configure the hardware using a previously saved
file, click Load.
NOTE: There is no option to select an AMPX Amplifier Unit (for 80W power)
on this screen. Rather, it is an option during amplifier configuration: to
include an AMPX unit in the configuration, check AMPX Available in
the R.F. Stage pane of the AMP Configuration Window, as shown in
Figure 7:
T390/EN PU/B23 Processing Unit Description and Configuration

Page 14/48 e-terragridcomT390

FIGURE 7: ADD AMPX AMPLIFIER TO THE CONFIGURATION


For further details, please refer to the following documents:

• Amplifier Unit Description and Configuration T390/EN AM

• 80W Amplifier Unit Description and Configuration T390/EN AX


4.2 Operating mode
In the Hardware Configuration Window, in the right part called bandwidth distribution (shown
in Figure 8) after choosing the bandwidth size, choose the operating mode of the PRCS : it
can be analog, mixte or digital, depending on the total bandwidth.

FIGURE 8: OPTIONS FOR OPERATING MODE


Processing Unit Description and Configuration T390/EN PU/B23

e-terragridcomT390 Page 15/48

4.3 Software configuration – digital mode


The Configuration Window displays a range of selectable tabs, each of which displays a
group of related parameters in a pane.

FIGURE 9: PRCS CONFIGURATION WINDOW

The tabs available on the PRCS Configuration Window are as follows:

Menu Tab Where described Menu Tab Where described


Basic Access 4.3.1 Ring generator 4.3.7
Encoder 4.3.2 Data1 to Data4 4.3.4
Speech1 to Speech3
Misc(ellaneous) 4.3.3 4.3.8
(digital)
Speech1 to Speech3
User Alarm 4.3.5 4.4.1
(analogue)
TP 4.3.6 MTU1 to MTU4 4.4.4

The bottom right of the window displays a front view of the PRCS. According to which tab is
selected, and therefore which pane is displayed in the main window, the relevant interface is
circled on the front view picture, as in Figure 10 .

FIGURE 10: HIGHLIGHTED INTERFACE


T390/EN PU/B23 Processing Unit Description and Configuration

Page 16/48 e-terragridcomT390

4.3.1 Basic Access

FIGURE 11: CONFIGURATION WINDOW: BASIC ACCESS


This pane is for configuration of the high speed channel (V11), which the PRCS unit offers
as an option. The associated connector is highlighted in the PRCS front view picture.
Under the panel heading “Channel Activation”, there are two editable settings:
4.3.1.1 Enable Channel
Checking Enable Channel activates the high speed channel, which is disabled by default.
4.3.1.2 Fallback Available
Checking Fallback Available causes the high speed channel to remain activated when the
system switches to fallback mode (when transmission quality has become degraded).
Otherwise, the channel is deactivated if the system switches into fallback (default).
The remaining parameters in the High Speed Channel pane are all V11-specific:

V11 clock
The clock source is selected from the three options by clicking one of the radio buttons:
Internal: The clock signal is generated by the PRCS unit
On master: The clock signal is provided by the device connected to the V11 connector
on the PLC master.
On slave: The clock signal is provided by the device connected to the V11 connector
on the PLC slave
4.3.1.3 Channel speed
The channel speed is set either by making a selection from a pull-down list in the lower of
the two boxes, or by typing a speed in the upper box. First click one of the radio buttons to
select the entry method. The default value is 64 kbit/s.
A typed-in speed must be consistent with the maximum bandwidth capacity of the selected
encoder mode (see section 4.3.2, Encoder for details).
Processing Unit Description and Configuration T390/EN PU/B23

e-terragridcomT390 Page 17/48

4.3.1.4 Fallback speed


Fallback speed selection follows exactly the same procedure as Channel Speed, using a
pull-down list or a customized entry. Again, any typed-in value must be consistent with the
maximum bandwidth capacity of the selected encoder mode (see section 4.3.2, Encoder
Configuration for details). Note that Fallback is unavailable until the option KEY-FALLBACK
is purchased and installed.
The bandwidth usage banner, at the foot of the window, is updated with any settings
changes for channel and fallback speeds.
4.3.2 Encoder
The Encoder pane is where settings are made for modulation mode and data rates, for
normal and fallback modes. Click Encoder to open the Encoder pane in the Configuration
Window, as in Figure 12:

FIGURE 12: CONFIGURATION WINDOW: ENCODER PANE

4.3.2.1 Encoder configuration panel

FIGURE 13: ENCODER CONFIGURATION


For Normal Mode, select a QAM or TCM setting from the pull-down list, as in Figure 13.
If Fallback mode is an available option (requires KEY-FALLBACK), click Allow fallback
mode to enable it. Then select a QAM or TCM setting (offers the same pull-down list as for
Normal mode).
T390/EN PU/B23 Processing Unit Description and Configuration

Page 18/48 e-terragridcomT390

The settings for Fallback mode define the modification of transmission settings, and
limitation of the total available data rate, that will be applied when transmission conditions
are degraded beyond user-defined thresholds.
If fallback is disabled, the system will try to continue transmitting as normal, regardless of
degraded transmission conditions.
Derived data rates are displayed in the bandwidth usage banner, at the foot of the window.
Fallback encoder parameter values must be lower than those for normal operation.
4.3.2.2 Quality of Service panel
The Entry and Exit conditions are computed thanks the expected Quality of Service defined
by user. The quality of Service is the highest guaranteed BER.
Furthermore, the user can choose the delay before returning from Fallback to Normal
conditions.
The gross and user rates displayed in the Encoder Configuration panel are calculated from
the encoder type and the transmission parameters defined for the amplifier.
4.3.2.3 High Speed Modem Key
If option KEY-HSM is installed, only the Data channels are transmitted, using a 4 kHz band,
and the encoding is limited to QAM4, QAM8, QAM16, or TCM32.
4.3.3 Misc

FIGURE 14: CONFIGURATION WINDOW: MISC PANE


The Misc pane is for configuring the miscellaneous parameters that relate to signal quality
and module interface choices.
4.3.3.1 BER Alarm Threshold
When the BER rises above the threshold defined here, the signal is in degraded mode and
the relevant alarm is raised. This threshold, i.e. the acceptable BER (bit error ratio) range for
the digital signal, is set in this panel using the slide bar control. The current threshold value is
displayed as a power of 10 in the adjacent text box, and is adjustable from 10-9 to 10-1, in
steps of 1 for the power of 10.
Processing Unit Description and Configuration T390/EN PU/B23

e-terragridcomT390 Page 19/48

4.3.3.2 Modules panel


This panel enables any or all of the three interfaces LAN2LAN, SNMP, and IRIG-B, provided
that the relevant keys are purchased and installed (KEY-L2L, KEY-SNMP, and KEY-IRIGB).
Selecting LAN2LAN or SNMP makes available the associated parameter setting panel(s).
4.3.3.3 LAN2LAN
This interface allows network connection between computers, using PLC equipment and IP
addressing. Click Enable Channel to make the interface available and to open the panel for
LAN2LAN settings. If Fallback is required, then also click Fallback Available.
Channel and Fallback speeds can now be set in the adjacent settings panel.
4.3.3.4 SNMP
Enabling SNMP allows the configuration of the SNMP Trap Server. SNMP is an application
layer protocol that facilitates the exchange of management information between network
devices, It enables network administration to manage network performance, find and solve
network problems, and plan for network growth. Up to 10 Traps can be defined.
Note that the LAN to LAN function is the medium highway, while SNMP is the carrier.
4.3.3.5 IRIG-B
Enabling the IRIG-B input interface allows the synchronization of the PRCS unit real time
clock with an external time generator device, such as a GPS clock device.
If LAN to LAN is also activated, then the IRIG-B function can activate time synchronization
from an SNTP (Simple Network Time Protocol) server, accessed through the Ethernet
interface.
Derived data rates are displayed in the bandwidth usage banner, at the foot of the window.
The interface connector is described in section 5.5, IRIG B P10 connector.
4.3.4 Data
Various combinations of data equipment (DTE or DCE) can be connected to a T390 system.
With the exception of Splitting mode (in the channel Activation panel), the discussion that
follows applies equally to any of the Data tabs (Data1, Data2, Data3, Data4): the overall
process of configuration is identical for all four Data tabs.

FIGURE 15: CONFIGURATION WINDOW: DATA1 PANE


T390/EN PU/B23 Processing Unit Description and Configuration

Page 20/48 e-terragridcomT390

4.3.4.1 Channel Activation panel


Click Enable Channel to make the Data channel available in the system (disabled by
default).
If Use lock condition is enabled, the channel will be deactivated automatically when
transmission conditions are beyond the user-defined thresholds. The threshold values are
configured on the User Alarm pane. Use lock condition is disabled by default.
Use the Service number pull-down box to assign the same service number (from 0 to 63) at
both ends of the PLC link. The Auto selection allocates service numbers automatically and is
the recommended setting.
Use the Splitting mode pull-down box to enable Point to Multipoint (PTM) facilities, when
access is required to remote and/or local RTU devices.

FIGURE 16: SPLITTING MODE SELECTION

The options, shown in Figure 16, are as follows:


None: Only Point to Point (PTP) communication on this channel (local devices only)
Multi: Point to Multipoint (PTM) communication, including an attached local RTU
Single: PTM communication with remote RTUs only. This is a “pass-through” mode.
Note that PTM channels are assigned as adjacent pairs, with the following implications:
• The Splitting mode pull-down box only appears on the Channel Activation panels for
Data1 and Data3.
• If Splitting mode|Single is selected for Data1 or Data3, then either Data2 or Data4,
respectively, is grayed out (i.e. is unavailable).
• Selecting Splitting mode|Multi for Data1 or Data3 automatically enables Data2 or
Data4, respectively.
• If Splitting mode|Multi is selected for Data1 or Data3, the RTU will be attached to
Data2 or Data4, respectively.
4.3.4.2 Fallback panel
Check the Available radio button to enable fallback for this data channel. The channel will
then remain activated if the system switches into fallback mode. Otherwise, the channel is
deactivated when the system switches to fallback mode (the default setting).
4.3.4.3 Channel Speed
Select the channel speed (default 2400 bits/s) from the pull-down list. Note that the same
speed must be set at both ends of the connection. The available speeds, in bits/s, are 200,
300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 14400, 19200, 28800 and 38400.
4.3.4.4 Comm Mode
Click one of the three radio buttons to select the communication mode. The available modes
are discussed under Data Channel Modes in the Overall System Description, T390/EN OS.
Note that Back to Back mode requires the communicating units to be on the same site, with
a direct connection between them.
The operator must ensure that the configuration of each T390 module is consistent with the
supported configuration modes. These parameters must also be compatible with the settings
of any equipment connected to T390 system.
Processing Unit Description and Configuration T390/EN PU/B23

e-terragridcomT390 Page 21/48

4.3.4.5 Transfer Type (Asynchronous or Synchronous)


For the PRCS unit, the transfer type can be either “Asynchronous” or "Synchronous".
The following parameters can be set on the Asynchronous panel, and they must be
compatible with the settings of equipment connected to the relevant T390 data channel
connector:
Data bit: Defines the number of data bits in a frame. It must be an integer
between 1 and 9, the default is 9.
Stop bit: Defines the number of stop bits per frame. The value must 1 or 2, the
default is 1.
Parity bit: Defines the number of parity bits per frame. It must be 0 or 1, the
default is 0.
HW Flow Control: Enabled by default.
DTR forced/DSR Ignored: Adjust signalling conditions to improve transmission/reception.
If the transfer type is synchronous, the parameters controlling Rx/Tx clocking are set
automatically as follows:

• Check DCE, automatically sets RX Clk internal and TX Clk internal

• Check DTE, automatically sets RX Clk external and TX Clk external

• Check Back to Back, automatically sets RX Clk external and TX Clk external

The HMI globally checks that the settings are compatible with the bandwidth usage (both for
normal and fallback mode): channel activation and associated parameters are used to derive
the necessary bandwidth for each channel and a check is made against the total available
bandwidth. The check is performed for every change in any of “Channel activation: Enable”,
“Fallback: Available” and “Channel Speed”.
The total bandwidth in use for both normal and fallback modes is displayed on the bandwidth
usage banner.
4.3.5 User Alarm

FIGURE 17: CONFIGURATION WINDOW: USER ALARM


T390/EN PU/B23 Processing Unit Description and Configuration

Page 22/48 e-terragridcomT390

External alarms (e.g. sound alarms, large flashing light, etc.) can be connected to the PRCS
unit to rapidly alert the operators of (potentially) blocking transmission or system problems.
The connectors are detailed in section 5.3.
A lock condition can be specified so that a specific problem puts the system in lock mode (all
channels configured as “locked in case of bad line” are disabled when that condition arises).
The last column, Trigger, sets which alarms will trigger the data recorder (must be set up
with the Event trigger option, described in Overall System Description, T390/EN OS).
The User Alarm panel also supports setting the mapping between the alarms/lock condition
and the system events. For some of these events, it is possible to detect them remotely (i.e.
to detect events on a T390 system across the power line). The following table lists the
possible events and describes this mapping:

Available
Event name Short description Associated LED
remotely?

Maintenance phase NO System maintenance state “Remote/Local


Maintenance” LED on the
Amplifier Unit
TX Power Warning NO Signal power lower than “Tx power” LED on the
transmission power threshold Amplifier Unit
TX Power Critical NO Signal power critical error “Tx power” LED on the
Amplifier Unit
TX IS SHUTDOWN
AGC High RX level YES AGC (Automatic Gain Not Applicable
Control) exceeds high level
threshold
AGC Low RX level YES AGC (Automatic Gain Not Applicable
Control) falls under low level
threshold
Loss of TDM YES Loss of the TDM Not Applicable
synchronization synchronization: this is
related to the synchronization
on the incoming signal from
the line
Safety presence YES Logical OR of all “Safety Not Applicable
presence” configured checks.
Two such checks are
available: one for the high
speed channel (V11), the
other for the optional external
teleprotection.
Amplifier SNR YES The transmitted signal’s SNR “SNR Alarm” LED on the
under threshold falls under the threshold Amplifier Unit
BER NO The digital signal’s BER Not Applicable
exceeds the configured
acceptable value
Config error NO Bad Config code. This is Not Applicable
related to the firmware
downloaded from the PC to
the PLC system
Hardware error NO A hardware internal error has “Internal Error” LED on
occurred in any of the T390 every Unit.
system’s units.
Fallback activated NO The system has entered “Fallback mode” LED on
fallback mode the Processing Unit
Processing Unit Description and Configuration T390/EN PU/B23

e-terragridcomT390 Page 23/48

Available
Event name Short description Associated LED
remotely?

TPX command too YES Duration command over the Not Applicable
long threshold
TPX Error YES When External TP is in Error “TPX Error” LED on the
Processing Unit
TPX Active YES When External TP is Active “TPX Active” LED on the
Processing Unit
TPX Safety YES When External TP is TPX Safety” LED on the
Connected Processing Unit
Temperature YES Amplifier internal Not Applicable
temperature has reached a
threshold
Analog Channel 1 NO Channel 1 is currently being Not Applicable
Equalization equalized
Analog Channel 2 NO Channel 2 is currently being Not Applicable
Equalization equalized
Analog TX power NO Analog channels TX power is Not Applicable
too high over a preset threshold
Analogue TX power NO Analog channels TX power is Not Applicable
error in error

TABLE 1: EVENTS MAPPING TO EXTERNAL ALARMS AND LOCK CONDITION

4.3.6 TP ( Setttings for external analogue teleprotection )

FIGURE 18: CONFIGURATION WINDOW: TP

When an external Teleprotection is connected to the PRCS, the relevant parameters are
configured in this pane, as described below.
4.3.6.1 TP Deactivated
Select TP Deactivated to disable the TP interface (default).
T390/EN PU/B23 Processing Unit Description and Configuration

Page 24/48 e-terragridcomT390

4.3.6.2 TPX
Select TPX when an external Teleprotection is connected to the PRCS unit. With TPX
enabled, the parameter setting panels become available:
4.3.6.3 Input Gain
Use the slide bar to set the PLC Gain, which is the relative gain in the PLC of the TPX
channel. The absolute reference of this gain is given for PLC gain=0, Boost mode disabled.
For this configuration, a single tone at the PLC input with a level of 0dBm gives a tone at
46dBm on the R.F. line.
Note that some option buttons may be unavailable if the boost is 6dB or 12dB.
4.3.6.4 Boost Mode
The command sent by the teleprotection can be boosted to reduce the risk of losing the
signal, although the default state is disabled. The available settings are:
Disabled: no boost 6dB: boost the signal by 6dB 12dB: boost the signal by 12dB
4.3.6.5 Use guard sent by PLC
With this option selected, the TPX works in external mode, using the analog channel
signalling tone as guard. The signalling must be located on Analogue Channel 1. The TPX
must be calibrated in order to use the T390 internal signalling tone correctly.
The signalling level is set 26dB under the PEP of Analogue Channel 1.
4.3.6.6 Guard Level

FIGURE 19: INPUT LEVEL CONFIGURATION RELEASE 6


The guard AF level is adjustable only if you click on TPX over Speech2, if there is a speech
2 with a signalling in the frequency range [300-3800Hz]. Guard level RF is calibrated thanks
to the guard level AF. Choose a value for the guard AF level and see the corresponding
guard RF level value.
For both release, the power is shared between the data and the TPX channel. The guard
level calibration also implies a power decrease of the data channel.
Note that if the TP sends a trip command, it is automatically assigned full power, at the
expense of other transmissions.
PLEASE KEEP IN MIND THAT IN GUARD MODE, THE MORE POWER
YOU USE FOR TPX, THE LESS POWER IS LEFT FOR THE DATA
CHANNEL. AN EXCESSIVELY HIGH GUARD WILL DEGRADE DATA
PERFORMANCE.
In most cases, a guard level up to PEP -18 dBm is recommended.
Processing Unit Description and Configuration T390/EN PU/B23

e-terragridcomT390 Page 25/48

4.3.6.7 Max TP output level


This tuning is not required for PLC configuration; its function is the calibration of the
teleprotection command level. By applying a level at the Max TP output level, the command
R.F. level can be adjusted.
4.3.6.8 Safety Presence
When Safety Presence is enabled, an alarm is raised if the external TP appears
disconnected to the PRCS unit. This function is enabled by default.
The safety presence alarm is useful when used with teleprotection with a specific output
alarm when off.
4.3.6.9 Output Gain
Use the slide bar to set Output Gain, which is the relative gain in the PLC of the TPX
channel at the output.
The absolute reference of this gain is given for Input Gain=0. For this configuration, a single
tone at PEP implies a level of 0dBm at the TP input.
4.3.6.10 Available power

This part shows the available power associated to channel supporting the TPX.
4.3.6.11 Selective cutting
4.3.6.11.1 Short description
The selective cutting dialog box allows to select the services that are cut when a TP
command is active thus allocating more power to it. This selection is available for the TPX
and for each TPI.
T390/EN PU/B23 Processing Unit Description and Configuration

Page 26/48 e-terragridcomT390

This window is called from the TPX tab of the PRCS. Click on selective cutting the following
windows appears:

FIGURE 20: SELECTIVE CUTTING WINDOW


When it is called by one of them, the parts of the window concerning the other TPs are
disabled (note that in version 6.1 only one TP can be set in the system).
The checkboxes corresponding to channels or services not enabled on the system are
inactive.
4.3.6.11.2 Rules
The following rules have to be respected:

− It is possible to cut services on any channel.

− 2 TPs cannot cut the same service.

− It is not possible to cut a complete channel where there is another TP.


4.3.6.11.3 Services automatically selected
For the normal application:

− Case TPI over QAM: the QAM is automatically selected.

− Case TPI over Speech: the speech on which is the TPI is automatically selected.

− Case TPX over Speech: the Speech 2 is automatically selected.


For these 3 cases, it is not possible to uncheck services automatically selected. The
corresponding checkboxes are displayed inactive.
Processing Unit Description and Configuration T390/EN PU/B23

e-terragridcomT390 Page 27/48

Case TPI FULL BAND (or TPX not over Speech): if the TP is alone in the channel (no
services selected for another TP), all the services available in the channel are selected.
4.3.7 Ringing Generator

FIGURE 21: CONFIGURATION WINDOW: RING GENERATOR


The Ring Generator provides the ring signal for speech channels (this does not apply to the
maintenance handset).
4.3.7.1 Frequency
Click one of the radio buttons to select a frequency of 16.7 Hz, 20Hz, 25Hz, or 50 Hz.
4.3.7.2 Signal shape
The ringing signal consists of alternating periods of ring tone and silence. Use the two slide
bars to set the two periods:
Signal ringing period: Adjustable between 1s and 4s. Default value: 2s.
Silent period: Adjustable between 1s and 4s. Default value: 1s.
4.3.8 Speech Configuration in digital mode
Speech channels are implemented as an optional bundle of three speech channels
(identified as Channel A, Channel B, Channel C) plus one maintenance handset plug.
Several combinations of equipment (such as PABX, phone, fax) can be connected to the
T390 system.
Channels B and C are functionally identical and are independent from the maintenance
handset, while channel A does not have FXO and shares the FXS with the maintenance
handset.
T390/EN PU/B23 Processing Unit Description and Configuration

Page 28/48 e-terragridcomT390

FIGURE 22: CONFIGURATION WINDOW, SPEECH


4.3.8.1 Channel Activation panel
Select Enable Channel to enable the Speech channel.
If Use lock condition is enabled, the channel is automatically deactivated when the
transmission conditions become too degraded. This is controlled by the PRCS unit. The
criteria on which the PRCS unit decides that the lock condition has been reached is defined
in section 4.3.5, User Alarm. The option is disabled by default.
Use the Service number pull-down box to assign the same service number (from 0 to 63) at
both ends of the PLC link. The Auto selection allocates service numbers automatically and is
the recommended setting.
4.3.8.2 Fallback panel
Click Available to enable fallback. The channel then remains activated when the system
switches to fallback mode. If disabled, a switch to fallback deactivates the channel (default).
4.3.8.3 Maintenance Handset panel
Maintenance handset is only available on speech1.
Select Active to enable the maintenance handset. Note that the maintenance channel has
priority over Channel A, meaning that when call in progress comes from remote maintenance
handset then the speech 1 services will be stopped immediately until the maintenance
handset is taken off hook. Maintenance handset is disabled by default except when FXS is
selected. It this case, the maintenance handset is forced at “active”. Note that in digital mode
the T390 system buzzes to indicate an incoming call on the maintenance handset (in analog
mode, the handset rings).
4.3.8.4 Misc panel
Select Fax when a fax machine will be connected to the relevant connector. By default, this
option is enabled.
Select Echo canceller to suppress echo on the channel. Enabled by default.
4.3.8.5 Channel Properties panel
This panel sets the input and output speech levels:
Input Level: Sets speech input level, adjustable between –30dBm and +7dBm
Output Level: Sets speech output level, adjustable between –30dBm and +7dBm
Processing Unit Description and Configuration T390/EN PU/B23

e-terragridcomT390 Page 29/48

4.3.8.6 Speech Compression panel


Select the speech compression mode from the pull-down list. This setting must be identical
at both ends of the channel. This is set in accordance with the capabilities of the PABX line
to which the channel is connected. The available compression modes are as follows:
Vocoder low bit rate (4010 bits/s) ADPCM16 (17360 bit/s) ADPCM24 (25710 bit/s)
ADPCM32 (33390 bit/s) ADPCM40 (41410 bit/s)
4.3.8.7 Interfacing panel
Channels A, B and C can be used in any of the three configuration modes: Phone/Phone,
PABX/Phone, and Transit. Click a radio button to select the speech channel mode:

• Phone (for hotline mode) – the default : 2W

• Line Extension (for PABX/subscriber mode, FXO/FXS) : 2W

• Transit : 4W
If Line Extension is enabled, then click FXO or FXS, to select the Foreign Exchange role:

• For connection to a PABX, the setting must be FXO (available only on B and C)

• For connection is to a phone or fax, the setting must be FXS


4.3.8.8 Power Mode panel
If a phone or fax is connected to the speech channel, the T390 provides the power to the
device (48V).
4.3.8.9 Call progress standard panel
The call progress standard selection panel, shown in Figure 23, is used to choose which
standard is active for call progress signaling (incoming call signal, ringing tone, busy tone,
etc.). Its main purpose is to ensure compatibility with the many international standards. The
choice is Q35 or a national standard chosen from a pull-down list, or else a custom
configuration. Q35 is the default standard.

FIGURE 23: CALL PROGRESS STANDARD


The Config and Advanced Configuration buttons allow the user to set all parameters to
individual customized values.
T390/EN PU/B23 Processing Unit Description and Configuration

Page 30/48 e-terragridcomT390

Click the Config button to display the panel shown in Figure 24:

FIGURE 24: CALL PROGRESS CONFIGURATION


Enter Frequency and Delay values for ringback tone, idle tone, busy tone, and congestion
tone in the text boxes for each option.
Click Close to return to the Call Progress Standard panel.
Click Advanced Configuration to display the panel shown in Figure 26:

FIGURE 25: CALL PROGRESS ADVANDED


Enter Bandwidth (Hz), Duration (ms) and Level (dBm) in the CP Detector panel.
Enter Level (dBm) in the CP Generator panel.
Enter Level (dBm) for the DTMF Generator.
Click Close to return to the Call Progress panel.
4.3.8.10 Bandwidth usage
The HMI globally checks that the settings are compatible with the bandwidth usage (both for
normal and fallback mode): channel activation and associated parameters are used to derive
the necessary bandwidth for each channel and a check is made against the total available
bandwidth. The check is performed for every change in any of Channel activation: Enable,
Fallback: Available and Speech Compression. The total bandwidth in use for both normal
and fallback modes is displayed on the bandwidth usage banner.
Processing Unit Description and Configuration T390/EN PU/B23

e-terragridcomT390 Page 31/48

4.4 Analog configuration: Speech and MTU


This section describes the configuration of the speech channels in analogue modes
(including “telegraph” options in analogue mode), and configuration of the analogue MTU
options.
4.4.1 Speech/Telegraph configuration in analog mode
This section describes Speech/Telegraph configuration of the PRCS unit in Analogue mode.
The connectors used are the same as in digital mode.

FIGURE 26: SPEECH/TELEGRAPH CONFIGURATION IN ANALOG MODE


4.4.1.1 Frequency repartition
In the version 6.x, it is possible to get 3 speeches on a channel, several rules have been
chosen.
If the analog bandwidth of the current unit is “2.5kHz” or “4kHz”, then only one speech with
signalling can be set on the band.
For example, if user selects “speech1”, channel type: “speech”, then it is possible to choose
“telegraph” in “speech2” and “speech3” but not “speech”.
If the analog bandwidth of current unit is “5kHz”, it is possible to set 2 speeches with
signaling on the band.
If the analog bandwidth of current unit is “8kHz”, it is possible to set 3 speeches with
signaling on the band.
If the analog bandwidth of current unit is “2kHz”, it is not possible to set speeches with
signaling on the band”, only telegraphs are authorized.
When the first speech is selected, band 1 is 300-2000, band 2 is 300-2200, band 3 is 300-
2400, band 4 is 300-3400.
If user select a second speech, band 1 is 2580-4280, band 2 is 2680-4580, band 3 is 2880-
4980, band 4 is 4020-4120.
Furthermore, the second speech selected has the same bandwidth as first one. Except if the
first one is band 4. In that case, band 1 to 4 are available.
If user selects a third speech, band 1 is 4860-6560, band 2 is 5060-6960 and band 3 is
5460-7560. The third speech has the same bandwidth as the 2 first ones.
T390/EN PU/B23 Processing Unit Description and Configuration

Page 32/48 e-terragridcomT390

A resume is given in Table 2.

beginning end bandwidth Band name Speech selected


300 2000 1700 Band 1 1st
300 2200 1900 Band 2 1st
300 2400 2100 Band 3 1st
300 3400 3100 Band 4 1st
2580 4280 1700 Band 1 2nd
2680 4580 1900 Band 2 2nd
2880 4980 2100 Band 3 2nd
4020 5720 1700 Band 1 2nd in case first b4
4020 5920 1900 Band 2 2nd in case first b4
4020 6120 2100 Band 3 2nd in case first b4
4020 7120 3100 Band 4 2nd
4860 6560 1700 Band 1 3rd
5060 6960 1900 Band 2 3rd
5460 7560 2100 Band 3 3rd
TABLE 2: POSSIBLE SPEECHES

Possible bands for fsk are :

beginning end
2160 2280
2260 2380
2280 2400
2460 2580
3600 3720
4440 4560
4640 4760
5040 5160
5880 6000
6040 6160
6240 6360
6720 6840
7020 7140
7320 7440
7620 7740
TABLE 3: POSSIBLE SIGNALLINGS

4.4.1.2 Default speeches


The default speeches are:
Analog bw Tx and Rx filter bandwidth
2k No speech
2.5 2100
4k 3100
5k 3100
8k 3100
TABLE 4: DEFAULT SPEECHES
Processing Unit Description and Configuration T390/EN PU/B23

e-terragridcomT390 Page 33/48

4.4.1.3 Analog band display


During configuration, click Show analogue band to display the current band allocation:

FIGURE 27: SHOW ANALOG BAND BUTTON


The display shows all currently configured channels (speech, telegraph, and MTU).
4.4.1.4 Note on the Maintenance Handset
As with digital mode, the maintenance handset is only available on the first speech channel.
Note, however, that in analogue mode the handset rings to indicate an incoming call on the
maintenance handset, while in digital mode, the T390 system buzzes.
4.4.1.5 Channel type panel

FIGURE 28: SPEECH CHANNEL: TYPE


Select the channel type from the pull-down list:
OFF: The channel is disabled
SPEECH: Speech channel
TELEGRAPH: Telegraph channel
4.4.1.6 Levels panel

FIGURE 29: SPEECH CHANNEL LEVELS


Sets input and output levels for either channel type from -30 to + 7 dBm, in steps of 0.1 dBm.
Enable Squelch to cut low level signals.
T390/EN PU/B23 Processing Unit Description and Configuration

Page 34/48 e-terragridcomT390

4.4.2 Configure Speech channel

FIGURE 30: CONFIGURATION WINDOW: SPEECH


The configurable parameters are as follows:
4.4.2.1 Band Allocation
Click FULLBAND, Band1, Band2, or Band3 to select the required bandwidth.
4.4.2.2 Signaling
Select a value for the signalling channel from the pull-down list.
There is a graphical representation of the speech channel on the right side of the panel.
4.4.2.3 Reverse Mode
Click Reverse Mode to swap the FSK frequencies for bit detection. If enabled, this mode
must be activated on both sides.
4.4.2.4 Basic panel

FIGURE 31: SPEECH CONFIGURATION: BASIC PANEL


The two parameters in the Basic panel are:
Cable equalizer: Enable/disable cable equalizer for this channel. The cable equalizer can
be set to one of eight values ranging from 1 db to 15 dB.
Interfacing: Same as for digital channels.
Processing Unit Description and Configuration T390/EN PU/B23

e-terragridcomT390 Page 35/48

4.4.2.5 Advanced panel

FIGURE 32: SPEECH CONFIGURATION: ADVANCED


The three parameters in the advanced panel are:

• Compressor Expander: Set to ON, OFF, or Driven by X Wire (external wire)

• Limiter: Set to ON or OFF

• Maintenance handset: Set ON or OFF, but only available for Speech1


4.4.2.6 Ring Generator panel
Settings are the same as in digital mode.
T390/EN PU/B23 Processing Unit Description and Configuration

Page 36/48 e-terragridcomT390

4.4.2.7 Possible modes for analog speeches


The possible modes are given below :

Phone speech 1 Line Extension speech 1 Transit speech 1 (default)

Phone speech 2&3 Line Extension FXS speech Line Extension FXO speech
2&3 2&3

Transit speech 2&3 (default) Ring generator speech 1&2&3


(default)

Advanced with phone Advanced without phone Advanced with speech 2&3
interface speech1 interface speech1 (default) (default)
Processing Unit Description and Configuration T390/EN PU/B23

e-terragridcomT390 Page 37/48

4.4.3 Configure Telegraph channel

FIGURE 33: TELEGRAPH CONFIGURATION


The only required settings for Telegraph, apart from levels, are bandwidth and band shifting.
They can be configured from predefined values, or in expert mode (custom band allocation):
4.4.3.1 Predefined band allocation

FIGURE 34: TELEGRAPH PRE-DEFINED BANDS


The available bands are:

• Full band

• 1200 Bds

• 600 Bds

• ITU-R38A and ITU-R38B

• Over speech band


T390/EN PU/B23 Processing Unit Description and Configuration

Page 38/48 e-terragridcomT390

4.4.3.2 Expert mode: custom band allocation

FIGURE 35: TELEGRAPH CUSTOM BANDS


In this mode, there are two possibilities.
Click on filtering and all parameters can be customized:
Local centre Freq: Input signal centre frequency.
Line centre Freq: Transmission signal centre frequency. This is the centre frequency
of the signal in the LF band (4 or 2.5Khz).
Remote centre Freq: Remote signal centre frequency. This is the centre frequency of
remote input/output signal.
Filtering Local: Local signal filtering width.
Filtering Remote: Remote signal filtering width.

Don’t click on filtering and local center Freq and Remote center Freq settings are locked
4.4.4 MTU configuration (analog mode)

FIGURE 36: CONFIGURATION WINDOW: MTU CHANNELS


The MTU uses an FSK channel to transmit information.
Processing Unit Description and Configuration T390/EN PU/B23

e-terragridcomT390 Page 39/48

The configurable parameters are as follows:


4.4.4.1 Channel Activation panel
Click Enable Channel to make the MTU channel available in the system (disabled by
default).
Use the Splitting mode pull-down box to enable Point to Multipoint facilities, when access is
required to remote and/or local RTU devices.

FIGURE 37: SPLITTING MODE SELECTION

The options, shown above in Figure 37, are as follows:


None: Only Point to Point (PtP) communication on this channel (local devices only)
Multi: Point to Multipoint (PtM) communication, including an attached local RTU
Single: PtM communication with remote RTUs only. This is a “pass-through” mode.
Note that Point to Multipoint channels is assigned as adjacent pairs, which has the following
implications:

• The Splitting mode pull-down box only appears on the Channel Activation panels for
MTU1 and MTU3

• If Splitting mode|Slave is selected for MTU1 or MTU3, then either MTU2 or MTU4,
respectively, is grayed out (i.e. is unavailable).

• Selecting Splitting mode|Master for MTU1 or MTU3 automatically enables MTU2 or


MTU4, respectively.
NOTE: Firmware must be at version 4.1 or higher to benefit from significant
enhancements in transfer speed compared with earlier releases.
Upgrade if necessary as described in the Firmware and Key Upgrade
chapter of Application Note, T390/EN AP.
4.4.4.2 Channel speed panel
Select channel speed from the pull-down list. The options (bit/s) are 200, 300, 600 and 1200.
4.4.4.3 Comm mode and Transfer Data Type panels
Same as for digital channels. See the previous discussions for more details.
4.4.4.4 Frequency Shift panel
Choose the channel position in the 4Khz or 2.5Khz band. The result can be seen by clicking
SHOW ANALOG BAND.
4.4.4.5 Reverse mode
Click Reverse Mode to reverse the FSK working mode.
T390/EN PU/B23 Processing Unit Description and Configuration

Page 40/48 e-terragridcomT390

5. CONNECTORS DESCRIPTION
The table identifies all the PRCS unit connectors:

P1 Ethernet 10/100 MB P10 IRIG-B


P2 Unit chain out P11 Alarms
P3 Unit chain in P12 Power supply
P4 Teleprotection P13 Maintenance handset
P5 V11/X24 P14 Speech1
P6 RS232-Data P15 Speech 2
P7 RS232-Data 1 P16 Speech 3
P8 RS232-Data 2 P17 Reference voltage
P9 RS232-Data 3

5.1 Power Supply P12 connector


The Power Supply connector is not specific to the PRCS unit, every unit in a T390 system
uses an identical power connector.

FIGURE 38: POWER SUPPLY P12 CONNECTOR

Pin out Description


+ BAT 48 VDC positive
- BAT 48 VDC negative
NC Not Connected

5.2 Unit Chain P2 & P3 connectors


Unit Chain connectors are not specific to the PRCS unit, they are identical for every unit in a
T390 system. They are described in the Overall System Description, T390/EN OS.
Processing Unit Description and Configuration T390/EN PU/B23

e-terragridcomT390 Page 41/48

5.3 Alarms P11 connector


The connector is a WAGO connector. The characteristics to take into account before
connecting any external device are the following:

Min Type. Max Unit Notes


Continuous DC Voltage 17 48 300 V 48 to 250V DC nominal
Max continuous DC current 2 A
Short circuit current 100 A During 30 ms
Switching power 100 W Resistive load
Insulation 2500 Vrms During 1 minute (IEC60834-1)
Response time (opening) 0.3 ms
Frequency Max 100 Hz

FIGURE 39: ALARMS P11 CONNECTOR

AL1-1 AL1-2 AL2-1 AL2-2 Alive


st nd st nd
1 contact 2 contact 1 contact 2 contact Connector presence

5.4 External Teleprotection P4 connector


The connector is a SUD-D 15 connector.

FIGURE 40: TPX P4 CONNECTOR


T390/EN PU/B23 Processing Unit Description and Configuration

Page 42/48 e-terragridcomT390

FIGURE 41: DIP-T390 CONNECTION


5.5 IRIG B P10 connector
This is an input interface for synchronizing the real time clock with an external time generator
device, a GPS clock device for example. The code used is the 1 kHz AM modulated version
of IRIG-B (Inter Range Instrumentation Group) standard time code.
IRIG-B supports formats B120, B121, B122, and B123, where the codes translate as follows:
B = format B (100pps)
1 = Amplitude modulation
2 = 1 kHz sinusoidal
0 = BCD, CF, SBS
1 = BCD, CF
2 = BCD
3 =BCD, SBS
IRIG-B caracteristics are :

• Standard 200-04,

• Input impedence 4,7 kΩ à 1000 Hz,

• Modulation ratio : 3:1 à 6:1,

• Peak to Peak input signal : 100 mV à 10 V.


The connector is a BNC connector, of which details are given below:

BNC, Coaxial 75Ω, Right Angle, Unshielded


Allocation:

• Internal cable: IRIG-B

• External cable: Return signal


Processing Unit Description and Configuration T390/EN PU/B23

e-terragridcomT390 Page 43/48

Internal cable: IRIG-B

External cable: Return signal

D0601ENa

FIGURE 42: IRIG B P10 CONNECTOR

5.6 V11/X24 P5 connector


This interface offers up to 64kbps transmission capabilities.
This access interface is composed of the three following circuits, for which data flow direction
depends on the role given to the interface (DTE or DCE):

Name Description T390 as DCE T390 as DTE


T Transmission circuit Input Output
R Reception circuit Output Input
S Signal element timing Output Input

This is a 15-pin connector, of which details are given below:


Sub D 15 Points Female Right angle (Metallic connector)
T390/EN PU/B23 Processing Unit Description and Configuration

Page 44/48 e-terragridcomT390

Pin allocation:
Depending on the role given to the interface (DTE or DCE), the pin assignment differs.
Details are given in the table below for an interface being used as DCE:

Pinning Circuit DCE


(ISO 4903) (X24)
1
2 Transmit (A) TA In
3
4 Receive (A) RA Out
5
6 Timing RD (A) SRA Out
7 Timing TD (A) STA In/Out
8 V11_GND G
9 Transmit (B) TB In
10
11 Receive (B) RB Out
12
13 Timing RD (B) SRB Out
14 Timing TD (B) STB In/Out
15
Case Shield Case / Earth

If the interface is used as DTE, input and output pins must be swapped.

FIGURE 43: V11 CONNECTOR


Processing Unit Description and Configuration T390/EN PU/B23

e-terragridcomT390 Page 45/48

V11/X24 Interface
(ISO 4903)

1
9 T(B)
2 T(A)
10
3 R(B)
11
4 R(A)
12
5 S(B)
13
S(A)
6 S'(B)
14
7 S'(A)
15
8

S' : transmitter clock circuit


for non-standard use
D0102ENa

FIGURE 44: V11 CONNECTOR PIN-OUT


5.7 RS 232 P6 to P9 connectors
This is a 9-pin connector, of which details are given below:
Sub D 9 Points Female Right angle (Metallic connector)

FIGURE 45: RS232 CONNECTORS


Pin allocation is given in Figure 46:

FIGURE 46: RS232 PIN-OUT


T390/EN PU/B23 Processing Unit Description and Configuration

Page 46/48 e-terragridcomT390

5.8 Service Phone P13 connector (RJ11)


This interface allows complete phone services such as dialling, hook/unhook detection. A
buzzer on-board replaces the ring generator.
The connector is an RJ11 connector, of which details are given below.
The 4-pole right-angle RJ11 maintenance telephone connector is shown in Figure 47, along
with its pin-out following pin-out:

FIGURE 47: MAINTENANCE HANDSET CONNECTOR AND PIN-OUT

Pin Name Direction Comments


1 NC
2 a (Ring) in/out 2 wires maintenance handset access
3 b (Trip) in/out
4 NC
Case MGROUND To mechanical ground

5.9 Speech Channels P14 to P16 connectors


The connector is an RJ45 connector, of which details are given below:
RJ45 Right angle mounted, 8-pole unshielded
The 8 poles, right-angle RJ45 speech connector is a combination of three different
interfaces, as follows:

• Analog (ab, cd)

• 4 Opto isolated input (DC voltage sensitive, 1 Wire).

• 1 Relayed isolated output (DC Voltage 1 wire output).


The pin-out is the following.

FIGURE 48: SPEECH CONNECTOR PIN-OUT


Processing Unit Description and Configuration T390/EN PU/B23

e-terragridcomT390 Page 47/48

FIGURE 49: SPEECH CONNECTORS

Pin Name Direction Comments


1 not connected
2 X in X wire (compandor switch)
3 M in M wire
4 a (Ring) in/out 2 wires access, Receive (output) 4
wires access.
5 b (Trip) in/out
6 c in Transmit 4 wires access
7 d in
8 E out E wire
Case MGRND To mechanical ground
T390/EN PU/B23 Processing Unit Description and Configuration

Page 48/48 e-terragridcomT390

5.10 Reference Voltage P17 connector


5.10.1 Reference input access for telephone circuits
Connector to input the reference voltages for the IC5 inputs (VREFIN) and OC5 outputs
(VREFOUT). The VREFIN and VREFOUT potentials will generally be of opposite polarities.
These inputs will be protected against common mode voltages with varistors, and protected
against over-current with resettable POLYSWITCH fuses.
The earth reference internally connected to the mechanical ground is provided on the
connector.
5.10.1.1 Characteristics

Min Typ. Max Unit Notes


Input level +17 +48 +72 VDC 48V/60V nominal
Input current 500 mA
Insulation 1000 Vrms

5.10.1.2 Connectors
References: WAGO 231-433 (Male, 3 points, 5 mm, Right angle)
Pin out:

Pin Signal
1 VREFOUT (in) + Positive
2 MECA GRND (out)
3 VREFIN (in) – Negative

FIGURE 50: REFERENCE VOLTAGE CONNECTOR


Alstom Grid

T390/EN PU/B23 © - ALSTOM 2012.


ALSTOM, the ALSTOM logo and any
alternative version thereof are trademarks and
service marks of ALSTOM. The other names
mentioned, registered or not, are the property
of their respective companies. The technical
and other data contained in this document is
provided for information only. Neither
ALSTOM, its officers and employees accept
responsibility for or should be taken as
making any representation or warranty
(whether express or implied) as to the
accuracy or completeness of such data or the
achievement of any projected performance
criteria where these are indicated. ALSTOM
reserves the right to revise or change this
data at any time without further notice.

Alstom Grid Worldwide Contact Centre


www.grid.alstom.com/contactcentre/
Tel: +44 (0) 1785 250 070

www.alstom.com
e-terragridcomT390

Application Note

Version 6.1

T390/EN AP/B23

GRID
Application Note T390/EN AP/B23

e-terragridcomT390 Page 3/208

CONTENTS

SAFETY SECTION

CONNECTING THE HMI TO T390 (T390_EN_AP-003) 5

LAN2LAN CONFIGURATION (T390_EN_AP-004) 25

ADJACENT BANDS FOR 8+8KHZ (T390_EN_AP-005) 43

ADJACENT BANDS FOR 8+8KHZ (QAM+TPX) (T390_EN_AP-006) 51

FILTERS SETTINGS (T390_EN_AP-011) 59

FIRMWARE UPGRADE (T390_EN_AP-012) 75

SPEECH INTERFACE (T390_EN_AP-013) 93

POINT TO MULTIPOINT (PTM) CONFIGURATION (T390_EN_AP-104) 105

DATA RETRIEVING FOR ASSISTANCE (T390_EN_AP-014) 119

INSTALLATION USER GUIDE (T390_EN_AP-015) 131

INSTALLATION CHECK GUIDE (T390_EN_AP-016) 143

MANUAL FOR SUPERIMPOSED MODE (T390_EN_AP-017) 155

DIP CONNECTION TO T390 (T390_EN_AP-018) 165

HF POWER MEASUREMENT METHOD (T390_EN_AP-021) 187

QUICK START-UP (T390_EN_AP-100) 197


Safety Section

SAFETY SECTION
Safety Section

(SS) - 1/6

STANDARD SAFETY STATEMENTS FOR ALSTOM


TELEPROTECTION EQUIPMENT

1. INTRODUCTION 2

2. HEALTH AND SAFETY 2

3. SYMBOLS AND LABELS ON THE EQUIPMENT 3


3.1 Symbols 3
3.2 Labels 3

4. INSTALLING, COMMISSIONING AND SERVICING 3

5. DE-COMMISSIONING AND DISPOSAL 5

6. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR SAFETY 6


6.1 Protective fuse rating 6
6.2 Protective class 6
6.3 Installation category 6
6.4 Environment 6
Safety Section

(SS) - 2/6

1. INTRODUCTION
This Safety Section and the relevant equipment documentation provide full information on
safe handling, commissioning and testing of this equipment. This Safety Section also
includes reference to typical equipment label markings.
The technical data in this Safety Section is typical only, see the technical data section of the
relevant equipment documentation for data specific to a particular equipment.

Before carrying out any work on the equipment the user should be familiar with
the contents of this Safety Section and the ratings on the equipment’s rating
label.

Reference should be made to the external connection diagram before the equipment is
installed, commissioned or serviced.
Language specific, self-adhesive User Interface labels are provided in a bag for some
equipment.

2. HEALTH AND SAFETY


The information in the Safety Section of the equipment documentation is intended to ensure
that equipment is properly installed and handled in order to maintain it in a safe condition.
When electrical equipment is in operation, dangerous voltages will be present in certain parts
of the equipment. Failure to observe warning notices, incorrect use, or improper use may
endanger personnel and equipment and also cause personal injury or physical damage.
Before working in the terminal strip area, the equipment must be isolated.
Proper and safe operation of the equipment depends on appropriate shipping and handling,
proper storage, installation and commissioning, and on careful operation, maintenance and
servicing. For this reason only qualified personnel may work on or operate the equipment.
Qualified personnel are individuals who:

• Are familiar with the installation, commissioning, and operation of the equipment and
of the system to which it is being connected;

• Are able to safely perform switching operations in accordance with accepted safety
engineering practices and are authorized to energize and de-energize equipment and
to isolate, ground, and label it;

• Are trained in the care and use of safety apparatus in accordance with safety
engineering practices;

• Are trained in emergency procedures (first aid).


The equipment documentation gives instructions for its installation, commissioning, and
operation. However, the manuals cannot cover all conceivable circumstances or include
detailed information on all topics. In the event of questions or specific problems, do not take
any action without proper authorization. Contact the appropriate ALSTOM technical sales
office and request the necessary information.
Safety Section

(SS) - 3/6

3. SYMBOLS AND LABELS ON THE EQUIPMENT


For safety reasons the following symbols which may be used on the equipment or referred to
in the equipment documentation, should be understood before it is installed or
commissioned.
3.1 Symbols

Caution: refer to equipment documentation Caution: risk of electric shock

Protective Conductor (*Earth) terminal Functional/Protective Conductor


(*Earth) terminal

Note: This symbol may also be used for a Protective Conductor (Earth) terminal if that
terminal is part of a terminal block or sub-assembly e.g. power supply.

*NOTE: THE TERM EARTH USED THROUGHOUT THIS TECHNICAL


MANUAL IS THE DIRECT EQUIVALENT OF THE NORTH
AMERICAN TERM GROUND.
3.2 Labels
See Safety Guide (SFTY/4L M) for typical equipment labeling information.

4. INSTALLING, COMMISSIONING AND SERVICING


Equipment connections
Personnel undertaking installation, commissioning or servicing work for this
equipment should be aware of the correct working procedures to ensure safety.
The equipment documentation should be consulted before installing,
commissioning, or servicing the equipment.
The equipment and cabinet must be earthed as specified in IEC 60950-1.
The equipment must be supplied over circuit breaker for the power supply. Circuit
breaker must be switched off.
Terminals exposed during installation, commissioning and maintenance may
present a hazardous voltage unless the equipment is electrically isolated.
Do not work on the equipment or connecting cables during lightning storm.
Any disassembly of the equipment may expose parts at hazardous voltage, also
electronic parts may be damaged if suitable electrostatic voltage discharge (ESD)
precautions are not taken.
If there is unlocked access to the rear of the equipment, care should be taken by
all personnel to avoid electric shock or energy hazards.
To ensure that wires are correctly terminated the correct crimp terminal and tool
for the wire size should be used.
The equipment must be connected in accordance with the appropriate connection
diagram.
Do not touch the high frequency 3 pin terminations or the inner core of the BNC
cable, when the T390 is energized.
Before removing top cover, the isolating terminals of external cables must be
opened or disconnected.
Safety Section

(SS) - 4/6

Protection Class I Equipment:


- Before energizing the equipment it must be earthed using the protective
conductor terminal, if provided, or the appropriate termination of the
supply plug in the case of plug connected equipment.
- The protective conductor (earth) connection must not be removed since
the protection against electric shock provided by the equipment would be
lost.
- When the protective (earth) conductor terminal (PCT) is also used to
terminate cable screens, etc., it is essential that the integrity of the
protective (earth) conductor is checked after the addition or removal of
such functional earth connections. For M4 stud PCTs the integrity of the
protective (earth) connections should be ensured by use of a locknut or
similar.
The recommended minimum protective conductor (earth) wire size is 2.5 mm²
(3.3 mm² for North America) unless otherwise stated in the technical data section
of the equipment documentation, or otherwise required by local or country wiring
regulations.
The protective conductor (earth) connection must be low-inductance and as short
as possible.
All connections to the equipment must have a defined potential. Connections that
are pre-wired, but not used, should preferably be grounded when binary inputs
and output relays are isolated. When binary inputs and output relays are
connected to common potential, the pre-wired but unused connections should be
connected to the common potential of the grouped connections.
Before energizing the equipment, the following should be checked:
- Voltage rating/polarity (rating label/equipment documentation);
- Protective fuse rating;
- Integrity of the protective conductor (earth) connection (where
applicable);
- Voltage and current rating of external wiring, applicable to the application.
It is important that this instruction manual is read and fully understood by all
people involved including personnel that has already undergone training and is
otherwise qualified before changing configuration or carrying out maintenance.
Otherwise no warranty will be applied.
Accidental touching of exposed terminals
If working in an area of restricted space, such as a cubicle, where there is a risk of
electric shock due to accidental touching of terminals which do not comply with
IP20 rating, then a suitable protective barrier should be provided.
Unused connectors in the equipment sub-racks should be terminated with blank
plugs.
Equipment use
If the equipment is used in a manner not specified by the manufacturer, the
protection provided by the equipment may be impaired.
Removal of the equipment front panel/cover
Removal of the equipment front panel/cover may expose hazardous live parts,
which must not be touched until the electrical power is removed.
Safety Section

(SS) - 5/6

Equipment operating conditions


The equipment should be operated within the specified electrical and
environmental limits.
If the link gets disturbed while using tuning, testing, simulating alarms,
measurement and loading new configurations, appropriate measures must be
taken to prevent the protection signal transmission being used.
Before switching on the circuit breaker check that the equipment/cabinet is
securely connected to the protective earth/ground and check the polarity and
value of the power supply.
Insulation and dielectric strength testing
Insulation testing may leave capacitors charged up to a hazardous voltage. At the
end of each part of the test, the voltage should be gradually reduced to zero, to
discharge capacitors, before the test leads are disconnected.
Insertion of modules and pcb cards
Modules and PCB cards must not be inserted into or withdrawn from the
equipment whilst it is energized, since this may result in damage.
Fiber optic communication
Where fiber optic communication devices are fitted, these should not be viewed
directly. Optical power meters should be used to determine the operation or
signal level of the device.
Cleaning
The equipment may be cleaned using a lint free cloth dampened with clean water,
when no connections are energized. Contact fingers of test plugs are normally
protected by petroleum jelly, which should not be removed.

5. DE-COMMISSIONING AND DISPOSAL


De-commissioning
The supply input (auxiliary) for the equipment may include capacitors across the
supply or to earth. To avoid electric shock or energy hazards, after completely
isolating the supplies to the equipment (both poles of any dc supply), the
capacitors should be safely discharged via the external terminals prior to
de-commissioning.

Disposal
It is recommended that incineration and disposal to water courses is avoided.
The equipment should be disposed of in a safe manner. Any equipment
containing batteries should have them removed before disposal, taking
precautions to avoid short circuits. Particular regulations within the country of
operation, may apply to the disposal of the equipment.
Safety Section

(SS) - 6/6

6. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR SAFETY


Unless otherwise stated in the equipment technical manual, the following data is applicable.
6.1 Protective fuse rating
The recommended maximum rating of the external protective fuse for equipments is 16A,
high rupture capacity (HRC) Red Spot type NIT, or TIA, or equivalent. The protective fuse
should be located as close to the unit as possible.

6.2 Protective class


IEC 60255-27: 2005 Class I (unless otherwise specified in the
EN 60255-27: 2005 equipment documentation). This equipment
requires a protective conductor (earth) connection
to ensure user safety.

6.3 Installation category


IEC 60255-27: 2005 Installation category III (Overvoltage Category III):
EN 60255-27: 2005 Distribution level, fixed installation.
Equipment in this category is qualification tested at
5 kV peak, 1.2/50 µs, 500 Ω, 0.5 J, between all
supply circuits and earth and also between
independent circuits.

6.4 Environment
The equipment is intended for indoor installation and use only. If it is required for use in an
outdoor environment then it must be mounted in a specific cabinet of housing which will
enable it to meet the requirements of IEC 60529 with the classification of degree of
protection IP54 (dust and splashing water protected).
Pollution Degree - Pollution Degree 2 Compliance is demonstrated by reference to safety
Altitude - Operation up to 2000m standards.
IEC 60255-27:2005
EN 60255-27: 2005
Application Note T390/EN AP/B23

e-terragridcomT390 Page 5/208

CONNECTING THE HMI


TO T390
Application Note T390/EN AP/B23
Connecting the HMI to T390
e-terragridcomT390 Page 7/208

CONTENTS

1. GENERAL 9
1.1 Physical connection between a PC and a PLC 9
1.1.1 Basic connection 9
1.1.2 Indirect PC connection through a LAN (complex configuration) 10
1.2 Check if your PC is able to access the equipment 10

2. CONFIGURING THE PC (WINDOWS 2000 OR XP) 12


2.1 Overview 12
2.2 Modifying computer TCP/IP configuration 12
2.3 Install the HMI software 14
2.4 Give the PLC IP address to the HMI 16
2.4.1 Easy Method 16
2.4.2 “Expert mode” method 17

3. CONFIGURE THE PLC 18


3.1 Why configuring the PLC IP address ? 18
3.2 How to read the PLC IP address 18
3.2.1 Original manufactured PLC 18
3.3 How to change the IP address of the PLC 19

4. SECURITY PACK 20
4.1 Overview 20
4.2 Enabling the security 20

5. ANNEXES 21
5.1 Uderstanding ip addressing 21
5.2 Classes 21
5.2.1 Class A network 21
5.2.2 Class B network 21
5.2.3 Class C network 21
5.2.4 Class D network 21
5.2.5 Class E network 21
5.3 Internet-legal versus Private addressing 22
5.4 Understanding subnet mask 22
T390/EN AP/B23 Application Note
Connecting the HMI to T390
Page 8/208 e-terragridcomT390

MODIFICATIONS PAGE

VERSION DATE COMMENTS


A22 25/02/2011 Product release 5
A23 30/03/2011 Product release 6
B23 10/07/2012 Product release 6.1
Application Note T390/EN AP/B23
Connecting the HMI to T390
e-terragridcomT390 Page 9/208

1. GENERAL

Before carrying out any work on the equipment, the user should be familiar with the
contents of the safety section, the technical data section and the ratings on the
equipment rating label.

1.1 Physical connection between a PC and a PLC


First, establish a physical connection between the system Ethernet port of the T390 product
and the PC running the HMI, by one of the following methods:

• Direct PC to equipment connection, by the means of a cross-cable

• Basic connection by the means of a Ethernet HUB or switch

• Connection of the equipment to an existing LAN

• Connection to a large network through an Ethernet router

All units of system are connected together through the daisy-chain lvds ring. This feature
allows seeing and configuring the whole system with only one Ethernet connection.
However, under some circumstances (firmware corruption, kernels incompatibility,
parameters mismatch, etc), it could be necessary to connect to each unit to restablish the
system coherency.
We recommend connecting always to the processing unit for faster access to the
equipment.
1.1.1 Basic connection
Basic connection means that PC and T390 equipment are not connected to an existing LAN
or WAN, allowing a complete free Ethernet configuration.
In this figure, you are completely free for choosing the IP address of the equipment.
By default, the IP address of T390 equipment is given below according to the kind of
equipment. In any case, this value should be mentioned in the TRS or FAT/SAT report
sheet.

Release Default IP Address


REL 6.x 10.22.171.200

If no change has been made during commissioning, FAT or SAT, all units have the same
default IP address, forbidding connecting them on a HUB or switching equipment.
T390/EN AP/B23 Application Note
Connecting the HMI to T390
Page 10/208 e-terragridcomT390

Connect only one unit first, reconfigure the IP address/mask/gateway of each recognized
units, and reboot the system. After this operation, you may connect all units to the HUB.
1.1.2 Indirect PC connection through a LAN (complex configuration)
In the scheme depicted below, each computer shown are able to configure the digital PLC.
In addition, through the LAN2LAN feature of the PLC, you could also configure the remote
PLC and all PLC seen through the TCP/IP network.

Telephone Telephone
Fax

Computer

Digital PBX
Printer

Computer
Printer ETHERNET LAN

Computer
ETHERNET LAN

Internet

Router Digital PLC


Digital PLC
Firewall D0406ENa

Before connecting the PLC to a network, you have to properly configure your equipment to
be compliant with your network. Otherwise you may jeopardize your network and/or not be
able to access your equipment.
Connect first your equipment to an isolated network as described in the above basic
connection chapter, and configure properly your system.
Contact your network administrator to obtain a free IP address range for your products and
the gateway IP address if a router is on the path between your PC and the connected
equipments.
Verify also the presence of a firewall in the network that may block the traffic between the
HMI and the T390.
1.2 Check if your PC is able to access the equipment
The PC should be configured properly to be able to see the Ethernet subnet of the PLC. In
other words, the PC should have an IP address mask allowing to not hide the address of the
connected equipment.
To know and configure your PC, follow the guide below:
Under WINDOWS 2000/XP;
Run ipconfig/all from a Command Prompt window.
(click Start, then Run, then type cmd in the text box.)
Type in ipconfig /all in the Command Prompt Windows.
Application Note T390/EN AP/B23
Connecting the HMI to T390
e-terragridcomT390 Page 11/208

The information that can be retrieved is:

Name Example Description


“Physical Address” 00-0D-56-A8-D3-62 MAC address of the interface
“IP address” 131.12.14.234 IP address of the interface
“Subnet Mask” 255.255.255.0 IP Mask
“Default gateway” 131.12.14.197 Gateway IP address

In the above configuration, you will be able to see IP address:


from 131.12.14.0 to 131.12.14.255
If your equipment has not been modified, its default IP address should be 10.22.171.200,
and then you will not be able to see it. You have to change the IP configuration of the PC
T390/EN AP/B23 Application Note
Connecting the HMI to T390
Page 12/208 e-terragridcomT390

2. CONFIGURING THE PC (WINDOWS 2000 OR XP)


2.1 Overview
In order to access the T390 product, it is mandatory to:

• configure the PC hosting the HMI according to the PLC product.

• Install the HMI software.

• Configure the units.ini file within HMI directory to point the PLC units.

• Know the IP address/mask of the PLC product (see chapter 4).


2.2 Modifying computer TCP/IP configuration
Open the control panel from the start menu, double-click on the icon named "Network and
Dial-up Connections". This opens an explorer windows showing all the computer network
connections. Right-click on the icon representing the connection you want to configure and
select "Properties" in the pop-up menu. The following window should appear:

Click on "Internet Protocol (TCP/IP)" and then click the "Properties" button.
Application Note T390/EN AP/B23
Connecting the HMI to T390
e-terragridcomT390 Page 13/208

Then, the following window allows you to configure the IP address, the subnet mask and the
gateway address for this connection.

To connect the Personal computer directly to the PLC, enter an IP Address compatible with
the Subnet Mask of the PLC IP configuration. Set the Default gateway field to 0.0.0.0. The
DNS server address fields can be left blank.
Example:
The default configuration of the PLC is:

• IP Address: 10.22.171.200

• Subnet Mask: 255.255.255.0

• Default gateway: 0.0.0.0

• The configuration of the computer may be set to:

• IP Address: 10.22.171.202

• Subnet Mask: 255.255.255.0

• Default gateway: 0.0.0.0


To connect on the PLC through your local area network, ask first to your administrator. In
this case, the following procedure should be followed:

• Program the TCP/IP properties of your computer according to the T390 default
configuration and connect directly the PLC and the computer with a cross-cable as
described above.

• With the HMI application, modify the TCP-IP settings of the T390 according to your
administrator's recommendations.

• Program the TCP/IP properties of your computer back to the original configuration
(connection to your local area network).

• Connect the T390 and the computer on the local area network with direct cables.
T390/EN AP/B23 Application Note
Connecting the HMI to T390
Page 14/208 e-terragridcomT390

2.3 Install the HMI software


Run the executable setup program found on your CD-ROM.
The setup program setup.exe is located into the directory HMI
Follow the wizard:
Application Note T390/EN AP/B23
Connecting the HMI to T390
e-terragridcomT390 Page 15/208

Check the settings and click on “install” if OK.


T390/EN AP/B23 Application Note
Connecting the HMI to T390
Page 16/208 e-terragridcomT390

2.4 Give the PLC IP address to the HMI


There are 2 ways for recording IP address within the HMI:

• Adding a single address within the HMI dialog box (easy method)

• Modifying the “unit.ini file” of the HMI program


2.4.1 Easy Method
Within the HMI, click on “PLC/connect to local”

Then right click anywhere in this windows. the button "Add New IP" should appear, click on
it, and fill the required fields:

Then click the "ADD" button.


Application Note T390/EN AP/B23
Connecting the HMI to T390
e-terragridcomT390 Page 17/208

2.4.2 “Expert mode” method


Search for the "units.ini” file within the install directory of the HMI (should be normally
“C:\Program Files\Alstom\T390\Ini”) and edit the file with the windows Notepad.
Each PLC unit owns a text block composed by:
[name]
addip=
Type in all the names and IP address for the PLC units you want to access.
Example:

If the PLC rejects any logon and you are able to ping its IP address properly, the equipment
may be protected by the security pack option. In this case, refer to the security pack chapter
for details.
T390/EN AP/B23 Application Note
Connecting the HMI to T390
Page 18/208 e-terragridcomT390

3. CONFIGURE THE PLC


3.1 Why configuring the PLC IP address ?
If you only need to configure the PLC through a laptop PC (cross cable), you don’t need to
change the PLC address configuration. Simply use the default configuration each time you
need a connection.
But, in all other cases, you need to change this configuration.
Examples:

• Connecting one or more PLC on a LAN or HUB

• Using the LAN2LAN module, for connecting 2 LANs across a PLC link

• Remote configuration or measurements through LAN2LAN


In such cases, each PLC should have a unique IP address to be properly identified on the
network.
Take care to assign a correct IP address respect to your subnet mask.
You should also set the gateway address if you need to access the PLC through a router.
3.2 How to read the PLC IP address
It is quite difficult to know the IP of the PLC after having applied some changes.
So BE REALLY CAREFULL when changing the IP Address of a system and record the
configuration change on a secure place.
3.2.1 Original manufactured PLC
Each PLC comes with a default address/mask. Try this one prior searching with another
method.
Default IP address : 10.22.171.200
Default IP Mask : 255.255.255.0
Default gateway : 0.0.0.0
Application Note T390/EN AP/B23
Connecting the HMI to T390
e-terragridcomT390 Page 19/208

3.3 How to change the IP address of the PLC


Go to PLC info and Recognition to modify IP settings for each unit by sending them after
setting new address under Change IP.

Change IP address and click Apply.


T390/EN AP/B23 Application Note
Connecting the HMI to T390
Page 20/208 e-terragridcomT390

4. SECURITY PACK
The security pack is a feature which allows the user to protect the access to equipment
without the required privilege.
4.1 Overview
Security pack offers 3 levels:

• Level 0: unsecured basic access (backward compatible)

• Level 1: authentication mode (only the authentication is secured, traffic is not


encrypted)

• Level 2: full secured mode, all exchanges are encrypted


The PLC is delivered without security pack enabled, at level 0, to access freely the
equipment.
When level 1 or 2 are enabled, the login name & passwords are stored within the equipment
for authentication.
For the level 2, additional authorizations are stored in PLC for each registered user. These
authorization rights shall be red and used by HMI upon connection to grant related privileges
to user.
4.2 Enabling the security
Prior enabling the security, check first:

• Option is available on the equipment (KEYS has been loaded)

• Record the administrator login/pwd somewhere: if you forget the password, you won’t
be able to connect to your equipment

• Create at least an account for:

− the administrator (full access)

− power users (able to configure the equipment)

− guest (able to read the equipment)


To enable the service, simply go to the maintenance/security tab within the HMI, select the
required level and apply your changes.
Changes are applied immediately and will be seen on next connection.
Application Note T390/EN AP/B23
Connecting the HMI to T390
e-terragridcomT390 Page 21/208

5. ANNEXES
5.1 Uderstanding ip addressing
Every computer that communicates over the Internet is assigned an IP address that uniquely
identifies the device and distinguishes it from other computers on the Internet.
An IP address consists of 32 bits, often shown as 4 bytes ranging from 0 to 255 and
generally represented in decimal form instead of binary form.
For example, the IP address:
168.212.226.204
in binary form is:
10101000.11010100.11100010.11001100
But it is easier for everyone to remember decimal numbers than it is to remember binary
numbers. That's the reason why we use decimals to represent the IP address.
An IP address consists of two parts, one identifying the network and one identifying the node
or host. The Class of the address determines which part belongs to the network address and
which part belongs to the node address.
All nodes on a given network share the same network prefix but must have a unique host
number.
5.2 Classes
5.2.1 Class A network
Binary address start with 0, therefore the decimal number can be anywhere from 1 to 126.
The first byte identifies the network, and the remaining 24 bits indicate the host within the
network. An example of a Class A IP address is 102.168.212.226, where "102" identifies the
network and "168.212.226" identifies the host on that network.
5.2.2 Class B network
Binary addresses start with 10, therefore the decimal number can be anywhere from 128 to
191. (The number "127" is reserved for loopback and is used for internal testing on the local
machine.) The first two bytes identify the network and the remaining 16 bits indicate the host
within the network. An example of a Class B IP address is 168.212.226.204 where "168.212"
identifies the network and "226.204" identifies the host on that network.
5.2.3 Class C network
Binary addresses start with 110, therefore the decimal number can be anywhere from 192 to
223. The first 24 bits (the first three octets) identify the network and the remaining 8 bits
indicate the host within the network. An example of a Class C IP address is 200.168.212.226
where "200.168.212" identifies the network and "226" identifies the host on that network.
5.2.4 Class D network
Binary addresses start with 1110, therefore the decimal number can be anywhere from 224
to 239. Class D networks are used to support multicasting.
5.2.5 Class E network
Binary addresses start with 1111, therefore the decimal number can be anywhere from 240
to 255. Class E networks are used for experimentation. They have never been documented
or utilized in a standard way.
T390/EN AP/B23 Application Note
Connecting the HMI to T390
Page 22/208 e-terragridcomT390

5.3 Internet-legal versus Private addressing


Not every company can afford the use of Internet-legal addresses for their hosts, for any
number of reasons. For example, there may be legacy applications that use hard-coded
addresses, or there may be too many systems across the organization for a clean upgrade
to be successful. If you are unable to use Internet-legal addresses, you should at least be
aware that there are groups of "private" Internet addresses that can be used on internal
networks by anyone. These address pools were set aside in RFC 1918, and therefore
cannot be "assigned" to any organization. The Internet's backbone routers are configured
explicitly not to route packets with these addresses, so they are completely useless outside
of an organization's internal network. The address blocks available are listed in Table below;

Class Range of Addresses


A Any addresses in 10.x.x.x
B Addresses in the range of 172.16.x.x-172.31.x.x
C Addresses in the range of 192.168.0.x-192.168.255.x

5.4 Understanding subnet mask


A Mask is used to determine what subnet an IP address belongs to.
Sub-netting enables the network administrator to further divide the host part of the address
into two or more subnets. In this case, a part of the host address is reserved to identify the
particular subnet.
The subnet mask is the network address plus the bits reserved for identifying the sub-
network.
Sub-netting is a technique that allows the network administrator to divide a network into
smaller networks by using the same network number assignment. The advantages of sub-
netting are listed below:

• Simplified administration- With the help of routers networks can be broken up into
smaller subnets that can be managed more independently and efficiently.

• Restructuring of the internal network without affecting external networks. An


organization can continue to use it's allocated IP addresses without having to obtain
additional IP blocks.

• Improved security - Subnetting allows an organization to separate internal networks on


the internetwork but will not be visible to external networks.

• Isolation of network traffic - With the help of routers and subnetting, network traffic can
be kept to a minimum.
Application Note T390/EN AP/B23
Connecting the HMI to T390
e-terragridcomT390 Page 23/208

Internet

IP Address Netid Hostid

Subnet Number Host Number

Internetwork

Router

Subnet Subnet

Host Host

Router Subnet Router


D0407ENa

The diagram above illustrates how a sub-netted IP appears on an internal Intra-Net and the
Internet. The Internet only reads the NetId and the routers on the Internet are only
concerned with routing the IP packet to the Intra-Net external router. When the IP packet
reaches the external router, which has been configured for subnet routing reads the HostId.
The router then forwards the packet to appropriate subnet where it is delivered to the host.
Determining the Subnet Mask to Use:
The diagram below shows that when subnetting an IP address the Netid remains unchanged
but the Hostid is further sectioned or divided up.

Subnet Mask Assignment

Netid Hostid

. . . . 000 000 . . . . .
Subnet Host
Number Subnet Mask
Number
Boundary D0408ENa
T390/EN AP/B23 Application Note
Connecting the HMI to T390
Page 24/208 e-terragridcomT390
Application Note T390/EN AP/B23

e-terragridcomT390 Page 25/208

NETWORKING ADVANCED
FEATURES
(LAN2LAN, SNMP)
Application Note T390/EN AP/B23
LAN2LAN, SNMP
e-terragridcomT390 Page 27/208

CONTENTS

1. INTRODUCTION 29
1.1 Scope 29
1.2 References 29

2. SYSTEM CONFIGURATION 30
2.1 Hardware configuration 30
2.1.1 Using cross cables 30
2.1.2 Using routers 30
2.2 Software configuration 30

3. LAN2LAN ACTIVATION 31
3.1 Overview 31
3.2 Permanent network channel 32
3.3 Full band network channel (Maintenance mode) 33

4. SNMP ACTIVATION 35
4.1 Overview 35
4.2 PLC Configuration 35
4.3 SNMP Management 36
4.4 MIB (Management Information Base) 36
4.5 SNMP architecture 37
4.6 SNMPc configuration 38
4.6.1 MIB copy 38
4.6.2 Launch SNMPc 38
4.6.3 MIB compil 38
4.6.4 New equipment 39

5. TROUBLESHOOTING 41
5.1 Problem while configuring the options 41
5.2 PLC locks or crashes when LAN2LAN is enabled 41
T390/EN AP/B23 Application Note
LAN2LAN, SNMP
Page 28/208 e-terragridcomT390

MODIFICATIONS PAGE

VERSION DATE COMMENTS


A 26/10/2004 Original issue
B 26/01/2006 T390 product update
C 15/03/2007 Add L2 bridge feature and SNMP
C21 10/01/2011 Brand Format ALSTOM
A22 25/02/2011 LAN & SNMP update
A23 03/05/2011 Product release 6
B23 10/07/2012 Product release 6.1
Application Note T390/EN AP/B23
LAN2LAN, SNMP
e-terragridcomT390 Page 29/208

1. INTRODUCTION
1.1 Scope
This document handles about the LAN2LAN configuration. The LAN2LAN option of the PLC
provides a full network access through the power line.
1.2 References
For more information, see related documents:

Document name Description


T390/EN GP T390 General Presentation
T390/EN OS T390 Overall System Description
T390/EN AM T390 Amplifier Description and Configuration
T390/EN AX T390 Extended Amplifier Description and Configuration
T390/EN PU T390 Processing Unit Description and Configuration
T390/EN AP T390 Application Note
– Connecting the HMI to T390
– LAN to LAN configuration
– Adjacent bands for 8+8KHZ
– Adjacent bands for 8+8KHZ (QAM+TPX)
– Filters settings
– Firmware upgrade
– Speech interface
– Point to Multipoint (PTM) Configuration
– Data retrieving for Assistance
– Installation User Guide
– Installation check Guide
– Manual for Superimposed mode
– DIP connection to T390
– HF Power Measurement Method
– Quick Start-up
T390 EN TP T390 TPI Description and Configuration
T390/EN AP/B23 Application Note
LAN2LAN, SNMP
Page 30/208 e-terragridcomT390

2. SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
2.1 Hardware configuration

WARNING:
If the LAN2LAN option is activated, DO NOT CONNECT the PLC
equipment directly neither to a Local Ethernet nor to the internet.
A router properly configured should be used in order to filter
excessive traffic.
2.1.1 Using cross cables

Computer
Computer

Digital PLC Digital PLC

D0563ENa

2.1.2 Using routers

Computer

Computer
Computer
ETHERNET LAN
Printer

Computer
ETHERNET LAN
Router

Router

Internet
Router
Firewall Digital PLC Digital PLC
D0564ENa

2.2 Software configuration


The IP address, mask and gateway address of each equipment connected to the network
should be properly configured.
Refer to the T390/EN AP Connecting the HMI to T390 application note to configure these
parameters within the PLC equipment.
Application Note T390/EN AP/B23
LAN2LAN, SNMP
e-terragridcomT390 Page 31/208

3. LAN2LAN ACTIVATION
3.1 Overview
The Lan2Lan option can be used to:

• Access to the remote equipment for monitoring, uploading or configuring

• Implement a complete bridge between distant LAN


The Lan2lan option could be activated for maintenance operation only or for on-line
operations (permanent channel), in this last case, a TDM slot should be assigned to this
function and a user programmable data rate chosen for it.
This mode requires the digital or mixed mode feature of the system to work.
The LAN2LAN option is mandatory.
Click on each module and the installed keys will appear, the same keys
have to be installed on each module on both side of the link
T390/EN AP/B23 Application Note
LAN2LAN, SNMP
Page 32/208 e-terragridcomT390

3.2 Permanent network channel


The LAN2LAN option can be found in the Processing unit configuration under the MISC tab:
Set a LAN speed:

A permanent network channel can be added in the band in order to be able to use the
LAN2LAN option at any time during system run.
This channel follows the same rules than Basic access channel. It can be enabled, locked if
bad line and set available or not during fallback.
For fallback mode, an additional feature allows to assign a different speed for the LAN
channel.
Application Note T390/EN AP/B23
LAN2LAN, SNMP
e-terragridcomT390 Page 33/208

3.3 Full band network channel (Maintenance mode)


When LAN2LAN is activated, it is possible to switch to LAN2LAN maintenance mode.
If you don’t switch in this mode and you want to access to remote equipment the following
message will appear;

If you click on YES you will crash the remote equipment


Otherwise, you have to use the full QAM band for the LAN2LAN. This mode is particularly
used for remote management (Services & Patches configuration, events retrieving ...).
On local PLC click on Lan2Lan switch

To exit this mode, click on the Exit Maintenance button.


T390/EN AP/B23 Application Note
LAN2LAN, SNMP
Page 34/208 e-terragridcomT390

Result after Maintenance switching

View from remote equipment

Result after complete LAN establishment (reading the 2 IP addresses)

You are allowed to change any Service or alarm feature by ticking on


Application Note T390/EN AP/B23
LAN2LAN, SNMP
e-terragridcomT390 Page 35/208

4. SNMP ACTIVATION
4.1 Overview
The SNMP option can be used to supervise or monitor the PLC equipment, locally (in
analogue or digital mode functioning) or remotely through the LAN2LAN feature (digital
mode only)
The SNMP feature implements the polling mode through standard GET commands and also
the TRAP.
Up to 10 IP address could be configured to dispatch the Trap messages.
4.2 PLC Configuration

• Select PRCS module

• Select Misc tab

• Tick on SNMP interface

• Settle the SNMP configuration as below (in connected mode)

For polling mode, the activation of SNMP feature is enough (Tick the SNMP checkbox).

If the Trap should be generated, specify each server address in the SNMP configuration
TAB.
T390/EN AP/B23 Application Note
LAN2LAN, SNMP
Page 36/208 e-terragridcomT390

4.3 SNMP Management


A SNMP (SNMP V2) agent is implemented within the T390, which allows a full monitoring of
alarms, real-time measures (SNR, AGC, etc) and complete configuration reading
(frequencies, TX power, services, etc). Moreover, each alarm could generate a Trap sent to
the network manager (up to 10 IP addresses are programmable). The management system
could be any of the existing products available on the market like Alstom e-terrasentinel. We
provide a MIB to interface the T390 with the management system (ASN.1 format).
Basic components
An SNMP-managed network consists of three key components:
Managed device = Slave device (PLC)
Agent = software which runs on Slave device (MIB)
Network management system (NMS) = software which runs on Master
A managed device is a network node that implements an SNMP interface that allows
unidirectional (read-only) or bidirectional access to node-specific information. Managed
devices exchange node-specific information with the NMSs. Sometimes called network
elements, the managed devices can be any type of device, including, but not limited to,
routers, access servers, switches, bridges, hubs, IP telephones, IP video cameras, computer
hosts, and printers.
An agent is a network-management software module that resides on a managed device. An
agent has local knowledge of management information and translates that information to or
from an SNMP specific form.
A network management system (NMS) executes applications that monitor and control
managed devices. NMSs provide the bulk of the processing and memory resources required
for network management. One or more NMSs may exist on any managed network.
4.4 MIB (Management Information Base)
SNMP itself does not define which information (which variables) a managed system should
offer. Rather, SNMP uses an extensible design, where the available information is defined by
management information bases (MIBs). MIBs describe the structure of the management data
of a device subsystem; they use a hierarchical namespace containing object identifiers
(OID). Each OID identifies a variable that can be read or set via SNMP. MIBs use the
notation defined by ASN.1.
Application Note T390/EN AP/B23
LAN2LAN, SNMP
e-terragridcomT390 Page 37/208

4.5 SNMP architecture


MIB name
iso.org.dod.internet.private.enterprise.AlstomGrid.AIS.Datacom.T1R5.mib

D0672ENa
T390/EN AP/B23 Application Note
LAN2LAN, SNMP
Page 38/208 e-terragridcomT390

4.6 SNMPc configuration


1. Setup.exe
2. Next
3. Server
4. Next
5. Address IP address (SNMP server address = Pc)
Subnet mask (same as Pc)
Community (public)
Select “start with discovery off”
6. Next
7. Next
8. OK
4.6.1 MIB copy
Copy the MIB under following file;
C:\Program Files\SNMPc Network Manager\mibfiles

4.6.2 Launch SNMPc


1. Startup system
2. Cancel
3. Continue
4.6.3 MIB compil
1. Menu : config Æ Mib database
2. Keep “standard.mib” only
3. Add MIB renaming it “T1R5.mib”
4. Select “T1R5.mib”
5. Compile Yes
OK
Done
Application Note T390/EN AP/B23
LAN2LAN, SNMP
e-terragridcomT390 Page 39/208

4.6.4 New equipment


1. Insert device

2. Properties by right click

3. Fill in Label & address (Groups is not mandatory)


Label = equipment name
Address = IP equipment address
OK
T390/EN AP/B23 Application Note
LAN2LAN, SNMP
Page 40/208 e-terragridcomT390

4. Access tab, read/write community (public)

5. Attributes, exec program, replace auto.exe by micom.bat $a


Application Note T390/EN AP/B23
LAN2LAN, SNMP
e-terragridcomT390 Page 41/208

5. TROUBLESHOOTING
5.1 Problem while configuring the options
The above feature are key locked and should be unlocked prior usage.
Check first if the key are present in your system:

• Open the HMI and connect to the equipment

• goto to Help/About

• Click on “installed keys” button and check SNMP & LAN2LAN presence

5.2 PLC locks or crashes when LAN2LAN is enabled


If the PLC is directly connected to Ethernet Network or internet without routers to limit the
traffic, an excessive IP traffic is seen by the PLC, which may locks or crash the Ethernet
interface.
¾ Add routers/firewall to limit the traffic seen by the PLC
T390/EN AP/B23 Application Note
LAN2LAN, SNMP
Page 42/208 e-terragridcomT390
Application Note T390/EN AP/B23

e-terragridcomT390 Page 43/208

ADJACENT BANDS FOR


8+8KHZ
Application Note T390/EN AP/B23
Adjacent Bands for 8+8kHz
e-terragridcomT390 Page 45/208

CONTENTS

1. FOREWORD 47
1.1 Scope 47
1.2 References 47

2. HARDWARE CONFIGURATION 48
2.1 General Configuration 48
2.2 Tx filter 48

3. HMI CONFIGURATION 49
3.1 MASTER/SLAVE configuration 49
3.2 Internal Noise Measurement 49
T390/EN AP/B23 Application Note
Adjacent Bands for 8+8kHz
Page 46/208 e-terragridcomT390

MODIFICATIONS PAGE

VERSION DATE COMMENTS


A 03/10/2004 Original issue
B 07/04/2005 Changes for rel 2.2
C21 10/01/2011 Brand Format ALSTOM
A22 25/02/2011 Product release 5
A23 30/03/2011 Product release 6
B23 10/07/2012 Product release 6.1
Application Note T390/EN AP/B23
Adjacent Bands for 8+8kHz
e-terragridcomT390 Page 47/208

1. FOREWORD
1.1 Scope
This document handles about the adjacent bands configuration. This configuration is helpful
when you have a single band available for Tx/Rx, and a separated band mode is preferred to
superimposed mode respect to SNR or recovery time best achievement.
The following paragraphs are pieces of advice to achieve the best performance for the
8+8kHz configuration (single band of 16kHz available).
This document does not apply for other adjacent modes such as 4+4kHz or teleprotection mode.
This document is aimed at anyone who has to set PLC equipment on line, that is to say:

• Customers who have to integrate and configure their own system

• System integrators

• Field engineer

This document is applicable for Release 6.1 and later


1.2 References
For more informations, see related documents:

Document name Description


T390/EN GP T390 General Presentation
T390/EN OS T390 Overall System Description
T390/EN AM T390 Amplifier Description and Configuration
T390/EN AX T390 Extended Amplifier Description and Configuration
T390/EN PU T390 Processing Unit Description and Configuration
T390/EN AP T390 Application Note
– Connecting the HMI to T390
– LAN to LAN configuration
– Adjacent bands for 8+8KHZ
– Adjacent bands for 8+8KHZ (QAM+TPX°
– Filters settings
– Firmware upgrade
– Speech interface
– Point to Multipoint (PTM) Configuration
– Data retrieving for Assistance
– Installation User Guide
– Installation check Guide
– Manual for Superimposed mode
– DIP connection to T390
– HF Power Measurement Method
– Quick Start-up
T390/EN TP T390 TPI Description and Configuration
T390/EN AP/B23 Application Note
Adjacent Bands for 8+8kHz
Page 48/208 e-terragridcomT390

2. HARDWARE CONFIGURATION
2.1 General Configuration
For better performance, a single 16kHz Tx filter shall be preferred. The filters must be
configured like for the superimposed mode:
In the adjacent mode configuration, the crosstalk between TX & RX board is a critical point.
That’s why a metallic plate has been inserted between boards to shield properly the various
electrical fields, especially the high level of emission of TX filter.
In case of unproper isolation, the reception filter will receive the whole field and you will not
be able to synchronize your systems even in the best line conditions.
2.2 Tx filter
The Tx filter will be tuned to include both reception and transmission bands.
The use of two different 8kHz transmission filers is prohibited because of the tapping loss,
which will exceed reasonable limits near the band center.
So it will be 16kHz wide like for the following scheme:

Tx filter
16kHz

8kHz 8kHz D0411ENa

FIGURE 2-1: TX FILTER TRANSMISSION BAND


This configuration avoids the interference between the transmission filter and the reception
filter and gives the better SNR achievement.
So, even if separated mode TX filter settings could work in some cases, we recommend
configuring the system as this for adjacent mode.
Application Note T390/EN AP/B23
Adjacent Bands for 8+8kHz
e-terragridcomT390 Page 49/208

3. HMI CONFIGURATION
3.1 MASTER/SLAVE configuration
The first step is the choice of the Master/Slave
The focus of attention must be the robustness of the maintenance channel. In order to
ensure the best availability, the fsk must be set at the edges of the band.
Therefore,

The recommendation is to set the master to the upper frequency

16kHz
FSK SL

FSK M
Noise measure channel

8kHz 8kHz
SLAVE Tx MASTER Tx
D0412ENa

FIGURE 3-1: MASTER/SLAVE CONFIGURATION


For instance, if you use a 184-200KHz band

• The MASTER will transmit in the upper part of the allocated band(from 192 to 200kHz)

• The SLAVE will transmit in the lower part of the allocated band (from 184 to 192kHz)
At the edges, the recommendation is to leave 8kHz interband for other digital PLC.
The way to connect PLCs in parallel and to reduce such interband are not discussed in this
document.
For an analog PLC, no interband is requested. The main reason is that the nominal level of
analog signal within the band is lower than digital PLC. QAM signals could be considered as
a blank noise at maximum power. Analog signals are few tones distributed within the band.
3.2 Internal Noise Measurement
Due to the proximity of QAM, and especially the lack of separate TX filters, the rejection of
signal is only entrusted to the Hybrid transformer (and related tuning).
For that reason, the internal SNR measure may be altered and seen lower than it should be.
T390/EN AP/B23 Application Note
Adjacent Bands for 8+8kHz
Page 50/208 e-terragridcomT390
Application Note T390/EN AP/B23

e-terragridcomT390 Page 51/208

ADJACENT BANDS FOR


8+8KHZ (QAM+TPX)
Application Note T390/EN AP/B23
Adjacent Bands for 8+8kHz (QAM+TPX)
e-terragridcomT390 Page 53/208

CONTENTS

1. FOREWORD 55
1.1 Scope 55
1.2 References 55

2. HARDWARE CONFIGURATION 56
2.1 TX filter 56

3. HMI CONFIGURATION 57
3.1 MASTER/SLAVE configuration 57
3.2 Noise Measurement 57
T390/EN AP/B23 Application Note
Adjacent Bands for 8+8kHz (QAM+TPX)
Page 54/208 e-terragridcomT390

MODIFICATIONS PAGE

Version DATE COMMENTS


A 03/12/2004 Original issue
B 07/04/2005 Changes for REL 2.2
C21 10/01/2011 Brand Format ALSTOM
A22 25/02/2011 Product release 5
A23 30/03/2011 Product release 6
B23 10/07/2012 Product release 6.1
Application Note T390/EN AP/B23
Adjacent Bands for 8+8kHz (QAM+TPX)
e-terragridcomT390 Page 55/208

1. FOREWORD
1.1 Scope
This document handles about the adjacent band configuration. This configuration is helpful
when you have a single band available for TX/RX, and a separated band mode is preferred
to superimposed mode respect to SNR or recovery time best achievement.
The following paragraphs are pieces of advice to achieve the best performance for the
8+8kHz configuration (4kHz of DATA and 4kHz of analog band).
This document does not apply for other adjacent modes such as 4+4kHz.
This document is aimed at anyone who has to set T390 equipment on line, that is to say:

• Customers who have to integrate and configure their own system

• System integrators

• Field engineer

This document is applicable for Release 6.1 and later


1.2 References
For more informations, see related documents:

Document name Description


T390/EN GP T390 General Presentation
T390/EN OS T390 Overall System Description
T390/EN AM T390 Amplifier Description and Configuration
T390/EN AX T390 Extended Amplifier Description and Configuration
T390/EN PU T390 Processing Unit Description and Configuration
T390/EN AP T390 Application Note
– Connecting the HMI to T390
– LAN to LAN configuration
– Adjacent bands for 8+8KHZ
– Adjacent bands for 8+8KHZ (QAM+TPX°
– Filters settings
– Firmware upgrade
– Speech interface
– Point to Multipoint (PTM) Configuration
– Data retrieving for Assistance
– Installation User Guide
– Installation check Guide
– Manual for Superimposed mode
– DIP connection to T390
– HF Power Measurement Method
– Quick Start-up
T390/EN TP T390 TPI Description and Configuration
T390/EN AP/B23 Application Note
Adjacent Bands for 8+8kHz (QAM+TPX)
Page 56/208 e-terragridcomT390

2. HARDWARE CONFIGURATION
2.1 TX filter
The TX filter will be tuned to include both reception and transmission bands.
The use of two different 8kHz transmission filers is prohibited because of the tapping loss,
which will exceed reasonable limits near the band center.
So it will be 16kHz wide like for the following scheme:

Tx filter
16kHz

8kHz 8kHz D0411ENa

FIGURE 2-1: TX FILTER TRANSMISSION BAND


This configuration avoids the interference between the transmission filter and the reception
filter and gives the better SNR achievement.
So, even if separated mode TX filter settings could work in some cases, we recommend
configuring the system as this for adjacent mode.
The Rx filter, however, keeps a normal bandwidth of 8kHz.
Application Note T390/EN AP/B23
Adjacent Bands for 8+8kHz (QAM+TPX)
e-terragridcomT390 Page 57/208

3. HMI CONFIGURATION
3.1 MASTER/SLAVE configuration
The first step is the choice of the Master/Slave
The focus of attention must be the robustness of the maintenance channel. In order to
ensure the best availability, you must set the QAM far from each other to reduce the cross
talk in the data band.
Therefore,

The recommendation is to set the master to the LOWER frequency

16kHz
Noise measurement

Noise measurement
FSK SL
FSK M
channel

QAM QAM

channel
analog analog
band band

8kHz 8kHz
MASTER TX SLAVE TX
D0413ENa

FIGURE 3-1: MASTER/SLAVE CONFIGURATION


For instance, if you use a 184-200KHz band

• The MASTER will transmit in the lower part of the allocated band(from 184 to 192kHz)

• The SLAVE will transmit in the upper part of the allocated band (from 192 to 200kHz)
At the edges, the recommendation is to leave 8kHz interband for other digital PLC.
The way to connect PLCs in parallel and to reduce such interband is not discussed in this
document.
3.2 Noise Measurement
Due to the proximity of QAM, and especially the lack of separate TX filters, the rejection of
signal is only entrusted to the Hybrid transformer (and related tuning).
For that reason, the internal SNR measure may be altered and seen lower than it should be.
This effect is not critical for the operation of PLC but could have an impact for fallback
thresholds if SNR is used as a trigger for fallback condition.
T390/EN AP/B23 Application Note
Adjacent Bands for 8+8kHz (QAM+TPX)
Page 58/208 e-terragridcomT390
Application Note T390/EN AP/B23

e-terragridcomT390 Page 59/208

FILTERS SETTINGS
Application Note T390/EN AP/B23
Filters Settings
e-terragridcomT390 Page 61/208

CONTENTS

1. FOREWORD 63

2. TRANSMISSION FILTER SETTINGS 64


2.1 Precisions on filter parameters 64
2.2 TXFA board jumpers setting 65
2.3 TXFB board jumpers setting 66
2.4 TXF board filter tuning 67
2.4.1 Required measurement instruments 67
2.4.2 TXFA board test bench 67
2.4.3 TXFB board test bench 69

3. RECEPTION FILTER SETTINGS 70


3.1 RXF board filter tuning 71
3.1.1 Required measurement instruments 71
3.1.2 RXF board jumpers setting characteristics 71
3.1.3 RXF board test bench 72
T390/EN AP/B23 Application Note
Filters Settings
Page 62/208 e-terragridcomT390

MODIFICATIONS PAGE

VERSION DATE COMMENTS


A 23/03/2005 Original issue
B 15/01/2005 Add T390-AMP configuration
C 11/04/2007 Complete version for T390
D 28/06/2007 Modify the frequency response masks
E 25/09/2007 Modifications of tables for RXF frequency response
F 23/10/2007 Correction of tables for RXF frequency response
G 19/05/2008 Correction of tables for TXF and RXF frequency response
masks
H 10/10/2008 Modification of the document after new version of the TXF
filter Excel worksheet (index H)
C21 10/01/2011 Brand Format ALSTOM
A22 25/02/2011 Jumpers symmetrical configuration on RXF & AMPX
Information
A23 02/05/2011 Product release 6
B23 10/07/2012 Product release 6.1
Application Note T390/EN AP/B23
Filters Settings
e-terragridcomT390 Page 63/208

1. FOREWORD
This document applies to all T390 amplifier products, including T390-AMP and T390-AMPX.
For previous T390 amplifier configuration please to refer directly to T390 user manual (PTC-
T390-E-TS-011)

The T390 transmission and reception filter can be tuned at any 100Hz step, between
24 kHz and 700 kHz, using the same straps of the closest standard transmission
channels reported on the electronic spreadsheet (excel format).

This document refers to external configuration programs:

• TXF: “PTC-Tx9x-E-DEV-TXF-001.xls”

• RXF: “PTC-Tx9x-E-DEV-RXF-001.xls”
T390/EN AP/B23 Application Note
Filters Settings
Page 64/208 e-terragridcomT390

2. TRANSMISSION FILTER SETTINGS


2.1 Precisions on filter parameters
The limitations on the lower frequency are the following:

• For 4 kHz and 5 kHz Bandwidth, the lower central frequency is 22 kHz (lower filter is
20 - 24 kHz for the 4 kHz BW and 20 - 25 kHz BW)

• For 8 kHz Bandwidth, the lower central frequency is 24 kHz (lower filter is 20 - 28 kHz)

• For 16 kHz Bandwidth, the lower central frequency is 48 kHz (lower filter is 40 -
56 kHz)
The real bandwidth of the filters and the tapping loss mask are depending on the position of
the central frequency between 22 and 700 kHz. They are summarized in the following table:
Fc is the central frequency and dF is the distance from the central frequency (up or down)
where the tapping loss becomes lower than 1.5 dB

4 / 5 kHz BW
Fc (kHz) Useful BW dF (kHz)
22 - 320 5 kHz 7.5
320 - 400 8 kHz 12
400 - 500 8 kHz 16
500 - 700 8 kHz 20
8 kHz BW
24 - 150 8 kHz 10
300 - 400 8 kHz 12
400 - 500 8 kHz 16
500 - 700 8 kHz 20
16 kHz BW
48 - 350 16 kHz 24
350 - 700 16 kHz 32

Note that for a given useful bandwidth, the in-band loss increases with the center frequency.
If the main concern is the output power, the useful bandwidth above should be preferred in
the upper part of the frequency range.
Application Note T390/EN AP/B23
Filters Settings
e-terragridcomT390 Page 65/208

2.2 TXFA board jumpers setting


Use the Excel spreadsheet “PTC-Tx9x-E-DEV-TXF-001.xls” following the steps described
below. Note that the spreadsheet is usable with the TXFA and TXFB versions of the board.
First step – Choosing the module version and the power settings

First select the version of the board, TXFA. For a TXFA module, select the normal option if it
is aimed to be used alone or the Double Power option if the board is to be connected to an
AMPX module. Then choose the output impedance, which can be 50 to 150 Ω balanced or
unbalanced. The preferred selections are 75 Ω unbalanced or 150 Ω balanced modes.
Second step – Central frequency and bandwidth
Enter the central frequency and the bandwidth of the required filter. The spreadsheet will
automatically propose the best jumpers setting.
The minimum value of the central frequency depends on the bandwidth selected and must
be in the following range:

Bandwidth Minimum Central frequency


4 kHz or 5 kHz 22 kHz
8 kHz 24 kHz
16 kHz 48 kHz

Set the jumpers and go to the following step: TXF filter tuning.
T390/EN AP/B23 Application Note
Filters Settings
Page 66/208 e-terragridcomT390

2.3 TXFB board jumpers setting


Use the Excel spreadsheet “PTC-Tx9x-E-DEV-TXF-001.xls” following the steps described
below. Note that the spreadsheet is usable with the TXFA and TXFB versions of the board.
First step – Choosing the module version and the power settings

First select the version of the board, TXFB. If TXFB is selected, there are no other options.
Second step – Central frequency and bandwidth
Enter the central frequency and the bandwidth of the required filter. The spreadsheet will
automatically propose the best jumpers setting.
The minimum value of the central frequency depends on the bandwidth selected and must
be in the following range:

Bandwidth Minimum Central frequency


4 kHz or 5 kHz 22 kHz
8 kHz 24 kHz
16 kHz 48 kHz

Set the jumpers and go to the following step: TXFB filter tuning.
Application Note T390/EN AP/B23
Filters Settings
e-terragridcomT390 Page 67/208

2.4 TXF board filter tuning


For commodity, in the following chapter, the TXF filter is supposed to be setup with an output
impedance of 75 Ω unbalanced. If another impedance or mode is required, just set the
instruments in the right way for those settings.
2.4.1 Required measurement instruments
The best way to tune the filter is to use a generic spectrum analyzer with a tracking
generator. The analyzer can be replaced by a selective voltmeter also equipped with a
tracking generator.
In the following, the generator will be referred as TG and the level meter or analyzer will be
referred as LM.
2.4.2 TXFA board test bench
IMPORTANT NOTE: If the TXFA board is to be used with a AMPX module
(double power option), just set the jumpers in the single
power mode for the tuning procedure. Don’t forget to replace
the jumpers (JP38, JP51) in the double power mode once
the tuning is over.

• Disconnect all connections from and to TXF filter board.

• Release the holding screws on the L1 and L2 coil

• Connect the TXFA board in the following way:

Tracking Generator
75 ohms
TG

Analyser
75 ohms
LM
D0565ENa

Send a test tone at the central frequency of the filter Fc, and then adjust the two coils for the
minimum signal loss. Send tones at the frequencies Fc ± BandWidth/2 try to reach the best
symmetry on the edges of the band. Verify that the filter loss matches the value on the table
below. Note that the value of the admitted loss depends on the position of the T390 in the
20-700 kHz band and on the bandwidth of the filter.
T390/EN AP/B23 Application Note
Filters Settings
Page 68/208 e-terragridcomT390

BW (kHz) Center Frequency Range (kHz) Maximum Loss (dB)


Min Max
22 100 1,25
4/5 100 250 2,00
250 320 3,00
24 100 1,00
100 350 2,00
8 350 500 3,00
500 700 4,50
48 200 1,20
200 400 1,50
16 400 500 2,00
500 700 3,00

Check that the filter frequency response matches the mask on the figure below. In these
figures, CL is the measured value of the loss at the center frequency Fc performed in
previous step.

Level (dB)

Fc
F (kHz)

CL
CL+A1
B1 B1

CL+A2

B2 B2

CL+A3
B3 B3

D0673ENa

FIGURE 1 - OUT-BAND TX FILTER FREQUENCY RESPONSE MASK

The parameters of the frequency response mask are given in the table below:

Bandwidth Frequency Range B1 A1 B2 A2 B3 A3


(kHz) (dB) (kHz) (dB) (kHz) (dB)
BW = 4 / 5 kHz 22 – 700 kHz 2.5 0.35 8 6 14 15
BW = 8 kHz 24 – 120 kHz 4 0.30 10 6 18 15
120 – 500 kHz 4 0.30 14 6 24 15
500 – 700 kHz 4 0.30 15 6 26 15
BW = 16 kHz 48 – 700 kHz 8 0,30 30 6 40 10

Tip: the two coils L1 and L2 have theoretically the same self-inductance value. To avoid long
blindly search for the good filter response, the first step is to screw on (clockwise) the
adjusting screws of the coils until blocking. To perform the adjustment, try then to screw on
or off the two tuning screws alternately with the same number of turns.
Application Note T390/EN AP/B23
Filters Settings
e-terragridcomT390 Page 69/208

2.4.3 TXFB board test bench

• Disconnect all connections from and to TXF filter board.

• Release the holding screws on the L1 and L2 coil

• Connect the TXFB board in the following way:

Tracking Generator
75 ohms

Analyser
75 ohms

D0567ENa

FIGURE 2 - TX FILTER TESTBENCH

For tuning and checking refer to TXFA tuning above.


T390/EN AP/B23 Application Note
Filters Settings
Page 70/208 e-terragridcomT390

3. RECEPTION FILTER SETTINGS


Use the Excel spreadsheet “PTC-Tx9x-E-DEV-RXF-001.xls” following the steps described
below.
Selecting the central frequency and bandwidth

Enter the central frequency and the bandwidth of the required filter. The spreadsheet will
automatically propose the best jumpers setting.
The central frequency range allowed depends on the bandwidth selected and must be the
following:

Bandwidth Minimum Central frequency


2.5 kHz 22 kHz to 320 kHz
4 kHz or 5 kHz 22 kHz to 375 kHz (BW = 4)
376 kHz to 700 kHz (BW = 8)
8 kHz 24 kHz to 700 kHz
16 kHz 48 kHz to 700 kHz

The 2.5 kHz bandwidth filters are used to cover the 2.5 kHz reception band in TX/RX 2.5 kHz
adjacent configuration. Above 320 kHz, or for double channel in the 2.5 kHz mode, use the
5 kHz filters.
Set the jumpers in accordance with the spread sheet then go to the next step.
Set the first attenuator jumpers in the following position: JP2 CLOSED - JP6 OPEN
Application Note T390/EN AP/B23
Filters Settings
e-terragridcomT390 Page 71/208

3.1 RXF board filter tuning


NOTE: A more convenient method for tuning the TXF filters has been
developped and is described in the document PTC-T390-E-TS-023.
3.1.1 Required measurement instruments
The best way to tune the filter is to use a generic spectrum analyzer with a tracking
generator. The analyzer can be replaced by a selective voltmeter also equipped with a
tracking generator.
In the following, the generator will be referred as TG and the level meter or analyzer will be
referred as LM. The input and output impedance of the instruments are always 75 Ω.
3.1.2 RXF board jumpers setting characteristics
T390/EN AP/B23 Application Note
Filters Settings
Page 72/208 e-terragridcomT390

3.1.3 RXF board test bench

• Disconnect all connections from and to RXF filter board.

• Connect the RXF board in the following way:

Tracking Generator
75 ohms L1
TG

L3

Analyser L2
75 ohms
LM

D0568ENa

FIGURE 3 - RX FILTER TESTBENCH

With the signal generator, send a tone at the central frequency Fc of the filter. Set the
selective voltmeter on this frequency, with a measurement bandwidth < 30 Hz. Then follow
the steps of the procedure below.

• Adjust the L3 coil to obtain the minimum attenuation on Fc

• Then, adjust alternatively L1 and L2 to obtain the minimum attenuation on Fc. At each
step, it is recommended to find the maximum level. Verify that the final loss matches
the values of the following table (Note that the value of the admitted loss depends on
the position of the T390 in the 40-500 kHz band, and on the bandwidth selected).

Center Frequency Range (kHz) Maximum Loss (dB)


Min Max
20 168 < 1.0
168 320 < 2.0
320 500 < 3.2
500 700 < 4.5

• Next, taking the loss at Fc for reference, verify the value of the attenuation in the
passband of the filter. If necessary, adjust slightly L1 and L2.

• With the same reference, verify the value at the limit frequencies:
− Fc ± 8 kHz for 16 kHz bandwidth
− Fc ± 4 kHz for 8 and 4 kHz bandwidth (4 kHz BW for Fc > 375 kHz)
− Fc ± 2 kHz for 4 kHz bandwidth (4 kHz BW for Fc ≤ 375 kHz)
− Fc ± 1.25 kHz for 2.5 kHz bandwidth (For Fc ≤ 320 kHz)
• These values must be symmetrical. If it is not the case, adjust very slightly the L3 coil
to restore the balance.
• If the L3 coil has been adjusted in the previous step, verify the loss on Fc. If
necessary, adjust very slightly the L1 and L2 coil to find back the minimum loss.
Application Note T390/EN AP/B23
Filters Settings
e-terragridcomT390 Page 73/208

The adjustments must be done in a very precise way. It is recommended two use a small
plastic screwdriver and to be very meticulous. Verify that the filter frequency response
matches the masks on figure 4 below. In the following figure, CL is the measured value of
the loss at the center frequency Fc performed in previous step.

Level (dB)

Fc
F (kHz)

CL
CL+A1
B1 B1

CL+A2

B2 B2

CL+A3
B3 B3

FIGURE 4 - OUT-BAND RX FILTER FREQUENCY RESPONSE MASK

The parameters of the frequency response mask are given in the table below:

Bandwidth Frequency Range B1 A1 B2 A2 B3 A3


(kHz) (dB) (kHz) (dB) (kHz) (dB)
BW = 2.5 kHz 24 – 320 kHz 1.5 0.3 5 6 8 20
BW = 4 / 5 kHz 22 – 375 2.5 0.10 7.5 6 12.5 20
375 – 700 kHz 2.5 0.10 14 6 24 20
BW = 8 kHz 24 – 50 kHz 4 0.30 8 6 14 20
50 – 700 kHz 4 0.15 14 6 24 20
BW = 16 kHz 48 – 58 kHz 8 0.50 14 6 22 15
48 – 700 kHz 8 0.20 28 6 32 10

Tip: the two coils L1 and L2 have theoretically the same self-inductance value, while L3 is
the double of L1 and L2. To avoid long blindly search for the good filter response, the first
step is to screw on (clockwise) all the adjusting screws of the coils until blocking. Then begin
with the search of a maximum level with L3 and after; adjust L1 and L2 trying then to screw
on or off both of them alternately with the same number of turns.
T390/EN AP/B23 Application Note
Filters Settings
Page 74/208 e-terragridcomT390
Application Note T390/EN AP/B23

e-terragridcomT390 Page 75/208

FIRMWARE UPGRADE
Application Note T390/EN AP/B23
Firmware Upgrade
e-terragridcomT390 Page 77/208

CONTENTS

1. INTRODUCTION 79
1.1 Scope 79
1.2 References 79

2. FIRMWARE RELEASE IDENTIFICATION 80


2.1 Objectives 80
2.2 Bundles 80
2.3 HMI version 81
2.4 Hardware, kernel and bundle versions 82
2.5 Firmware description 82

3. FIRMWARE UPGRADE/UPDATE 83
3.1 Objective 83
3.1.1 Passwords & permissions 83
3.2 Upgrading a new T390 83
3.2.1 General procedure 83
3.2.2 Kernel upgrade 84
3.2.3 Applicative upgrade 85
3.2.4 MSU,VSU and TIO boards upgrade 86
3.3 Replacing a unit (spare) 87

4. EXTENDED PACKAGES UNLOCKING: KEY SYSTEM 88


4.1 How to get the already installed keys on the system 88
4.2 How to obtain the keys 88
4.3 Key installation procedure 89

5. APPENDIX 90
5.1 HMI: Firmware window description 90
5.2 General procedure to upgrade an unit 92
5.2.1 MSU 92
5.2.2 VSU 92
5.2.3 Tio board 92
5.2.4 Kernel image 92
5.2.5 Applicatives 92
5.3 Specific procedure to upgrade an unit from release 6.0 to release 6.1 92
T390/EN AP/B23 Application Note
Firmware Upgrade
Page 78/208 e-terragridcomT390

MODIFICATIONS

VERSION DATE COMMENTS


A 31/03/2005 Original issue
B 15/01/2006 T390 products
C 24/09/2008 Update for Rel. 4.1
MSU upgrade
C21 10/01/2011 Brand Format ALSTOM
A22 25/02/2011 Product release 5
A23 03/05/2011 Product release 6
B23 10/07/2012 Product release 6.1
Application Note T390/EN AP/B23
Firmware Upgrade
e-terragridcomT390 Page 79/208

1. INTRODUCTION
1.1 Scope
This document handles about the T390 firmware upgrade that could occur during several
situations as commissioning or system replacement.

This document is applicable for Release 6.1 and later


1.2 References
For more information, see related documents:

Document name Description


T390/EN GP T390 General Presentation
T390/EN OS T390 Overall System Description
T390/EN AM T390 Amplifier Description and Configuration
T390/EN AX T390 Extended Amplifier Description and Configuration
T390/EN PU T390 Processing Unit Description and Configuration
T390/EN AP T390 Application Note
– Connecting the HMI to T390
– LAN to LAN configuration
– Adjacent bands for 8+8KHZ
– Adjacent bands for 8+8KHZ (QAM+TPX)
– Filters settings
– Firmware upgrade
– Speech interface
– Point to Multipoint (PTM) Configuration
– Data retrieving for Assistance
– Installation User Guide
– Installation check Guide
– Manual for Superimposed mode
– DIP connection to T390
– HF Power Measurement Method
– Quick Start-up
T390/EN TP T390 TPI Description and Configuration
T390/EN AP/B23 Application Note
Firmware Upgrade
Page 80/208 e-terragridcomT390

2. FIRMWARE RELEASE IDENTIFICATION


2.1 Objectives
The objective of this chapter is to provide a way to completely identify a T390 system by its
hardware and firmware.
This identification procedure is very important in order to be able to successfully upgrade the
firmware to new product releases.
2.2 Bundles
A major release of the software is delivered in bundles (software packages) that includes:

⇒ HMI: PC based software to configure the equipment

⇒ Kernel: Operating system of T390 products

⇒ Applicatives: one for each unit

⇒ FPGA bitstreams and DSP programs: according to unit


The bundle is versioned and numbered as follow:
Release X.Y.Z [build number]
X is the major version
Y is the minor version
Z is optional to identify an intermediate minor version
[Build number] is the build revision.
Major version is incremented on deep product change
Minor version is incremented on bug fixes or small features
Build revision is incremented on HMI update or documentation updates
Each bundle is shipped on a CDROM, and last up-to-date bundle is delivered with the
equipment in the box.
New minor version or build revision are sent on demand (product update)
New major version should be ordered (product upgrade)
If you need to retrieve the bundle installed on your equipment, get it on the SAT document or
determine it from the firmware’s loaded on the product as described here after.
Application Note T390/EN AP/B23
Firmware Upgrade
e-terragridcomT390 Page 81/208

2.3 HMI version


Go to « Help/About» in the HMI menu to have a view of the HMI version:

FIGURE 2-1: HMI VERSION IDENTIFICATION


T390/EN AP/B23 Application Note
Firmware Upgrade
Page 82/208 e-terragridcomT390

2.4 Hardware, kernel and bundle versions


Information on kernel and bundle version of each unit are given in PLC info window.

FIGURE 2-2: KERNEL AND BUNDLE VERSION IDENTIFICATION

WARNING: The kernel and bundle revision must be checked on all


units by clicking on each of them in the list. They must be the same on
all units.
The Hardware version is given in same above figure under the field “Part Number”. The last
2 digits of the part number indicate the hardware version.
2.5 Firmware description
Report to document PTC-T390-E-TS-002 for detailed information about each release.
Application Note T390/EN AP/B23
Firmware Upgrade
e-terragridcomT390 Page 83/208

3. FIRMWARE UPGRADE/UPDATE
3.1 Objective
The objective of this chapter is to describe how to proceed to load a new bundle on the
equipment (update or upgrade of the Firmware).

INSTALL THE COMPLETE BUNDLE


(HMI + KERNEL + FIRMWARE)

Partial update may cause the system to fail or to not work properly
3.1.1 Passwords & permissions
In order to be able to upgrade a system, you must have the level3 privilege. Contact your
responsible to get the right login level.
All scripts are also protected by a distinct password. All passwords regarding your purchased
firmware & options, are given in a sheet called « Firmware property certificate ». This
certificate, shipped with the CDROM, grants you the right to install and use the related
package on one system.
3.2 Upgrading a new T390
3.2.1 General procedure
To upgrade the equipment to a newer product release, please follow the procedure:

1 - KERNEL UPGRADE

2 - PLC REBOOT

3 - APPLICATIVE UPGRADE

4 - PLC REBOOT

5 - MSU UPGRADE

6 - PLC Power OFF

7 - CONFIGURE THE FIRMWARE

D0427ENb
T390/EN AP/B23 Application Note
Firmware Upgrade
Page 84/208 e-terragridcomT390

3.2.2 Kernel upgrade

1 -CONNECT TO THE EQUIPEMENT USING


THE HMI

2 - OPEN THE FIRMWARE UPGRADE


WINDOW

3 - OPEN THE U05 KERNEL SCRIPT

4 - ENTER THE KERNEL PASSWORD

5 - START THE UPDATE BY CLICKING ON


"START"

6 - REPEAT THE OPERATION WITH OTHER


UNITS PRESENT ON YOUR SYSTEM
D0428ENa

FIGURE 3-1: KERNEL UPGRADE PROCEDURE


For more details about the HMI Firmware Upgrade window, please refer to annex chapter.
Application Note T390/EN AP/B23
Firmware Upgrade
e-terragridcomT390 Page 85/208

3.2.3 Applicative upgrade

1 -CONNECT TO THE EQUIPMENT USING


THE HMI

2 - OPEN THE FIRMWARE UPGRADE


WINDOW

3 - OPEN THE APPLICATIVE SCRIPT

4 - ENTER THE APPLICATIVE PASSWORD

5 - START THE UPDATE BY CLICKING ON


"START"

6 - REPEAT THE OPERATION WITH OTHER


UNITS PRESENT ON YOUR SYSTEM
D0429ENa

FIGURE 3-2: APPLICATIVE UPGRADE PROCEDURE


For more details about the HMI Firmware Upgrade window, please refer to annex chapter.
T390/EN AP/B23 Application Note
Firmware Upgrade
Page 86/208 e-terragridcomT390

3.2.4 MSU,VSU and TIO boards upgrade

1 -CONNECT TO THE EQUIPMENT USING


THE HMI

2 - OPEN THE FIRMWARE UPGRADE


WINDOW

3 - OPEN THE MSU BRD SCRIPT

4 - ENTER THE MSU BOARD PASSWORD

5 - START THE UPGRADE BY CLICKING ON


"START"
D0620ENa

FIGURE 3-3: MSU UPGRADE PROCEDURE


For more details about the HMI Firmware Upgrade window, please refer to annex chapter.
Application Note T390/EN AP/B23
Firmware Upgrade
e-terragridcomT390 Page 87/208

3.3 Replacing a unit (spare)


Follow this procedure to update your spare unit with current PRODUCT RELEASE:

1 - PLUG THE NEW UNIT TO THE SYSTEM

2 -UPGRADE KERNEL OF THE NEW UNIT

3 - REBOOT THE PLC

4 - UPGRADE APPLICATIVE OF THE NEW


UNIT

5 - REBOOT

6 - RECONFIGURE THE FIRMWARE

D0430ENa

FIGURE 3-4: SPARE REPLACEMENT

Take care to maintain the same product release and firmware option
on the entire system. A non-homogeneity may be not detected by the
HMI and causes some crash of the system.
T390/EN AP/B23 Application Note
Firmware Upgrade
Page 88/208 e-terragridcomT390

4. EXTENDED PACKAGES UNLOCKING: KEY SYSTEM


4.1 How to get the already installed keys on the system
Go to « Help/About » in the HMI menu, and then click on the « Show keys » button.

FIGURE 4-1: INSTALLED KEYS VIEW


4.2 How to obtain the keys
When the equipment has been ordered, the keys were installed on the equipment and
nothing should be done unless you would like to add some options on your system or you
need to reinstall completely the system.
To reinstall the firmware on your system, use the procedure described in the above chapters,
and then install the unlocking file delivered with your equipment (CDROM or USB key).
To add a new option (new key), you have to get first the serial number of your units and
make a request to ALSTOM sales department to obtain a unlocking file.
Go to the « Tools/Key activation request » and click on the « Create request file » button.
This feature will create a request file on the disk that you have to send to ALSTOM Sales
department with your order.
After receiving the unlocking file, follow the next procedure to install it on your system.
NOTE: An unlocking file is strictly associated with your equipment. The
unlocking file cannot be used neither for another equipment, nor for a
modified equipment. That is to say, if you add or remove some units of
your system, you have to request for a new unlocking file.
Application Note T390/EN AP/B23
Firmware Upgrade
e-terragridcomT390 Page 89/208

FIGURE 4-2: KEY REQUEST PROCEDURE


4.3 Key installation procedure
Go to the « Tools/Send script », localize the unlocking file for your equipment and press OK

1 -CONNECT TO THE EQUIPMENT USING


THE HMI WITH A LEVEL 3 LOGIN

2 - OPEN THE SEND SCRIPT MENU

3 - LOCALIZE and OPEN THE UNLOCKING


FILE

4 - VERIFY THE INSTALLED KEYS

D0431ENa

FIGURE 4-3: KEY ACTIVATION PROCEDURE


T390/EN AP/B23 Application Note
Firmware Upgrade
Page 90/208 e-terragridcomT390

5. APPENDIX
5.1 HMI: Firmware window description

FIGURE 5-1: FIRMWARE UPGRADE WINDOW


Items descriptions:
1. Open Script: opens a window to choose the script of the firmware that must be
downloaded on the T390.
2. Script Password: the user must enter in this box the password associated with the
script.
3. Script: once the transfer has been initiated (“Start“ button), this frame contains the
result of the analysis of the script
Script Name: name of the files opened
Analysis: number of firmware to be upgraded found into the script
Key: presence and installation of one or more keys
Verifying Script: status of the script consistency check
4. Transfers: once the transfer has been initiated (“Start” button), this frame contains the
status of the transfer progress
Init: status of init order sending
Download: firmware that is currently downloaded
Flashing: status of firmware storing (in the flash memory of the T390)
Verifying Transfer: status of the transfer integrity check
Close: status of close order sending
5. Start: starts the transfer (only available once a script if loaded using the “open” button)
6. Reboot: reboots the T390. A reboot is required after any firmware upgrade.
7. Close: closes the firmware upgrade window
8. This panel contains a list of the units that compose the connected T390. Each unit has
its own set of firmware. When clicking on a unit, the list of its firmware is shown is the
following panels (9-10-11)
Application Note T390/EN AP/B23
Firmware Upgrade
e-terragridcomT390 Page 91/208

9. XILINX AREA (and DSP): list of the xilinx and DSP files used by the selected unit:
Name: name of the xilinx file
Real size: size of the file before compression
Comp size: size of the file after compression
Comp: type of compression used for the file
CRC: cyclic redundancy code of the file
Info: type of file (XILINX or DSP)
Start: tells if the file is set to be programmed at T390 startup
Loaded: tells if the file is currently running on the T390
Flashing date: date corresponding to the file download on the T390
NOTE: the xilinx area can be reset and all files erased by clicking on the
“Erase button”
10. PROGRAM AREA: list of the PowerPC files used by the selected unit:
Name: name of the file
Real size: size of the file before compression
Comp size: size of the file after compression
Comp: type of compression used for the file
CRC: cyclic redundancy code of the file
Start: tells if the file is set to be programmed at T390 startup
Flashing date: date corresponding to the file download on the T390
NOTE: The program area can be reset and all files erased by clicking on the
“Erase button”
11. USER PARAMETERS AREA: list of the unit parameters. These parameters are
changed by using the HMI Firmware Configuration window and are described in the
T390 Technical Notes.
NOTE: The program area can be reset and all files erased by clicking on the
“Erase button”
T390/EN AP/B23 Application Note
Firmware Upgrade
Page 92/208 e-terragridcomT390

5.2 General procedure to upgrade an unit


5.2.1 MSU

• Launch the script T390_MSU_BRD.script , in the directory


\Board_upgrade\T390_MSU
5.2.2 VSU

• Launch the script T390_VSU_BRD.script , in the directory \Board_upgrade\T390_VSU


5.2.3 Tio board

• Launch the script T391_PPC_BRD.script, in the \Board_upgrade\T391_TIO.


5.2.4 Kernel image

• Launch the script corresponding to your units available in the directory


\Kernel_upgrade

• S10 is a script for upgrading AMP and PRCS.

• S110 is a script for upgrading AMP, PRCS and TP.


5.2.5 Applicatives

• Launch the script corresponding to your units available in the directory


\Applicative_upgrade

• S10 is a script for upgrading AMP and PRCS

• S110 is a script for upgrading AMP, PRCS and TP

5.3 Specific procedure to upgrade an unit from release 6.0 to release 6.1
In the case of upgrade from 6.0 to 6.1, it is not useful to upgrade MSU. Only TIO, VSU,
kernels and applicatives have to be upgraded.
Application Note T390/EN AP/B23

e-terragridcomT390 Page 93/208

SPEECH INTERFACE
Application Note T390/EN AP/B23
Speech Interface
e-terragridcomT390 Page 95/208

CONTENTS

1. FOREWORD 97
1.1 Scope 97
1.2 Caution 97
1.3 References 98
1.4 Analog vs digital mode 98

2. SERVICE PHONE CONNECTOR 99

3. SPEECH CHANNEL CONNECTOR 100

4. APPLICATIONS 101
4.1 Standard 2W phone 101
4.2 Transit between two PLC 101
4.3 Transit of PABX 102
4.4 FXO/FXS Mode 103
4.4.1 Subscriber 103
4.4.2 Office 103
T390/EN AP/B22 Application Note
Speech Interface
Page 96/208 e-terragridcomT390

MODIFICATIONS

VERSION DATE COMMENTS


A 23/03/2005 Original issue
B 15/1/2006 T390 product
C21 10/01/2011 Brand Format ALSTOM
A22 25/02/2011 Product release 5
A23 14/11/2011 Product release 6
B23 20/07/2012 Product release 6.1
Application Note T390/EN AP/B23
Speech Interface
e-terragridcomT390 Page 97/208

1. FOREWORD
1.1 Scope
This document handles about the speech interface.
It gives an exhaustive description of how to link the Speech connectors to the various device.
It does not describe the IHM configuration of the equipment.
This document is mainly at anyone who has to set PLC equipment on line, that is to say:

• Customers who have to integrate and configure their own system

• System integrators

• Field engineer

This document is applicable for Release 6.1 and later


1.2 Caution

DIGITAL MODE
As the signal is compressed and digitally transmitted, it is impossible to
transmit a single tone through the speech interface in the digital Mode.

DO NOT TEST THE INTERFACE BY SENDING A TONE, TRYING TO MEASURE


IT ON THE REMOTE SIDE OF THE DIGITAL LINK

A test of the speech interface can only be performed emitting a complex signal
like the voice and checking that this signal can be received on the remote side
of the link
For the same reason it is impossible to connect a modem to a speech interface
functioning in digital mode

ANALOGUE MODE
No restriction in this configuration, the speech channels operate as
transparent BF/BF channels
Explanations for digital mode
This interface uses a hybrid vocoder that analyse the stream and compress it. The algorithm
is based on voice recognition, and is suited only for that purpose.
Alternate Test methods for digital mode
You could use empiric method such as plugging normal telephone handset and check the
channel and the quality through your ear.
If you need an objective method, use standard MOS measurement equipments/instruments
that are able to measure the gain, quality, distortion, etc of that kind of channel.
T390/EN AP/B22 Application Note
Speech Interface
Page 98/208 e-terragridcomT390

1.3 References
For more informations, see related documents:

Document name Description


T390/EN GP T390 General Presentation
T390/EN OS T390 Overall System Description
T390/EN AM T390 Amplifier Description and Configuration
T390/EN AX T390 Extended Amplifier Description and Configuration
T390/EN PU T390 Processing Unit Description and Configuration
T390/EN AP T390 Application Note
– Connecting the HMI to T390
– LAN to LAN configuration
– Adjacent bands for 8+8KHZ
– Adjacent bands for 8+8KHZ (QAM+TPX)
– TPX Interface used ad an 4W Analogue Service
– Filters settings
– Firmware upgrade
– Speech interface
– Point to Multipoint (PTM) Configuration
– Data retrieving for Assistance
– Installation User Guide
– Installation check Guide
– Manual for Superimposed mode
– DIP connection to T390
– HF Power Measurement Method
– Quick Start-up
T390/EN TP T390 TPI Description and Configuration

1.4 Analog vs digital mode

Voice transmission Advantages


Using an analogue Low E/M distortion (less than 2ms according to IEC495)
channel
No compression/recompression allowing multiple HOPs without
voice deterioration
Using a digital channel High quality of voice in phone to phone or FXO/FXS
(TDM slot)
Small band usage
Application Note T390/EN AP/B23
Speech Interface
e-terragridcomT390 Page 99/208

2. SERVICE PHONE CONNECTOR


The maintenance handset is enabled by checking the option in the speech1 configuration
window.
The interface is 2 wires

1 4

FRONT SIDE OF THE FEMALE CONNECTOR

Pin Name Direction Comments


1 NC
2 a (Ring) in/out 2 wires maintenance handset access
3 b (Trip) in/out
4 NC
Case MGROUND To mechanical ground

Telephone

D0433ENa
T390/EN AP/B22 Application Note
Speech Interface
Page 100/208 e-terragridcomT390

3. SPEECH CHANNEL CONNECTOR

1 8

FRONT SIDE OF THE FEMALE CONNECTOR

Pin Name Direction Comments


1 not connected
2 X in X wire (compandor switch)
3 M in M wire
4 a (Ring) in/out 2 wires access, Receive (output) 4
wires access.
5 b (Trip) in/out
6 c in Transmit 4 wires access
7 d in
8 E out E wire
Case MGRND To mechanical ground
Application Note T390/EN AP/B23
Speech Interface
e-terragridcomT390 Page 101/208

4. APPLICATIONS
4.1 Standard 2W phone
In the Hot line mode, the standard phone to phone speech only use the a,b wires
The wiring between the PLC and the device for speech 2 and speech3 will be on pin 4/5

6
Telephone
7

D0434ENa

FIGURE 4-1:WIRING A PHONE FOR HOT LINE MODE ON SPEECH 2/3


4.2 Transit between two PLC
In the transit mode, the 4wire are used.
The E/M wire must also be linked.
The reference Voltage must be supplied to reference the E/M wires

FIGURE 4-2: WIRING SCHEME FOR SPEECH 1/2/3 IN TRANSIT CASE


T390/EN AP/B22 Application Note
Speech Interface
Page 102/208 e-terragridcomT390

4.3 Transit of PABX

PBX

Telephone

PBX PBX
PLC PLC

Telephone
D0435ENa

FIGURE 4-3: PBX NETWORK WITH PDIGITAL PLC CHANNEL


In the following case, all the Wires are used:
The transit is mainly performed on 4 wires (a,b,c,d)
The E/M wires are used to transmit the signalling. The reference voltage must be linked. In
the standard case, REFOUT is polarized positive (ground) and REFIN is polarized negative.
The X wire is used to control the compandor switch; it is useless in Digital Mode

FIGURE 4-4: WIRING SCHEME FOR SPEECH 1/2/3 IN PBX TRANSIT CASE
Application Note T390/EN AP/B23
Speech Interface
e-terragridcomT390 Page 103/208

4.4 FXO/FXS Mode


In that mode, the transmission is 2W for both side, the call will be transmitted through the
(a,b) wires
4.4.1 Subscriber

6
Telephone
7

D0434ENa

FIGURE 4-5: WIRING SCHEME FOR SPEECH 1/2/3 ON SUBSCRIBER SIDE


4.4.2 Office

1 w

2 x

3 m

4 e

5 a

6 b

7 c
PBX

8 d

T390 PBX

FIGURE 4-6: WIRING SCHEME FOR SPEECH 2/3 ON OFFICE SIDE


T390/EN AP/B22 Application Note
Speech Interface
Page 104/208 e-terragridcomT390
Application Note T390/EN AP/B23

e-terragridcomT390 Page 105/208

POINT TO MULTIPOINT
(PTM) CONFIGURATION
Application Note T390/EN AP/B23
Point to Multipoint (PTM) Configuration
e-terragridcomT390 Page 107/208

CONTENTS

1. INTRODUCTION 109

2. OVERVIEW OF POINT TO MULTIPOINT (PTM) 110


2.1 Operating mode 111
2.1.1 Analog mode 111
2.1.2 Digital Mode 111
2.1.3 Mixed Mode 111
2.2 Star Topology 112

3. SOFTWARE CONFIGURATION 113


3.1 Analog Mode 113
3.2 Digital Mode 116

4. PERFORMANCE 118

LIST OF FIGURES

FIGURE 1: POINT TO POINT CONFIGURATION 110


FIGURE 2: POINT TO MULTIPOINT CONFIGURATION 110
FIGURE 3: PTM MIXED MODE 111
FIGURE 4: STAR FORMATION 112
FIGURE 5: CONFIGURATION WINDOW: MTU CHANNELS 113
FIGURE 6: PTM MODE SELECTION 113
FIGURE 7: SHOW ANALOG BAND 114
FIGURE 8: MTU2 SAME BAND AS MULTI 115
FIGURE 9: MTU2 WITH WIDER BAND 116
FIGURE 10: CONFIGURATION WINDOW 116
FIGURE 11: SPLITTING MODE SELECTION 117
T390/EN AP/B23 Application Note
Point to Multipoint (PTM) Configuration
Page 108/208 e-terragridcomT390

MODIFICATIONS

VERSION DATE COMMENTS


A23 30/03/2011 Product release 6
B23 10/07/2012 Product release 6.1
Application Note T390/EN AP/B23
Point to Multipoint (PTM) Configuration
e-terragridcomT390 Page 109/208

1. INTRODUCTION
This document describes the Point to Multipoint (PTM) service of the PLC T390 system, and
sets out the necessary steps for its configuration.
The overview introduces the basic concepts of Point to Multipoint and outlines the available
features. The section layout thereafter reflects the configuration options from which the user
can choose: specifically an all analog, all digital, or mixed mode configuration. Finally, there
is a discussion of the possible topology choices that are inherent in configuration of PTM.
NOTE: Use of the terms analog, digital, and mixed mode in this document
refers exclusively to their meaning in the context of PTM.
T390/EN AP/B23 Application Note
Point to Multipoint (PTM) Configuration
Page 110/208 e-terragridcomT390

2. OVERVIEW OF POINT TO MULTIPOINT (PTM)


Point to Multipoint (PTM) is more easily explained by looking first at Point to Point (PTP)
communication. PTP is illustrated in Figure 1, in which there are two PLC links with RTUs
attached to three of the four PLC systems.

FIGURE 1: POINT TO POINT CONFIGURATION


With a point to point setup as shown in Figure 1, access to the different RTU on remote links
requires that each RTU need an associated dedicated bandwidth. For example in figure 1
RTU1 and RTU 3 will need each a dedicated band to communicate their information to the
SCADA. This mode when used on several transit is highly bandwidth consuming.
With Point to Multipoint arrangement as illustrated in figure 2, each RTU on the different links
will share the same bandwidth but will be authorized or not to communicate depending on
which RTU is answering to the SCADA

FIGURE 2: POINT TO MULTIPOINT CONFIGURATION


Application Note T390/EN AP/B23
Point to Multipoint (PTM) Configuration
e-terragridcomT390 Page 111/208

In the Point to Multipoint system shown in Figure 2, the SCADA system can reach both
attached devices, i.e. RTU1 and RTU3. There are several points to note about PTM:

• At any point where two PLC links are connected, as in Substation 2 (SS2) in Figure 2,
the two T390 systems are connected back-to-back, using a “straight-through” RS-232
cable of maximum length 15m.

• For an RTU to be accessible to the SCADA system, the T390 system to which it is
attached must be designated a Multi.

• Other T390 systems that simply form links in the chain, and operate only as “pass-
through” devices, must be designated Single.

• Several T390 systems in the single “chain” from SCADA to target RTU may be
designated Master.
2.1 Operating mode
The choice of operating mode for PTM depends on which transmission modes are supported
by the T390 system, as well as on the operational needs of the PLC link.
2.1.1 Analog mode
Analog Point to Multipoint support is included in the standard system, and the latest PTM
versions show a marked improvement in transfer speeds, compared with earlier releases.
The standard T390 system is supplied with KEY-ANALOG-4KHZ installed, which enables
4kHz or 8kHz bandwidth analog communication. Support for 2.5kHz analog bandwidth is
enabled by the purchase and installation of KEY-ANALOG-2.5KHZ.
2.1.2 Digital Mode
Digital Point to Multipoint support becomes available on a digital-enabled T390 system after
purchase and installation of KEY-PTM. Digital operating mode for a T390 system is enabled
by the purchase and installation of KEY-DIGITAL.
2.1.3 Mixed Mode
Mixed mode PTM, allowing mixed Analog and Digital mode links, is illustrated in Figure 3:

FIGURE 3: PTM MIXED MODE


With this configuration, the control system can reach all three RTU devices. The link closest
to the SCADA system must be operating in digital mode, while the most remote link may be
analog. All intermediate links can be either digital or analog, provided there is at most one
changeover, in the whole chain, from digital to analog.
T390/EN AP/B23 Application Note
Point to Multipoint (PTM) Configuration
Page 112/208 e-terragridcomT390

2.2 Star Topology


So far the discussion has assumed a “linear” layout of links, but this is not mandatory. A
simple star formation, as in Figure 4 may be used, or even multiple branching.

FIGURE 4: STAR FORMATION


Application Note T390/EN AP/B23
Point to Multipoint (PTM) Configuration
e-terragridcomT390 Page 113/208

3. SOFTWARE CONFIGURATION
This section describes the configuration procedure for PTM, in analog and digital modes.
Check the firmware before starting the configuration to make sure that the installed firmware
is version 4.1 or higher. If necessary, carry out a firmware upgrade, as described in the
Firmware and Key Upgrade chapter of the Application Note, T390/EN AP.
3.1 Analog Mode

FIGURE 5: CONFIGURATION WINDOW: MTU CHANNELS


Channel Activation panel
Click Enable Channel to make the MTU channel available in the system (disabled by
default).
Use the Splitting mode pull-down box to enable Point to Multipoint (PTM) facilities.

FIGURE 6: PTM MODE SELECTION


T390/EN AP/B23 Application Note
Point to Multipoint (PTM) Configuration
Page 114/208 e-terragridcomT390

The options, shown above in Figure 6, are as follows:

• None: Only Point to Point (PTP) communication on this channel (local devices only)

• Multi: Point to Multipoint (PTM) communication, includes local and remote RTUs.

• Single: PTM communication with remote RTUs only. This is a “pass-through” mode.
Note that PTM channels are assigned as adjacent pairs, with the following implications:

• The Splitting mode pull-down box only appears on the Channel Activation panels for
MTU1 and MTU3

• If Splitting mode|Single is selected for MTU1 or MTU3, then either MTU2 or MTU4,
respectively, is grayed out (i.e. is unavailable).

• Selecting Splitting mode|Multi for MTU1 or MTU3 automatically enables MTU2 or


MTU4, respectively.

• With Splitting mode|Multi selected for MTU1 or MTU3, the relevant RTU will be
connected to MTU2 or MTU4, respectively.
Channel speed panel
Select channel speed from the pull-down list. The options (bit/s) are 200, 300, 600 and 1200.
Show/Hide Analog Band
Click SHOW ANALOG BAND to display the current analog bandwidth settings in the panel
at the foot of the Configuration Window.

FIGURE 7: SHOW ANALOG BAND


Application Note T390/EN AP/B23
Point to Multipoint (PTM) Configuration
e-terragridcomT390 Page 115/208

In Figure 7, PTM mode Multi is selected in the MTU1 pane, and therefore MTU2 has
automatically been enabled. The band selected for MTU1 is displayed in the SHOW
ANALOG BAND panel. If the same band, or a narrower band, is selected for MTU2, the
band display in the MTU2 pane is the same as for MTU1, as can be seen in Figure 8.

FIGURE 8: MTU2 SAME BAND AS MULTI


T390/EN AP/B23 Application Note
Point to Multipoint (PTM) Configuration
Page 116/208 e-terragridcomT390

If the band selected for MTU2 is wider than that for the Multi, MTU1 in the example, then this
is visible in the Analog band display on the MTU2 pane, as illustrated in Figure 9:

FIGURE 9: MTU2 WITH WIDER BAND


3.2 Digital Mode

FIGURE 10: CONFIGURATION WINDOW


Application Note T390/EN AP/B23
Point to Multipoint (PTM) Configuration
e-terragridcomT390 Page 117/208

Channel Activation panel


Click Enable Channel to make the Data channel available (disabled by default).
If Use lock condition is enabled, the channel will be deactivated automatically when
transmission conditions are beyond the user-defined thresholds. The threshold values are
configured on the User Alarm pane. Use lock condition is disabled by default.
Use the Service number pull-down box to assign the same service number (from 0 to 63) at
both ends of the PLC link. Click Auto to allocate service numbers automatically; this is the
recommended setting.
Make a selection in the Splitting mode pull-down box to enable Point to Multipoint (PTM)
facilities, as in Figure 11.

FIGURE 11: SPLITTING MODE SELECTION


The PTM options are as follows:

• None: Only Point to Point (PTP) communication on this channel (local devices only)

• Multi:Point to Multipoint (PTM) communication, including an attached local RTU

• Single: PTM communication with remote RTUs only. This is a “pass-through” mode.
Note that PTM channels are assigned as adjacent pairs, with the following implications:

• The Splitting mode pull-down box only appears on the Channel Activation panels for
Data1 and Data3.

• If Splitting mode|Single is selected for Data1 or Data3, then either Data2 or Data4,
respectively, is grayed out (i.e. is unavailable).

• Selecting Splitting mode|Multi for Data1 or Data3 automatically enables Data2 or


Data4, respectively, but the only settable option is channel speed.

• With Splitting mode|Multi selected for Data1 or Data3, the relevant RTU will be
connected to Data2 or Data4, respectively.
Channel speed panel
Select the channel speed (default 2400 bits/s) from the pull-down list. Note that the same
speed must be set at both ends of the connection. The available speeds, in bits/s, are 200,
300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 14400, 19200, 28800, 38400.
T390/EN AP/B23 Application Note
Point to Multipoint (PTM) Configuration
Page 118/208 e-terragridcomT390

4. PERFORMANCE
The following table lists the minimum round-trip transfer time for each speed available in
Analog and Digital modes.

Analog Digital
200 b/s 53 39
300 b/s 37 30
600 b/s 24 28
1200 b/s 23 28
2400 b/s 24
4800 b/s 19
9600 b/s 19
14400 b/s 19
19200 b/s 17
28800 b/s 16
38400 b/s 16
Application Note T390/EN AP/B23

e-terragridcomT390 Page 119/208

DATA RETRIEVING FOR


ASSISTANCE
Application Note T390/EN AP/B23
Data Retrieving for Assistance
e-terragridcomT390 Page 121/208

CONTENTS

1. PRESENTATION 123

2. FIRST STEP: SYSTEM NOT READY 124


2.1 Startup Sequence Digital Mode 124
2.2 Synchronization state 124
2.3 Startup Sequence Analog Mode 125
2.4 Synchronization state 125

3. SECOND STEP: SYSTEM IS READY 130


T390/EN AP/B23 Application Note
Data Retrieving for Assistance
Page 122/208 e-terragridcomT390

MODIFICATIONS PAGE

VERSION DATE COMMENTS


A 05/04/2005 Original issue
B 15/01/2006 T390 products
C21 10/01/2011 Brand Format ALSTOM
A22 25/02/2011 Product release 5
A23 30/03/2011 Product release 6
B23 10/07/2012 Product release 6.1
Application Note T390/EN AP/B23
Data Retrieving for Assistance
e-terragridcomT390 Page 123/208

1. PRESENTATION
This document is a guide to retrieve data and information in case of technical problem with
the T390 equipment.
These data will be valuable for the assistance engineer to focus and repair the problem. It
must join an exhaustive description of the issue
This document is aimed to any final user
We can distinguish two types

• The system is not ready to work. The LED are not ok

• Ready to work but the system does not synchronise or the connection performance
are irregular
In case the first step must be performed.
If the performance is unsatisfactory, a focus must be made on the second point
T390/EN AP/B23 Application Note
Data Retrieving for Assistance
Page 124/208 e-terragridcomT390

2. FIRST STEP: SYSTEM NOT READY


We describe in this part the LED’s behaviour in working equipment
2.1 Startup Sequence Digital Mode
Step 1: system recognition

• After powering on the units, all the Leds of all the units will be ON during about 5
seconds, then they will all be OFF during 2 seconds.

• Then the red Leds "Internal Error" of the units will blink quickly until all the units have
been recognized.

• Then the "Internal errors" Leds will go OFF, and the "System OK" green Leds on all
the units will be ON (fix).

• The green Led indicating the Power on the amplifier unit is now ON (fix) [1/4 or 1/2 or
Full]. The led is blinking if the PeP limiter is not 100% in the configuration.

• The green Led Mode / Normal is now blinking fast on the PRCS unit.
Step 2: Amplifier synchronization
First, the "Line Fault" unit Led (Red) is ON (fix), and the "SNR Alarm" Led (Yellow) is blinking
slowly, then:

• The Line Fault Led must switch OFF (SNR Alarm always blinking)

• The SNR Alarm must go OFF after a variable delay (up to 15 seconds)
The amplifier is synchronized, and the AGC has reached a good level
Step 3: TDM synchronization
During this phase, the green Led "Mode / Normal" on the PRCS unit is always blinking fast.
When it stops blinking and go to a fix green, the equipment is fully synchronized.
2.2 Synchronization state
On AMP unit:

LED State
System OK Fix Green
TX power / (1/4 or 1/2 or Full) Fix Green
Power Supply / Logic Fix Green
Power Supply / Power Fix green
All others Off

On PRCS unit:

LED State
System OK Fix Green
Mode / Normal Fix Green
Power Supply / Main Fix Green
All others Off
Application Note T390/EN AP/B23
Data Retrieving for Assistance
e-terragridcomT390 Page 125/208

2.3 Startup Sequence Analog Mode


Step 1: system recognition

• After powering on the units, all the Leds of all the units will be ON during about 5
seconds, then they will all be OFF during 2 seconds.

• Then the red Leds "Internal Error" of the units will blink quickly until all the units have
been recognized.

• Then the "Internal errors" Leds will go OFF, and the "System OK" green Leds on all
the units will be ON (fix).

• The green Led indicating the Power on the amplifier unit is now ON (fix) [1/4 or 1/2 or
Full]. The led is blinking if the PeP limiter is not 100% in the configuration.

• The green Led Mode / Serv Local is now blinking fast on the PRCS unit.
Step 2: Amplifier synchronization
First, the "Line Fault" unit Led (Red) is ON (fix), and the "SNR Alarm" Led (Yellow) is blinking
slowly, then:

• The Line Fault Led must switch OFF (SNR Alarm always blinking)

• The SNR Alarm must go OFF after a variable delay (up to 15 seconds)
The amplifier is synchronized, and the AGC has reached a good level
Step 3: TDM synchronization
During this phase, the green Led "Mode / Serv Local" on the PRCS unit is always blinking
fast.
When it stops blinking and go to a fix green, the equipment is fully synchronized.
2.4 Synchronization state
On AMP unit:

LED State
System OK Fix Green
TX power / (1/4 or 1/2 or Full) Fix Green
Power Supply / Logic Fix Green
Power Supply / Power Fix green
All others Off

On PRCS unit:

LED State
System OK Fix Green
Mode / Normal Fix Green
Power Supply / Main Fix Green
All others Off
T390/EN AP/B23 Application Note
Data Retrieving for Assistance
Page 126/208 e-terragridcomT390

LED status

• Switch on the system

• Wait for about one minute

• Check the LED status

• If your equipment is not in the configuration we described above, fill the document:
Amplifier Unit

Colour Type of shining


LED
(RED/GREEN/YELLOW) (OFF/Fixed/blinking/fast Blinking)
Internal Error
System OK
Activity
Link
Line Fault
SNR Alarm
Remote
Local
Tx Power Alarm
TX power:
10W,20W,40W or full,
½, ¼,

Processing Unit

Color Type of shining


LED
(RED/GREEN/YELLOW) (OFF/Fixed/blinking/fast Blinking)
Internal Error
System OK
Activity
Link
Fallback Mode
User Alarm 1
User Alarm 2
IRIGB
Maint-Call
Serv 1
Serv 2
Serv 3
Application Note T390/EN AP/B23
Data Retrieving for Assistance
e-terragridcomT390 Page 127/208

Important things to check:


In case of TPx error, check if there is a TPx connected and if there is a TPx configuration in
the HMI.
In case of line fault check all the wire connections.
If internal error led is red, and if local or normal led after a couple of minutes is blinking,
check the carrier center TX and RX frequencies with HMI, check if both PLC got the same
configuration, and in any case, apply again the same configuration to the two PLC.
If there is no improvement, reboot the system, and apply the same configuration to the two
PLC.

Logs of Events
1. If possible, connect to the system through the IHM and check the status in the
Measurment window/System Diagnosis
Save it in a file called
“T390-Name_of_the_Link-D-SytemDiagnosis”
Name_of_the_link is an indication of the system (for instance, the station location)
D is M if the system is Master, S if the system is slave
2. Go the History Logging window int the PLC menu
T390/EN AP/B23 Application Note
Data Retrieving for Assistance
Page 128/208 e-terragridcomT390

• Retrieve the Data for each Rack

• Save each rack’s History Logging in a File called


“T390-Name_of_the_Link-D-HL-UNIT_NAME”
UNIT_NAME is Amplifier, Processing or Service
1. Repeat the operation with the Event Window:
Application Note T390/EN AP/B23
Data Retrieving for Assistance
e-terragridcomT390 Page 129/208

Save the files in


“T390-Name_of_the_Link-D-EV-UNIT_NAME”
Configuration Files
Go to the configuration Menu and Load the configuration

After Loading , save this configuration in a File called


“T390-Name_of_the_Link-D-Conf”
T390/EN AP/B23 Application Note
Data Retrieving for Assistance
Page 130/208 e-terragridcomT390

3. SECOND STEP: SYSTEM IS READY


In that case, Go the the measurement window

• Refresh the Line Window and Save it in a File called


“T390-Name_of_the_Link-D-Meas-Line”

• Refresh the BER Window and Save it in a File called


“T390-Name_of_the_Link-D-Meas-BER”

• Refresh the Constellation Window and Save it in a File called


“T390-Name_of_the_Link-D-Meas-Constellation”

• Refresh the Alarm Window and Save it in a File called


“T390-Name_of_the_Link-D-Meas-Alarm”

• Refresh the Data Recorder Window for Amplifier


and Save it in a File called “T390-Name_of_the_Link-D-Meas-Amp”

• Refresh the Data Recorder Window for processing


and Save it in a File called “T390-Name_of_the_Link-D-Meas-Proc”
Application Note T390/EN AP/B23

e-terragridcomT390 Page 131/208

INSTALLATION USER GUIDE


Application Note T390/EN AP/B23
Installation User Guide
e-terragridcomT390 Page 133/208

CONTENTS

1. FOREWORD 135
1.1 Standards - Norms 135
1.2 Links 136

2. CABINET INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS 137


2.1 Instructions relevant to the power supply 137
2.2 Electrical protection 138
2.3 Instructions relative to the thermal aspects 138
2.4 Instructions relative to the mechanical layout 139

3. WIRING INSTRUCTIONS 140


3.1 General principle for Telecom room wiring 140
3.2 Screens, Shielding 141
3.3 Grounding 141
3.4 LMU connection 142
3.5 Protection & galvanic isolation 142
T390/EN AP/B23 Application Note
Installation User Guide
Page 134/208 e-terragridcomT390

MODIFICATIONS PAGE

VERSION DATE COMMENTS


A 20/04/2005 Original file
B 20/01/2006 T390 products
C21 10/01/2011 Brand Format ALSTOM
A22 25/02/2011 Product release 5
A23 02/05/2011 Product release 6
B23 10/07/2012 Product release 6.1
Application Note T390/EN AP/B23
Installation User Guide
e-terragridcomT390 Page 135/208

1. FOREWORD
This document is focused to the T390 equipment, but covers also related equipments that
could be connected to, such as DIP teleprotection equipment, modems, protocols or
interface converters.
The T390 is a full range of products designed to cover the power utilities needs. The
complete project is suitable for conventional analog transmission & services as well as new
digital services as noted in the Cigré PLC report:
“Digital Power Line Carrier/WG 35.09/ August 2000”.
This document aims at giving some rules and guidelines to install properly T390 equipment
within a substation
Equipments covered by this document:

• T390

• Alstom LMU

• DIP

• Alstom OCM

• MD50 or equivalent modem


1.1 Standards - Norms

Name Comments
IEC 60495 1993 edition
IEC 60834-1 Edition 2.0 (1999-10)
Cigré report Digital Power Line Carrier/WG 35.09/ August 2000

IEC 60663 Manual for planning of (SSB) PLC systems: Part 1 PLC systems
(1980)
IEC TS 61000-6-5 Generic standards - immunity for power station and substation
environments
EN60950-1 Demonstrating compliance with the European Low Voltage Directive
EN60255-27 Demonstrating compliance with the European Low Voltage Directive
IEC ou EN 61000-6-4 Generic standards - Emission standard for industrial environments
EN 55011 limits of conducted radio disturbance
EN 55022 limits of radiated radio disturbance
UIT-T (V,X)
T390/EN AP/B23 Application Note
Installation User Guide
Page 136/208 e-terragridcomT390

1.2 Links
For more information, see related documents:

Document name Description


T390/EN GP T390 General Presentation
T390/EN OS T390 Overall System Description
T390/EN AM T390 Amplifier Description and Configuration
T390/EN AX T390 Extended Amplifier Description and Configuration
T390/EN PU T390 Processing Unit Description and Configuration
T390/EN AP T390 Application Note
– Connecting the HMI to T390
– LAN to LAN configuration
– Adjacent bands for 8+8KHZ
– Adjacent bands for 8+8KHZ (QAM+TPX°
– Filters settings
– Firmware upgrade
– Speech interface
– Point to Multipoint (PTM) Configuration
– Data retrieving for Assistance
– Installation User Guide
– Installation check Guide
– Manual for Superimposed mode
– DIP connection to T390
– HF Power Measurement Method
– Quick Start-up
T390/EN TP T390 TPI Description and Configuration
Application Note T390/EN AP/B23
Installation User Guide
e-terragridcomT390 Page 137/208

2. CABINET INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS

Before carrying out any work on the equipment, the user should be familiar with the
contents of the safety section, the technical data section and the ratings on the
equipment rating label.

2.1 Instructions relevant to the power supply


Main supply of T390 is 48Vdc (38 to 72Vdc).
Each piece of equipment shall be connected to 3 wire circuit breaker (+bat, -bat and
protective [earth] conductor terminal (PCT)). The PCT is marked on the rear of the T390 with
the symbol:

For all other equipments placed within the cubicle, such as Teleprotection, modems, the Star
supply scheme should be used for connection.
Use a separate circuit breaker to protect each system. In general application we will have:

• Circuit 1: T390 equipments (2 to 10 units)


=> Unipolar 10A 127Vdc (type Merlin Gerin C32H-DC)
• Circuit 2: DIP equipment
=> Unipolar 4A 127Vdc (type Merlin Gerin C32H-DC)
• Circuit 3: Modems and ancillaries equipments
=> Unipolar 10A 127Vdc (ancillaries equipments type Merlin Gerin C32H-DC)
• Other circuits if needed.
Node of star connection should be placed at the wiring input of the cubicle, close to ground
bar (earth connection).
The power supply cables could be unshielded inside the cubicle, if the cubicle is completely
shielded.
The power supply cables entering the cubicle must be shielded and the screen connected to
earth where they enter the cubicle. This is to ensure that the EMC and electrical isolation
design requirements are maintained.
Each cubicle should be powered by a separate cable from the main 48V battery source, with
always the same star scheme.
The cabinet cabling scheme is depicted below. In this figure, we could see:

• The protection devices placed closed to the arrival of cable (at the input of the cabinet)
• A solid copper bar to minimize the ground impedance at each point within the cabinet
and ensure that all equipment is at the same potential
• Equipment shall be connected to a 3 wire circuit breaker (+bat, -bat and protective
[earth] conductor)
• Each T390 unit shall be connected to the protective (earth) bar using a large cross
section braid. This shall be securely connected to the protective (earth) conductor
terminal (PCT) using an M4 screw and flat washer. The PCT is marked on the rear of
the T390 with the symbol:
T390/EN AP/B23 Application Note
Installation User Guide
Page 138/208 e-terragridcomT390

• A split ferrite sleeve, with snap fit plastic case should be fitted around the power
supply cable(s), either at the cable entry or between the input terminal and the circuit
breaker. This is to ensure that the EMC design requirements are maintained.

Cubicle

T390
Ground
AMPLIFIER
UNIT From circuit
Coax Bat
breaker
10A/127Vdc

T390 To circuit
SRV breakers
UNIT
P rotection
services

devices
User

-
+

Cubicle Ground

From From From


MDF Batterie LMU D0437ENa

2.2 Electrical protection

Using Manufacturer Reference


Battery protection devices Littlefuse V120ZA20
RF line protection devices Littlefuse V250LA40
Circuit breaker Merlin Gerin C32H-DC

2.3 Instructions relative to the thermal aspects


Leave at least 1U space between each unit of T390 equipment and from other ones. This
space could be useful for wire fixing systems.
Place a FAN equipment at the top of the cabinet to generate a continuous air flow through all
PLC units to equalise the temperature in the cabinet.
It is possible to insert a thermostat (set to 45°C) in the FAN supply circuit, if the forced
ventilation is not always required due to room air conditioning.
Application Note T390/EN AP/B23
Installation User Guide
e-terragridcomT390 Page 139/208

2.4 Instructions relative to the mechanical layout


There is not a strong constraint relative to the mechanical disposition of equipment inside the
cabinet, but we recommend the following layout:

In case of use of additional AMPX amplifier for 80W we recommend to 2U spacing with the
main amplifier
Amplifier radiator being on the left side ( front view ) it is recommended to put the more
cooling on this side and like insure an air flow in the cabinet
T390/EN AP/B23 Application Note
Installation User Guide
Page 140/208 e-terragridcomT390

3. WIRING INSTRUCTIONS
3.1 General principle for Telecom room wiring
Use only shielded & closed cabinet for all telecom equipments, and use separate power
supply wires for each cabinet in the room.
Use large section cable for power supply connection to ensure all equipment is at the same
potential. If necessary, double or triple the power supply cable between the battery charger
and each cabinet.
Use large copper braid for all ground connection.
Connections should be kept as short as possible.
Create distinct conduits for each kind of signal level & frequencies. For instance, use
separate conduit for:

• Conduit 1: power supply cables (continuous voltage 24 to 127Vdc)

• Conduit 2: RF line

• Conduit 3: telephony, pbx, modems, telegraphs wiring

• Conduit 4: connection between teleprotection and protection

• Conduit 5: General 230Vac distribution


Take care about the curving of cables, and avoid bending the cables
Care about the cable environment in the conduit:

• Presence of water or other liquids

• Contact with aggressive of corrosive substances


Application Note T390/EN AP/B23
Installation User Guide
e-terragridcomT390 Page 141/208

3.2 Screens, Shielding


All connections should be properly shielded, and the shield well connected to earth.
3.3 Grounding

Ground cable sections to be used according to associated current values:

CABLE SECTION mm² ASSOCIATED CURRENT ADC


16 I < 50
25 50 < I < 70
70 130 < I < 160
95 160 < I < 180
120 180 < I < 1000

NOTE: The indicated sections are related to a maximum length of 50 m.

Copper bar

PLC
Unit

Terminal Block

Station
Ground Grid

Ground connections:
By Wire 16 mm²
or copper braid < 30 cm
D0087ENa

FIGURE 3-1: DC SUPPLY AND RF CABLE CONNECTIONS


T390/EN AP/B23 Application Note
Installation User Guide
Page 142/208 e-terragridcomT390

3.4 LMU connection


Approved coupling boxes to be used with T390

Name Manufacturer Reference Notes


LMU ALSTOM LMU-1: master box Highly recommended
LMU-2: phase/phase
GC305 ALSTOM GC305-1: master box
GC305-2: phase/phase
ALSPA 194 11x ALSTOM 194-111: master box Obsolete product.
194-112: phase/phase Not recommended for digital
application

We highly recommend using a LMU coupling box with the T390 PLC equipments.
We recommend a phase to phase connection whenever is possible.
3.5 Protection & galvanic isolation
Except the RF line, already discussed, the various connections to the PLC should follow the
following rules:

• All connection inside the T390 cabinet are direct (without isolation) through shielded
cables

• All connection within the telecom room should be properly shielded, made as short as
possible, put far away from other kind of signal to avoid crosstalk or disturbance
(power cables, HF, high voltage cables, etc)

• All connection that exit the telecom room should distinctly studied and additional rules
applied:

⇒ Care about the voltage reference or each side, especially if different batteries are
used

⇒ Add galvanic isolation (such as transformers) in case of long distance, earth


equipotential breaks, etc
Always use for instance a galvanic isolation for connection to external substation networks.
Application Note T390/EN AP/B23

e-terragridcomT390 Page 143/208

INSTALLATION CHECK
GUIDE
Application Note T390/EN AP/B23
Installation Check Guide
e-terragridcomT390 Page 145/208

CONTENTS

1. FOREWORD 147
1.1 Scope 147
1.2 References 147

2. GENERAL SCHEME 148

3. SETTING STEPS 149


T390/EN AP/B23 Application Note
Installation Check Guide
Page 146/208 e-terragridcomT390

MODIFICATIONS PAGE

VERSION DATE COMMENTS


A 19/03/2006 Original file
C21 10/01/2011 Brand Format ALSTOM
A22 25/02/2011 Product release 5
A23 02/05/2011 Product release 6
B23 10/07/2012 Product release 6.1
Application Note T390/EN AP/B23
Installation Check Guide
e-terragridcomT390 Page 147/208

1. FOREWORD
1.1 Scope
This document is a quick start guide for the T390 installation. It is useful to get the best
performances of your system.
This document is aimed at anyone who has to set T390 equipment, that is to say:

• Customers who have to integrate and configure their own system

• System integrators

• Field engineer
This document is valid for the T390 products.
1.2 References
For more informations, see related documents:

Document name Description


T390/EN GP T390 General Presentation
T390/EN OS T390 Overall System Description
T390/EN AM T390 Amplifier Description and Configuration
T390/EN AX T390 Extended Amplifier Description and Configuration
T390/EN PU T390 Processing Unit Description and Configuration
T390/EN AP T390 Application Note
– Connecting the HMI to T390
– LAN to LAN configuration
– Adjacent bands for 8+8KHZ
– Adjacent bands for 8+8KHZ (QAM+TPX°
– Filters settings
– Firmware upgrade
– Speech interface
– Point to Multipoint (PTM) Configuration
– Data retrieving for Assistance
– Installation User Guide
– Installation check Guide
– Manual for Superimposed mode
– DIP connection to T390
– HF Power Measurement Method
– Quick Start-up
T390/EN TP T390 TPI Description and Configuration
T390/EN AP/B23 Application Note
Installation Check Guide
Page 148/208 e-terragridcomT390

2. GENERAL SCHEME
The following diagram is an overview of all the steps to perform for a complete T390 setting.
Every step is detailed below. Check the validity of the step before going to the next one

START

EQUIPMENT
RECEPTION

HARDWARE
MOUNTING

CONNECTION

AMPLIFIER
SETTING

LINE
SETTINGS

TP/ANALOG
CHANNEL

SERVICES

NEWORK
SERVICES

CHECK LIST

D0468ENa
Application Note T390/EN AP/B23
Installation Check Guide
e-terragridcomT390 Page 149/208

3. SETTING STEPS
1 SYSTEM RECEPTION

START

1. CHECKING: a quick check must ensure that


CHECKING
there is no visible damage due to the
EQUIPMENT
shipment and that the test report is ok. The
RECEPTION test report also provides the IP of the rack
SYSTEM
COHERENCY 2. SYSTEM COHERENCY: Each system is
composed by two or more racks. The test
HARDWARE
report gives the serial number of one
MOUNTING system. They must be recompose
STEP OK?
identically

D0469ENa

2 HARDWARE MOUNTING

EQUIPMENT 1. CABINET INSTALLATION: Precautions


RECEPTION
CABINET
must be taken, especially for grounding.
INSTALLATION Refer to the T4390_EN_AP Installation User
guide for details

HARDWARE
2. SYSTEM INSTALLATION: The wiring for
MOUNTING SYSTEM power supply, Line , LVDS cable are
INSTALLATION
described in the chapter T390/EN OS.
LVDS cable can be connected/disconnected
only when the equipment is switched
STEP OK?
CONNECTION off.

You can switch on the systems


D0470ENa

3 CONNECTION

HARDWARE The I.P. of each rack is written on the test report.


MOUNTING If not, the default I.P. is 10.22.171.200
PC CONFIGURATION
1. PC CONFIGURATION: follow the instruction
of the TS-003
2. CONNECTION: If the system is mounted
CONNECTION
CONNECTION correctly, by connecting to one of the rack,
you can access to the whole system
3. KEY INSTALLING: install the keys
KEY
INSTALLING
according to the option you chose.
You can check it directly in the menu
AMPLIFIER HELP, ABOUT, INSTALLED KEYS
SETTING

STEP OK?
If you only detect one rack at the connection,
check the coherency of the system and the
software release.

D0471ENa
T390/EN AP/B23 Application Note
Installation Check Guide
Page 150/208 e-terragridcomT390

4 AMPLIFIER SETTING

CONNECTION
1. IHM CONFIGURATION: configure ONLY
IHM configuration the amplifier rack, in order to set the
frequencies (TX, RX) and the transmission
power. Uncheck the option Enable Amplifier
in the Misc and alarm tab
AMPLIFIER
SETTING Filter configuration 2. FILTER CONFIGURATION: Use a level
generator with a selective meter or a
spectral analyzer adapted to 75Ω to
measure the response.

LINE STEP OK?


SETTINGS
Check the option to enable the amplifier in the
configuration window

D0472ENa
Application Note T390/EN AP/B23
Installation Check Guide
e-terragridcomT390 Page 151/208

5 LINE SETTINGS
1. IN LINE TX POWER: The global Tx power
level must be adjusted to the desired value.
With a selective voltmeter, measure the level
of the FSK directly at the output of the
amplifier (if necessary, use an attenuator),
AMPLIFIER
SETTING
Tx power the FSK level is , by default, 22dB under the
PEP. Adjust the level (HF ADJUST) to get
the right value.
2. FREQUENCY PRECISION: In the
Frequency maintenance tool, go to OFFLINE
precision MAINTENANCE and send a tone a 0Hz, -
20dB. It will be emitted at the center of the
band. Check the frequency precision with
the selective voltmeter and correct the
Hybrid
rejection
emission frequency in the configuration
window if necessary. Keep the tone for the
LINE
SETTINGS next step
3. HYBRID REJECTION: connect the
Hybrid selective voltmeter to the test point of the
attenuation hybrid board in the amplifier unit- and tune
the hybrid to get the minimum reinjection
(see T390_EN_AM for details).

WARNING: This tuning has to BE performed on


SNR computation line
TP/ANALOG 4. SNR COMPUTATION: Scan the line and
CHANNEL
find the quieter frequency band to measure
the noise, this is inband by default but you
can also choose to measure outband
STEP OK? At the end of this step: the system amplifier must
synchronise: in the measure window, you should
D0473ENa get RUNNING in the status of the Medium
training of the System Diagnosis
T390/EN AP/B23 Application Note
Installation Check Guide
Page 152/208 e-terragridcomT390

6 ANALOG CHANNEL

LINE
SETTINGS
HMI
CONFIGURATION
If you do not have any analog band, go directly
to the next step
The main guideline for this step is TS-018 app
TP/ANALOG
Teleprotection/
note
CHANNEL
Analog device 1. HMI CONFIGURATION: enable the analog
aligning channel on the T390 HMI, check the band
allocation
2. ANALOG DEVICE: configure the device to
get the desired levels on R.F. and on A.F.
SERVICES
band
STEP OK?

D0474ENa

7 DIGITAL CHANNEL

In this step, the reference manual are NT-


003.pdf and NT-004.pdf
TP/ANALOG
CHANNEL
1. HMI CONFIGURATION: Configure the HMI
DIGITAL in order to get the desired constellation and
SYNCHRONISATION disable all the services (the used band must
be null). Apply, reboot and wait for the digital
synchronisation(In the diagnosis tab, the
QAM training status must be running)
SERVICES SERVICES 2. SERVICES CONFIGURATION: Add the
CONFIGURATION
services in the HMI. Check that the
coherency number is equal on both sides.
3. SERVICES OPTION: Add the options of
SERVICES synchronisation like
OPTION
the alarms triggers,
NETWORK the fallback options,
SERVICES the lock on bad line,
STEP OK? the RECORDER,
the DATA RECORDER trigger

D0475ENa
Application Note T390/EN AP/B23
Installation Check Guide
e-terragridcomT390 Page 153/208

8 NETWORK SERVICES

SERVICES

For this step, the reference document is TS-


004.pdf
LAN2LAN 1. LAN2LAN: follow the instruction of the TS-
004 in order to configure correctly the
NETWORK
SERVICES LAN2LAN access. It also implies the remote
access and the remote connectivity of the
SNMP access.
SNMP 2. SNMP: configure by the HMI in order to get
the desired number of traps. Unplug the
CHECK LIST
LVDS cable in order to provoke an alarm in
order to check in your software if the traps
are correctly configured
STEP OK?

D0476ENa
T390/EN AP/B23 Application Note
Installation Check Guide
Page 154/208 e-terragridcomT390
Application Note T390/EN AP/B23

e-terragridcomT390 Page 155/208

MANUAL FOR
SUPERIMPOSED MODE
Application Note T390/EN AP/B23
Manual for Superimposed Mode
e-terragridcomT390 Page 157/208

CONTENTS

1. FOREWORD 159
1.1 Scope 159
1.2 Links 159

2. DISCUSSION ABOUT THE CHOICE OF THE TRANSMISSION MODE 160

3. PRECAUTIONS 162
3.1 Line adaptation 162
3.2 AGC dynamic 162
3.3 Line attenuation 162

4. ADDITIONAL FEATURES 163


4.1 Fallback 163
4.2 Teleprotection 163

5. DISCUSSION ABOUT THE INSTALLATION 164


5.1 The power in the reception line 164
5.1.1 Transmission power 164
5.1.2 The reception attenuation 164
5.2 Rejection Capacity 164
T390/EN AP/B23 Application Note
Manual for Superimposed Mode
Page 158/208 e-terragridcomT390

MODIFICATIONS PAGE

VERSION DATE COMMENTS


A 13/04/2006 Original file
C21 10/01/2011 Brand Format ALSTOM
A22 25/02/2011 Product release 5
A23 02/05/2011 Product release 6
B23 10/07/2012 Product release 6.1
Application Note T390/EN AP/B23
Manual for Superimposed Mode
e-terragridcomT390 Page 159/208

1. FOREWORD
1.1 Scope
This document handles about the Superimposed Mode. This configuration is helpful when
you have a single band available for TX/RX.
The following paragraphs are pieces of advice to make the decision between the separated
mode and the superimposed mode.
This document gives some precautions about the use of superimposed mode
It also presents some installation rules in order to get the best performance on line.
This document is aimed at anyone who has to set T390 equipment on line, that is to say:

• Customers who have to integrate and configure their own system


• System integrators
• Field engineer
This document is valid for the product release 6.1 and later. It includes the use of differential
hybrid.
1.2 Links
For more information, see related documents:

Document name Description


T390/EN GP T390 General Presentation
T390/EN OS T390 Overall System Description
T390/EN AM T390 Amplifier Description and Configuration
T390/EN AX T390 Extended Amplifier Description and Configuration
T390/EN PU T390 Processing Unit Description and Configuration
T390/EN AP T390 Application Note
– Connecting the HMI to T390
– LAN to LAN configuration
– Adjacent bands for 8+8KHZ
– Adjacent bands for 8+8KHZ (QAM+TPX°
– Filters settings
– Firmware upgrade
– Speech interface
– Point to Multipoint (PTM) Configuration
– Data retrieving for Assistance
– Installation User Guide
– Installation check Guide
– Manual for Superimposed mode
– DIP connection to T390
– HF Power Measurement Method
– Quick Start-up
T390/EN TP T390 TPI Description and Configuration
T390/EN AP/B23 Application Note
Manual for Superimposed Mode
Page 160/208 e-terragridcomT390

2. DISCUSSION ABOUT THE CHOICE OF THE TRANSMISSION MODE


The choice of a transmission mode for the PLC depends on the band needs and on the line
bandwidth availability.
Once the customer demand is totally defined, two factors must be considered to match the
requirements:

• The QAM bandwidth

• The encoder
A simple formula to calculate the available bitrate in function of these criteria is

B = 0 .8 × BW × K
With Bw the QAM bandwidth in Hz
K function of the encoder: 2 for QAM4
4 for QAM16 and TCM32
6 for QAM64 and TCM128
8 for QAM256
10 for QAM1024
For instance, for 16 kHz of QAM64, the gross bit rate is B=0.8x16000x6=76800 bit/s
Thus, for the same encoder, see next figure, the superimposed mode saves half the band to
reach the same bit rate

SUPERIMPOSED SEPARATED
MODE MODE
INTERBAND

RX
TX RX TX

BW BW BW
D0477ENa

FIGURE 2-1: COMPARISON BETWEEN THE BANDWIDTH IN SEPARATED MODE AND IN


SUPERIMPOSED MODE
But the choice is not so simple. The superimposed mode implies an echo cancellation and
there are many consequences:

• The reception gets the whole signal. The transmission signal is more likely to be
higher than the reception signal, which means that the AGC reference will be the Tx.
The reception signal dynamic will be lower than in separated mode.

• The synchronisation is sequential for the superimposed mode. The system trains first
one side and after the other side. Furthermore, an training of the echo canceller is
necessary.
In separated mode, the training is contemporary for both sides.
For these reasons the synchronisation time is far quicker in separated mode (60s
against 100s)

• The resynchronisation time is also different in both cases. The quick resynchronisation
is really fast in separated mode(less than 1s). In superimposed mode, a readaption of
the echo canceller is necessary, which implies a longer delay for resynchronisation
(near 8s)
Application Note T390/EN AP/B23
Manual for Superimposed Mode
e-terragridcomT390 Page 161/208

• The performance depends directly on the capacity for the Echo canceller to cancel the
own transmission. Obviously, the Line attenuation influence will be really critical:
For a 40dB cancellation, the disturbing due to the own transmission will imply a SNR
of
20dB for a line Attenuation of 20dB
30dB for a line Attenuation of 10dB
The good adaptation to the line is also a really important factor for the echo cancellation.
Some simple rules can be deduced from all these considerations:
1. If there is no band occupation issue, the separated mode must be preferred
2. In good conditions, the performances (SNR Vs BER) are equals in separated mode
and in superimposed mode but the bandwidth is halved
3. In case of disturbing (line changes, spikes), the resynchronisation is faster in
separated mode
4. In bad conditions, like an high line attenuation or a bad adaptation, the superimposed
mode is not indicated.
T390/EN AP/B23 Application Note
Manual for Superimposed Mode
Page 162/208 e-terragridcomT390

3. PRECAUTIONS
Two major precautions must be taken before deciding to set a PLC on line in superimposed
mode:
3.1 Line adaptation
The use of the system implies a tuning of the Hybrid transformer. The tuning consists in
adapting the transmission to the line conditions (impedance, capacity). In case of poor line,
especially for the short line, the impedance is too tough and too varying to reach a good
tuning. The rejection of the transmission into the reception is very high and the system is not
able of synchronising.
In a simple way,

If the line attenuation is higher than the transformer rejection,


the system may not synchronise
3.2 AGC dynamic
The AGC (Automatic Gain Control) function is compensating the line attenuation.
The only limitation is the saturation of the A/D converter.
In superimposed mode, the own transmission power provokes a risk of saturation in the
reception line. The AGC is decreased (respect to a separated mode in the same line
conditions).
The main nuisance could stand in the analog channel. The reception level is decreased in
case of high power in the reception line. The signal in reception could be lower than the level
configured by HMI.
In that case a last tuning can be made in the HMI after installation
3.3 Line attenuation
For obvious problems of rejection, it is not recommended to use the superimposed mode for
line attenuation over 30dB.
Application Note T390/EN AP/B23
Manual for Superimposed Mode
e-terragridcomT390 Page 163/208

4. ADDITIONAL FEATURES
Most of the cases, the performance in separated mode and in superimposed mode are
similar but two features are affected.
4.1 Fallback
The fallback mode is an optional feature that allows a encoder switching in case of episodic
bad line. The performance criterion is the switching time.
In superimposed mode as in separate mode, the switching time is less than 15s.
4.2 Teleprotection
In teleprotection mode, during a command emission, the QAM is turned off in order to get the
maximum power for the command transmission signal.
The recovery time is quite short in separated mode as in separate mode, about a few
seconds.
T390/EN AP/B23 Application Note
Manual for Superimposed Mode
Page 164/208 e-terragridcomT390

5. DISCUSSION ABOUT THE INSTALLATION


Two factors are critical for the system capacity of synchronising:

⇒ The power in the reception line

⇒ The rejection capacity


5.1 The power in the reception line
5.1.1 Transmission power
In superimposed mode, the choice of the transmission power is only dependent on the noise
in band:
The attenuation is not a decisive criterion. Actually, any power choice (over 2W) should be
sufficient for the line attenuation recommended (see paragraph 3.3).
Thus, the transmission power should only be chose in function of the noise level.
The transmission power should guarantee a SNR sufficient to avoid unacceptable BER
(SeeT390/EN GP)
In absence of noise, a power of 10W ensures the best performances for the system
5.1.2 The reception attenuation
Once, the transmission power is chosen, the reception attenuator should follow the table
instructions:

Transmission Power Reception Attenuator


40w 21dB
20w 18dB
10w 15dB
5w 12dB

For the other power choice, an interpolation of this table values gives a good estimation of
the attenuator best value
5.2 Rejection Capacity
As said above, the rejection attenuation is a really critical factor to get the best performance.
To reach this scope, it is really important to tune the Hybrid transformer to the line
conditions.
The recommendations are
1. Measure the rejection at the center of the QAM band
2. Adapt the line capacity by moving the capacitors jumpers (see T390/EN AM for
details)
3. Adapt the varistor to get the best rejection
The difference between the transmitted signal level measured at the output of the system
(balanced output or unbalanced output) should be minimum of 20dB
If the rejection is lower than 20dB, it could jeopardise the system synchronisation.

So the rejection tuning must be performed with the best care.


Application Note T390/EN AP/B23

e-terragridcomT390 Page 165/208

DIP CONNECTION
TO T390
Application Note T390/EN AP/B23
DIP Connection to PLC
e-terragridcomT390 Page 167/208

CONTENTS

1. FOREWORD 169

2. INSTRUCTIONS RELATIVE TO THE CABINET INSTALLATION 170

3. INSTRUCTIONS RELATIVE TO WIRING 171

4. INSTRUCTIONS RELATIVE TO FIRMWARE CONFIGURATION 172


4.1 Safety presence and alarms 172
4.1.1 PLC side 172
4.1.1.1 Overview 172
4.1.2 DIP side 174
4.1.2.1 External Alarm 174
4.1.2.2 Alive 174
4.2 Configuration of teleprotection Levels 175
4.2.1 PLC side 175
4.2.2 DIP side 176
4.2.2.1 Mode Choice 176
4.2.2.2 Dual Tone Mode 176
4.2.2.3 Reception 177
4.2.2.4 Single tone Mode 178
4.2.2.5 Enhanced Mode 179
4.2.2.6 Normal Mode 180
4.2.2.7 Reception 181

5. ANNEXES 182
5.1 Physical units 182
5.1.1 Definition 182
5.1.2 Conversion formulas 182
5.1.2.1 Voltage 182
5.1.2.2 Power 182
5.1.2.3 Power-Voltage conversion 182
5.2 Standard TPHF levels table configuration 183
5.3 How to compute the max power output of DIP 184
5.3.1 Single tone case 184
5.3.2 Dual tone case 184
5.4 Why using the « boost » option and how 184
T390/EN AP/B23 Application Note
DIP Connection to PLC l
Page 168/208 e-terragridcomT390

MODIFICATIONS PAGE

VERSION DATE COMMENTS


A 20/04/2005 Original file
B 23/11/2005 Changes in the wiring
C 30/09/2009 Update with Dual tone
D 30/08/2010 Update chap; 3.1.1.1. – optional alarms are now
compulsory
C21 10/01/2011 Brand Format ALSTOM
A22 25/02/2011 Product release 5
A23 30/03/2011 Product release 6
B23 10/07/2012 Product release 6.1
Application Note T390/EN AP/B23
DIP Connection to PLC
e-terragridcomT390 Page 169/208

1. FOREWORD
The T390 is a full range of products designed to cover the power utilities needs. The
complete project is suitable for conventional analog transmission & services as well as new
digital services as noted in the Cigré PLC report:
“Digital Power Line Carrier/WG 35.09/ August 2000”.
This document aims at giving some rules and guidelines to install properly a DIP
teleprotection equipment to a T390 system with a substation.
The DIP equipment shall be configured obviously in analog mode to be connected properly
to the PLC equipment.
The document covers the hardware wiring scheme and the firmware general configuration.
For special application types, see the suited application note.
For more information, see related documents:

Document name Description


T390/EN GP T390 General Presentation
T390/EN OS T390 Overall System Description
T390/EN AM T390 Amplifier Description and Configuration
T390/EN AX T390 Extended Amplifier Description and Configuration
T390/EN PU T390 Processing Unit Description and Configuration
T390/EN AP T390 Application Note
– Connecting the HMI to T390
– LAN to LAN configuration
– Adjacent bands for 8+8KHZ
– Adjacent bands for 8+8KHZ (QAM+TPX°
– Filters settings
– Firmware upgrade
– Speech interface
– Point to Multipoint (PTM) Configuration
– Data retrieving for Assistance
– Installation User Guide
– Installation check Guide
– Manual for Superimposed mode
– DIP connection to T390
– HF Power Measurement Method
– Quick Start-up
T390/EN TP T390 TPI Description and Configuration
T390/EN AP/B23 Application Note
DIP Connection to PLC l
Page 170/208 e-terragridcomT390

2. INSTRUCTIONS RELATIVE TO THE CABINET INSTALLATION


See the general installation guide (T390/EN AP user guide) for complete details about DIP
installation in the cabinet.
It is recommended to supply the DIP with a distinct circuit from the PLC equipment, and a
separate circuit breaker. In case of redundancy of power supplies, we recommend to use the
dual input option of the DIP equipment and use of distinct supply circuits for each.
We recommend placing the DIP equipment under the PLC, in order that the warm air flow
produced by the PLC amplifier does not flow through the Teleprotection equipment.
Application Note T390/EN AP/B23
DIP Connection to PLC
e-terragridcomT390 Page 171/208

3. INSTRUCTIONS RELATIVE TO WIRING


The General principle for Datacom equipment wiring is fully described in the T390/EN AP
Installation User guide document.
The objective of this document is to give additional details about some functionality of
DIP/T390 equipment which require specific wiring.

FIGURE 1: TELEPROTECTION WIRING SCHEME WITH T390-PRCS


This wiring scheme is highly recommended especially if the power supplies of both
equipments are connected to separate circuit breakers.
If one power supply fails, the alarm on the other device must be able to detect this failure.
That is why each alarm input must be supplied its own circuit breaker.
T390/EN AP/B23 Application Note
DIP Connection to PLC l
Page 172/208 e-terragridcomT390

4. INSTRUCTIONS RELATIVE TO FIRMWARE CONFIGURATION


4.1 Safety presence and alarms
4.1.1 PLC side
4.1.1.1 Overview
The following alarm must be configured to prevent unknown effects in case of hardware
failures of the material.
The alarm must be configured to drive the Teleprotection alarm input:

• TPX Error: This alarm is triggered when the PLC is not operational.

• AGC High level Rx: The alarm is triggered when the AGC level get over the High
Threshold

• AGC Low level Rx: The alarm is triggered when the AGC level goes over the low
Threshold
In this case, the AGC threshold must be tuned properly, once the PLC is synchronised.
The recommendation is NOMINAL LEVEL +15dB for High Threshold
NOMINAL LEVEL –15dB for low level
Optionally, we may add the following PLC alarms:

• Line Fault: This alarm is triggered when the remote FSK is lost.
Use the dedicated alarm output to check the alarm state.
The firmware settings are depicted here after.
Application Note T390/EN AP/B23
DIP Connection to PLC
e-terragridcomT390 Page 173/208

Firmware Release 4.x, 5.x & 6.x

FIGURE 2: TPX ERROR FLAG

FIGURE 3: AGC HIGH/LOW LEVEL FLAGS


T390/EN AP/B23 Application Note
DIP Connection to PLC l
Page 174/208 e-terragridcomT390

4.1.2 DIP side


4.1.2.1 External Alarm
This alarm will be commanded by the T390 alarm relays. The Major alarm must be on during
all the duration of an hardware failure (remote DIP or PLC).
The alarm will be off immediately (configuration: 0s) after PLC alarm relay switch.

4.1.2.2 Alive
The Alive signal from the DIP is a flag that automatically is switched ON as soon as the DIP
device is alive, even if the link is not operating correctly.
Application Note T390/EN AP/B23
DIP Connection to PLC
e-terragridcomT390 Page 175/208

4.2 Configuration of teleprotection Levels


4.2.1 PLC side

FIGURE 4: TPX WINDOW LEVELS

• The safety presence must absolutely be activated so that the PLC can react in case
of DIP Hardware failure

• The PLC must be in that way (TP HF application)

− Guard level: The guard level is –6dBm on the PLC input/output (TP interface on
P4). Tune the guard level to match this value. The Guard BAR displays the RF
level of the guard.

− Command level: The command level must make use of the maximum power of the
PLC. For this reason, the combination of the Max TP output level with the boost
mode must get the PEP on the RF command level Bar in output. In this case
2dB is the maximum authorized for 40w configuration.

• The following Output Gain must be set to get the same level at the input and output,
the example shows one frequency at -9dBm in AF (Audio Frequency=low frequency
level) is corresponding to 23dBm at the RF (Radio frequency=High frequency
level)to get it at -9dBm set the “Output Gain” on +12.
T390/EN AP/B23 Application Note
DIP Connection to PLC l
Page 176/208 e-terragridcomT390

FIGURE 5: ADJUSTMENTS

• “Internal Guard”, possibility to use TP in mute mode, in that case the teleprotection
must base its guard on the frequency of signalling of the speech configured on band 1.

• The “Max TP Output Level” and “RF Level” sliders are only for simulation levels.

4.2.2 DIP side


4.2.2.1 Mode Choice
The Dual Tone mode is designed to transmit the commands always at the maximum power
available. It offers a fast application but the allocated band for teleprotection can not be
shared with another service
The single tone allows the multiplexing with another service
4.2.2.2 Dual Tone Mode
The first bandwidth is 300-1900.
The source is internal (generated by the DIP and not by the PLC in case of TPHF utilization)
In Dual Tone mode,

• At the most, always two frequencies can be transmitted simultaneously.

• In such a case, the magnitudes of the tones are halved.

FIGURE 6: DIP TRANSMISSION LEVELS


Application Note T390/EN AP/B23
DIP Connection to PLC
e-terragridcomT390 Page 177/208

4.2.2.3 Reception

FIGURE 7: DIP RECEPTION LEVELS

The “Automatic Adjust” must be performed to match with “Output Gain” 12 Db.
In this example -6,39dBm is corresponding to 0dBr reception level and PLC will be
transparent.

FIGURE 8: AUTOMATIC ADJUST


T390/EN AP/B23 Application Note
DIP Connection to PLC l
Page 178/208 e-terragridcomT390

4.2.2.4 Single tone Mode


The normal mode and the enhanced mode can be chosen for the application with PLC but
the system best matches in the enhanced mode.
The enhanced mode is designed to transmit the commands always at the maximum power
available.
Application Note T390/EN AP/B23
DIP Connection to PLC
e-terragridcomT390 Page 179/208

4.2.2.5 Enhanced Mode


The best bandwidth is 300-3400.
The source is internal (generated by the DIP and not by the PLC)
The guard Level must be –22dBm to match with the PLC configuration.
The command level must be –12dBm to match with the maximum power available.
In enhanced mode,

• At the most, two commands can be transmitted simultaneously.

• In such a case, the magnitude of the tones are halved.


This is the reason why the magnitude of each command can reach the maximum
power available, either –12dBm
T390/EN AP/B23 Application Note
DIP Connection to PLC l
Page 180/208 e-terragridcomT390

4.2.2.6 Normal Mode


The best bandwidth is 300-3400.
The source is internal (generated by the DIP and not by the PL)
The guard Level must be –22dBm to match with the PLC configuration.
The maximum level is –12dBm (PLC configuration).
In the worst case, we have four commands simultaneously. If we suppose that we have the
same magnitude, we get 4 times the single tone magnitude for the PEP.
So have to send the single tone with magnitude ¼ of the PEP, either 12dB under –12dBm
The magnitude of each tone will be –24dBm
Application Note T390/EN AP/B23
DIP Connection to PLC
e-terragridcomT390 Page 181/208

4.2.2.7 Reception
The reception bandwidth must be set equal to the transmission bandwidth.
The guard signal is equal to the output of the PLC, either –22dBm.
The command Vs guard ratio must be tuned to the maximum: 6dB
T390/EN AP/B23 Application Note
DIP Connection to PLC l
Page 182/208 e-terragridcomT390

5. ANNEXES
5.1 Physical units
5.1.1 Definition
dBm: a term expressing an electrical power level, referenced to 1 mill watt
(i.e., 0 dBm = 1 mW).
dBu: a means of expressing voltage referenced so that 0 dBu equals 0.775 volts,
regardless of impedance. One mW of power is dissipated if 0.775 volts is applied
to a 600-ohm load, so when the load impedance is 600 ohms, 0 dBu = 0 dBm
dBV: a means of expressing voltage, referenced so that 0 dBV equals 1-volt RMS,
regardless of impedance.
5.1.2 Conversion formulas
5.1.2.1 Voltage

U
U ( dBv ) = 20 log10 ( )
U0
With:

• U0=1V

• U in volt
5.1.2.2 Power

P
P( dBm) = 10 log10 ( )
P0
With:

• P0=0.001W

• P in watt
5.1.2.3 Power-Voltage conversion


P=
Zc
With:

• U: voltage in volt

• Zc: Impedance of the interface

• P: power in Watt
So,
P ( dBm)

P(dBm) = 10 log10 ( )←
⎯→U = PO Z C ×10 20
PoZc
Application Note T390/EN AP/B23
DIP Connection to PLC
e-terragridcomT390 Page 183/208

5.2 Standard TPHF levels table configuration


The following settings apply to a TPHF application with no other service on PLC and
TP on dual tone.
All level tolerance must be ±10%.

F1 TO F7 COMMAND
POWER SETTLED FSK PEP-22dBm GUARD 12dB BOOST 12dB BOOST
not INCLUDED not INCLUDED

5W/37dBm/19,37V 15dBm/1,54V 17dBm/1,94V 14dBm/1,37V 17dBm/1,94V

10W/40dBm/27,39V 18dBm/2,18V 20dBm/2,74V 17dBm/1,94V 20dBm/2,74V

20W/43dBm/38,73V 21dBm/3,07V 23dBm/3,87V 20dBm/2,74V 23dBm/3,87V

40W/46dBm/54,78V 24dBm/4,34V 26dBm/5,46V 23dBm/3,87V 26dBm/5,46V

F1 TO F7 COMMAND
POWER SETTLED FSK PEP-22dBm GUARD 12Db BOOST 12Db BOOST
INCLUDED INCLUDED
5W/37dBm/19,37V 15dBm/1,54V 17dBm/1,94V 26dBm/5,46V 29dBm/7,72V

10W/40dBm/27,39V 18dBm/2,18V 20dBm/2,74V 29dBm/7,72V 32dBm/10,9V

20W/43dBm/38,73V 21dBm/3,07V 23dBm/3,87V 32dBm/10,9V 35dBm/15,4V

40W/46dBm/54,78V 24dBm/4,34V 26dBm/5,46V 35dBm/15,4V 38dBm/21,75V


T390/EN AP/B23 Application Note
DIP Connection to PLC l
Page 184/208 e-terragridcomT390

5.3 How to compute the max power output of DIP


5.3.1 Single tone case
Each command corresponds to a tone.
The max power output corresponds to the maximum power sent when all the commands are
transmitted.
In the normal case,
Max Voltage= U1+U2+U3+U4

With U1, U2 ,U3 ,U4 magnitude of the tone calculated using 5.1.2.3 formula.
Therefore, The maximum power output will be this maximum voltage converted in dBm by
the 5.1.2.3 formula with impedance of 600Ω
5.3.2 Dual tone case
Each command corresponds to 2 tones.
The max power output corresponds to the maximum power sent when 2 frequencies are
transmitted.
Exemple : Max Voltage = F1+F3 = command 1

With command 1 magnitude of the tones calculated with 5.1.2.3 formula.


Therefore, the maximum power output will be this maximum voltage converted in dBm by the
5.1.2.3 formula with impedance of 600Ω.
5.4 Why using the « boost » option and how
The boost option allows to leave the PLC increase the command level.
The increasing is performed inside the PLC which controls the power in R.F. line
The Boost can be chosen by steps of 6Db (0, 6, 12dB) during the PLC configuration in the
HMI.

The Boost, if configured, is activated by trigger of the BLE/Boost relay (5-6)


Pure TPHF configuration, theoretically, does not need boost function, cause nothing other
signal to suppress, but anyway could be selected for signal on noise ratio improvement.
Application Note T390/EN AP/B23
DIP Connection to PLC
e-terragridcomT390 Page 185/208

5.5 In case of line distorsion, how can I equalize the Tones / What is the effect of PLC
equalizer ?
The tone level tuning does not rely on the PLC capacity to equalize the TP channel.
The spirit is that the PLC shall provide a channel as transparent as possible. In that way, the
teleprotection path bypasses the equalizer filter.
The commissioner engineer should compensate the initial line distortion by applying a
different transmission level for each tone.
T390/EN AP/B23 Application Note
DIP Connection to PLC l
Page 186/208 e-terragridcomT390
Application Note T390/EN AP/B23

e-terragridcomT390 Page 187/208

HF POWER MEASUREMENT
METHOD
Application Note T390/EN AP/B23
HF Power Measurement Method
e-terragridcomT390 Page 189/208

CONTENTS

1. INTRODUCTION 191

2. THEORETICAL CONFIGURATION 192


2.1 Band sharing 192
2.1.1 Maintenance channel 192
2.1.2 Signal channel 192
2.1.3 Synchronisation phase 193
2.2 Setting up 194
2.2.1 Application 195

3. ON-LINE MEASUREMENTS 196


T390/EN AP/B23 Application Note
HF Power Measurement Method
Page 190/208 e-terragridcomT390

MODIFICATIONS PAGE

VERSION DATE COMMENTS


A 23/11/2005 Original issue
B 02/10/2006 Section 2.1.3 added (Synchronization phase)
C21 10/01/2011 Brand Format ALSTOM
A22 25/02/2011 Product release 5
A23 02/05/2011 Product release 6
B23 10/07/2012 Product release 6.1
Application Note T390/EN AP/B23
HF Power Measurement Method
e-terragridcomT390 Page 191/208

1. INTRODUCTION
This document describes the methods to be applied in order to perfectly control the power
output to the line by the T390.
It is intended for all personnel who may have to install PLCs:

• System integrators

• Field engineers

• Customers who have to set up their own system


This document is divided into two distinct sections:
1. System configuration and theoretical overview
2. On-line metering
For more information, see the related documents:

Document name Description


T390/EN GP T390 General Presentation
T390/EN OS T390 Overall System Description
T390/EN AM T390 Amplifier Description and Configuration
T390/EN AX T390 Extended Amplifier Description and Configuration
T390/EN PU T390 Processing Unit Description and Configuration
T390/EN AP T390 Application Note
– Connecting the HMI to T390
– LAN to LAN configuration
– Adjacent bands for 8+8KHZ
– Adjacent bands for 8+8KHZ (QAM+TPX°
– Filters settings
– Firmware upgrade
– Speech interface
– Point to Multipoint (PTM) Configuration
– Data retrieving for Assistance
– Installation User Guide
– Installation check Guide
– Manual for Superimposed mode
– DIP connection to T390
– HF Power Measurement Method
– Quick Start-up
T390/EN TP T390 TPI Description and Configuration
T390/EN AP/B23 Application Note
HF Power Measurement Method
Page 192/208 e-terragridcomT390

2. THEORETICAL CONFIGURATION
2.1 Band sharing
The R.F. frequency band sharing for the T390 is as follows:

8 kHz minimum interband

Maintenance Maintenance
Channel RX Channel RX

Rx Signal Channel Tx Signal Channel

4 kHz, 8 kHz or 16 kHz 4 kHz, 8 kHz or 16 kHz

D0569ENa

2.1.1 Maintenance channel


The maintenance channel is a 120Hz-wide FSK channel.
Since it does not contain any scrambler it can be considered as a signal.
The reference tone (idle) is located:

• at 7910Hz of the band's central frequency for a 16kHz application

• at 3970Hz of the band's central frequency for an 8kHz application


Its level is 22dB below the PEP power of the system. This is our calibration level for the
output power.
2.1.2 Signal channel
The signal channel is a QAM modulation.
Because of the scrambler, the spectrum may be considered as totally white prior to filtering.
The following consequence ensues:
The spectrum is flat and highest between the centre of the band and 0.4xBW.
This will make it possible to measure the power at the centre of the band only. The maximum
power over the remainder of the band will be equal to this measurement.

10

-10

-20 0.4BW

-30

-40

-50
Fc

-60

-70

-80

-90
Application Note T390/EN AP/B23
HF Power Measurement Method
e-terragridcomT390 Page 193/208

2.1.3 Synchronisation phase


During training, upon start-up or after a loss of synchronism, power transmissions go through
the following stages:

Separated Mode Superimposed Mode


Master Slave Master Slave
FSK FSK
Mute Mute
Synchronisation transmission transmission
Amplification FSK FSK FSK FSK
transmission transmission transmission transmission
FSK +QAM FSK +QAM FSK +QAM FSK
“ “ FSK FSK +QAM
Synchronisation
“ “ FSK +QAM FSK +QAM
Processing
Sync. Sync. Sync. Sync.
complete complete complete complete

It should be noted that:


QAM and FSK magnitudes are similar during the training phase and normal operation.
Faders applied during start-up avoid spectrum expansion during training phases.
T390/EN AP/B23 Application Note
HF Power Measurement Method
Page 194/208 e-terragridcomT390

2.2 Setting up
The power can be set up in the Configuration window of the Amplifier rack.
(Cf T390/EN AM)

The following principles must be taken into account:

• The power to be considered is the PEP power. With regard to QAM, as a result of the
encoder's statistics, the ratio between the PEP power and the mean QAM power is
equal to 6dB.

• The FSK power is set by default 22dB below the PEP power.
Furthermore, an estimation of the QAM power is provided in the Advanced tab.
Power calculations are always performed more easily when using the dBm unit system.
Reminder: P(dBm)= 10xlog (P(W)x1000)
E.g.: 10W=40dBm
As a first approach, it can be assumed that the QAM power is shared over the whole
bandwidth.
As a result, to calculate roughly the power per kHz, simply apply the following formula:

Pk = Pmean – X
Where Pk, power over 1kHz
Pmean, mean power of the QAM over the whole bandwidth
X depends on the bandwidth: 9dB for 8kHz
12dB for 16kHz
Application Note T390/EN AP/B23
HF Power Measurement Method
e-terragridcomT390 Page 195/208

2.2.1 Application
Where strict power limitation rules must be observed, it may be useful to use the following
rules to ensure that the configuration is adequate.
1. The output power should be limited to 0.25W/kHz over the whole bandwidth
2. The power of one signal should be less than 0.1W
With regard to FSK, if a signal is limited to 0.1W=20dBm it can be assumed that the PEP's
maximum value is 20+22=42dBm (i.e. 17W approx.) in order to comply with rule #2
For the first rule, it can be assumed that:

Pmean total ≦ Pmean QAM + Pmean FSK

The QAM mean power is given in the Advanced panel.


The FSK mean power is equal to PEP - 22dB.
T390/EN AP/B23 Application Note
HF Power Measurement Method
Page 196/208 e-terragridcomT390

3. ON-LINE MEASUREMENTS
On-line measurements should be done without disturbing the systems operation.
Systems should be synchronised before the QAM signal is transmitted.
It is thus impossible to measure the powers output on the line if the systems are not
connected to one another.
Therefore, we recommend that the measuring device be connected in parallel to the line
(e.g. using a Tee).
Furthermore, it is strongly recommended to use a high-impedance attenuator, considering
the high power levels.
The figure below shows how to avoid disturbing the impedance whilst creating a 40dB
attenuation.

PLC Line

10 kΩ 100 Ω

High impédance
Voltmeter D0570ENa

The use of a selective voltmeter to measure the voltages is based on the following two
assumptions:

• The line impedance is close to the required nominal impedance (e.g. 75Ohms)

• A selective voltmeter can significantly measure this type of signal


Regarding the second assumption above, experiments have demonstrated consistency
between the measurements when using:

• A 3100Hz or 1700Hz selective voltmeter

• A 1Hz spectrum analyser

• An RMS voltmeter through a filter


The use of a selective voltmeter is the easiest method. It makes it possible to measure the
level of the service channel's line as well as the "mean" QAM level at the centre of the band.
Application Note T390/EN AP/B23

e-terragridcomT390 Page 197/208

QUICK START-UP
Application Note T390/EN AP/B23
Quick Start-Up
e-terragridcomT390 Page 199/208

CONTENTS

1. INTRODUCTION 201
1.1 Scope 201
1.2 References 201

2. ACCESSORIES PROVIDED 202


2.1 Hardware & Software 202

3. CDROM INSTALLATION 203


3.1 HMI Installation 203
3.1.1 Step 1 203
3.1.2 Step 2 203
3.1.3 Step 3 203
3.1.4 Step 4 203

4. COMPUTER-PLC CONNECTION 204


4.1 Physical Connection 204
4.2 Software Configuration 204

5. ACCESS TO THE PLC 205


5.1 Path 205
5.1.1 Step 1 205
5.1.2 Step 2 205
5.1.3 Step 3 205
5.1.4 Step 4 205
5.1.5 Step 5 206
5.1.6 Step 6 206
5.1.7 Step 7 206
5.1.8 Step 8 207
5.1.9 Step 9 207
T390/EN AP/B23 Application Note
Quick Start-Up
Page 200/208 e-terragridcomT390

MODIFICATIONS PAGE

VERSION DATE COMMENTS


A 23/04/07 Original issue
C21 10/01/11 Brand Format ALSTOM
A22 25/02/11 Product release 5
A23 02/05/2011 Product release 6
B23 10/07/2012 Product release 6.1
Application Note T390/EN AP/B23
Quick Start-Up
e-terragridcomT390 Page 201/208

1. INTRODUCTION
1.1 Scope
This document handles about How to make a T390 quick start up.
1.2 References
For more information, see related documents:

Document name Description


T390/EN GP T390 General Presentation
T390/EN OS T390 Overall System Description
T390/EN AM T390 Amplifier Description and Configuration
T390/EN AX T390 Extended Amplifier Description and Configuration
T390/EN PU T390 Processing Unit Description and Configuration
T390/EN AP T390 Application Note
– Connecting the HMI to T390
– LAN to LAN configuration
– Adjacent bands for 8+8KHZ
– Adjacent bands for 8+8KHZ (QAM+TPX°
– Filters settings
– Firmware upgrade
– Speech interface
– Point to Multipoint (PTM) Configuration
– Data retrieving for Assistance
– Installation User Guide
– Installation check Guide
– Manual for Superimposed mode
– DIP connection to T390
– HF Power Measurement Method
– Quick Start-up
T390/EN TP T390 TPI Description and Configuration
T390/EN AP/B23 Application Note
Quick Start-Up
Page 202/208 e-terragridcomT390

2. ACCESSORIES PROVIDED
2.1 Hardware & Software
Check the accessories provided within the PLC, following your configuration, according to
information given in T390-EN-OS.
Application Note T390/EN AP/B23
Quick Start-Up
e-terragridcomT390 Page 203/208

3. CDROM INSTALLATION
3.1 HMI Installation
3.1.1 Step 1
Your computer has to use the W2000 or WXP.
Open the CD-ROM
3.1.2 Step 2
Then double click on folder HMI…

3.1.3 Step 3
Double click on setup.exe…

3.1.4 Step 4
The HMI is already installed on your computer automatically, at this location:
C:\Program Files\Alstom\e-terragridcom T390

Remarks:

• The “Access manager” icon concerns the customisation of the PLC password.

• The “Ini” icon concerns the customisation of the language.


You have to set the “PLC5K.fr” to “PLC5k.Lang” for French language.
T390/EN AP/B23 Application Note
Quick Start-Up
Page 204/208 e-terragridcomT390

4. COMPUTER-PLC CONNECTION
4.1 Physical Connection
Use the cable provided under the user kit (cross Ethernet cable equipped with RJ45 plug,
1m).
Connect it to the RJ45 PRCS unit (Ethernet 10/100 MB plug)

Computer

4.2 Software Configuration


The IP address, mask and gateway address of each equipment connected to the network
should be properly configured.
Check the Factory Acceptance tests document, provided within the PLC, to know what the IP
address of the PRCS module is.
Refer to the T390/EN/AP (Connecting the HMI to T390) application note to configure these
parameters within the PLC equipment.
The coherency of the PLC module connected IP and computer IP have to be similar,
otherwise it will be impossible to access to the configuration.
Application Note T390/EN AP/B23
Quick Start-Up
e-terragridcomT390 Page 205/208

5. ACCESS TO THE PLC


5.1 Path
5.1.1 Step 1

Double click on the “.exe” icon:


5.1.2 Step 2
The main tool bar appears.

5.1.3 Step 3

Click on “Connection”:
5.1.4 Step 4
Select the IP associated to the module you are connected:

By default, the IP address of T390 equipment is given below according to the kind of
equipment. In any case, this value should be mentioned in the TRS or FAT/SAT report
sheet.

Release Default IP Address


REL 6.x 10.22.171.200

If no change has been made during commissioning, FAT or SAT, all units have the same
default IP address, forbidding connecting them on a HUB or switching equipment.
T390/EN AP/B23 Application Note
Quick Start-Up
Page 206/208 e-terragridcomT390

5.1.5 Step 5
Click on “Connect”.

5.1.6 Step 6
The “Identification” window appears to leave you enter the default user name and password.

5.1.7 Step 7
Number “3” is the common user name and password standard access.

Refer to the “T390/EN OS” manual to change user name and password references.
Application Note T390/EN AP/B23
Quick Start-Up
e-terragridcomT390 Page 207/208

5.1.8 Step 8
Click on “Login” and you can have an overview of your system:

5.1.9 Step 9
Click on “OK” and the main window is appearing.

You are connected.


Refer to the associated manuals for modules configuration.
T390/EN AP/B23 Application Note
Quick Start-Up
Page 208/208 e-terragridcomT390

BLANK PAGE
Alstom Grid

T390/EN AP/B23 © - ALSTOM 2012.


ALSTOM, the ALSTOM logo and any
alternative version thereof are trademarks and
service marks of ALSTOM. The other names
mentioned, registered or not, are the property
of their respective companies. The technical
and other data contained in this document is
provided for information only. Neither
ALSTOM, its officers and employees accept
responsibility for or should be taken as
making any representation or warranty
(whether express or implied) as to the
accuracy or completeness of such data or the
achievement of any projected performance
criteria where these are indicated. ALSTOM
reserves the right to revise or change this
data at any time without further notice.

Alstom Grid Worldwide Contact Centre


www.grid.alstom.com/contactcentre/
Tel: +44 (0) 1785 250 070

www.alstom.com
e-terragridcomT390

TPI Description
and Configuration

Version 6.1

T390/EN TP/B23

GRID
Integrated Teleprotection T390/EN TP/B23

e-terragridcomT390 Page 1/102

CONTENTS

1. INTRODUCTION 11

2. SUMMARY DESCRIPTION 12
2.1 Overview of teleprotection and intertripping 13
2.2 International standards 13

3. FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION 14
3.1 Transmission options 14
3.1.1 Analogue transmission through T390 14
3.1.2 Digital path 14
3.1.3 Dual path 14
3.2 Analog path : teleprotection command coding methods 15
3.2.2 Mixed dual and single tone mode (mode 2+2 and mode 3+1) 16
3.3 Digital transmission (optional) 17
3.3.1 Optical path 17
3.3.2 G.703.1 and G.703.6 19
3.3.3 V.11 19
3.3.4 Factory Codes 19

4. TPI HMI HARDWARE CONFIGURATION 20

5. TPI CONFIGURATION SETTINGS 21


5.1 Power configuration 21
5.1.1 TPX power 22
5.2 TPI configuration menu 24
5.3 Main screen 24
5.4 Communication path 25
5.4.1 Defining communication paths 25
5.4.2 Operator 26
5.5 Analog, case dual tone 27
5.5.1 Case 4 commands 28
5.5.2 Case 6 commands Mode A 28
5.5.3 Case 6 commands Mode B 30
5.5.4 Case 2 set/reset 31
5.5.5 Case 3 set/reset 32
5.5.6 Analog Interface TX window 33
5.5.7 Analog Interface RX window 38
5.6 Analog, case mixed mode 41
5.6.1 Frequencies 41
5.6.2 Command coding 42
T390/EN TP/B23 Integrated Teleprotection

Page 2/102 e-terragridcomT390

5.6.3 Relation between commands and frequencies 47


5.6.4 Analog Interface TX window 48
5.6.5 Analog interface RX window 50
5.7 Digital 53
5.8 Input commands 55
5.8.1 Protection scheme 56
5.8.2 Operator 57
5.8.3 Holding delay 57
5.8.4 Validation delay 58
5.8.5 Start (Ext Blk) 58
5.8.6 Filter 59
5.9 Output commands 60
5.9.1 Reception Commands 60
5.9.2 Transmission Commands 61
5.9.3 Protection scheme 61
5.9.4 Operator 61
5.9.5 Holding Delay 62
5.9.6 Validation delay 62
5.9.7 Unblocking 62
5.9.8 Start (External Blocking) 63
5.9.9 Events/Alarms 64
5.9.10 State on alarm 66
5.10 Warning about protection scheme in analog path 68

6. TPI MEASUREMENT OPTIONS 69


6.1 Input 69
6.2 Output 70
6.3 Counters 70
6.4 Analog 71
6.5 Digital 72
6.6 Alarms 73

7. MAINTENANCE MENU 75
7.1 Input commands 75
7.2 Outputs commands 76
7.3 Counters 77
7.4 Loop test 77

8. HARDWARE CONFIGURATION 79
8.1 Board top view 79
8.2 Connector and cable descriptions 81
8.3 Back panel 81
8.4 INPUTS CONTACTS 81
Integrated Teleprotection T390/EN TP/B23

e-terragridcomT390 Page 3/102

8.4.1 Input contacts 81


8.4.2 Input Range 81
8.4.3 Input mode 82
8.4.4 Optional daughter board 82
8.5 OUTPUT CONTACTS 83
8.5.1 Output contacts 83
8.5.2 Output mode 83
8.6 Power Supply P7 connector 84
8.7 Digital Communication interface 85
8.8 Front panel 85
8.8.1 Unit Chain P8 and P9 connectors 85
8.8.2 Communication medium connector P11 85
8.8.3 Optical connector 88
8.8.4 Ethernet Connector 88
8.9 Signalling LEDs (front panel) 89
8.9.1 Internal Error and System OK 89
8.10 Alarm LEDs 90

9. APPENDIX 1 - INTERNATIONAL STANDARDS 91

10. APPENDIX 2 - TELEPROTECTION TERMS AND CONVENTIONS 92

11. INTEGRATED TELEPROTECTION CONFIGURATION AND TUNING 94


11.1 General workflow 95
11.2 Configuration step by step 96
11.2.1 Services 96
11.2.2 Window TPI / Main 96
11.2.3 Window TPI / Communication path 96
11.2.4 Window TPI / Input commands 96
11.2.5 Window TPI / Output commands 96
11.3 TPI / communication path / Digital configuration 97
11.4 TPI / communication path / Analog configuration case Dual Tone Mode 98
11.4.1 TPI / communication path / Analog configuration / TX 98
11.4.2 TPI / communication path / Analog configuration / RX 98
11.5 TPI / communication path / Analog configuration case Mixed tone Mode 100
11.5.1 TPI / communication path / Analog configuration / TX 100
11.5.2 TPI / communication path / Analog configuration / RX 100
11.6 Apply configuration 101
11.7 Maintenance and Measure ONLY in analog case 101
11.8 Maintenance AGC init 101
11.9 TPI / communication path / Analog configuration ONLY in analog case 102
11.10 Apply configuration 102
11.11 Maintenance and Measure ONLY in analog case. Check levels 102
T390/EN TP/B23 Integrated Teleprotection

Page 4/102 e-terragridcomT390

LIST OF FIGURES

FIGURE 1: TPI SYSTEM 11


FIGURE 2: TPI SYSTEM CONNECTION 12
FIGURE 3: FRONT PANEL OF THE TPI SYSTEM 12
FIGURE 4: OVERVIEW OF TRANSMISSION OPTIONS 14
FIGURE 5: TP OVER QAM 15
FIGURE 6: TP OVER QAM UNDER HMI 15
FIGURE 7 TP OVER QAM SUPERIMPOSED MODE 15
FIGURE 8: TP FULL BAND 16
FIGURE 9: TP OVER SPEECH 16
FIGURE 10: UNIDIRECTIONAL SFP 17
FIGURE 11: BIDIRECTIONAL SFP 18
FIGURE 12: SELECT YOUR LANGUAGE 20
FIGURE 13: OPEN THE HARDWARE CONFIGURATION WINDOW 20
FIGURE 14: THE HARDWARE CONFIGURATION WINDOW 20
FIGURE 15: AMPLIFIER CONFIGURATION ADVANCED PANEL 21
FIGURE 16: TPX CONFIGURATION (PRCS) 22
FIGURE 17: TPI MAIN TAB 24
FIGURE 18: TPI COMMUNICATION PATH 25
FIGURE 19: DUAL TONE CHOICE 25
FIGURE 20: 2PT+2DT CHOICE 26
FIGURE 21: DUAL TONE FREQUENCIES SHARING 27
FIGURE 22: ANALOGUE INTERFACE TX 33
FIGURE 23: SET/RESET FUNCTION 34
FIGURE 24: SET/RESET TRANSMISSION DURATION 35
FIGURE 25: CHOICE OF THE SPEECH 35
FIGURE 26: GUARD RATIO, CASE TP OVER QAM SUPERIMPOSED 36
FIGURE 27: AMP/ADVANCED QAM RATIO 37
FIGURE 28: ANALOGUE INTERFACE RX 38
FIGURE 29: UNBLOCKING 39
FIGURE 30: ALARMS 39
FIGURE 31: COMMAND FREQUENCIES 300 - 3400 HZ 41
FIGURE 32: COMMAND FREQUENCIES 300 - 2400 HZ 41
FIGURE 33: COMMAND FREQUENCIES 300 - 2200 HZ 41
FIGURE 34: COMMAND FREQUENCIES 300-2000 HZ 42
Integrated Teleprotection T390/EN TP/B23

e-terragridcomT390 Page 5/102

FIGURE 35 - PRIORITY SCHEME DIRECT / PERMISSIVE 43


FIGURE 36 - END OF PERMISSIVE BEFORE END OF DIRECT TRIPPING 44
FIGURE 37: ANALOG INTERFACE TX, CASE MIXED TONE 48
FIGURE 38: ANALOG INTERFACE RX 50
FIGURE 39: UNBLOCKING 51
FIGURE 40: ALARMS 51
FIGURE 41: DIGITAL INTERFACE 53
FIGURE 42: DIGITAL INTERFACE V11 53
FIGURE 43: TPI INPUTS SCREEN CASE DUAL TONE 55
FIGURE 44: TPI INPUTS SCREEN CASE MIXED TONE 55
FIGURE 45: INV INPUT 56
FIGURE 46: OPERATOR CHOICES 57
FIGURE 47: OPERATOR EXAMPLE 57
FIGURE 48: INPUT HOLDING DELAY 57
FIGURE 49: INPUT VALIDATION DELAY 58
FIGURE 50: INPUT FILTER 59
FIGURE 51: TPI OUTPUTS SCREEN 60
FIGURE 52: OUTPUT HOLDING DELAY 62
FIGURE 53: VALIDATION DELAY 62
FIGURE 54: START (EXTERNAL BLOCKING) FUNCTION 63
FIGURE 55: EVENTS EXTRACT 65
FIGURE 56: ALARMS EXTRACT 66
FIGURE 57: INPUT COMMANDS SCREEN 69
FIGURE 58: OUTPUT COMMAND STATUS 70
FIGURE 59: COUNTER VALUES 70
FIGURE 60: TONE LEVEL MEASUREMENT 71
FIGURE 61: DIGITAL MEASURE TAB 72
FIGURE 62: DIGITAL MEASURE NOT USED 72
FIGURE 63: ALARM STATE 73
FIGURE 64: MAINTENANCE SCREEN 75
FIGURE 65: INPUT FORCING WARNING 75
FIGURE 66: MAINTENANCE OUTPUT COMMANDS 76
FIGURE 67: OUTPUT FORCING WARNING 76
FIGURE 68: RESET COMMANDS WARNING 77
FIGURE 69: COUNTER RESET 77
FIGURE 70: MAINTENANCE LOOP TEST 77
T390/EN TP/B23 Integrated Teleprotection

Page 6/102 e-terragridcomT390

FIGURE 71: T390 TPI MOTHERBOARD TOPVIEW 79


FIGURE 72: T390 TPI INPUT JUMPERS 80
FIGURE 73: T390 TPI OUTPUT JUMPERS 80
FIGURE 74: T390 TPI BACK PANEL CONNECTORS 81
FIGURE 75: T390 TPI TIO/DRY DAUGHTER BOARD 82
FIGURE 76: POWER SUPPLY PIN OUT 84
FIGURE 77: POWER SUPPLY BOARD 84
FIGURE 78: FUSE 84
FIGURE 79: FRONT PANEL CONNECTORS 85
FIGURE 80: COMMUNICATION MEDIUM CONNECTOR 85
FIGURE 81: COMMUNICATION MEDIUM CONNECTOR 86
FIGURE 82: G703.1 INTERFACE PIN OUT 87
FIGURE 83: G703.6 INTERFACE 2 MBPS 88
FIGURE 84: LEDS FRONT PANEL 89
FIGURE 85: TRIPPING MODE CHANNEL REQUIREMENTS 93
FIGURE 86: GENERAL WORKFLOW 95

LIST OF TABLES

TABLE 1: MULTIMODE SFP 17


TABLE 2: SINGLE MODE UNIDIRECTIONAL SFP 18
TABLE 3: SINGLE MODE BIDIRECTIONAL SFP 18
TABLE 4: FACTORY CODES 19
TABLE 5: FREQUENCIES LOCATION DEPENDING OF CONFIGURATION 27
TABLE 6: TP OVER SUPERIMPOSED 16 KHZ FREQUENCIES LOCATION 27
TABLE 7: DUAL TONE FREQUENCY CODING 28
TABLE 8: PRIORITY RULES FOR CASE 6 COMMANDS (MODE A) 29
TABLE 9: DUAL TONES FREQUENCY CODING CASE 6 COMMANDS (MODE A) 29
TABLE 10: PRIORITY RULES FOR CASE 6 COMMANDS (MODE B) 30
TABLE 11: DUAL TONE FREQUENCY CODING CASE 6 COMMANDS (MODE B) 31
TABLE 12 : PRIORITY RULES FOR CASE 2 SET/RESET 31
TABLE 13: DUAL TONE FREQUENCY CODING CASE 2 SET/RESET 31
TABLE 14: PRIORITY RULES FOR CASE 3 SET/RESET 32
Integrated Teleprotection T390/EN TP/B23

e-terragridcomT390 Page 7/102

TABLE 15: DUAL TONE FREQUENCY CODING CASE 3 SET/RESET 32


TABLE 16: GUARD FREQUENCIES 42
TABLE 17 : RELATION BETWEEN INJECTED / TRANSMITTED COMMANDS - MODE 2+2 45
TABLE 18 : RELATION BETWEEN INJECTED / TRANSMITTED COMMANDS - MODE 3+1 46
TABLE 19: RELATION BETWEEN RECEIVED COMMANDS & OUTPUTS - MODE 3+1 46
TABLE 20 : RELATION BETWEEN COMMANDS AND FREQIUENCIES, MODE 2+2 47
TABLE 21 : RELATION BETWEEN COMMANDS AND FREQUENCIES, MODE 3+1 47
TABLE 22: LINK BETWEEN COMMANDS AND OUTPUT RELAYS, MIXED TONE MODE 60
TABLE 23: START TRUTH TABLE 63
TABLE 24: EVENTS TABLE 65
TABLE 26: RELAY STATES ON ALARM 66
TABLE 27: TRUTH TABLES 67
TABLE 28: ALARM POSSIBLE STATES 73
TABLE 29 : TPI ALARM LIST 74
TABLE 30: TPI UNIT CONNECTORS 81
TABLE 31: INPUT CONTACT TABLE 81
TABLE 32: INPUT RANGE JUMPERS TABLE 81
TABLE 33: INPUT RANGE TABLE 82
TABLE 34: INPUT MODE TABLE 82
TABLE 35: NORMALLY OPEN OUTPUT CONTACTS 83
TABLE 36: NORMALLY OPEN/NORMALLY CLOSED OUTPUT CONTACTS 83
TABLE 37: NORMALLY OPEN OUTPUT SETTINGS 83
TABLE 38: NORMALLY OPEN/NORMALLY CLOSE OUTPUT SETTINGS 83
TABLE 39: V.11 PIN-OUT 86
TABLE 40: G703-1 CO DIRECTIONAL INTERFACE CONNECTION 87
TABLE 41: G703-6 PIN-OUT 88
TABLE 42: SIGNALLING LEDS 89
TABLE 43: SIGNALLING LEDS 89
TABLE 44: ALARM LEDS COMPLETE ALARM CONDITION 90
TABLE 46: REFERENCE STANDARDS 91
TABLE 47: TESTING STANDARDS 91
TABLE 48: ALARMS RECOMMENDED SETTINGS 99
TABLE 49: ALARMS RECOMMENDED SETTINGS 100
T390/EN TP/B23 Integrated Teleprotection

Page 8/102 e-terragridcomT390

BLANK PAGE
Integrated Teleprotection T390/EN TP/B23

e-terragridcomT390 Page 9/102

DOCUMENT CONTEXT AND VERSION HISTORY


This document is part of the T390 user manuals document set.
Document Context

Document name Description


T390/EN OS T390 Technical manual – Overall System Description
T390/EN AM T390 Technical manual – AMP Description and Configuration
T390/EN AX T390 Technical manual – AMPX Description and Configuration
T390/EN PU T390 Technical manual – PRCSe Description and Configuration
T390/EN TP T390 Technical manual – TPI Description and Configuration (this
document)
T390/EN AP T390 Technical Schedule – Application Note

Version History

VERSION DATE COMMENTS


A 07/06/2010 Original issue
A11 12/07/2010 Additional function for superimposed mode
A12 25/02/2011 Modification for superimposed mode release 5.1.2
A13 30/03/2011 Update release 6
B23 10/07/2012 Update release 6.1
T390/EN TP/B23 Integrated Teleprotection

Page 10/102 e-terragridcomT390

BLANK PAGE
Integrated Teleprotection T390/EN TP/B23

e-terragridcomT390 Page 11/102

1. INTRODUCTION
This document describes the TPI teleprotection unit for the PLC T390.
The TPI module offers the unique advantage on the market to be an integrated teleprotection
module, with dual path communication feature (optional).

FIGURE 1: TPI SYSTEM

As a standard integrated teleprotection all functionalities can be adressed through the T390
HMI either connected locally or remotely through a TCP /Ip network or even thanks to the
SNMP V2 compatibility accessible through an SNMP compatible network management
software.
The Second communication channel can be depending on customer choice among this
different possibilities:
Digital electrical interfaces

− V11 / X21

− G703 1 and 6
Optical Interfaces

− C37.94

− Single mode bifiber 1310 nm and 1550 nm

− Single mode single fiber 1550 nm


Due to the modular concept of the T390 PLC in case of loss of communication over the PLC
medium the TPI module can still communicate on the digital path.
All combination of Input / command / output / communication path can be done through a
matrix in the HMI interface.
Often integrated teleprotection means limited number of contact and limited making capacity
of output contacts that make necessary to use intermediate relays to activate Circuit Breaker
trip coil decreasing the overall protection scheme reliability and fault clearance time.
TPI unit offers 8 inputs and 14 (8 NO + 6 NO/NC) heavy duty outputs (5 A) all that without
impacting transfer speed that remains on the highest level on the market.
T390/EN TP/B23 Integrated Teleprotection

Page 12/102 e-terragridcomT390

2. SUMMARY DESCRIPTION

FIGURE 2: TPI SYSTEM CONNECTION

Note that Service units are not available in release 6.1.


Note that there is only one TPI in release 6.1.
The amplifier offers a choice of different transmitting powers up to 40W, configured by the
HMI (Human-Machine Interface, described in the Overall System Description). Note that the
output power can be increased to 80W by adding a T390 80W Extension Amplifier Unit.
Each T390 system unit is enclosed in a stackable rack unit, as in the figures below. Most
units use a double height case, except the TPI unit, which is housed in a single-height case.
The system does not produce perturbations or spurious noise out of its own allocated band.
Bandwidth allocation: The system can transmit frequencies in bands that are from 2 kHz
up to 16kHz wide, and within the range 20-700 kHz. The allowed bandwidth allocations are
shown graphically in the T390 Amplifier Description and Configuration, T390/EN AM.

FIGURE 3: FRONT PANEL OF THE TPI SYSTEM


Integrated Teleprotection T390/EN TP/B23

e-terragridcomT390 Page 13/102

2.1 Overview of teleprotection and intertripping


Teleprotection is used by power companies to protect their distribution medium: it is
designed to transfer protection commands coming usually from distance protection relay
contacts to a remote location through a point-to-point communication.
In short, a “protected section”, or “protected zone”, is a high voltage line between two
substations, with a circuit-breaker at each end. Teleprotection equipment monitors and
constantly assesses the line for problems and, when necessary, “trips” the circuit-breakers to
isolate the high voltage line. Tripping of a protected section can be initiated (or in some
cases prevented) by the teleprotection at either end. The signals that must be exchanged
during this process, and their integrity and security, are the concern of the TPI.
For further information, refer to Appendix 2 – Introduction to teleprotection.
2.2 International standards
A list of all relevant Test and Reference standards is given in chapter 9.
T390/EN TP/B23 Integrated Teleprotection

Page 14/102 e-terragridcomT390

3. FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION
This section introduces the operational features.
3.1 Transmission options
The TPI supports optical or electrical signalling solutions, as described below, in addition to
the PLC link, as an option.

FIGURE 4: OVERVIEW OF TRANSMISSION OPTIONS

3.1.1 Analogue transmission through T390


The analogue transmission option uses PLC technology to signal over the high voltage lines.
For this transmission method, the path between the two TPI units includes the LVDS (low-
voltage differential signalling) connection, which interconnects all units in a T390 system.
3.1.2 Digital path
A digital path is available, thanks optical, V11, G703-1 or G703-6.
3.1.3 Dual path
If a digital path is available, there is a possibility to increase dramatically the command
dependability by applying a combination on the command reception.
Integrated Teleprotection T390/EN TP/B23

e-terragridcomT390 Page 15/102

3.2 Analog path : teleprotection command coding methods


3.2.1.1 There are four coding options available with the TPI, allowing TP commands to be transmitted in
the absence of any other signals, or else occupying a part of the bandwidth used by speech or
QAM signalling, or both. In the latter two cases, in the event of a TP command transmission, the
speech or QAM signal is interrupted, and replaced, by the TP command being transmitted. The
user has control over which signals are cut during command transmission. For example on a
system transmitting Speech along with TP over QAM, the user can choose to cut only QAM during
command transmission, but has also the option to cut both QAM and Speech, to maximise the
power available to the TP.TP over QAM

FIGURE 5: TP OVER QAM


In TP over QAM, the teleprotection signal space shares a part of the QAM bandwidth. The
whole QAM signal is suppressed in favour of TP commands that are to be transmitted.
Please note that this configuration is only available under all bands in separated mode or 16
kHz superimposed (optional key) only.

FIGURE 6: TP OVER QAM UNDER HMI

TPI inactive TPI active

FSK + QAM FSK + 2 tones (command)

FSK + QAM + Guard (16kHz superimposed mode) FSK + 2 tones (command)

FIGURE 7 TP OVER QAM SUPERIMPOSED MODE


T390/EN TP/B23 Integrated Teleprotection

Page 16/102 e-terragridcomT390

3.2.1.2 TP Full Band

FIGURE 8: TP FULL BAND

The guard signal is transmitted, except when there is a command to be sent. This mode can
be used only if no other analogue services are used in the band.

TPI inactive TPI active


FSK + guard (F8) FSK + 2 tones (command)

3.2.1.3 TP over speech

FIGURE 9: TP OVER SPEECH

In the absence of any commands, the system transmits the signalling signal plus the
user-defined speech band. When a command is present, the speech signal is replaced by
the TP dual frequencies.

TPI inactive TPI active


FSK + signalling + speech FSK + 2 tones (command)

3.2.2 Mixed dual and single tone mode (mode 2+2 and mode 3+1)
The mixed mode works only if a speech is configured on the PLC. The command bandwidth
is the bandwidth of this speech. The guard is either the signalling of this speech, or, if no
signalling has been configured, a tone generated by the TPI whose frequency is chosen in a
list by the user.
In the absence of any commands, the system transmits the guard tone plus the speech
band. When a command is present, the speech signal is replaced by either TP dual
frequencies, or a TP single frequency, according to chapter 5, TPI configuration settings.

TPI inactive TPI active


FSK + guard tone + speech FSK + 1 or 2 tone(s)
Integrated Teleprotection T390/EN TP/B23

e-terragridcomT390 Page 17/102

3.3 Digital transmission (optional)


There are four available options for digital transmission:
3.3.1 Optical path
An optical interface for use between teleprotection and digital multiplexer equipment/or in
direct that can operate at a data rate of N times 64 kilobit per second (where N = 1, 2, 4).
This interface uses the frame structure defined in the IEEE C37.94 standard.
For testing purposes, the two TPI units can be connected back to back.
The different modes are available (separated SFP modules):

Single mode 1550nm long haul


1310nm short haul
1310/1550nm and 1510/1590 bidirectional interface
Multimode 850 nm for C3794 compatible application

One type of multimode SFP is covered

Interface type Multimode fiber


Wavelength (nm) 830 to 860
Fiber type 62.5/125μm or 50/125μm
Average output power (dBm) -7 to -2
Sensibility (dBm) -16
Connector type LC
Theoretical max distance (km) 1

TABLE 1: MULTIMODE SFP

Two types of single mode SFP are covered:

− Unidirectional: One fiber is used for each direction. This is the standard type of SFP
used in Power Utility telecom network.
There are four ranges of unidirectional SFP depending on the distance covered:

− Sx.x for Short Haul

− Lx.x for Long Haul

− Vx.x for Very Long Haul

− Ux.x for Ultra Long Haul

FIGURE 10: UNIDIRECTIONAL SFP


T390/EN TP/B23 Integrated Teleprotection

Page 18/102 e-terragridcomT390

Item Specification
Nominal Bit rate 155520 kbit/s / STM1
Line code NRZ
Optical interface type S1.1 L1.2e U1.2e
Working wavelength (nm) 1261 to 1360 1480 to 1580 1480 to 1580
Fiber Type SM SM SM
Mean Launched optical power (dBm) -14 to -8 -3 to +2 +5 to +8
Receiver sensitivity (dBm) -34 -34 -45
Max Input Power(dBm) -8 -8 -10
Connector Duplex LC Duplex LC Duplex LC
Max Distance (km) 30 100 240
Maximum Allowed Dispersion (ps/nm) NA NA 4800

TABLE 2: SINGLE MODE UNIDIRECTIONAL SFP

− Bidirectional: One fiber is used for both directions. Each direction is covered by one
λ. This kind of SFP is proposed to make fiber savings.
By combining the transmit and receive functions onto a single fiber without an external
splitter or combiner, single fiber bidirectional Small Form-Factor Pluggables (SFPs)
provide a simple way to deliver optical transmission by cutting fiber cabling needs in
half.

FIGURE 11: BIDIRECTIONAL SFP

Item Specification
Nominal Bit rate 1-Fiber Bi-Directional 155520 kbit/s / STM1
Line code NRZ
Optical interface type BIDI-180-1 BIDI-180-2 BIDI-1120-1 BIDI-1120-2 BIDI-1200-1 BIDI-1200-2
Tx/Rx (nm) 1310/1550 1550/1310 1510/1590 1590/1510 1510/1590 1590/1510
Fiber Type SM SM SM SM SM SM
Mean Launched optical
power (dBm) -2 to 3 -2 to 3 -2 to 3 -2 to 3 1 to 5 1 to 5
Receiver sensitivity (dBm) -34 -34 -34 -34 -45 -45
Max Input Power(dBm) -8 -8 -8 -8 -10 -10
Connector LC LC LC LC LC LC
Max Distance (km) 80 80 120 120 200 200
Maximum Allowed
Dispersion (ps/nm) NA NA NA NA NA NA

TABLE 3: SINGLE MODE BIDIRECTIONAL SFP


Integrated Teleprotection T390/EN TP/B23

e-terragridcomT390 Page 19/102

3.3.2 G.703.1 and G.703.6


G.703 is an ITU/T standard originally for transmitting voice over digital carriers (such as T1
and E1). Modern networks are working with voice and data and so is G.703.
G.703 provides specifications for pulse code modulation (PCM) at data rates from 64 Kbps
(G.703.1) up to 2.048 Mbps (G.703.6).
3.3.3 V.11
V.11 is an ITU-T recommendation for balanced electrical circuits for data communication.
Speed is selectable 32, 64, 128 or 256 kbps.
Note V11 and G703 digital communication are compatible with DIP equipped with such
interface.
3.3.4 Factory Codes
The factory codes are given in the Table 4.

Board Factory code


V11/X24 Interface (ISO 4903) IR 179
G703.6 Interface 2Mbit/s IR 173
G703.1 Interface codirectional IR180

TABLE 4: FACTORY CODES


T390/EN TP/B23 Integrated Teleprotection

Page 20/102 e-terragridcomT390

4. TPI HMI HARDWARE CONFIGURATION


First of all you must connect HMI with release 6.x or upper, if not an error message will
appear.
As a general rules please use the HMI associated to the release implemented in your
equipment to avoid compatibility issues.
To start, select File to select your language, as illustrated in the following Figure.

e-terragricom

FIGURE 12: SELECT YOUR LANGUAGE


To follow, select File|Configuraton or click the configuration icon.

e-terragridcom

FIGURE 13: OPEN THE HARDWARE CONFIGURATION WINDOW


From the individual panels of the Hardware Configuration Window, select the combination of
units that makes up the target system, supplying an identifying name for each unit.
In future versions, the Teleprotection panes will allow the addition to the configuration of up
to two TPI Units. Service units are not yet available in version 6.1 and only one TP can be
set on the system.

FIGURE 14: THE HARDWARE CONFIGURATION WINDOW


To begin software configuration, click Next. The hardware configuration screen is minimized
and the Amplifier pane of the software configuration screen is displayed.
Integrated Teleprotection T390/EN TP/B23

e-terragridcomT390 Page 21/102

5. TPI CONFIGURATION SETTINGS


This section describes the process of setting parameters, and identifies the recommended or
mandatory steps for performing the TPI software configuration. The discussion that follows
assumes some familiarity with the T390 Human-Machine Interface (HMI), with which the
configuration is carried out. Note that many of the operations involved in configuring a T390
system require you to be logged on with a certain levels of privilege (assigned using the
Access Manager application).
For an introduction to the HMI, and a guide to using the Access Manager, please refer to the
Configuration and Settings chapter of the Overall System Description, T390/EN OS.
5.1 Power configuration
If the amplifier configuration screen is not already displayed, click on the amplifier icon in the
Units from PLC panel.
Power configuration is described in Amplifier Description and Configuration, T390/EN AM.
Click the Advanced tab to display the screen shown in Figure 15, which includes a display of
the overall power distribution for the system:

FIGURE 15: AMPLIFIER CONFIGURATION ADVANCED PANEL

Default values
By default, the ratio allocated to to each channele (QAM, band1 or band 2) s given by:

channel_ratio = channel bandwidth / total bandwidth

For example, with QAM (8 kHz) + Band 1 (4kHz), the default values are:

− Channel ratio (QAM) = 8 / (8+4) = 66.7%

− Channel ratio(band1) = 4 / (8+4) = 33.3%

We recommend to use the default power repartition


T390/EN TP/B23 Integrated Teleprotection

Page 22/102 e-terragridcomT390

5.1.1 TPX power


In version 6.1, only one TP (TPI or TPX external teleprotection) can be connect to the
system.
In future versions, the system will allow two teleprotections units, as follows:

• A TPX single external teleprotection unit (DIP, for example)

• A single TPI unit, and no TPX external teleprotection

• A TPX DIP unit and a single TPI unit

• Two TPI units


Power for the TPI unit(s) is configured under the Advanced Tab of the AMP configuration
screen (see previous section).
External teleprotection (TPX) power is configured under the TP tab of the PRCS
configuration screen, as shown in Figure 16. Please refer to the related chapter in the
documentation T390/EN PU and T390/EN AP on how to configure external teleprotection

FIGURE 16: TPX CONFIGURATION (PRCS)

To configure power for external teleprotection, proceed as follows:

• In hardware window, check “TPX”.

• On the PRCS configuration screen, click TP.

• Choose first if a Boost is needed for the TPX commands (6 or 12 dB) in the Boost
mode panel.

• Set the Input Gain with the + and - buttons in the Input Gain Panel. For this use
the following rules :
¾ In the Guard Level panel of the INPUT zone, input the level of the Guard
frequency (dBm) generated by the external TP if any using the slide bars (or
else tick the check box Use guard send by PLC – In this case, the signalling
of the telephone channel will be used as the guard frequency for the TPX).
¾ In the Max TP Output Level panel of the INPUT zone, input the level of the
command frequency(ies) (dBm) generated by the external TP. This may be
different from the guard level.
Integrated Teleprotection T390/EN TP/B23

e-terragridcomT390 Page 23/102

¾ Tune the Input Gain with the + and - buttons to obtain the required values
in the Guard RF Level and RF Command Level bars at the bottom of the TP
panel.

• Note that the Max TP Output Level, Guard Level, Guard RF Level and RF
Command Level data are not sent to the PLC, they are only a guide to help the
tuning of the input gain. Therefore, when reading back the configuration from the PLC,
they will be reset to the default value. The Max TP Output Level and Guard Level
should be programmed on the TPX equipment.

• Set the Output Gain with the + and - buttons in the Output Gain Panel. For this
use the following rules :
¾ In the RF Level panel of the OUPUT zone, input the RF level of the Guard or
Commands tones.

¾ Set the Output Gain with the + and - buttons to obtain the required
values in AF for the given tone (information Panel of the OUTPUT zone).

• Note that the RF Level data is not sent to the PLC, it is only a guide to help the tuning
of the output gain. Therefore, when reading back the configuration from the PLC, this
will be reset to the default value.

• On the Available Power panel, click the check boxes for the bands that will be cut
during command transmission. The selection includes automatically the TPX sending
band (band 1 is automatically selected, but selecting the other bands as well
guarantees maximum power for TPX command transmission).
NOTE 1: Guard level is limited by power allocated to band 1 in tab
Amp/advanced. Command level is limited by power allocated to bands
cut by TPX during command transmission.
NOTE 2: It is not possible to cut a band occupied by TPI.
NOTE 3: The TPX settings must be consistent with those for the DIP.
T390/EN TP/B23 Integrated Teleprotection

Page 24/102 e-terragridcomT390

5.2 TPI configuration menu


When power configuration is complete, click the Teleprotection icon in the Units from PLC
panel and then select a TPI unit. The TPI configuration screen is displayed, with the Main tab
selected, as shown in Figure 17:

FIGURE 17: TPI MAIN TAB


The TPI configuration screen has the four menu options (tabs): Main, Communication Path,
Input and Output commands. Their functions are described below.
5.3 Main screen
On the TPI configuration screen, click Main to display the screen shown in Figure 17.
Logical Address
Applicable only in case of digital communication path activated. Enter a logical address for
the TPI unit, in the range 0 to 124. The local and remote TPI units must use the same logical
address.
Input MAX
The number of inputs available in the system. It depends on the hardware configuration
detected on the equipment. By this value is set to 8 and cannot be changed.
Output MAX
The number of outputs available in the system. It depends on the hardware configuration
detected on the equipment. By this value is set to 14 and cannot be changed.
Interfaces available
This panel lists the interfaces available in the system. It depends on the communication
interface detected on the equipment when configuration is on line.
As default the available interface is “Analogue on TPI” allowing the transfer of Teleprotection
command through the T390.
On off line configuration the following choices appear:

− C37.94: This interface cover all the SFP optical interface module that can be plug into
the TPI: Please make sure to use the appropriate SFP to the type of fiber used and
distance to be covered.

− G703-1 / G703-6 or V11 are daughter boards that can be implemented on TPI.
Integrated Teleprotection T390/EN TP/B23

e-terragridcomT390 Page 25/102

5.4 Communication path


Click the Communication path tab to display the screen shown in Figure 18:

FIGURE 18: TPI COMMUNICATION PATH

The table displayed in communication path window allows selecting the paths and
commands to use.
The first column of the table contains the index of commands. The interfaces are displayed
in 2 following columns. First one is dedicated to Digital path, second one is dedicated to
Analogue path.
Operator column is fixed with no choice, at the reception side it will be acknowledged the first
command received.
5.4.1 Defining communication paths
5.4.1.1 Digital path
By clicking on lines of column “C3794”, you can select 2, 4 or 8 commands. By default, you
can only select 2 or 4 commands. In order to tick 8 commands, you have to select “8
commands” in the tab with digital path, which can be OPTICAL, V11, G703-1, G703-6 (see
section 5.7 for more details).
5.4.1.2 Analog path case dual tone
Select dual tone in the menu in analog on TPI column to choose the dual tone mode as
shown in Figure 19.

FIGURE 19: DUAL TONE CHOICE


T390/EN TP/B23 Integrated Teleprotection

Page 26/102 e-terragridcomT390

By clicking on lines of column “Analog on TPI”, you can select 4 or 6 commands. By default,
you can only select 4 commands. In order to tick 6 commands, you have to select “6
commands” in tab “Analog on TPI” (see section 5.5 for more details).
NOTE 1: If no command is selected in C3794 path, it is deactivated. If no
command is selected in Analogue path, it is deactivated.
NOTE 2: If the key “set-reset” is installed:
- if you have selected “1 set-reset in tab “Analogue on TPI”, you can
only check cmd1, cmd3 and cmd 4 (refer to set/reset explanation later
in the manual).
- if you have selected “2 set-reset in tab “Analogue on TPI”, you can
only check cmd1, cmd3 and cmd 5.
- if you have selected “3 set-reset in tab “Analogue on TPI”, you can
only check cmd1, cmd3 and cmd 5.
NOTE 3: If a command is used on both interfaces all the other commands must
be on both interfaces. If this rule is not respected, an error message
will appears when leaving the window.
5.4.1.3 Analog path case mixed tone
Select “2PT + 2DT” in the menu in analog on TPI column to choose the mode 2+2 and “3PT
+ 1DT” to select the mode 3+1, as shown in the figure above.

FIGURE 20: 2PT+2DT CHOICE

In the mixed mode, it is not possible to unselect commands as in dual tone. The commands
1 to 4 are selected by default.
5.4.2 Operator
Only “OR” choice.
Integrated Teleprotection T390/EN TP/B23

e-terragridcomT390 Page 27/102

5.5 Analog, case dual tone


The analogue transmission system is an implementation of the “dual tone” principle:

FIGURE 21: DUAL TONE FREQUENCIES SHARING


F8 is the Guard frequency, and each of the available commands is represented by a
combination of two of the frequencies F1 to F7.
The combination depends on the number of commands: 4commands, 6 commands,
particular case of 2 set/reset and particular case of 3 set/reset.
NOTE: The guard frequency F8 is not transmitted in case of silent
teleprotection.
In the other cases, external signals (QAM or signalling) are used as guard.

Frequencies Location
F1 Fcentral ± 300Hz
F2 Fcentral ± 500Hz
F3 Fcentral ± 700Hz
F4 Fcentral ± 900Hz
F5 Fcentral ± 1100Hz
F6 Fcentral ± 1300Hz
F7 Fcentral ± 1500Hz
F8 Fcentral ± 1700Hz

TABLE 5: FREQUENCIES LOCATION DEPENDING OF CONFIGURATION

In case of TPI over QAM, in superimposed mode with 16 khz bandwidth the frequencies
location are :

Frequencies Location
F1 Fcentral ± 6300Hz
F2 Fcentral ± 6500Hz
F3 Fcentral ± 6700Hz
F4 Fcentral ± 6900Hz
F5 Fcentral ± 7100Hz
F6 Fcentral ± 7300Hz
F7 Fcentral ± 7500Hz
F8 Fcentral ± 7700Hz

TABLE 6: TP OVER SUPERIMPOSED 16 KHZ FREQUENCIES LOCATION


T390/EN TP/B23 Integrated Teleprotection

Page 28/102 e-terragridcomT390

5.5.1 Case 4 commands


Relation between commands and frequencies is given hereafter.

Input command Frequency coding


Command #1 F1+F3
Command #2 F2+F4
Command #3 F1+F4
Command #4 F2+F5
Command #1+2 F1+F5
Command #1+3 F3+F5
Command #1+4 F2+F6
Command #2+3 F1+F6
Command # 2+4 F3+F6
Command #3+4 F4+F6
Command #1+2+3+4 F5+F7
Command #1+2+3 F1+F7
Command #2+3+4 F4+F7
Command #1+3+4 F3+F7
Command #1+2+4 F2+F7
Guard F8 or QAM

TABLE 7: DUAL TONE FREQUENCY CODING

5.5.2 Case 6 commands Mode A


In the particular case of 6 commands, 7 frequencies are not enough to transmit all command
combinations. Hence we apply the priority rules given in the following table.
INJECTED COMMAND TRANSMITTED COMMAND
A B C D E F A B A+B C D E F C+F D+F E+F

X X
X X
X X X
X X
X X X
X X X
X X X X
X X
X X X
X X X
X X X X
X X X
X X X X
X X X X
X X X X X
X X
X X X
X X X
X X X X
X X X
X X X X
X X X X
X X X X X
X X X
X X X X
X X X X
X X X X X
X X X X
Integrated Teleprotection T390/EN TP/B23

e-terragridcomT390 Page 29/102

INJECTED COMMAND TRANSMITTED COMMAND


X X X X X
X X X X X
X X X X X X
X X
X X X
X X X
X X X X
X X X
X X X X
X X X X
X X X X X
X X X
X X X X
X X X X
X X X X X
X X X X
X X X X X
X X X X X
X X X X X X
X X X
X X X X
X X X X
X X X X X
X X X X
X X X X X
X X X X X
X X X X X X
X X X X
X X X X X
X X X X X
X X X X X X
X X X X X
X X X X X X
X X X X X X
X X X X X X X

TABLE 8: PRIORITY RULES FOR CASE 6 COMMANDS (MODE A)

In that case, the relation between commands and frequencies is given hereafter.

Input command Frequency coding


Command #1 F1+F3
Command #2 F2+F4
Command #1+2 F1+F4
Command #3 F2+F5
Command #4 F1+F5
Command #5 F1+F6
Command # 6 F4+F6
Command #3+6 F3+F5
Command #4+6 F3+F6
Command #5+6 F2+F6
Guard F8 or QAM

TABLE 9: DUAL TONES FREQUENCY CODING CASE 6 COMMANDS (MODE A)


T390/EN TP/B23 Integrated Teleprotection

Page 30/102 e-terragridcomT390

5.5.3 Case 6 commands Mode B


In the particular case of 6 commands, 7 frequencies are not enough to transmit all command
combinations. Hence we apply the priority rules given in the following table.
INJECTED COMMANDS TRANSMITTED COMMANDS
A B C D E F A B C D E F E+F
X X
X X
X X X
X X
X X X
X X X
X X X X
X X
X X X
X X X
X X X X
X X X
X X X X
X X X X
X X X X X
X X
X X X
X X X
X X X X
X X X
X X X X
X X X X
X X X X X
X X X
X X X X
X X X X
X X X X X
X X X X
X X X X X
X X X X X
X X X X X X
X X
X X X
X X X
X X X X
X X X
X X X X
X X X X
X X X X X
X X X
X X X X
X X X X
X X X X X
X X X X
X X X X X
X X X X X
X X X X X X
X X X
X X X X
X X X X
X X X X X
X X X X
X X X X X
X X X X X
X X X X X X
X X X X
X X X X X
X X X X X
X X X X X X
X X X X X
X X X X X X
X X X X X X
X X X X X X X

TABLE 10: PRIORITY RULES FOR CASE 6 COMMANDS (MODE B)


Integrated Teleprotection T390/EN TP/B23

e-terragridcomT390 Page 31/102

In that case, the relation between commands and frequencies is given inTable 11:
The rule is to avoid the use of F7 if possible and to keep the combination where the gap
between the two tones is maximum.

Input command Frequency coding


Command #1 F2+F6
Command #2 F3+F6
Command #3 F1+F4
Command #4 F2+F5
Command #5 F1+F5
Command #6 F1+F6
Command # 5+6 F4+F6
Guard F8 or QAM

TABLE 11: DUAL TONE FREQUENCY CODING CASE 6 COMMANDS (MODE B)


5.5.4 Case 2 set/reset
In the particular case of 2 set/reset S1-R1 and S2-R2 and one command 3, we apply the
priority rules given in the following table.
S1 R1 S2 R2 E S1&R2 S2&R1 E&R1&R2 S1&S2 S1&R2&E R1&S2&E S1&S2&E R1&R2
1 X X
2 X X
3 X X
4 X X
5 X X
6 X X X
7 X X X
8 X X X
9 X X X
10 X X X
11 X X X
12 X X X
13 X X X
14 X X X X
15 X X X X
16 X X X X
17 X X X X

TABLE 12 : PRIORITY RULES FOR CASE 2 SET/RESET

In that case, the relation between commands and frequencies is given hereafter.

Input command Frequency coding


Set#1 + Set#2 F2+F6
Set#1 + Set#2 + cmd E F3+F6
Reset#1 + Reset#2 F1+F4
Reset#1 + Reset#2+cmd E F2+F5
Set#1 + Reset#2 F1+F5
Set#1 + Reset#2 + cmdE F1+F6
Reset#1 + Set#2 F4+F6
Reset#1 + Set#2 +cmd E F3+F5
Guard F8 or QAM

TABLE 13: DUAL TONE FREQUENCY CODING CASE 2 SET/RESET


T390/EN TP/B23 Integrated Teleprotection

Page 32/102 e-terragridcomT390

5.5.5 Case 3 set/reset


In the particular case of 3 set/reset S1-R1, S2-R2 and S3-R3, we apply the priority rules
given in the following table.
S1&R2 S2&R1 S3&R1 S1&S2 S1&S3 S2&S3 S1&S2 R1&R2
S1 R1 S2 R2 S3 R3
&R3 &R3 &R2 &R3 &R2 &R1 &S3 &R3
1 X X
2 X X
3 X X
4 X X
5 X X
6 X X
7 X X X
8 X X X
9 X X X
10 X X X
11 X X X
12 X X X
13 X X X
14 X X X
15 X X X
16 X X X
17 X X X
18 X X X
19 X X X X
20 X X X X
21 X X X X
22 X X X X
23 X X X X
24 X X X X
25 X X X X
26 X X X X

TABLE 14: PRIORITY RULES FOR CASE 3 SET/RESET

In that case, the relation between commands and frequencies is given hereafter.

Input command Frequency coding


Set#1 + Reset#2 + Reset#3 F2+F6
Reset#1 + Set#2 + Reset#3 F3+F6
Reset#1 + Reset#2 + Set#3 F1+F4
Set#1 + Set#2 + Reset#3 F2+F5
Set#1 + Reset#2 + Set#3 F1+F5
Reset#1 + Set#2 + Set#3 F1+F6
Set#1 + Set#2 + Set#3 F4+F6
Reset#1 + Reset#2 + Reset#3 F3+F5
Guard F8 or QAM

TABLE 15: DUAL TONE FREQUENCY CODING CASE 3 SET/RESET

By clicking on tab “Analogue on TPI”, configure the analogue path.


Integrated Teleprotection T390/EN TP/B23

e-terragridcomT390 Page 33/102

5.5.6 Analog Interface TX window


Click the “Analogue on TPI” tab of Communication path window to display the screen shown
in Figure 22.

FIGURE 22: ANALOGUE INTERFACE TX

5.5.6.1 Overlay mode


Choose the location where the Teleprotection command has to be transmitted:

− TP over QAM

− TP over speech

− TP Full Band
5.5.6.2 Command mode
If the key set/reset is installed, you can choose “4 commands”, “6 commands”, “1set/reset”,
“2 set/reset”, or “3 set/reset”.
The specific function set/reset is to avoid interrupting data transmission during command
sending from set pulse up to reset pulse.
T390/EN TP/B23 Integrated Teleprotection

Page 34/102 e-terragridcomT390

LINK STATUS

FIGURE 23: SET/RESET FUNCTION

C: INPUT COMMAND
CTx: Tx COMMAND TPS (SET/RESET)
R: COMMAND RESTITUTION

Together with an input C a Set/Reset CTx is sent by local TP to remote TP (Set=cmd1 &
Reset=cmd2) on line.
On remote TP a command R is receiving after Set acknowledged.
After Set acknowledged CTx may released allowing services transmission.
In standard mode after Reset acknowledged R may released.
If link down 2 Reset of 20sec are sending up to keep R on remote TP.
If the key set/reset is not installed, you can only choose 4 or 6 commands. If you select
“1set/reset”, “2 set/reset”, or “3 set/reset”, an error message will appears when applying
configuration.
NOTE: When closing the “Analogue Interface” window by clicking “OK” and
returning to “Communication path” window, don't forget to select
commands .(section 6.4)
If you select “1 set/reset”, “2 set/reset” or “3 set/reset”, click on the ellipsis on the right of
command mode. The screen displayed in Figure 24 will appear. You can choose the set and
reset transmission duration using the slider.
Integrated Teleprotection T390/EN TP/B23

e-terragridcomT390 Page 35/102

FIGURE 24: SET/RESET TRANSMISSION DURATION

5.5.6.3 Overlay Analog channel


You can choose in this menu the LF band where to set the TPI. The choice depends on
signalling method.

• Case TP over Full band


If you have chosen “TP Full Band”, then you can choose to set the TPI over the band 1 or
over the band 2. No other service shall be configured on the chosen band.

• Case TP over speech


If you have chosen “TP over speech” and if only one speech with signalling is defined on
PRCS (or SRV in future version), you cannot choose the band, the TPI band is automatically
allocated to the band where the speech is configured.
If you have chosen “TP over speech” and if no speech is defined on PRCS (or SRV) or
speech without signalling, then an error message will appear when you will close the
window.
You must configure a signalling to use the mode “TP over speech”.
If you have chosen “TP over speech” and if several speeches with signalling are configured,
then you can choose on which one the TPI is.

FIGURE 25: CHOICE OF THE SPEECH


T390/EN TP/B23 Integrated Teleprotection

Page 36/102 e-terragridcomT390

Note that the TP TX BAND center is automatically set to the speech center frequency
selected and cannot be modified. The TP range is displayed accordingly (850Hz on each
side of the center frequency).

• Case TP over QAM


If you have chosen the overlay mode “TP over QAM”, you cannot choose the band, the TPI
band is automatically the QAM band.

• Case TP over QAM, particular case of QAM superimposed


If you’re in superimposed mode with 16 kHz band, the TP analog window is different and as
following:

FIGURE 26: GUARD RATIO, CASE TP OVER QAM SUPERIMPOSED


Integrated Teleprotection T390/EN TP/B23

e-terragridcomT390 Page 37/102

The guard ratio represents the ratio of the QAM power you are allowing to the TP guard. You
have got this value in dB in the second red circle. This value is updated in the amplifier
window as we can see in the following window:

FIGURE 27: AMP/ADVANCED QAM RATIO

5.5.6.4 TP TX band
In case TP Full Band , it is possible to choose the place of the TPI in the band using slide
bar. Do not forget to check that the local TP Tx band is consistent with TP Rx band of remote
equipment.
5.5.6.5 Channel Cutting
In order to increase the power available for TP tones, it is possible to cut bands not used by
TP. The band used by TPI and selected in “Overlay Analogue Channel” is automatically cut.
For example,
If PEP is 40 W, if you have chosen in Amp / Advanced:

− QAM ratio 50%

− Band 1 ratio 20 %

− Band 2 ratio 30 %
If the TPI is on QAM, and if you have chosen for cut bands “QAM band” and “band 1”, then:

• The guard available power is:

− Guard available power = 39.3 dBm

• The command available power is:

− Command available power = 42.2dBm


5.5.6.6 Transmission Levels panel
Transmission levels are the signal levels assigned to each command frequency and to the
guard.
To set the levels, use the slide bar adjacent to each of the parameters.
T390/EN TP/B23 Integrated Teleprotection

Page 38/102 e-terragridcomT390

5.5.6.7 Maximum Transmission Time


It is possible to limit the transmission time of commands to x ms (x between 0 and 5s) if the
maximum transmission time checkbox is checked.
When the checkbox is unchecked, the transmission time is not limited. The commands are
sent as long as the corresponding inputs are activated.
The alarm corresponding to the “Maximum Transmission Time” is MAJOR.
WARNING: IF SET/RESET IS USED, THE “ACTIVE” CHECKBOX MUST BE
UNCHECKED.
5.5.7 Analog Interface RX window
Click on the tab “RX” to display the screen shown in Figure 28.

FIGURE 28: ANALOGUE INTERFACE RX

5.5.7.1 TP Rx band Panel


The Rx band panel shows the TPI band.
Integrated Teleprotection T390/EN TP/B23

e-terragridcomT390 Page 39/102

5.5.7.2 Unblocking panel

FIGURE 29: UNBLOCKING


The Unblocking occurs if no command is received and if the guard level measured through
an internal digital filter falls below a threshold Unblocking level and remains there for at least
the time specified in Unblocking Delay. The duration of Unblocking is Unblocking duration

• Unblocking level: Use the slide bar to set the unblocking activation threshold in the
range -50 to -10 dB under Pep.

• Unblocking Delay: Use the slide bar to set the unblocking activation delay. The value
range is from 0 to 200 ms.

• Unblocking Duration: Use the slide bar to set the unblocking duration in the range 0
to 5000 ms.
5.5.7.3 Alarms

FIGURE 30: ALARMS


SNR Alarm
The SNR is defined by:

− Smaller level of received tones (guard excluded) - measured noise level on 4 kHz +
3dB.
The SNR Alarm occurs if the SNR measured through an internal digital filter falls below a
threshold SNR Low limit level and remains there for at least the time specified in SNR Low
limit Delay.
The SNR Alarm is removed if the SNR comes back over a threshold SNR High limit level
and remains there for at least the time specified in SNR High limit Delay.

• SNR Low limit level: Use the slide bar to set the SNR alarm activation threshold in
the range -10 to 40 dB.

• SNR Low limit Delay: Use the slide bar to set the SNR alarm activation delay. The
value range is from 0 to 5s.

• SNR High limit level: Use the slide bar to set the SNR alarm deactivation threshold in
the range -10 to 40 dB.

• SNR High limit Delay: Use the slide bar to set the SNR alarm deactivation delay. The
value range is from 0 to 5s.
T390/EN TP/B23 Integrated Teleprotection

Page 40/102 e-terragridcomT390

Loss of Signal Alarm


The Loss of signal Alarm occurs if the Signal level measured through an internal digital filter
falls below a threshold Loss of signal low limit level and remains there for at least the time
specified in Loss of signal low limit Delay.
The Loss of signal Alarm is removed if the Signal level comes back over a threshold Loss of
signal high limit level and remains there for at least the time specified in Loss of signal high
limit Delay.

• Loss of signal low limit level: Use the slide bar to set the Loss of signal alarm
activation threshold in the range -50 to 0 dB.

• Loss of signal low limit Delay: Use the slide bar to set the Loss of signal alarm
activation delay. The value range is from 0 to 5s.

• Loss of signal high limit level: Use the slide bar to set the Loss of signal alarm
deactivation threshold in the range -50 to 0 dB.

• Loss of signal high limit Delay: Use the slide bar to set the Loss of signal alarm
deactivation delay. The value range is from 0 to 5s.
5.5.7.4 Reception levels Panel
Use this panel to set the reception level of each frequency, between -60 and +60dB.
Integrated Teleprotection T390/EN TP/B23

e-terragridcomT390 Page 41/102

5.6 Analog, case mixed mode


The analog transmission system is an implementation of either a dual tone principle or a
single tone principle depending on the mode (2+2 or 3+1) and on the protection scheme of
the transmitted command (permissive tripping or direct tripping).
F8 is the guard frequency, and each of the available command is represented by a
combination of one or two of the frequencies F1 to F6. F7 and F8 are dedicated to the loop
test.
The frequencies of F1 to F7 depend on the chosen speech, as explained in next section.
The relation between commands and frequencies is given in sections 5.6.2 and 5.6.3.
5.6.1 Frequencies
5.6.1.1 Speech 300-3400Hz
This should be the preferred mode.

FIGURE 31: COMMAND FREQUENCIES 300 - 3400 HZ


5.6.1.2 Speech 300-2400Hz
In the case of a speech 300-2400 Hz, the frequencies become:

FIGURE 32: COMMAND FREQUENCIES 300 - 2400 HZ


5.6.1.3 Speech 300-2200Hz
In the case of a speech 300-2200 Hz, the frequencies become:

FIGURE 33: COMMAND FREQUENCIES 300 - 2200 HZ


T390/EN TP/B23 Integrated Teleprotection

Page 42/102 e-terragridcomT390

5.6.1.4 Speech 300-2000Hz


In the case of a speech 300-2000 Hz, the frequencies become:

FIGURE 34: COMMAND FREQUENCIES 300-2000 HZ


As the TPIC is always set on a telephone channel, the guard frequency (F8) will be the
signaling selected for the phone. When no signaling is selected, the guard frequency will be
selected in the following list. (The preferred frequency for each channel is shown in blue).

Command Channel
A (300-3400 Hz) B (300-2400 Hz) C (300-2200 Hz) D (300-2000 Hz)
3660 3660 3660 3660
Guard
2520 2520 2520
frequency
2320 2320
2220

TABLE 16: GUARD FREQUENCIES

5.6.2 Command coding


The TPIC works in 2 modes:

• 4 commands: 2+2, that is a mode with 2 permissive commands and 2 direct tripping
commands with priority on tripping.

• 4 commands: 3+1, that is a mode with 3 permissive commands and 1 tripping


commands with priority on tripping.
The permissive commands are sent on single tone. Tripping commands are sent on dual
tone.
5.6.2.1 Relation between injected and transmitted commands
Tripping commands have always priority over permissive commands. That means that if both
permissive and tripping inputs are activated, the direct trip command will be sent first and
during a fixed duration. Then, after, the permissive command will be sent. See figures below.
Integrated Teleprotection T390/EN TP/B23

e-terragridcomT390 Page 43/102

PRIORITY SCHEME FOR DIRECT TRIPPING


OVER PERMISSIVE

CASE 1
Input Commands

Permissive

Direct Tripping

OR OPTION 2
Transmitted
Commands

Transmit PT Transmit DT Transmit PT

Tmin (Direct Tripping)


From 15 ms to 500 ms

CASE 2

Permissive
Input Commands

Direct Tripping
Commands
Transmited

Transmit DT Transmit PT

Tmin (Direct Tripping)


From 15 ms to 500 ms

FIGURE 35 - PRIORITY SCHEME DIRECT / PERMISSIVE

The delay Tmin for the minimum transmission time of a direct tripping command will be set
by IHM. The minimum value for this delay will be constrained by the minimum time for the
receiver to acknowledge a direct trip command. On the other side, at the output command
relay can be set to a minimum duration from 0 ms to 2500 ms.
What happens when permissive input goes inactive again and direct tripping input stays
active? The following diagram describes these situations.
T390/EN TP/B23 Integrated Teleprotection

Page 44/102 e-terragridcomT390

FIGURE 36 - END OF PERMISSIVE BEFORE END OF DIRECT TRIPPING


Integrated Teleprotection T390/EN TP/B23

e-terragridcomT390 Page 45/102

5.6.2.2 Mode 2+2 : injected and transmitted commands


Commands 1 and 2 are permissive commands.
Commands 3 and 4 are direct tripping commands.
The link between injected command and transmitted commands is given in following table.

Injected command Transmitted command


Uncoded single tone Coded dual tone
1 2 3 4 A B A+B C D C+D
x x
x x
x x x
x x
x x
x x x
x x x
x x x
x x x
x x x
x x x x
x x x x
x x x x
x x x x
x x x x x

TABLE 17 : RELATION BETWEEN INJECTED / TRANSMITTED COMMANDS - MODE 2+2


T390/EN TP/B23 Integrated Teleprotection

Page 46/102 e-terragridcomT390

5.6.2.3 Mode 3+1


Commands 1, 2 and 3 are permissive commands.
Commands 4 is a direct tripping command.
The link between injected command and transmitted commands is given in the following
table.

Injected command Transmitted command


Permissive DT Uncoded coded
1 2 3 4 A B C D E
x x
x x
x x
x x
x x x
x x x
x x x
x x x
x x x
x x x
x x x x
x x x x
x x x x
x x x x
x x x x x

TABLE 18 : RELATION BETWEEN INJECTED / TRANSMITTED COMMANDS - MODE 3+1

The relationship between the received commands and the output is the following:

Received Cmds Output Commands


1 2 3 4
A x
B x
C x
D x x x
E x

TABLE 19: RELATION BETWEEN RECEIVED COMMANDS & OUTPUTS - MODE 3+1
Integrated Teleprotection T390/EN TP/B23

e-terragridcomT390 Page 47/102

5.6.3 Relation between commands and frequencies


The relation between transmitted commands and frequencies depends on the mode, 2+2 or
3+1. Tables are given in next sections.
5.6.3.1 Mode 2+2

cmd F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8
A x
B x
A+B x
C x x
D x x
C+D x x
Test x x
Guard x

TABLE 20 : RELATION BETWEEN COMMANDS AND FREQIUENCIES, MODE 2+2

5.6.3.2 Mode 3+1

cmd F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8
A x
B x
C x
D x
E x x
Test x x
Guard x

TABLE 21 : RELATION BETWEEN COMMANDS AND FREQUENCIES, MODE 3+1


T390/EN TP/B23 Integrated Teleprotection

Page 48/102 e-terragridcomT390

5.6.4 Analog Interface TX window


Click on “Analog on TPI” tab of Communication path window to display the screen shown in
Figure 37.

FIGURE 37: ANALOG INTERFACE TX, CASE MIXED TONE

5.6.4.1 Overlay mode


The overlay mode “TP over speech” is automatically selected and is not modifiable.
5.6.4.2 Overlay analog channel
The channel is automatically selected as the channel of PRCS (channel 1 by default) and is
not modifiable.
5.6.4.3 Speech
The speech that has been activated in PRCS is automatically selected and is not modifiable.
5.6.4.4 Guard frequency
If no signalling has been configured in the PRCS / speech tab, the menu “Guard frequency”
is visible and offers the user to choose the guard frequency in a list given in Table 16.
If a signalling has been configured, then this menu is not visible and the guard frequency is
the frequency of the signalling.
Integrated Teleprotection T390/EN TP/B23

e-terragridcomT390 Page 49/102

5.6.4.5 Available power


The command and guard available powers depend on the estimated output power EOP
defined in window AMP/ RF stage.

Command or guard available power = 10 log10 (EOP * 1000 ) * 10


Pfsk / 20

Where Pfsk is the FSK level under Pep and is by default -22dB under Pep.
5.6.4.6 Channel cutting
This option is not available in mixed mode.
5.6.4.7 Loop test
This panel is only visible on the Master unit.
This is a new feature for the TPIC. It gives information about the ability of the TPIC to send
or receive a TP command. Particularly, when in silent mode, the guard is transmitted by
another circuit than the TPIC transmitter, the test allows to verify the good working of the
transmitter of the TPI.
Note that the loop test is only made on the Analogue path.
The test is programmed by HMI to be:

• Deactivated

• Activated periodic Hourly.

• Activated periodic Daily


When the loop test is activated hourly or daily, it is possible to select the schedule in the loop
test time field.
It is furthermore possible to send a loop test in one shot from maintenance tab as explained
in section 7.4.
The result of the last loop test is displayed in Measure window, as explained in section 6.4.
The alarm in case of a loop test failure can be selected as minor or major.
5.6.4.8 Maximum transmission time
The maximal transmission time is tuneable between 100ms and 2.5s.
5.6.4.9 Tmin DT command
The minimal duration of a direct tripping command is tuneable between 15ms and 500ms.
5.6.4.10 Transmission level
Transmission levels are the signal levels assigned to each command frequency and to the
guard.
To set the levels, use the slide bar adjacent to each of the parameters.
The range is from -20dBr to 0dBr for single tones, -20dBr to -3dBr for dual tones, -33dBr to -
9dBr for the loop tets tone and -30dBr to -6dBr for the guard.
0dBr is defined as Pep-0.5dB.
T390/EN TP/B23 Integrated Teleprotection

Page 50/102 e-terragridcomT390

5.6.4.11 Recommanded transmission level

5.6.5 Analog interface RX window


Click on the tab “RX” to display the screen shown in Figure 38.

FIGURE 38: ANALOG INTERFACE RX


Integrated Teleprotection T390/EN TP/B23

e-terragridcomT390 Page 51/102

5.6.5.1 TP Rx band Panel


The Rx band panel reminds the TP bandwidth and the TP mode.
5.6.5.2 Unblocking panel

FIGURE 39: UNBLOCKING

The Unblocking scheme is used to improve the performances of permissive tripping


schemes by issuing command in case of high attenuation.
The unblocking command, when programmed, will last for “Duration” when the guard tone is
under a “level” threshold during a “delay” duration.

• Unblocking level: Use the slide bar to set the unblocking activation threshold in the
range -50 to -10 dB under Pep.

• Unblocking Delay: Use the slide bar to set the unblocking activation delay. The value
range is from 1 to 200 ms.

• Unblocking Duration: Use the slide bar to set the unblocking duration in the range
10ms to 5s.
5.6.5.3 Alarms

FIGURE 40: ALARMS


SNR Alarm
The SNR is defined by the norm iec 60834-1.
The SNR Alarm occurs if the SNR measured through an internal digital filter falls below a
threshold SNR Low limit level and remains there for at least the time specified in SNR Low
limit Delay.
The SNR Alarm is removed if the SNR comes back over a threshold SNR High limit level
and remains there for at least the time specified in SNR High limit Delay.

• SNR Low limit level: Use the slide bar to set the SNR alarm activation threshold in
the range -10 to 15 dB.

• SNR Low limit Delay: Use the slide bar to set the SNR alarm activation delay. The
value range is from 0.5s to 10s.

• SNR High limit level: Use the slide bar to set the SNR alarm deactivation threshold in
the range -10 to 15 dB. The high limit level cannot be lower than the low limit.
T390/EN TP/B23 Integrated Teleprotection

Page 52/102 e-terragridcomT390

• SNR High limit Delay: Use the slide bar to set the SNR alarm deactivation delay. The
value range is from 0.5s to 10s.
Loss of Signal Alarm
The Loss of signal Alarm occurs if the Signal level measured through an internal digital filter
falls below a threshold Loss of signal low limit level and remains there for at least the time
specified in Loss of signal low limit Delay.
The Loss of signal Alarm is removed if the Signal level comes back over a threshold Loss of
signal high limit level and remains there for at least the time specified in Loss of signal high
limit Delay.

• Loss of signal low limit level: Use the slide bar to set the Loss of signal alarm
activation threshold in the range -30 to -3 dB.

• Loss of signal low limit Delay: Use the slide bar to set the Loss of signal alarm
activation delay. The value range is from 0.5s to 10s.

• Loss of signal high limit level: Use the slide bar to set the Loss of signal alarm
deactivation threshold in the range -30 to -3 dB. The high limit level cannot be lower
than the low limit.

• Loss of signal high limit Delay: Use the slide bar to set the Loss of signal alarm
deactivation delay. The value range is from 0.5s to 10s.
5.6.5.4 Reception levels Panel
Use this panel to set the reception level of each frequency; the range is the same as in Tx
panel.
Integrated Teleprotection T390/EN TP/B23

e-terragridcomT390 Page 53/102

5.7 Digital
To configure the digital interface, click on button “C3794” in Window “Communication path”
The screen shown in Figure 41 is displayed.

FIGURE 41: DIGITAL INTERFACE

General parameters are configured as follows.


Communication module
Choose the path among the digital interfaces present on the system. The default digital path
is OPTICAL.
If you choose interface V11, the windows extends as shown in Figure 42.

FIGURE 42: DIGITAL INTERFACE V11


T390/EN TP/B23 Integrated Teleprotection

Page 54/102 e-terragridcomT390

Number of commands
Use the menu to select 2, 4 or 8 commands. When closing the “Digital Interface” window and
returning to “Communication path” window, do not forget to selects the commands (section
5.4,). The default value is 4 commands.
Source clock
Click the appropriate radio button to select External or Internal clock. The default value is
“external”.
Clock Speed
Select the clock speed in the menu.
In OPTICAL, the available speeds are 64, 128 and 256 kbps (default value 64kbps).
In case V11, the available speeds are 32, 64, 128 and 256kbps (default value 32kbps).
In case G703-1, the available speed is 64kbps.
In case G703-6, the available speed is 2000kbps.
Transfer time alarm threshold
The alarm is set when propagation time exceeds the user-defined threshold. The default
value is 20 ms.
BER alarms
Select BER minor alarm threshold among 4 values: 10-6, 10-5, 10-4, 10-3. The default value is
10-5.
Select BER major alarm threshold among 3 values: 10-3, 10-2, 10-1. The default value is 10-3.
Communication mode (only available with V11 interface)
Click the appropriate radio button to select data received on external or internal clock. The
default value is “data received on external c